Home

Street Atlas USA® 2009 User Guide

1. Click and hold the Polygon Rectangle Circle tool to view its hidden options Select the tool you want to use Optional Select one or more of the following e From the Fill drop down list select the fill style you want to apply to the draw object e Click the fill color button to the right of the Fill drop down list to select the color for your fill style e Select an outline style for your draw object from the Outline drop down list e Click the outline color button to select a color for the outline of your draw object e Select the width for your draw object outline from the Width drop down list e Select the Show Measurement check box to display measurement information for your draw object as your draw it on the map If you selected the Circle tool click the location for the circle s center on the map and drag away from center to set the radius for the circle Release as soon as you achieve the radius you want The radius of the circle and the coordinates of the circle s center display in the corresponding text boxes to the right of the circle fill option area OR If you selected the Polygon tool click the map to enter each point of the polygon OR If you selected the Rectangle tool click the location for the rectangle s upper left corner on the map and drag away from the corner to set the width height and area for the rectangle Release as soon as you achieve the size you want Click the Select tool A
2. Querying Features on the Map on a Palm OS Handheld 297 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide Tap a map feature on the map view screen on your Palm OS handheld to view query information about it including the coordinates of the point tapped The query information displays on the Info Area below the map view screen If no query information is available for a map feature the message No Info along with the current zoom level displays in the Info Area To Query Map Features The following table describes how to get query information on various map features To get information about Map Coordinates A point on the map to view its coordinate information latitude longitude or UTM UPS based on the coordinate option you chose in Setting Preferences Point Objects Placenames Airports A point object on the map to display its Landmarks etc name city state and ZIP Code information Waypoints wpts A waypoint to view extended Wpts information including names or any text appearing in the Close To text field For information on adding waypoints see Adding Waypoints Contour Lines A contour line to view the contour elevation in feet or meters depending on the settings of your DeLorme desktop application this feature is not available in Street Atlas USA 2009 data Road Railroad Hydro Water Lines A road to display its name city state and ZIP Code information A rail or hydro stream brook creek and so for
3. 107 Enable GPS Voice Navigation 234 Enable LED on GPS Device 234 Enable Stationary Logging 234 Enable WAAS Use nccc 234 End of Day Breaks 231 Entering Address Book Information 136 Estimate Fuel Breaks 231 Estimating the Fuel Cost of Your Route P E E AEA EETA amet estas 232 Exchange Wizard 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 Export to New Dataset 152 Export to Text File 0008 152 Exporting a Custom Scheme 95 Exporting a Map to a Handheld Device Wis hoaiaatah award aN aE mane 262 Exporting Data s e 152 Exporting Draw Files to Text Files 165 Exporting Tab Manager Preferences 89 Exporting Track or Waypoint Files to GPX FINES vere ele eerste 166 Exporting Your Address Book 140 F FAQS ties Several E brenden teaeieeieeees 2 File Preview 241 Find 126 127 128 132 137 139 145 207 Finding a Coordinate Location on a Palm OS Handheld 455 301 Finding a Coordinate Location on a Pocket PG sii icone ves ana teacgh 341 Finding a Custom Symbol 207 Finding a Symbol by Its Name 128 Index Finding Map Features on a Palm OS Handheld c ceeeeeeee eee ees 299 Finding Map Features on a Pocket PC DEVIC Grishin eaten aa sean 338 Finding Phone Book Listings for a Specific Road 145 Finding POls Near Your Current LOCATION ccceceeese eset r
4. Moving and Deleting Draw MapNotes You can add your own MapNotes to a map MapNotes have a white background that make them highly visible on the map They can contain multiple lines of text and can be moved off of the labeled area without losing their visual links with the points You can use MapNotes for directions or explanations Notes e This Help topic describes the steps necessary to move and delete Draw MapNotes To show delete Route MapNotes see Setting Your Routing Preferences on page 224 e When you use right click functionality to add a MapNote it is light blue unless it is a blank MapNote e You can search for a MapNote by its label name using the QuickSearch function in the Find tab or by typing the label name in the Start Finish Stop or Via text boxes when creating a route in the Route tab 203 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide To Move a MapNote Use the following steps to move a MapNote 1 2 3 Click the Draw tab Click the Select tool N Click the MapNote to select it The MapNote is enclosed with a box You can e Drag the stem to a new location to move the MapNote e Drag the text box to a new location leaving the anchor point in the same location on the map e Drag the anchor point to a new location leaving the text box in the same location on the map To Delete a MapNote Use the following steps to delete a MapNote AUN m 204 Click the Draw tab Click the Select tool
5. e Travel Package Provides maps of the route with corresponding directions e Turn Details Prints 2 x 2 maps of each of the turns in your route directions e Directions Provides action based directions turn merge bear depart arrive and continue including the time frame for each action Note You can save route directions as a text file e Along the Way Prints the search results of a previous Advanced Find search within a current route The search results are listed as they are listed in the Find results The Along the Way option is only available if you have recently performed a find category within current route search in the Advanced Find subtab For more information see Performing an Advanced Search on page 122 e Strip Maps Provides detailed maps in the direction of travel of the route along with directions that appear in the map margin Strip maps are not printed North Up like other printed maps They are printed so that the direction of travel is always at the top of the printed map 5 If you selected Travel Package or Strip Maps in step 4 select the miles per page that you want your route to cover from the Miles Per Page drop down list Note When setting the number of miles per page keep in mind that the number of miles is not the distance of the route Instead it equals the width of the strip map and determines the scale of the map 6 Select Increasing from the Trip Time Distance drop down list to end th
6. 254 Using Voice Navigation and Speech Recognition Voice Tab Commands The following table shows Voice tab voice commands and the response If there is a keyboard shortcut available it is listed after the command What can say Displays the Monitor dialog box More commands Displays next page of voice commands Repeat last Repeats your last spoken command command Speech Recognition Tips calculated 1 To use voice navigation you must have a 2 D or 3 D GPS fix and a route The following tips provide information on using the speech recognition feature and setting up your microphone e Speech recognition is only active when your application is the active window e Commands become enabled based on your current GPS status your data zoom level and other factors Enabled commands do not have a red x in their icon e Disabled commands display a red x in their icon Note Some commands are disabled if a route is not calculated or if the GPS has not been initialized e Avoid noisy environments when using voice command navigation e Use a close talk microphone for best speech recognition results e Properly position your microphone to achieve the best speech recognition results For a close talk microphone the recommended position is a thumb width from the corner of your mouth and slightly to the side For more information see the note at the end of this topic e When issuing commands to the computer use t
7. 3 Click File click Transfer and then click E mail A transfer file is created and your computer s default operating system e mail program opens with the transfer file included as an attachment 4 Complete the e mail in accordance with your e mail system Note for regular Street Atlas USA users This Help topic describes functionality provided in advanced file management Advanced file management allows you to save multiple routes and draw layers in a single map file With simplified file management you can save only one route and or draw layer in a single map file If you did not select to enable advanced file management during the product installation you can still change the settings using the Change File Management option in the Options menu For more information see Activating Advanced Simplified File Management This note does not apply to Street Atlas USA Plus users 107 Printing Printing a Map You can print a map based on your paper size or screen size If you choose to print a map based on your paper size you can also print a multi page map that you can assemble using the Manually Assembling a Multi page Map instructions To Print a Map Use the following steps to print a map 1 2 3 4 Locate the area you want to print Click the Print tab Click the Map subtab Under Print Layout select Page the map print area is based on the paper size you have specified in the Setup options or Screen
8. Radar Results f you are using GPS Radar an orange bar displays the closest search result Click Stop Here to insert a stop into your route Click More Info to open the GPS Radar subtab on the Find tab and get more information about the result Click Stop Radar to stop searching Progress Bar The progress bar displays below the orange bar It shows how far along you are in your route by distance Turns tThe blue area at the bottom of the screen shows the next turn in large text and the following turn in smaller text An arrow showing the direction of each turn displays next to the text Zoom In Out Click the plus sign in the Show Turns area to zoom the map in Click the minus sign to zoom the map out 3 D 2 D View To view the map in 3 D click 3 D If you are viewing the map in 3 D click 2 D to view the map in 2 D To Stop GPS Tracking In NavMode click the GPS button E on the toolbar In GPS tab view click the GPS tab and then click Stop GPS or click the GPS button Q on the toolbar Getting Back on Track When Off Course To automatically recalculate your route when off course select the Auto check box next to the Back on Track button in the Route tab If you do not want the program to automatically recalculate your route when off track clear the Auto check box and click the Back on Track button to manually recalculate the route 239 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide Panning the Map Automatically While GPS Trac
9. See also the Creating a Route tutorial on page 37 To Create a Route Using the Route Tab Use the following steps to create a route 1 Click the Route tab and then click New Edit if it is not already selected 2 Click File click New and then type the name for your route in the Name text box 3 Click the Start tool Q and then click the point on the map where you want to begin your route OR To use an address book entry as your start location select Start From Address Book from the Start drop down list click to select an Address Book entry and then click OK OR To use your current GPS position as your start location select Start From GPS Location from the Start drop down list OR Type your start location in the Start drop down text box You can type the name of an address book contact user added waypoint or address Notes An address must be in one of the following formats street address city state OR street address ZIP Postal Code The Book check box underneath the Address Book buttons in the Find tab must be selected to search for address book contact names 4 Click the Finish tool and then click the spot on the map where you want to end your route OR To use an address book entry as your finish location select Finish From Address Book from the Finish drop down list click to select an Address Book entry and then click OK OR Type your finish location in the Finish drop down text box You can type in the nam
10. To Rename a Draw Object on the Map Use the following steps to rename a draw object on the map 1 2 180 Open the map file that contains the draw object you want to rename Right click the waypoint point to Manage Draw and click Edit Draw Object Text The waypoint text box opens Note If you have more than one waypoint close together you may have to select from a list OR Click the Select tool RI click the waypoint and click the waypoint again do not double click The waypoint text box opens Using the Draw Tools 3 Type the new name in the box and press ENTER on your keyboard OR click away from the box Deleting Draw Objects Once you place a draw object on a draw file you can delete the object You can also delete multiple or all draw objects in the active draw file To Delete One Draw Object Use the following steps to delete a draw object 1 Open the existing map file that contains the draw object you want to delete 2 Click the Draw tab 3 Click the Select tool R and then click the draw object on the map to select it A box displays around the selected object 4 Click Delete in the Draw dialog area OR Press the DELETE key on your keyboard OR Right click the object and then select Manage Draw Delete Draw Object Tip To bring back the last draw object you deleted click the Undo button w to undo the last action You can undo approximately 200 events in a single map file Note You can also delete a
11. Notes e If you choose to hide both the vector and raster data no map data will be available e The vector or raster check box is invisible when the map does not contain that type of data The Data Screen on a Pocket PC Device The Data screen in Street Atlas USA Handheld lets you view a list of the map files you have installed on your Pocket PC handheld as well as any waypoints Wpts routes or GPS logs you have created To View Files in the Data Screen Use the following steps to view files in the Street Atlas USA Handheld data screen 1 Tap Data 2 Tap Maps Routes Wpts or GPS Logs Tap this To view option Maps Maps created in Street Atlas USA 2009 and installed on your handheld or located on a storage card Routes Routes created on the handheld or Street Atlas USA 2009 Wpts Waypoints added on the handheld GPS Logs GPS Logs recorded on the handheld while using a GPS receiver 331 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide 3 The Data screen displays and the list of files you have displays in the file list Select a file and tap Details to display information for your selection The following information displays based on the option you selected in step 2 For Direct Routes For Road Routes Name Name Coordin The point name The road name ate labeled with the informa name of the tion nearest map The time required to travel the leg feature distance Type type Close to of map and city state
12. Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide fix displays as 3 D DGPS To Monitor Your GPS Status in GPS Tab View Speed and Heading Speed Displays the speed you are traveling based on the units you selected on the Display tab in the Options dialog box Heading Displays the direction you are traveling as degrees T True North or M Magnetic North based on the bearing selected on the Units area on the Display tab in the Options dialog box Heading is provided as a numerical value as well as a compass direction Coordinates Elevation Coordinates The coordinate fields display based on the units N43 47 3073 you selected on the Display tab in the Options dialog box W70 11 4316 Elevation Displays the current elevation if the GPS status is 3 11i3feet Pel GPS Status 244 D and is based on the selected Units preference Elevation can be displayed with a 2 D status your position is indicated accurately on your screen as you travel unless you are in an area where your elevation varies greatly No GPS A red circle with a slash indicates the GPS receiver is not yet detected by your computer This status usually displays when initialization first begins Acquiring A red blinking circle indicates the GPS receiver is not yet receiving sufficient satellite data to determine your position This status displays while the GPS receiver is acquiring satellite data and can take several minutes 2 D A yellow
13. There are many menu options in Street Atlas USA Handheld Menu options are available in the menu bar at the top of the map view screen For information on the menu button and accessing menus on your handheld consult your handheld s user guide To Use the Menu Options Use the following steps to access the menu options 1 Tap the Menu button on your handheld to display the menu bar The menu bar contains four main menu options Data GPS Tools and Options The Menu Bar LZZ GPS Tools Options 2 Tap a main menu option to display the menu items available under each option The following table describes the four main menu options and a description of the menu items each contains Note The X indicates menu items accessible with Graffiti Menu Commands Tap the main Then tap the menu menu item option View map file information display a map Go To move a map to secondary storage or rename or delete map files Routes View information on a route you have created direct or road display a route on the map Go To or hide rename or delete a route View waypoints wpts you have added display a waypoint on the map Go To or edit or delete waypoints GPS Logs View information on GPS log files display a log file on the map Go To or hide rename or delete GPS log files 293 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide 294 GPS Connect Settings Logging Sky View Channel View
14. e From the Add list box tap Wpt to use existing waypoints and to display the Wpt List screen Select the waypoint from the list and then tap OK The selected waypoint is added to the route For information on adding waypoints see Adding Waypoints e From the Add list box tap Address Book Entry to use an Address Book entry as a point in your route only entries with addresses are included in the list Select the entry from the list and then tap OK The selected entry is added to the route e From the Add list box tap Screen Center to use the current screen center as a point in your route Screen Center points are labeled as Screen Center when information for that location is unavailable Notes e You can change the order of points in your route using the up and down arrow buttons e You can delete a point from your route using the delete button x 4 From the Method list box tap your preferred routing method quickest or shortest 5 When you have added all the points to your route tap Calculate 319 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide Renaming and Viewing Information on a Route File on a Palm OS Handheld Once you have created a route in Street Atlas USA Handheld you can rename the file or view information about the route at any time To Rename or View Information on a Route Use the following steps to rename or view route information 1 Tap the Menu button on your handheld to display the Street Atlas USA Handheld m
15. e Show Comments MapNotes Displays comments about each point of the route as specified in the Route Advanced subtab To modify route comments click the Route tab click the Advanced subtab select the route and then click in the Comments column twice do not double click next to the route point you want to create a comment for The information you type in the Comments field for that point is placed in a Comments MapNote when you selected to show it on the map e Show Summary MapNotes Displays time and distance information for each point in your route 4 Click Done Moving Route MapNotes You can move Route MapNotes The text box moves but the point stays on the map location To show delete Route MapNotes see Setting Your Routing Preferences in this section 227 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide To move and delete Draw Map Notes see Moving and Deleting Draw MapNotes in this section To Move a Route MapNote Use the following steps to move a MapNote Click the Route tab and then click the Advanced subtab Click the Move Route MapNotes button te Click the MapNote to select it Drag the text box to the new location ger a Displaying and Centering Routes on the Map All the routes you create are automatically displayed The active route displays as a gold line outlined in red Each inactive route displays as a dashed orange line outlined in green You can choose to display only certain routes without deleting
16. Adding Waypoints Use waypoints wpts on the map to mark specific locations or to use as points along a route To Add a Waypoint Use the following steps to add a waypoint to the map 1 Tap the Menu button on your Palm OS handheld to display the Street Atlas USA Handheld menu bar 2 Tap Tools and then tap Add Wpt The Add Wpt icon displays in the center of the map view screen 3 Tap the location on the map where you want to place the waypoint The Add Wpt icon displays at that location Note If you need to pan the map to place a waypoint at a particular location pan to the location and then tap the map view screen at the location at which to place the waypoint icon 4 Tap the waypoint wpt icon to lock the icon to the location The Wpt Info dialog box opens 5 Optional Enter a new name for the waypoint a map feature or placename the waypoint is close to or any comment about the waypoint The coordinates of the waypoint display in the dialog box Note Close to information displays as extended information when querying a waypoint 6 Optional to change the style or color of the waypoint symbol tap the symbol style and color from the available lists 7 Tap Done when finished The map view screen displays and the new waypoint displays at the location you selected Note You can also add a waypoint using the Graffiti Menu Commands Centering the Map on a Waypoint Waypoints display on the map view screen a
17. Alberta 780 427 Calgary 403 www infratrans gov ab ca 2731 246 5853 Edmonton 780 471 6056 Arizona 888 411 511 www dot state az us 7623 www azdot gov Arkansas 501 569 800 245 1672 www arkansasinterstates com 2227 British Columbia 604 660 604 660 2421 www drivebc ca 2421 800 550 4997 7623 Colorado 303 573 Denver 303 www cotrip org 7623 639 1111 877 315 7623 Connecticut 800 443 800 443 3061 www ct gov dot 3061 Outside CT Outside CT 860 594 2650 860 594 2650 302 760 302 760 2080 www deldot net static travel htm 2080 Florida 511 partial 511 partial www fl511 com coverage coverage www dot state fl us Central 866 Central 866 www fhp state fl us 874 3368 874 3368 Lake City Lake City 800 749 800 749 2967 2967 Miami 800 Miami 800 435 2368 5 365 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide 435 2368 Orlando 800 Orlando 800 780 7102 780 7102 Southwest Southwest 800 292 3368 800 292 Tampa 800 3368 226 7220 Tampa 800 Turnpike 226 7220 800 749 7453 Turnpike 1 75 or l 10 800 749 800 475 0044 7453 1 75 or l 10 800 475 0044 Georgia 888 635 888 635 8287 www dot state ga us 8287 808 536 808 536 6566 www hawaii gov dot publicaffairs roadwork 6566 Idaho Treasure Treasure www itd idaho gov Valley 208 Valley 208 336 6600 336 6600 All other All other areas 888 areas 888 432 7623 or 432 7623 or 511 511 Illinois Toll free Toll free www i
18. Click OK to exit the Options dialog and return to the GPS tab in the tab area 236 Using GPS 6 Click Start GPS Your GPS receiver begins acquiring satellite data and the GPS Status dialog area displays Notes e The status of your GPS connection displays on the screen Once your GPS receiver acquires a fix on your location your position on the map displays as a yellow or green dot that changes to an arrow as you travel For more information see Monitoring Your GPS Status e While your receiver is acquiring data many red dots display on your map except with Magellan receivers You may have to zoom in to see them clearly These red dots are positioned at the readings taken by the GPS receiver as it is acquiring data e Magellan receivers do not display any data until you are moving e If you have the HotSync manager loaded in the startup the default configuration it reserves the COM port If that is the one where the GPS receiver is attached you must exit HotSync manager for the GPS receiver to initialize To do this right click the HotSync icon on the taskbar and select Exit from the shortcut menu If you have two COM ports verify the correct COM port is selected for use with your application This pertains to older devices e Any questions or problems regarding the operation of your GPS receiver should be directed to its manufacturer Using NavMode or GPS Tab View The default GPS view is NavMode a hands free f
19. GPS location display at the top of the list Tap the feature you want to track and then tap Select The Select Track screen displays with the selected feature name under the Source box Tap the feature name and then tap Start Tracking The destination from the map feature to the screen center or your GPS position displays in the Information Area The map view screen displays the Tracking icon indicating the direction of travel to the selected feature s destination point if the destination is off the current map view If you have the Navigation Panel enabled a compass direction displays along with the name of your destination Below that area two drop down menus let you choose to display the time to finish heading elevation etc If you do not have the Navigation Panel enabled the Info Area displays the distance and bearing to the destination Pan the map to the destination point or tap the Tracking icon to center the map on the map feature OR If tracking while connected to a GPS receiver the map pans as you move toward your destination point To discontinue a tracking session tap the Track button or tap Tools and then tap Tracking to open the Select Track screen tap Stop Tracking and then tap ok to exit the Select Track screen The map view screen displays 358 Using Street Atlas Handheld on a PDA Tracking to a Waypoint on a Pocket PC You can track any waypoint Wpt you have added in Street Atlas USA Handheld For
20. LON LAT LON END BEGIN SPLINE LAT LON LAT LON LAT LON LAT LON END BEGIN ARC LAT LON LAT LON LAT LON LAT LON BEGIN POLY LAT LON LAT LON LAT LON LAT LON END BEGIN CIRCLE LAT LON Radius END BEGIN LINE 43 807801 70 164440 43 807629 70 163801 43 807211 70 162746 43 806707 70 163400 43 806696 70 163905 43 807125 70 164768 43 807801 70 164440 END BEGIN SPLINE 43 807801 70 164440 43 807629 70 163801 43 807211 70 162746 43 806707 70 163400 43 806696 70 163905 43 807125 70 164768 43 807801 70 164440 END BEGIN ARC 43 807801 70 164440 43 807704 70 162775 43 807211 70 162746 43 807430 70 163644 END BEGIN POLY 43 808692 70 165392 43 808692 70 162493 43 806621 70 162493 43 806621 70 165392 43 808692 70 165392 END BEGIN CIRCLE 43 807662 70 163935 0 114611 END 169 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide MapNote BEGIN SYMBOL LAT LON Name Symbol Name END BEGIN NOTE LAT LON Text END BEGIN SYMBOL 43 807662 70 163935 DeLorme Blue Pin END BEGIN NOTE 43 807662 70 163935 DeLorme END BEGIN TEXT 43 807662 Text Label BEGIN TEXT LAT LON Text END 70 163935 DeLorme END Note for regular Street Atlas USA users This Help topic describes functionality provided in advanced file management Advanced file management allows you to save multiple routes and draw layers in a single map file With simplified fil
21. Plus e Supported file formats include Microsoft Access mdb mdw and mda Microsoft Excel xls Microsoft Visual FoxPro dbf dBase dbf Text files txt csv tab and asc e XData labels names and URLs cannot be more than 255 characters You can use the XData tab to import your data so you can view the location of each record on detailed maps To geoplace locate your records on the map the data file must contain either a coordinate in decimal degrees a city and state a ZIP Postal Code or a complete physical address street address city state for each record Whatever your business needs you have powerful database management tools to help you plan accordingly You can e Import most database spreadsheet and text file formats for use within the program e Select symbols or design your own to represent the locations of your records e Display or hide databases so you can use them one at a time or together You can also use your data with other program functions e Customize an existing dataset and then save the new dataset by using the Export function e Create a route using your XData records as a start stop and or finish point Importing Data You can import your own data and view the location of each record on detailed maps To locate or geoplace your records on the map the file must contain either a coordinate a ZIP Postal Code or a complete physical address street address city stat
22. Redo CTRL Z Undo O Using Keyboard Shortcuts ALT M Set Focus on Map o The following keyboard keys cannot be used when assigning shortcuts 5 0 0 0o oo ooooag0oOoo Windows Key Application Key Print Screen Scroll Lock Sleep Pause Break Enter Caps Lock Num Lock Spacebar Insert Backspace Multi media Keys o Letters and numbers cannot be assigned alone for example you cannot assign a keyboard shortcut with the number 3 You must use a modifier such as CTRL or ALT with letters and numbers Customizing a DeLorme Scheme You cannot edit DeLorme schemes however you can create a copy of a DeLorme scheme that you can modify to fit your needs To Customize a DeLorme Scheme Use the following steps to customize a DeLorme scheme 1 on the toolbar Click the Options button Ee OR Click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu Then click Options to open the dialog box Click the Keyboard Shortcuts tab Select the DeLorme scheme you want to copy from the Scheme drop down list Click File and then click Copy The active scheme changes to Copy of Desktop Mapping Copy of In vehicle Navigation Copy of 3 D Navigation etc depending on the DeLorme scheme you chose to copy Assign keyboard shortcuts for the copied scheme Optional Rename the scheme 93 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide Renaming a Custom Scheme Custom schemes can be renamed to whatever name you cho
23. Use the Voice tab to view status information about your microphone and the list of available voice commands e The Microphone bar VU meter indicates the level of sound received from the microphone e The Command Status area displays either the last recognized voice command or one of the following error messages e Too noisy e No signal e Input too loud e Input too quiet e The Commands box lists the voice commands for accessing the Voice tab navigating using the map and using GPS It shows the availability of the commands and their shortcut keys You can double click a command to issue it To Activate and Monitor the Speech Recognition Feature Use the following steps to activate and monitor the speech recognition feature 1 Click the Voice tab 2 Select the Microphone check box to activate your microphone and to turn on the speech recognition feature The tab name turns red if the microphone is listening to your commands Note If your microphone is active when you exit the program it will still be active when you re enter the application 3 To trigger an audible signal when a voice command is recognized select the Beep When Heard check box 4 To display all of the possible voice commands including variations of the commands select the Show All Commands check box Both enabled fh and disabled ik commands are displayed 250 Using Voice Navigation and Speech Recognition Note Some commands are disabled if a route
24. Use the following steps to import a custom scheme 1 Click the Options button ES OR Click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu Then click Options to open the dialog box 2 Click the Keyboard Shortcuts tab Click File and then click Import The Import Scheme File dialog box opens 4 Browse to the location where you saved the keyscheme file select it and then click Open The imported file is now your active scheme on the toolbar Exporting a Custom Scheme You can share their keyboard shortcut schemes with other DeLorme users To Export a Custom Scheme Use the following steps to export a custom scheme 1 Click the Options button on the toolbar EE Options OR Click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu Then click Options to open the dialog box 2 Click the Keyboard Shortcuts tab Select the scheme you want to export from the Scheme drop down list 4 Click File and then click Export The Export Scheme File dialog box opens 5 Type a name in the File Name text box browse to the location where you want to save the keyscheme file and then click Save K Searching For Commands The Keyboard Shortcuts tab in the Options dialog box has a Search feature that lets you search for a specific command or command group Note You can sort the command list view at any time by clicking the heading you want to sort by Group Command or Shortcut To Search For a Comma
25. You can label any draw object Once you label a draw object you can search for it using the QuickSearch function in the Find tab or by typing the draw object label in any of the routing fields in the Route tab To Label a Draw Object See the labeling procedures below for each of the draw objects For this Draw Use this labeling procedure Object Routable Roads Type the name of the street in the text box available in the Draw dialog area Arcs Circles Lines Polygons Rectangles Splines Tracks Waypoints Images MapNotes Symbols Text Labels Place the object on the map Using the Select tool RI click the draw object once A gray box displays around the draw object Click the draw object again A text box displays Type the label name in the text box and then press the ENTER key on your keyboard Place the object on the map The URL Label text box displays Type the label for your draw object in the Label section of the text box Note When viewing a hyperlinked draw object on the map the object displays as an active hyperlink If you want to click the object without opening the hyperlink press the CTRL key on your keyboard while you click the draw object Waypoints 184 Using the Draw Tools Routable Roads Trails Tracks Lines Arcs and Splines Drawing Routable Roads on the Map The Routable Road tool allows you to add a new road to a draw layer in the current map file You can the
26. and click the track You can select only one track at a time If you selected GPL File in the GPS Data box type the path and file name for the file or click Browse to search for the file on your computer 7 Click Next The Image list displays the images that will be tagged Click an image to preview it in Image Preview window 283 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide 8 10 11 Under Time Offset if the time on your camera differed from actual time when you recorded the data calculate the offset type the actual time in the Matching GPS Time text box Click Next Select how you want to place the image on the map e Hyperlink A MapNote with a hyperlink to the image displays on the map e Embedded A MapNote with a thumbnail image hyperlinked to the image displays on the map e Symbol A camera symbol with a hyperlink to the image displays on the map Click Next A message displays telling you that you successfully tagged your images Click Finish When you view the GPS log file or track on the map you can see where the images are tagged OR An error message displays usually this is because the timestamps for the camera and the file or track do not match Calculate the Timestamp Offset The time on your camera must match the time in the track or GPS log so the images or data display in the correct place If they do not you must calculate a timestamp offset If possible do this before you use the GeoTagger Wiz
27. and then click the draw file object on the map that you want to edit 7 Click File and then click Save to save the changes you made to the draw file 8 Click Done to return to the main Draw tab area To Lock a Draw File Use the following steps to lock a draw file 1 Click the Draw tab 2 Click File to open the draw file editing area 3 Select the Lock check box for each draw file you want to lock Note Clear the Lock check box to make changes to a draw file 4 Click Done to return to the main Draw tab area 164 Using the Draw Tools Note for regular Street Atlas USA users This Help topic describes functionality provided in advanced file management Advanced file management allows you to save multiple routes and draw layers in a single map file With simplified file management you can save only one route and or draw layer in a single map file If you did not select to enable advanced file management during the product installation you can still change the settings using the Change File Management option in the Options menu For more information see Activating Advanced Simplified File Management This note does not apply to Street Atlas USA Plus users Exporting Draw Files to Text Files You can export draw files as text files Draw objects exported to text files contain coordinate information for each line area or point object You can open these text files in other DeLorme products To Export Draw Files to Te
28. and then click the draw object on the map A box displays around the object indicating that it is active Right click the draw object point to Manage Draw and click Route Avoid If the object has no name it the name Route Avoid is visible on the map If you do not have the Auto Calculate option selected in the Route tab click the Route tab and then click Calculate to recalculate your route Note To undo your route avoid click the Select tool in the Draw tab and click the draw object on the map Then press the DELETE key on your keyboard 223 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide Saving Route Directions as Text You can save your directions and along the way results as a text file To Save Your Route Directions Use the following steps to save your directions 1 Click the Print tab and then click the Route subtab If you do not have a route in this map file the Route Options are unavailable 2 Select the route you want to save from the Name drop down list If the route you want to save is not available in the Name drop down list you may not have the correct map file open 3 Under Options select Directions or Along the Way Click the Save button bl on the Route tab 5 To rename the txt file type the new name in the File Name text box and click Save Setting Your Routing Preferences Once you master basic routing you can customize your routing preferences and create more advanced routes The routing preference
29. click Go To Note To geoplace records again click GeoCode To delete one or more records within the dataset while in the Query dialog area select each record using one of the methods described above and then click Delete Click Yes to confirm the deletion Deleted records are unrecoverable To view the record of a particular dataset symbol on the map click Select and then click the symbol on the map Only the corresponding records display in the record window To resize columns place the pointer near the column border in the header of the desired column When the pointer changes to a double arrow drag the column in the direction you want to increase or decrease its size To arrange the records in ascending order according to a particular column click the header of that column Click the column header again to arrange the records in descending order Creating a Route with XData Records XData is available only in Street Atlas USA Plus Once you import an XData dataset you can use the individual records within the dataset to create a route To Create a Route with XData Records Use the following steps to create a route with XData records 1 2 Import a database into the XData tab Click the Query subtab Right click the record you want to use as a start for your route click Route and then click Set as Start 151 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide 4 Optional Right click the record you want to use as a sto
30. click the arrow next to the Options button EF options on the toolbar and click Tab Manager OR From the Start menu point to Programs point to DeLorme point to your application and then click Tab Manager 2 Click File and then click I mport The Import Tab Configuration dialog box opens 3 Browse to the location of the configuration preferences file select it and then click Open Tab Manager displays with the preferences saved in the imported configuration file 4 Click OK to close Tab Manager Exit your application 6 Open your application al 89 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide To Export Tab Manager Preferences Use the following steps to export your Tab Manager preferences as a configuration file 1 If your application is open click the arrow next to the Options button amp ptions R on the toolbar and click Tab Manager OR From the Start menu point to Programs point to DeLorme point to your application and then click Tab Manager 2 Click File and then click Export The Export Tab Configuration dialog box opens 3 Type a name for the configuration preferences file in the File Name text box and then click Save Configuration files are saved by default in the C DeLorme Docs Configuration directory 4 Click OK to close Tab Manager Reordering the Tabs The Tab Manager feature allows you to customize your program by reordering tabs You can access Tab Manager e During ins
31. do not have the right to sell or to reproduce or distribute for sale any part of the System or output of the System alone or in combination with any other text data software or graphic matter No Interactive Use You do not have the right to combine the System interactively with the operation of other software unless licensed to do so by DeLorme No Modifications or Decompilation Except through use of any software modification functions provided with the System you have no right to modify the System in any way incorporate any part or product of it into a compilation or create any derivative work You may not reverse engineer decompile disassemble or otherwise access source code or the logical structure and contents of the System database No Third Party Service Bureau Use Except as specifically provided in this Agreement you may not a permit any third party to use the System or transfer disclose or otherwise make available the System to any third party b use the System in the operation of a service bureau or c allow access to the System through terminals located outside your premises You agree to secure and protect the System in a manner consistent with the maintenance of DeLorme s rights therein and to take appropriate action by instruction or agreement with your employees who are permitted access to the System to satisfy your obligations hereunder No Copies The copying of the System any portion of the System or any of
32. e Tracks e Lines e Arcs e Splines e Area objects are those objects consisting of one or more closed line objects such as e Polygons e Rectangles e Circles e Point objects consist of one anchor point attached to either a waypoint symbol MapNote image or text label The anchor point is the pixel position on the symbol that corresponds to the geographic coordinate of the point selected on the map when the symbol is placed e Draw objects added to a draw file contain points that give the object its shape or allow you to snap one object to another object Points display and act in different ways within the various draw objects Click a link below to view additional information Points in Routable Roads Tracks Lines Splines and Polygons Draw objects such as routable roads tracks lines splines and polygons consist of shape points and end points Shape points are the points you place on the map when creating the object They give the object its shape When you select a draw object on the map shape points display along the active object as small magenta squares The line object below was drawn with the spline tool Ba a ay Ke i Total 4 788 87 feet End points are the first and last points of individual line segments on a draw object When you select a shape point of a line segment within an active line spline or polygon Using the Draw Tools A small green circle indicates the start end point of the selected lin
33. if there is and ZIP routing Code if Entry information available number Coordinate The distance of the leg information for each route point Waypoint Elevatio The total trip time z Line segment Show hide symbol and n e raster colGr distance for The total trip distance and or Heading segments Note Tap the road symbol next to the vector data Coordinates Note Tap between that desired route segment to center that route point on the Map View screen The leg distance Cutter Comments Speed The direction of travel information the bold point and the next coordinate and then tap The cumulative Go To to distance of each center the successive line map on that segment in the ocation route The total route distance at the end of the list of points Note Tap the bold point name to center the selected route point on the Map View screen The Data screen displays differently for the following options e Maps An eye symbol before the map name indicates the map currently displays on the map view screen e Routes or GPS Logs The Show Hide toggle button is available Tap Hide to clear a route or GPS log from the map view screen Tap Show to make the selected route available on the map view screen You can also reverse the direction of a route by tapping the Reverse button 4 Tap ok to exit the Details screen and return to the Data screen 5 If you selected Routes Wpts or GPS logs in step 2 you can also t
34. including unauthorized copies Termination is in addition to and not in lieu of any other remedies available to DeLorme All provisions relating to property rights shall survive termination You are not authorized to transfer your rights under this Agreement OTHER This Agreement contains the complete understanding between the parties and supersedes and replaces any prior or contemporaneous agreement or understanding whether oral or written with respect to its subject matter This Agreement shall be governed by the laws of the State of Maine applicable to agreements wholly executed and wholly performed in Maine Any action relating to this Agreement shall be brought in federal or state court in Maine and the parties consent to the personal jurisdiction of either such court U S GOVERNMENT RIGHTS IN COMMERCIAL SOFTWARE Use duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions set forth in the commercial computer software license agreement under which the software is delivered by DeLorme and as provided in DFARS 227 7202 1 a and 227 7202 3 a or DFARS 227 225 7013 OCT 1988 as applicable or FAR 12 212 a FAR 52 227 14 or FAR 52 227 19 as applicable CANADIAN GOVERNMENT DATA Certain of the Canadian data included in the System are Adapted from Statistics Canada FSA Boundary File 92FO170XCE 2001 Census or Statistics Canada 2005 384 Legal Information Road Network File 92 500 XWE or Melissa Data s Can
35. such as aerial and satellite imagery and even view the roads on top of the imagery Grab and pan the map in any direction Measure linear distance and area on the map based on the units chosen in the Display tab of the Options dialog box 27 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide e Get information about a location on the map You can also right click a location on the map and select the I nfo option e Combine images with GPS information on the map with the GeoTagger Wizard e Open the Options dialog box and menu Use the Options dialog box to set GPS voice display map feature handheld and keyboard shortcut preferences Use the menu to open Tab Manager customize your interface and more Note for regular Street Atlas USA users The Change File Management option is located on this menu e Open the Help menu to view Help Topics view travel conditions contacts reset shut off popup tutorials and more Tips e You can show or hide toolbar options e You can change the order of the toolbar options Using the Help System Help Overview There are several ways to get more information about the program s features and functionality On Screen Help There are three ways to access Help within the program e Pop up Tutorials When you perform some actions in the program a pop up Did you know tutorial opens These provide additional information for using that particular function If you do not want to see that specifi
36. the Advanced tab displays automatically POI s Search for specific points of interest such as hotels restaurants hospitals department stores etc Search a specified distance from the current map center or along an active route GPS Radar Search for points of interest within a designated distance from your current location while tracking a route with a GPS receiver Advanced Control what you are looking for with the Find field and where you are looking for it with the Within field while you conduct a more detailed search Performing a Basic Search Use the QuickSearch tab to locate places addresses ZIP Postal Codes coordinate positions and more To search for other items such as an area codes street intersections or a category such as Park Interstate and so on use the Advanced subtab To Perform a Basic Search Follow the steps below to use the QuickSearch tab 1 Click the Find tab and then click the QuickSearch subtab 2 OR Press CTRL F on your keyboard Type a name address ZIP Postal Code town name coordinate draw object label address book contact name street intersection etc in the Search For text box See Searching Tips on page 24 for a description of input formats OR Select From Address Book from the Search For drop down list to find an address book entry in your DeLorme Address Book and then click OK Notes e The Book check box under the Address Book buttons must be selected to
37. the map print area is based on the screen size The print area for a Page map displays as a red box on the map which may not always be visible The overview map and the print area for a Screen map display as a blue box on the overview map If you selected Screen in step 4 go to step 6 If you selected Page in step 4 the following options are available e Under Print Layout select a layout option Single 2 x 2 or 3 x 3 The print area displays on both the map and the overview map e If you selected 2 x 2 or 3 x 3 on the map layout graphic and you do not want to print all the pages in the multipage map click each page you do not want to print The page appears dimmed or gray You can click a dimmed gray page again to print it Note In the example below page 4 will not print for the 2 x 2 map e Verify this is the location and photo zoom you want to print e If not pan the map to a new location and zoom to the correct level OR e Street Atlas USA Plus only To change the photo zoom select an option from the Photo Zoom drop down list or type the photo zoom in the text box Note Changing the photo zoom enlarges or reduces the map features and changes the map print area If you increase the photo zoom level map text lines symbols etc display larger and your map print area is reduced If you decrease the photo zoom level map text lines symbols etc display smaller and your map print area is enlarged The reduc
38. 10 describe how to completely secure the sheets 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 until all the sheets are pieced together 6 With the multi page temporarily pieced together use small pieces of removable tape to secure the corners and edges of the multi page map Note Place the removable tape on the corners and edges not along the seams 7 For each seam fix the tape to the work surface not on the sheet so the tape is in alignment with the seam 8 Spool off enough permanent tape to cover the entire seam Be careful not to let the tape touch the map until you are ready to apply it in step 9 119 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide 9 Keeping the length of the tape taut carefully apply the tape to the seam until both sides are fixed to the work surface 10 Press the tape along the seam to remove any air gaps 11 Repeat steps 6 through 10 until all seams are completely pieced together 12 Using the straight edge ruler carefully trim the edges of the map at the seams where the tape is affixed to the workspace 13 Peel off the removable tape at the corners and the edges You are now ready to display your multi page map 120 Finding a Location on the Map Find Overview There are four Find options you can use to search for and locate places and other map items QuickSearch Search for places addresses cities towns ZIP Postal Codes and coordinate positions If the item you are looking for is not recognized
39. 145 USING X Data kr i fade eel nce eu reel a eke Mendes eingaee bes a Pa aao kaa AE ACERA AEE 147 XData OVErVICW 2 2 cc eee eee E tennant 147 Importing Datars isco oer et e E a A EE Or ERE E ie nee ead 147 Managing Datasets wicics cence eae eee vein tigere ae seus KE eie ee ey nee deni voy de Ea verte 149 Viewing Dataset RecordS c ccc ce cece te ene nee aetna eterna 150 Creating a Route with XData RecordS cece eee ee eee e ee eee teen ee teeta eee eee 151 Geocoding or Moving a Record s LOCatiON cece cece eee eect ee eee eee teeta 152 Exporting Dataiiecnssscicceeed covign hve ved ein ceeks ied oh caveat ove eee by eked eve day a 152 Printing XData Dataset ReECOIdS cece cece eee e eee nena tata t een ened 154 Using the Draw TOOIS ti Aat imaia horhhd wei a aaa Aa A E a A A aAA A 157 Draw OVETVIEW r rirorreen e aana oeae poa raa n ate Ee Aua E DVE deen aaao 157 Viewing Hidden Draw ToolS sssssssssssssssrrrrssssrrnrrssrrrnrrsnerrnrrsrerrrrrnrerrrrr nnt 160 Draw File Management ssssssssssssssrrrrsesrinrrsrererrntssrirrnnsaririnnearinnnnsterrenne 161 Creating a New Draw File ssssssssssssssssssssrrsrsresrrensrerrrrnsrsrirrnreerenrnnenerrennenet 161 Saving a Draw File ht cage aet Wades a eee a T Ea a eae e iay 162 Deletingsa Draw Flle bani a a A E E a Ea 163 Hiding Dra AES a a e a a a SEn 163 Editing Locking Draw FileS ssssssssesssrrssssrrrrsssrrrrrrssrrrrrnsnrrrnrrsnsrrnrn
40. 242 Using GPS e Acquisition location e Finish street e Finish location e Acquisition coordinate e Finish coordinate e Time from start to finish e Time for acquisition e Time from initial acquisition to finish e Time moving e Time stopped e File owner e File comments e File path e File size 6 Click OK to exit the dialog box Monitoring Your GPS Status Once you initialize your GPS and begun tracking you can continue to monitor the status of your GPS connection and other information Status information accuracy is affected by speed 3 mph or more and your GPS status 3 D status provides the most accurate information To Monitor Your GPS Status in NavMode Speed Speed Displays the speed you are traveling based on the units you 22 selected on the Display tab in the Options dialog box MPH Heading Displays the direction you are traveling in as degrees T True North or M Magnetic North based on the bearing selected WNW T on the Units area on the Display tab in the Options dialog box Heading is provided as a numerical value as well as a compass direction Heading GPS Fix GPS Fix No GPS Displays No Fix Acquiring Displays No Fix 2 D Displays 2 D 3 D The GPS receiver is receiving sufficient satellite data to determine your location When the status reads 3 D your current heading and traveling speed are displayed Note If you are tracking with a WAAS enabled device a 3 D 3 D 243
41. 79 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide Displaying Basic Map Features You can show or hide basic map features on your map You can also customize map features and customize the interface Notes If you cannot make changes to the basic preference check boxes verify the Use Custom Map Features check box is not selected Click Use Defaults to change the map feature settings to the default preferences To Select Basic Map Feature Preferences Use the following steps to change the basic map feature preferences Changes made to the map view display almost immediately after selection 80 1 Click the Options button OR EE Options on the toolbar Click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu Then click Options to open the dialog box OR Click the Map Features tab Select the check box next to the map features you want to display on the map Clear the check box next to the map features you want to hide on the map Grids tThe Grids option can be used to identify coordinate points on the map Grid lines automatically adjust for the data zoom level of your map Map Center Crosshair The map center crosshair indicates the map center at any data zoom level Exits View exits on primary limited access roads interstates and toll roads Available at data zoom level 10 0 or greater One Ways One ways display as bright green triangles on roads pointing toward the direction of travel most not
42. 8 Click OK The Create Transfer File dialog box opens 9 In the File Name text box type the file name Transfer files have dmt extensions and are saved by default in the C DeLorme Docs Transfer Files directory Browse to another location if you want to save the file somewhere else 104 Using Map Files 10 Click Create Your file is created and saved in the specified location Note for regular Street Atlas USA users This Help topic describes functionality provided in advanced file management Advanced file management allows you to save multiple routes and draw layers in a single map file With simplified file management you can save only one route and or draw layer in a single map file If you did not select to enable advanced file management during the product installation you can still change the settings using the Change File Management option in the Options menu For more information see Activating Advanced Simplified File Management This note does not apply to Street Atlas USA Plus users Importing Transfer Files You can package a map file and its contents into a single file called a transfer file to facilitate e mailing or copying You can also import transfer files allowing you to share your map files with other DeLorme users You can import a transfer file with or without attached hyperlink files When you create a transfer file with hyperlinked files you can choose to maintain the directory information
43. Atlas USA Handheld To Delete a GPS Log Use the following steps to delete a log file 1 Tap the Menu button on your Palm OS handheld to display the Street Atlas USA Handheld menu bar 2 Tap Data on the menu bar and then tap GPS Logs to view the Data screen The list of log files you have recorded displays under the Source selection box 3 From the list of GPS logs tap the log file you want to delete The log name is highlighted 4 Tap Delete A message box displays asking if you want to delete the selected log file 5 Tap OK to delete the file The Data screen displays and the log file is cleared from the list of GPS log files OR Tap Cancel to return to the Data screen without deleting the log file 6 Tap Done to display the map view screen Note You can also access Data screen commands Delete Go To Details and Beam by tapping the Data screen menu bar or the Menu button to display the Command drop down menu Monitoring Your GPS Session on a Palm OS Handheld Once you have updated your GPS settings and have a good connection to your GPS receiver you can monitor the status of your GPS connection as well as your speed heading elevation and position in latitude longitude or UTM UPS coordinates To Monitor GPS Use the following steps to monitor your GPS session 1 Tap the Menu button on your Palm OS handheld to display the Street Atlas USA Handheld menu bar 2 Tap GPS and then tap Monitor The Monitor GPS screen dis
44. Code information Waypoints Wpts A waypoint and then tap the information area above the menu bar to view extended Wpts information including names or any text appearing in the Close To text field For information on adding waypoints see Adding Waypoints Road Railroad Hydro Water Lines A road to display its name city state and ZIP Code information A rail or hydro stream brook creek and so forth line to displays its position in lat lon or UTM UPS 337 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide coordinates Water Polygons Islands Land Within the feature boundaries to Use Land Cover Parks and so forth display its name and coordinate information Saving a Map Point on a Pocket PC Street Atlas USA Handheld lets you save a map point as a waypoint or a contact To Save a Map Point as Waypoint Use the following steps to save a map point as a waypoint 1 Tap a map point you want to save as a waypoint 2 Tap the information area above the menu bar 3 Tap Add as Waypoint 4 Optional Enter a new name for the waypoint a map feature or placename the waypoint is close to any comment about the waypoint as well as the desired symbol style and color The coordinates of the waypoint display in the dialog box Note Close to information displays as extended information when querying a waypoint 5 Tap ok to save the waypoint 6 Tap ok The map view screen displays and the new waypoint displays at th
45. Comparisons for more information type a location in the Search for and select a location box click a result in the results list and then click the Preview button E Preview The default export area is defined with shaded grids Click the Select All EB SeectAN tton to select the default export area or click the Select Edit ER Setectest button to add or remove grids Grids selected for export are shaded red Note Click the Clear All button E from the map Crear All to clear the highlighted grids 262 Using Handheld Devices 3 Type a name for your map package in the Save your Map for Exchange box 4 Click Save ka e 5 Click Exchange LE Exchange o open the Exchange Wizard 6 Select the device you want to send the map to from the Device Type list 7 Palm OS Users Only e Select the user you want to send the map to from the User list e Select Main Memory or SD card from the Destination drop down list e Optionally select the Draw Points or Active Routes check boxes if your map includes that information 12 Click Prepare for Sync The map will be available on your handheld computer after your next synchronization operation Notes e All the map packages you have saved display in the Saved Map Packages list e To view a previously exported map select it from the Saved Packages list and then click View i e To delete a previously exported map select it from the Saved Packages list and then click Delete Grid S
46. Current Route from the Within drop down list 4 Type the appropriate keyword in the Keywords text box 5 Type the distance within which you want to search in the Distance text box 6 Click Search The search results display in the dialog area 7 Click the Print tab and then click Route The Route dialog area displays 8 Select the Along the Way check box 9 Click Print The search results print e How do turn on voice navigation Voice is used in the following ways Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide e Listen to your route directions while tracking along a route using GPS e Use the speech recognition feature to issue commands or ask questions about map panning and zooming navigation or GPS functions e Why can t hear the voice during voice navigation The voice navigation systems in DeLorme products are directly dependent on your computer s sound system for volume levels To Set the Volume Level If your system is not playing the sound loud enough use the following steps to verify the Wave volume control is set to its highest levels 1 From the Start menu point to Programs point to Accessories point to Multimedia or Entertainment depending on your operating system and then click Volume Control OR If available click the audio control shortcut on your taskbar 2 In the Wave column move the Volume slider to the top 3 Close the Volume Control dialog box If the voice commands are still not loud eno
47. Establishes a connection between your GPS device and your handheld Disconnects the GPS connection between your GPS device and your handheld View and if necessary change GPS settings Activate GPS logging at connection change logging time intervals start pause or stop a logging session view logging information and keep track of memory usage Monitor GPS status relative heading current direction of travel to True North current speed elevation 3 D mode only and coordinate position when connected to a GPS receiver View the visible satellites their assigned numbers and position in the sky relative to your current position Tap Key to display the Satellite Sky View Key for information on satellite status View each satellite currently visible in the sky which is listed by e Satellite number Sat e Elevation degrees to horizon El e Azimuth Az e Signal to noise ratio SNR e Status N navigation E ephemeris data T tracked and D differential mode for WAAS e PDOP Position Dilution of Precision e HDOP Horizontal Dilution of Precision e EHPE Estimated Horizontal Position Error Using Street Atlas Handheld on a PDA Sun Moon Add Wptx Findx Previous Mapx Go To Position TrackingX Distance Create Direct Route Create Road Route View sunrise set and moonrise set information Settings changed on this screen do not effect other screens The
48. FSA Boundary File 92FO170XCE 2001 Census or Statistics Canada 2005 Road Network File 92 500 XWE or Melissa Data s Canadian Postal Data product based on input from STC data files Statistics Canada information is used with the permission of Statistics Canada Users are forbidden to copy this material and or re disseminate the data in an original or modified form for commercial purposes without the expressed permission of Statistics Canada Information on the availability of the wide range of data from Statistics Canada can be obtained from Statistics Canada s Regional Offices its World Wide Web site at http www statcan ca and its toll free access number 1 800 263 1136 Copyright 2008 DeLorme All rights reserved Street Atlas USA 2009 Single User License Agreement This is an Agreement between you the end user and DeLorme By using the Street Atlas USA 2009 software data and documentation the System you are agreeing to be bound by the terms of this Agreement If you do not agree with the terms of this Agreement you may not use the System Return all materials within thirty 30 days of receipt to the dealer from which you obtained them or to DeLorme for a full refund Any term or condition of an approved purchase order that differs from or adds to the terms or conditions of this License Agreement as well as any other modification or amendment to this Agreement will not be effective unless expressly agreed to by both par
49. Log Use the following steps to view GPS logs you have created on a map 1 Tap Data and then tap GPS Logs The Data screen displays the list of GPS log files available on your Pocket PC 2 From the list of log files tap the name of the log you want to view The log name is highlighted Note Only one GPS log can be displayed on the map at a time 3 Tap Go To The map view displays the start point of the selected GPS log at map center Note You cannot view a log file that is actively being logged An hourglass symbol indicates the GPS log is a large file and may take longer to view on the screen 343 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide Renaming and Viewing Information on a GPS Log File on a Pocket PC Once you have created a GPS log in Street Atlas USA Handheld you can rename the file or view information about the log at any time To Rename or View Information on a GPS Log File Use the following steps to rename or view log information 1 Tap Data and then tap GPS Logs The Data screen displays the list of GPS log files available on your Pocket PC 2 To view information on a GPS log file tap to select a file in the file list and then tap Details OR To rename the log file tap to select a file in the file list tap Rename and then enter a new name in the Rename screen Tap ok to save the change and return to the Data screen Note ActiveSync only synchronizes only files located in Main Memory 3 To view another log select th
50. OR Click Advanced to display the advanced routing options AND OR Click Plan Trip to assign end of day or fuel breaks to your route AND OR Click Back on Track to add your current GPS position as a stop to the current route To Insert a Stop or Via Into Your Route The Insert Stop Via function arranges stops vias geographically in the route Use the following steps to insert a stop or via to your route 1 2x 220 Create a route In the New Edit dialog area in the Route tab make sure the button next to the Stop tool O if you are adding a stop or the Via tool Ol if you are adding a via is labeled Insert If it is not click the arrow next to the button and select I nsert To insert a stop or via to the route click the Stop or Via tool and then click the location on the map OR e To use an address book entry as your stop or via location 1 Select Stop From Address Book from the Stop drop down list OR Select Via From Address Book from the Via drop down list 2 Select an Address Book entry and then click OK e To use your current GPS position as your stop or via location Select Stop at GPS Location from the Stop drop down list OR Select Via at GPS Location from the Via drop down list Routing e Type the stop or via location in the Stop or Via text box Type the name of an address book contact user added waypoint or address If you type an address it must be in one of the following formats street address c
51. PC Help Map Files Viewing Maps on Your Pocket PC Device Street Atlas USA Handheld gives you the ability to create map files in your DeLorme mapping application and view street level maps on a Pocket PC device Select and export map rectangles from your DeLorme mapping application to your handheld and then add waypoints to the map create a direct route or create a road route on the map To View Maps on Your Handheld Use the following steps to view maps installed on your handheld 1 Open Street Atlas USA Handheld If you have already run the application and have one or more maps loaded the handheld screen displays the last map viewed Note If no maps are installed i e map files were deleted or not accessible to the handheld the No maps loaded on device error message displays 2 Tap Data and then tap Maps The Data screen displays the list of map files available on your Pocket PC device Notes e An eye symbol next to the map file name indicates the map s currently displaying on the map view screen e An hourglass symbol indicates it is a large file and may take longer to view on the screen 4 Tap the map file and then tap Go To The center of the map file is aligned with the screen center on the map view screen Note Once in the Data screen tap the Directories button to load multiple map files from a particular directory or to clear any map file directories you have previously selected 329 Street Atlas USA 2009 User G
52. Position Updating Your GPS Settings on a Pocket PC Device When connecting your GPS device to your Pocket PC handheld for use with Street Atlas USA Handheld you might have to update your GPS settings to initialize your GPS device Note NMEA compatible GPS devices used with Street Atlas USA Handheld should be set to a mode corresponding to NMEA 183 version 2 0 at 4800 baud To Update Your GPS Settings Use the following steps to update your GPS settings 1 Tap GPS then tap Settings The GPS Settings screen displays 2 Under State tap the state where you are currently located Note If you have previously used your GPS device with Street Atlas USA Handheld tap Last Location to use the last position used or tap Screen Center to use the current screen center coordinates OR Tap the Coords field to manually enter your coordinates The Select Location screen displays Tap a number or letter in the coordinate and use the up and down arrows to make changes Tap ok to update the coordinates The GPS Settings screen displays 3 Under Device tap to select the type of device you are using 4 Under Comport tap to select the COM port you are using 5 If you have a DeLorme USB Earthmate tap Advanced to change the LED and or WAAS settings Then tap OK to return to the GPS Settings screen 6 Tap OK to save settings The map view screen displays Notes e After the first initialization all settings default to those set the last time you edit
53. Receiving Waypoints From Your Palm OS Device Use the Exchange Wizard to receive waypoints created on your Palm OS device Once imported you can use the file in your mapping program To Receive Waypoints From Your Palm OS Device Use the following steps to receive waypoints from your Palm OS device Click the Exchange button on the toolbar 1 2 Under Select Device select Palm OS 3 Select Receive from Device 4 Select Waypoints from the Object Type drop down list 5 From the Save As drop down list select to save the waypoints as User Map Data Waypoints 6 Click Next 7 Select the waypoint file you want to add the waypoint information to from the Waypoint File drop down list To create a new waypoint file select New from the Waypoint File drop down list and type the new waypoint file name in the text box 8 If you want all of the waypoints to display with the current symbol such as the default red flag select the Use Current Waypoint active waypoint 272 Using Handheld Devices option If you want the waypoint symbols to match those on your third party GPS device select the Use Custom Waypoint Symbol Set option and then select the appropriate set from the drop down list For more information on creating a custom symbol set see Assigning a Waypoint ID to a Custom Symbol 9 Click Receive From Device 10 Repeats the steps for each waypoint file you want to receive 11 Click Finish The waypoint
54. Right click the draw object you want to move point to Move To and then click the draw file you want to copy the object to all compatible draw files display in the Move To shortcut list The draw object is moved to the new destination Note for regular Street Atlas USA users This Help topic describes functionality provided in advanced file management Advanced file management allows you to save multiple routes and draw layers in a single map file With simplified file management you can save only one route and or draw layer in a single map file If you did not select to enable advanced file management during the product installation you can still change the settings using the Change File Management option in the Options menu For more information see Activating Advanced Simplified File Management 177 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide This note does not apply to Street Atlas USA Plus users Using Draw Objects Copying and Placing Draw Objects You can copy any draw object you place on the map To Copy Draw Objects Use the following steps to copy draw objects 1 2 3 Open the map file that contains the draw object you want to copy Click the Draw tab To copy a single draw object click the Select tool A and then click the draw object on the map A box displays around the active object OR To copy multiple draw objects click the Select tool A and then drag a box over the draw objects you want to
55. Street Atlas Handheld on a PDA Notes e To use the current date tap Today The Sun Moon screen displays the current date e To cancel any date changes tap Cancel The Sun Moon screen displays e Changing the date in Sun Moon does not change the system date on your handheld To Change the Time Zone Change the time zone to view sun moon information for another time zone Sun moon information displays relative to the time zone you specify For example if you are in New York and want to view sun moon status for a location in California update the coordinates field to the California location To view the sun moon information as though you are in California you must change the time zone to that of the California location Use the following steps to change the time zone e Next to Zone tap the down arrow and select the number which represents the time zone of the desired location e Tap to select the DST check box if daylight saving time is in effect e Tap to select the Behind GMT Greenwich Mean Time check box if the time zone of the location is behind Greenwich Mean Time For example the East coast is 5 time zones behind GMT 4 time zones behind during Daylight Saving Time e Changing the time zone in Sun Moon does not effect the system time zone settings found on handhelds with Palm OS 4 0 or greater To Change Coordinates Coordinates can display in either latitude longitude degrees degrees minutes degrees minutes sec
56. Symbol e To repeat the last action click the Redo button under Edit Symbol 7 To assign a symbol name to the current symbol type a name or phrase in the Symbol Name text box under Edit Symbol Note Once you assign a name to a symbol in a symbol set each occurrence of that symbol you place on the map retains the new symbol name in addition to the default symbol name of symbol 8 Click OK when finished Note As you create a symbol an image preview displays to the upper left of the Symbol Editing Grid You can make edits to the symbol in either the Image Preview or the Symbol Editing Grid Any edits done in one view are mirrored in the other view Finding a Custom Symbol The symbol name you assign to a symbol in XSym is different than the label you attach to the symbol on the map using the symbol draw tool You can use the symbol name to help locate a custom symbol you have already placed on a map using the Advanced feature under the Find tab To Find a Custom Symbol Use the following steps to find a symbol by its symbol name 1 Click the Find tab and then click Advanced 2 Select Category from the Find drop down list 3 Select the applicable option from the Within drop down list 207 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide Notes Type the symbol name in the Keywords text box Click Search Click OK The closet matches display in the list view to the right of the Search For text box The Symbol Name displays in the Map
57. System documentation and other materials furnished to you or made by you including unauthorized copies Termination is in addition to and not in lieu of any other remedies available to DeLorme All provisions relating to property rights shall survive termination You are not authorized to transfer your rights under this Agreement OTHER This Agreement contains the complete understanding between the parties and supersedes and replaces any prior or contemporaneous agreement or understanding whether oral or written with respect to its subject matter This Agreement shall be governed by the laws of the State of Maine applicable to agreements wholly executed and wholly performed in Maine Any action relating to this Agreement shall be brought in federal or state court in Maine and the parties consent to the personal jurisdiction of either such court U S GOVERNMENT RIGHTS IN COMMERCIAL SOFTWARE Use duplication or disclosure by the Government of all parts of the Licensed Data except any USGS data is subject to restrictions set forth in the commercial computer software license agreement under which the software is delivered by DeLorme and as provided in DFARS 227 7202 1 a and 227 7202 3 a or DFARS 227 225 7013 OCT 1988 as applicable or FAR 12 212 a FAR 52 227 14 or FAR 52 227 19 as applicable 380 Legal Information CANADIAN GOVERNMENT DATA Certain of the Canadian data included in the System are Adapted from Statistics Canada
58. The coordinates of the waypoint display in the dialog box Note Close to information city state and ZIP Code if available displays as extended information when querying a waypoint Tap Ok to save the waypoint The map view screen displays and the new waypoint displays at the location you selected Using Street Atlas Handheld on a PDA Centering the Map on a Waypoint on a Pocket PC Waypoints display on the map view screen as soon as they are added You can create many waypoints on map files installed on you Pocket PC handheld These waypoint wpt files are stored on your handheld and can be accessed at any time To Center Your Map on a Waypoint Use the following steps to center the map on a waypoint you have added 1 Tap Data and then tap Wpts The Data screen displays the list of waypoint files available on your Pocket PC 2 Tap the waypoint you want to locate The waypoint name is highlighted 3 Tap Go To The map view screen centers on the selected waypoint Editing a Waypoint on a Pocket PC Edit waypoint file information of any waypoint Wpt you have created in Street Atlas USA Handheld To Edit a Waypoint Use the following steps to edit waypoint file information 1 Tap Data and then tap Wpts The Data screen displays the list of waypoint files available on your Pocket PC 2 Tap Rename to edit the file properties Note ActiveSync synchronizes only files located in Main Memory OR Tap Details to edi
59. USA 2009 User Guide eee 9 Select Send to Device Select User Map Data Track from the Object drop down list Click Next Select the track file you want to send to your device from the Track File drop down list Optional Designate a track name or a track number for the file on the device 10 Click Send to Device 11 Repeat the steps for every route file you want to send to your device 12 Click Finish Tip You can also open the Exchange Wizard by clicking the Exchange button TE Exchange on the GPS tab or the Handheld Export tab Sending Waypoints to Your Third party GPS Device If you have a compatible GPSdevice you can use the Exchange Wizard to send waypoints to your device To Send Waypoints Use the following steps to send waypoints to your device 1 2 oe ee Connect your device to your computer If you are using a third party GPS receiver you may have to use specific settings For example if you are using a GARMIN GPS receiver set your GARMIN receiver interface to GRMN GRMN For more information see your owner manual Click the Exchange button P Under Select Device select GPS Select Send to Device Select User Map Data Waypoints from the Object drop down list Click Next Select the waypoint file you want to send to your device from the Waypoint File drop down list To avoid overwriting existing waypoints on your device type a starting point for the new points and select the Pre
60. Under Records select an option Note Various options are available under the Records drop down box depending on options you chose under the Table Display drop down box in the XData dialog area You can choose specific options available or to print All Records in the dataset Print Column Displays column names on each printed page Names Clear the check box to have no column names display First Page Only Displays column names on the first page only This option is unavailable if the Print Column Names check box is cleared Print Column Displays borders around table columns Borders Shade Alternate Displays shading in alternate rows in the table Records 8 154 Under Columns select an option Note Selected check boxes indicate the columns that will print Clear a column check box if you do not want the column to print or click Using XData e Select All to select and print all columns e Select None to clear all columns no columns will print e Reverse Selection to alternate selections For example if you have selected columns 1 3 and 5 to print and decide you want to print columns 2 4 and 6 instead The Reverse Selection option selects those columns that were cleared 9 When all options are selected click Print Note For specific recommendations on best printing results see your printer manual 155 Using the Draw Tools Draw Overview You can add draw objects such as routable roads waypoints tr
61. Using the Draw Tools 3 Under Symbols select lt New gt from the drop down list The DeLorme XSym dialog box opens 4 Under Symbol Set Name type the name for your new symbol set The default name for the new symbol set is CustomSymbolSet 5 Import a bitmap into your new symbol set OR Create a new symbol to add to your new symbol set Opening a Symbol Set Open an existing symbol set dim to add new symbols or edit existing ones To Open a Symbol Set Use the following steps to open a symbol set 1 Click the Draw tab 2 Click and hold the Symbol MapNote Text Label I mage tool OT Pp to view its hidden options Select the Symbol tool P 3 Under Symbols select the symbol set from the drop down list The DeLorme XSym dialog box opens The symbol selection for the new symbol set displays under Symbols in Set and the Symbol Editing Grid updates with the first symbol of the new symbol set 215 Routing Creating a Route You can create a road route using the Route tab right click feature or the toolbar Once you create a route you can use the Route tab to view route directions edit a route and display routes on a map Routes are calculated using the default routing preferences To show remove routing MapNotes waypoint labels state borders and route vias enable disable GPS voice navigation or to change the default speed road type or routing preference see Setting Your Routing Preferences in this section
62. You can create a route by simply adding Start and Finish points If you find the route does not take your favorite streets or you need to make a stop along the way add or insert Vias or Stops You can create a route using the Route tab right click functionality or the toolbar For more information on adding a route to your map see Creating a Route on page 217 How do import files from an earlier version of Street Atlas USA into this version You can import map files routes and draw files from many other DeLorme mapping programs by using a drag and drop operation or by using the import function in Street Atlas USA The structure of map files has changed throughout the life of Street Atlas USA Map files in older products such as Street Atlas USA 9 0 and earlier are a single file that contain route information draw objects and the current display settings These map files cannot be opened in this version of Street Atlas USA however you can view the route and or draw information that the map file contains using the import and drag and drop functions within Street Atlas USA In more recent products Street Atlas USA Road Warrior and later map files do not contain the draw and route information but connect to separate route and draw files You can open these map files in Street Atlas USA to view their contents Or you can import drag and drop the draw route information individually To Open A Map File 1 Click the Map File
63. a MapTag Route Places a start stop or finish point at that location on the map based on your selection The location is listed in the Start text box Stop text box or Finish text box in the Route tab To locate an item on the map without moving the map single click an item in the results list It is highlighted on the map as long as it is in the current map view This is especially helpful when you are at the data zoom level you want but point labels are not displaying Notes To select multiple items press and hold the CTRL key while clicking up to 350 items in the results list If the items are listed continuously click the first item in the list and then press and hold the SHIFT key while clicking the last item you want You can adjust column widths The new size is retained until changed again You cannot rearrange the column order Different search types result in different column orders 129 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide e There are two types of results lists Most searches provide a fixed number of results If all Scroll of the results do not fit in the screen area a scroll bar Ba automatically displays A Name in ZIP Postal Code searches Name in U S or Canada searches and Area Code Exchange searches z provide results you can browse This means the entire database displays with the best match highlighted It is possible to continue browsing to the first or last item in the database Keywords
64. action click Redo Notes e Do not snap one end point of an arc to the other end point in the same arc e To turn the snapping feature off press the ALT key on the keyboard while dragging the draw object 182 Using the Draw Tools To Snap the Central Shape Point of an Arc to Another Object Use the following steps to snap the central shape point of the arc to another object 1 Click the Draw tab 2 Click the Select tool R and then click the arc on the map A box displays around the active object Shape points display as small magenta squares 3 While pressing the SHIFT key on the keyboard drag the center point of the arc line over a point on the draw object until the snap point the yellow diamond displays 4 Release the arc It is snapped to the other object s point coordinate Adding Points to Draw Objects You can add points to routable road line spline and polygon draw objects to change the shape of the object To Add Points to Draw Objects Use the following steps to add points to routable roads lines splines and polygons 1 In the Draw tab click the Select tool Af and then click the draw object you want to edit A box displays around the line indicating it is active The shape points of the draw objects display as small magenta squares 2 Click the line between two shape points in the object and drag A new point is created as well as a new line segment within the object The new segment displays wit
65. also open the Exchange Wizard by clicking the Exchange button TE Exchange on the GPS tab or the Handheld Export tab Oy ey P eS 273 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide Sending Route Information to Your Pocket PC Device Use the Exchange Wizard to send route points or route directions to your Pocket PC device To Send Route Points Use the following steps to send route points to your Pocket PC device 1 2 Under Device Type select Pocket PC 3 Select Send to Device 4 Select Route Points from the Object Type drop down list 5 Click Next 6 From the Route drop down list select the route file that contains the route points you want to send to your device 7 Click Prepare for Sync 8 Click OK to return to the Exchange Wizard 9 Repeat the steps for each route you want to send to your device 10 Click Finish The route points are available on your handheld device after your next synchronization operation To Send Route Directions Use the following steps to send route directions to your Pocket PC device r Click the Exchange button F on the toolbar 1 2 Under Device Type select Pocket PC 3 Select Send to Device 4 Select Route Directions from the Object Type drop down list 5 Click Next 6 From the Route drop down list select the route file that contains the route directions you want to send to your device 7 Click Prepare for Sync 8 Click OK to return to the Exchange Wizard
66. and click Back on Track whenever you want to recalculate the route based on the current GPS position e If you want to create a log of your travels select the Start GPS Log check box in the GPS tab of the Options dialog to log automatically Or click the Record button in the GPS Log subtab to log manually e The Turns option is available only during GPS tracking To Start GPS Tracking Use the following steps to track your movement as you travel 1 Create a route Important If the current map file includes hidden routes they may recalculate if you selected the Auto Back on Track check box or if you selected the Recalculate When Off Route check box in the GPS Settings To ensure this does not occur clear these check boxes or delete the routes you do not want to recalculate 2 Connect your GPS device to your computer Initialize the device This step is not necessary if you are using an Earthmate GPS device 4 In NavMode click the GPS button Q on the toolbar Click here to see a description of the screen display OR In GPS tab view click the GPS tab and then click the Status subtab For more information see Monitoring Your GPS Status Then click Start GPS or click the GPS button 6 on the toolbar Click here to see a description of the Show Turns area on the Route tab e Next Turn Displays the next turn and a turn graphic indicating the direction the distance to the next turn based on the units selected on the Display
67. and then tap Create Road Route The Road Route icon displays in the upper right corner of the map view screen and the Erase icon displays in the upper left corner of the map view screen Tap the locations on the map where you want to place each point in the route Each time you tap the map while in Road Route mode a point is placed on the map and a line segment displays between the points Then tap the Road Route icon 318 2 3 Notes Using Street Atlas Handheld on a PDA e If you have placed a point on the route incorrectly tap the Erase icon Eal The last point placed as well as the line segment between it and the previous point is cleared Clear a whole route by tapping the Erase icon until all points and line segments are cleared e If you need to pan the map to place another route point drag the map to the appropriate location and tap the map view screen at the desired location to place the next point and line segment in the route AND OR Tap the Road Route icon and enter the points of your route using one all of the three available choices e From the Add list box tap Find to search for points and to display the find screen Enter the name for a particular map feature and conduct a search for the feature Select the feature from the Find Results screen to add to your route and then tap Search The selected feature is added to the route For more information on using the Find feature see Finding Map Features
68. are visible but you can opt to hide them It is available only in 2 D mode To turn NavMode the default view off so you can use GPS tab view click the NavMode button on the toolbar To learn more about NavMode see the Routing with GPS NavMode tutorial on page 41 To learn more about using your GPS with your application see the Help topics under Using GPS Step 1 Get ready 1 Connect your GPS device to your portable computer Ensure the speakers are turned on and loud enough for you to hear while driving 2 Launch Street Atlas USA Step 2 Start the GPS Click the GPS button g on the toolbar to start your GPS If you are using a GPS device that is not an Earthmate GPS device and you have not initialized it in Street Atlas USA before you will need to initialize the device using the GPS Settings tab in the Options dialog box Note If you do not see the GPS button on the toolbar right click the toolbar and select the GPS Exchange option Step 4 Create your route Create a route using your current GPS location as the route start point and your destination as your finish You can create routes using the Route tab the toolbar or right click functionality in this tutorial we are using the toolbar i E Start from GPS Locations fee lt Start from Address Boo Le Step 5 Show turns Click the Show Turns button on the GPS tab OR Click the Route tab click the Directions subtab and click S
69. arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu Then click Options to open the dialog box 2 Click the Keyboard Shortcuts tab Select a scheme from the Scheme drop down list 4 Click Apply to activate the selected scheme Creating a New Custom Scheme You can create a custom keyboard shortcut scheme for different program uses To Create a Custom Scheme Use the following steps to create a custom scheme EE Options 1 Click the Options button on the toolbar OR Click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu Then click Options to open the dialog box 2 Click the Keyboard Shortcuts tab 3 Click File and then click New The Scheme drop down list is completed with Custom Scheme where indicates the incremental number for the number of custom scheme files you have created Note If you want to rename the new scheme file click File click Rename and then type a new name in the Scheme text box Press the ENTER key on your keyboard when finished The new name displays 4 Assign keyboard shortcuts for the commands that are listed 91 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide Assigning Keyboard Shortcuts in a Custom Scheme There are three non editable DeLorme keyboard shortcut schemes however you can create a custom scheme that you can edit with Keyboard Shortcuts tab in the Options dialog box To Assign Keyboard Shortcuts in a Custom Scheme Use the following steps to edit a custom
70. broad keyword search such as business school religious institution government facility military base airport park exit and rest area 5 Select the Only in Direction of Travel check box if you do not want GPS Radar to search for points of interest that are outside of your direction of travel for example points of interest that are behind you 127 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide 10 11 Enable the Speech button S by clicking it if you want to hear the nearest search result in the computer s voice If you want to automatically repeat your search after a designated amount of time select the Repeat Search Every check box and then select the number of minutes for automatically repeating the search This is required if you are using GPS NavMode Note Searches are not repeated when the GPS position is stationary Select a distance in miles from the Search Area scroll list to limit your search to a certain driving distance from your current location Click Search The search results display in the list box to the right of the Search button Click a search result to select it A green highlighted line displays on the map between your current specified location and the point of interest s location Note Click Recenter to center the map on the selected POI route Click Insert Stop to insert the selected search result into your current route Select the Info option to view the point of interest s name category pho
71. button on your Palm OS handheld to display the Street Atlas USA Handheld menu bar 2 Tap Tools and then tap Tracking The Select Track screen displays 3 In the Source box tap Routes The list of routes you have created displays 4 Tap the route you want to track along and then tap Start Tracking The map view screen displays the Tracking icon indicating the direction of travel to the finish point if the destination is off the current map view If you have the Navigation Panel enabled and are tracking towards a direct route a compass direction displays along with the name of your destination If you have the Navigation Panel enabled and are tracking towards a road route a turn arrow along with the name of the road of your next turn display Below that area two drop down menus let you choose to display the time to finish heading elevation etc If you do not have the Navigation Panel 326 Using Street Atlas Handheld on a PDA enabled the Info Area displays the distance and bearing to the destination for direct routes waypoints and map features or turn information for road routes 5 Pan the map to the point The Info Area displays the distance to the next line segment in the route and the point name OR If tracking while connected to a GPS receiver the map pans as you move toward each destination point Notes e To discontinue a tracking session open the Select Track screen tap Stop Tracking and then tap Done The
72. by your GPS receiver The status of the GPS connection displays in the lower section of the screen to the right of the Done button g No connection Acquiring satellites 2 b 2 D GPS connection 3 b 3 D GPS connection 3 Tap Done to exit the GPS Channel Info screen The map view screen displays Sun Moon on a Palm OS Handheld Change settings to view sun moon status at different dates or in different time zones anywhere in the world View the following information in the Sun Moon screen for your current location in Street Atlas USA Handheld e Sunrise set and moonrise set times displayed in on a 24 hour clock where 12 is noon and 24 is midnight e Moon phase e Percentage of moon illumination To open the Sun Moon screen in Street Atlas USA Handheld tap the Menu button on the handheld to display the menu bar tap GPS and then tap Sun Moon The Sun Moon screen displays Note Settings changed on the Sun Moon screen do not affect other screens To Change the Date Use the following steps to view the sun moon information for a particular date 1 Tap the Date field The Select Date calendar displays 2 Tap the arrows to either side of the year to change the year Tap a month name to change the calendar to another month 4 Tap a date on the calendar The Sun Moon screen displays with the selected date the sunrise set and moonrise set times and moon phase and illumination for the selected date w 308 Using
73. circle indicates the GPS connection is successful but there is insufficient satellite data to determine your GPS position This usually indicates insufficient data for an accurate location due to e Only three satellites being used e Poor signals from the satellites Move your receiver to another location until you get better reception 3 D A green circle indicates the GPS receiver is receiving sufficient satellite data to determine your location When the status reads 3 D Using GPS your current coordinates elevation and heading are displayed along with the speed you are currently traveling Note If you are tracking with a WAAS enabled device a 3 D fix displays as 3 D DGPS Monitoring GPS Satellite Information Click Sat Info in the GPS tab to view the current satellite status Sat Info is a toggle button that switches to Status Click Status to return to the original Status dialog area Dilution of Precision Dilution of Precision PDOP 0 00 HDOP 1 80 YDOP 0 00 Satellite Listing Almanac Skyview The Dilution of Precision area lists your Position Dilution of Precision your Horizontal Dilution of Precision and your Vertical Dilution of Precision For definitions of these terms see Glossary Terms The Satellite Listing window displays the satellites that are currently visible in the sky The columns list the satellite number elevation azimuth and signal to noise ratio Satellite Listin
74. click Directions to open the Route Directions dialog area The list of routes you have created display in the route list on the left A selected check box indicates the route is displaying on the map 2 Click a route to select and highlight it OR Double click a route to center it on the map 3 The route directions for the selected route display in the right window Adjust the size of the tab area to expand the view Tip Click the header of a column to open a shortcut menu from which you can select the type of information you want to display in each column 4 Click a leg to select it and then click Go To to center the map on the leg OR Double click a leg to center the map on the leg Tip When tracking with a GPS receiver select the GPS Track check box to follow along with the route directions in real time as you travel Click Show Turns to display the current distance and time to your finish Avoiding a Specified Area When Routing If you know you will be travelling in an area that is under construction or is a highly populated area with a lot of traffic congestion you can draw a circle rectangle polygon over that area to avoid it when you calculate your route You can create multiple regions to avoid 222 Routing To Avoid a Specified Area When Routing Use the following steps to designate an area to avoid when calculating your route 1 2 8 Create a route Click the Draw tab to open the Draw dialog area m
75. clicking the MapTags click the Delete Tag Itool and click the Select tool again e To delete all MapTags click the Delete Tag tool x A message box displays Delete all MapTags Click OK to confirm deletion Click Cancel to retain all MapTags To delete MapTags from other tabs e Right click the MapTag and select Delete MapTag 133 Using Address Book Contacts Searching for Address Book Contacts You have several ways to search for address book contacts e Use the QuickSearch function on the Find tab to search for the name of a contact browse for the contact or type the name of the contact e Use the Route tab to search for an address book entry as a route start stop or finish browse for the contact or type the name of the contact e Use the toolbar to search for an address book entry as a route start or finish browse for the contact or type the name of the contact With these functions you can select the lt From Address Book gt option from the applicable drop down list or you can type the name of the contact directly in the text box to find the entry If you type the name of the contact you must select the Book check box in the Find tab underneath the Address Book buttons To disable the address book search functionality clear the Book check box Notes e The address book has a 200 record limit e You can resize and move the Address Book dialog box e You can resize the columns inside the Address Book dialog box Impo
76. current map view and map cursor position It also includes zoom and map pan buttons You can customize your interface to show or hide the control panel 26 Data Zoom Level tThe current data zoom level of the map view ranges between 2 0 maximum zoom out and 16 0 regular Street Atlas maximum zoom in or 17 0 Street Atlas Plus maximum zoom in Zoom Tools Buttons that quickly zoom out three levels out one level or in one level For more information see Zooming In and Out on page 18 Compass Rose A group of nine buttons on a globe The outer buttons have yellow arrows click one of the arrow buttons to pan the map in that direction Click the middle button to center the map on the previous map view This button performs an undo function for the last pan or zoom up to 256 times Map Rotation Tool The arrow in the graphic indicates True North in relation to the rotated map Use the Map Rotation Tool to rotate the map in any direction You can rotate the map by clicking or dragging the square map graphic in the direction you want or by selecting typing the degree of map rotation from the drop down list Map Coordinates Coordinates for the current map cursor position display based on the units of measurement preferences chosen in the Display tab of the Options dialog box Scale Bar Indicates the distance one scale bar unit equals in the measurement chosen under in the Display tab of the Options dialog box Getting
77. desired units of measurement Getting Started View the Getting Started tutorial for Street Atlas USA 336 Using Street Atlas Handheld on a PDA Handheld Help View tips on using the map view screen About View version and other information about Street Atlas USA Handheld License View license information for Street Atlas USA Handheld Querying Features on the Map on a Pocket PC Device Tap a map feature on the map view screen on your Pocket PC handheld to view query information about it including the coordinates of the point tapped The query information displays in the information area above the menu bar Notes e Extended information may be available for your map feature Tap the information area above the menu bar to view additional information e If no query information is available for a map feature the message No Info at data zoom level along with the current zoom level displays in the information area above the menu bar To Query Map Features The following table describes how to get query information on various map features To get information about Map Coordinates A point on the map and then tap the information area above the menu bar to view its coordinate information latitude longitude or UTM UPS based on the coordinate option you chose in Setting Preferences Points Objects Placenames Airports A point object on the map to display its Landmarks etc name city state and ZIP
78. display the Street Atlas USA Handheld menu bar Tap Tools and then tap Tracking The Select Track screen displays In the Source box tap Wpts The list of waypoints you have added displays Tap the waypoint you want to track toward and then tap Start Tracking The map view screen displays the Tracking icon a indicating the direction of track to the selected waypoint s destination point if the destination is off the current map view If you have the Navigation Panel enabled a compass direction displays along with the name of your destination Below that area two drop down menus let you choose to display the time to finish heading elevation etc If you do not have the Navigation Panel enabled the Info Area displays the distance and bearing to the destination Drag the map to the destination point or tap the icon to center the map on the waypoint If tracking while connected to a GPS receiver the map pans as you move toward your destination point Note To discontinue a tracking session open the Select Track screen tap Stop Tracking and then tap Done The map view screen displays 325 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide Tracking to an Address Book Entry on a Palm OS Handheld You can track towards an entry in the Palm OS Address Book For an overview of the tracking feature see Tracking Overview To Track to an Address Book Entry Use the following steps to track to an address book entry 1 Tap the Menu butto
79. displays asking if you want to delete the selected route file Tap Yes to delete the file The Data screen displays and the route file is deleted from the device OR Tap No to return to the Data screen without deleting a route file When finished deleting route files tap ok to display the map view screen Reversing the Direction of a Route on a Pocket PC Once you have created a route in Street Atlas USA Handheld you can reverse its direction at any time To Reverse the Direction of a Route Use the following steps to reverse the direction of a route 1 4 Tap Data and then tap Routes The Data screen displays and the list of routes you have on your device displays under the Source selection box To reverse a route file tap the file to select it and then tap Reverse A confirmation message displays Tap ok to accept the confirmation message A new route is created the original route is unchanged Tap ok to return to the map view screen Distance Measuring Distance on a Pocket PC Use the Distance tool to measure the distance from one map feature to another To Measure Distance Use the following steps to measure distance on the map 1 Tap Tools then tap Distance 356 3 The Distance tool icon displays in the upper right corner of the map view screen and the Erase tool icon displays in the upper left corner of the map view screen Tap the location on the map where you want to place the first poin
80. documentation data compilations screen displays and map printouts are protected by U S and foreign copyright You have no ownership rights in the System Rather you have a license to use the System as long as this Agreement remains in full force and effect YOUR USE OF THE SYSTEM Permitted Use This Agreement permits a registered user to use the System on a non exclusive basis for personal reference or business purposes on a single computer at one time You may install the System on an auxiliary computer in addition to your principal computer However one of these two computers must be portable and the software may not be used simultaneously on both computers Otherwise once you have installed the System on one computer you may use the System on a second computer only if you delete the System from the first computer or purchase a separate license Installation of any part of the System on a network is prohibited unless you have a separate network license For information on network or multiple user licensing contact DeLorme at prosales delorme com or 1 800 293 2389 You may use the System as instructed by the documentation to perform its designed functions only for the purposes authorized by this Agreement Paper Map Printout Rights You may reproduce paper copies or static digital images such as PDF or TIFF files of any Street Atlas USA map for personal or household use or if you are a business or institution for in house purposes pro
81. draw object using the right click feature in the draw file list Click the File button in the Draw tab click to select the Draw File that contains the object you want to delete click More right click the object and then click Delete To Delete Multiple Draw Objects Use the following steps to delete several draw objects 1 Click the Draw tab 2 To select multiple draw objects click the Select tool Al click the first draw object on the map to select it and then press and hold the SHIFT key on your keyboard while clicking each additional draw object you want to delete A box displays around each selected object OR To select multiple draw objects click the Select tool A drag a box over the draw objects you want to delete 3 Click the Delete button in the Draw dialog area OR Press the DELETE key on your keyboard OR Right click the object and then click Manage Draw Delete Draw Object A message box displays asking if you want to delete the draw objects from the current file 181 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide e If you click Yes all selected draw objects in the file are deleted You cannot undo this action e If you click No no objects are cleared from the file To Delete All Draw Objects To delete all draw objects from an unsaved draw file click a draw object icon that represents the draw file you want to clear for example if you want to clear a RoadLayer click the Routable Roads icon and then click Clear
82. drop down list below The routes in the list are all of the routes contained in your current Map File Then click Next Available Routes Montezuma C to General Tell x Step 4 Add a title or notes to the route map To add a title or notes to your route map type the appropriate information in the text boxes and click Next Share Route Directions Title ee Montezuma C to General 1 Step 5 Add notes to the directions Then if you would like to add notes to display with your directions type them in the Notes text box and click Next 56 Tutorials Share Route Directions Montezuma C to General Tell Notes 00 00 00 0 01 mi r oth St 00 00 08 0 07 mi a efor 275 Sts John Rd 00 00 14 0 12mi Step 6 View upload confirmation A message telling you that your map has been uploaded successfully to the MapShare site displays Click Next Share Route Directions Your route map and directions has been uploaded successfully to the MapShare site Click Next to preview the route map and directions and get a link to their location or e mail the route and directions to a friend or an associate Step 7 Preview or e mail the route Click E mail the MapShare Link for Your Route Map and Directions to e mail a link of your route map and directions This option is available only if an e mail program is detected If an e mail program is n
83. e Tap No in the receiving message box if you decide not to accept the beamed file Note If Street Atlas USA Handheld is not open on the receiving device at the time a file is beamed the Street Atlas USA Handheld application automatically launches Showing Hiding Raster and or Vector Data on Your Map on a Palm OS Handheld You can choose to show or hide vector and or raster data on your Palm OS map To Show Hide Data Use the following steps to show hide vector and or raster data on your map 1 Tap the Menu button to display the Street Atlas USA Handheld menu bar 2 From the Data menu tap Maps to view the Data screen The list of maps you have installed displays under the Source selection box Note An eye symbol next to the map file name indicates the map s currently displayed on the map view screen 3 Tap Details The name type size location and creation date of your map file display 4 Tap Advanced 5 If available select the Draw Vectors check box to show vector data on your map OR Clear the Draw Vectors check box to hide vector data on your map 6 If available select the Draw Rasters check box to show raster data on your map OR Clear the Draw Rasters check box to hide raster data on your map 7 Tap OK to save your changes OR Tap Cancel to cancel your changes 8 Tap Done to return to the map view screen e If you choose to hide both the vector and raster data nothing from that map file will be displaye
84. e Waypoints Wpts created in your DeLorme mapping application and installed on your handheld OR created on the handheld e GPS Logs recorded on the handheld while using a GPS receiver To Beam Files to Another Handheld Use the following steps to beam files from one handheld to another 1 Tips Point the IR port of your handheld the sending handheld directly at the IR port of the receiving handheld Open Street Atlas USA Handheld Tap the Menu button on the sending handheld to display the Street Atlas USA Handheld menu bar From the Data menu tap any of the four menu options to access the files under each option The Data screen displays and the list of files you have displays under the Source selection box for the menu option you have chosen Tap to select the desired file and then tap Beam OR Tap the Data screen menu bar or the Menu button to display the Command drop down menu and then tap Beam OR Write the B Graffiti Menu Command A Beam message box displays on each handheld with the name of the file you are sending receiving Once the beaming of the file from the sending handheld is complete the Beam message box on the receiving handheld asks if you want to accept the beamed file Tap Yes to accept the beamed data Note To beam another item repeat steps 6 and 7 e Tap Cancel in the sending receiving message box at any time to stop the beaming process 290 Using Street Atlas Handheld on a PDA
85. eee eee ee eee eee cee ee eee ene ea ates 221 Changing the Properties of a Stop Along Your Route ccceeeeee eee eee eens 222 Viewing Route Directions 0 ccc cece ee eee ne eaten e een e eae 222 Avoiding a Specified Area When Routing cceeceee cece e eee e teeta e neta teeta eed 222 Saving Route Directions aS Text ccc cece eee eee eee eats teeta eae nets 224 Setting Your Routing Preferences ccecceee cece cece eee eee eee eee teeta ete e nae ee eee 224 Editing a ROUTE Ee tender a EE a Aa decane pad doteec se A tah Me tothe te 225 Editing RO S svane iniia a ed oa eves vs Weed vein eds Sed iw eevee eee elie 226 Labeling a Route Point with a MapNote cece eee ee ee eee eee eee teeta teeta ed 227 Moving Route MapNotes c cece ee eens tenn e ene raed 227 Displaying and Centering Routes on the Map ccecceee cece eect ee eee ee teeta ees 228 Saving a ROUTE tice eee Ai tee ieee sein eee gabe Mi E AEAN AE le ea awed eases EREE EEn 229 Deleting a Routen miian ees renee ata A nd eee ati 230 IMPOFLING ROUEES ee n seis eee dae at ee ee reseed elena tare Pda atin 230 Setting Your End of Day and Fuel Break Preferences cccceceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeenes 231 Estimating the Fuel Cost of Your ROUuteC cceecee eee eee e teeta teen a eee teeta ened 232 Converting a Route to a GPS LOG ccee cece eee ee eee ee eee eee eee teen eee 232 USING GPS arrera ua ede ee
86. eee eee eect ee teen teed 194 Editing a Track eretia pacenteadespeighee deh pideusengtennded ated Gnactoeedeibaneenesebeudhasea ae 195 Placing a Routable Road Line Arc or Spline at a Specific Location 196 Joining and Breaking Linear Objects c cece eee eee e ee teeta eee eee teen ee eae 196 Circles Rectangles and POlyQONS cceece cece eee eee eee eee eee eee neta eee 197 Drawing a Circle Rectangle or Polygon on the Map sceeeeeeeee cnet eee eee 197 Editing a Circle Rectangle Or POIYQON ccceeee eee eee eee eee eee e ee eee teeta eed 199 Placing a Circle Rectangle or Polygon on the Map ecceeeeeeee eee e ee ea eee eee 200 Waypoints Symbols MapNotes Text Labels and IMAQES cccceceeeeeeeeeees 200 Adding a Waypoint Symbol MapNote Text Label or Image to the Map 200 Editing a Waypoint Symbol MapNote Text Label or IMage cceceeee eens 202 Placing a Waypoint Symbol Text Label or Image at a Specific Location 202 Moving and Deleting Draw MapNotes cc ccece cece cece eee eee eee teen e ee eee teeta eed 203 Custom Sy MDO lS rehna teies Bose eden essa ate eta aaa Ge aa sete ee AA 205 Custom Symbols OvervieW c cece eee eee tenet ene e tetas 205 Creating a New SyMbol 0c cece peie a ene eens e aa ee eee tenets 205 Assigning a Waypoint ID to a Custom SymMbol cccececeee eee eee
87. file management you can save only one route and or draw layer in a single map file If you did not select to enable advanced file management during the product installation you can still change the settings using the Change File Management option in the Options menu For more information see Activating Advanced Simplified File Management This note does not apply to Street Atlas USA Plus users Using the Draw Tools Importing Files to Draw Files You can import many types of files as draw files The file items display as draw objects within the draw file You can also use the Exchange dialog to download waypoint and tracks to the Draw tab See the Help topics under Using Handheld Devices for more information See the chart at the end of this topic to learn what is imported for each type of file Important To add a draw file such as a track to a map file click the Add button on the Map Files tab For more information see Editing a Map File on page 102 To Import Files Use the following steps to import a file 1 Click the Draw tab 2 Click File to open the draw file editing area 3 Click Import The Import Draw File dialog box opens 4 Browse to the source folder of the file The default directory is C DeLorme Docs Export 5 From the Files of type drop down list select the type of file you want to import 6 If you selected GPS Log File format select how you want the file to display on the map from the Import A
88. have not installed the phone data to your hard disk drive you can use it from the DVD Click the Phone tab to display the Phone dialog area Select the Residential check box to view residential phone book listings AND OR Select the Business check box to view business phone book listings AND OR Select the Hide Multiple YP Headings check box to display only one Yellow Pages heading for each business phone number Select the country you want to search within from the Country drop down list The States Provinces drop down list updates according to the selected country Note If you are using an older version of DeLorme Phone Data only U S will be available in the Country drop down list Phone Data 2009 and later includes both U S and Canadian phone data if you install all of the regions Type select the name street address city state and or ZIP Postal Code to search for the phone number s associated with that information OR Type the phone number to search for the name address city state province and ZIP Postal Code associated with that phone number OR Type yellow page keywords in the Yellow Pg text box to find all of the phone book listings available based on your search criteria Notes e Type a city in the City text box to narrow your yellow page search Do not enter more than five digits for a ZIP Code search or three digits for a Postal Code search Searching for Phone Book Listings e Yellow page keywords mus
89. heading book symbol and then clicking the Print button You can print only the selected topic or a heading and all subtopics OR Right click the topic displaying in the right window to print only that topic Tip Before you click Print expand any links in the topic that include information you want to print within your topic e While in the Help system the pointer changes to a hand when it passes over text or graphics that you can click for more information e You can move resize and minimize the Help window e To exit Help click the Close button EJ in the upper right corner of the screen Help Documentation Conventions To help you easily locate and interpret information this Help system is formatted There are also hyperlinks that expand jump to another location within the same topic or link you to other topics The table below defines each convention and its use ALL CAPITALS Acronyms names of certain commands and keys on the keyboard Note Use ofthe plus sign between key names indicates key combinations that perform various actions For example in the directions Press CTRL SHIFT F3 on your keyboard you must press and hold the CTRL and SHIFT keys while pressing F3 Command buttons tab names and options when used in procedures and exercise steps Also used for information that you type exactly into a particular field Headings and table headings are bold for emphasis Italic Directory names and paths Also
90. hold the Symbol MapNote Text Label I mage tool oTe to view its hidden options Select the Symbol tool m 3 Under Symbols select the symbol set that contains the symbol you want to edit 4 Click Edit The DeLorme XSym dialog box opens 5 Select the symbol to remove from the symbol selection The symbol displays in the Symbol Editing Grid 6 Click Remove The symbol disappears from the symbol selection under Symbols in Set and the next symbol within the selection displays in the Symbol Editing Grid 7 Click OK when finished Symbol Editing Tools Draw Tool Box DeLorme XSym has a Draw Tool Box that lets you create and edit symbols within the Symbol Editing Grid independently of the DeLorme mapping program The tools provided help you to create unique symbols to add to your map The following are the tools available in the Draw Tool Box f Pencil Draw freehand lines within the grid Line Draw lines by clicking and dragging to the end point you want within the grid Ellipse Create an ellipse by clicking and dragging until you achieve the size or shape of the ellipse you want Filled Ellipse Create a filled ellipse by clicking and dragging until you achieve the size or shape of the filled ellipse you want Rectangle Create a rectangle by clicking and dragging until you achieve the size of the rectangle you want Filled Rectangle Create a filled rectangle by clicking and dragging until you achieve the siz
91. is not calculated or if the GPS is not initialized Training the Speech Recognition Engine 1 To use voice navigation you must have a 2 D or 3 D GPS fix and a route calculated You should train the speech recognition engine to provide good speech recognition results Before training ensure your microphone is active and the speech recognition feature is on For more information see Activating and Monitoring Speech Recognition To Train the Engine to Recognize Your Speech Patterns You should train the speech recognition engine to recognize your specific speech patterns This is often done by reading a predetermined piece of text supplied by the creator of the speech recognition engine If the engine supports multiple user models you can train the engine to recognize more than one speech pattern Use the following steps to train the speech recognition engine to recognize your speech patterns 1 Click the Options button ES ea on the toolbar OR Click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu Then click Options to open the dialog box 2 Click the Voice Settings tab Select the microphone you intend to use from the Microphone drop down list 4 Select your preferred user voice model from the User Profile drop down list Note To create a new speech recognition profile for each of your working environments noisy quiet and users your spouse your child click Speech in the Windows Control Panel
92. level at the current map center Once you reach the map area or data zoom level you want to display release the mouse button The area you selected fills the map window the map re centers and the map view adjusts to show the appropriate level of detail Tip You can move the view box to another location by pressing the SHIFT key at anytime during this procedure To Drag and Zoom Out Use the following steps to zoom in either the right or left map 1 18 Click and hold down the left mouse button as you drag the mouse in an up left direction on the map A staircase with a small circle displays on the screen Continue dragging the mouse in an up left direction The small circle moves up the steps one step per data zoom level A label displays the data zoom level to the bottom right of the staircase Once you reach the data zoom level you want to display release the mouse button The map view adjusts to display the appropriate level of detail The map center is retained on your screen Getting Started To Zoom In Out Using the Zoom Tools There are two sets of zoom tools The zoom tools for the right map are located in the Control Panel The zoom tools for the left map are located at the top of the left map view Right Map Click the up arrow to zoom out one minor data zoom level at a time Click the down arrow to zoom in one minor data zoom level at a time Controls Click the Zoom Out 1 tool to decrease the detail num
93. map The Located To field for that record now reads as Manual Placement OR Click GeoCode to geocode a record again OR Right click the record s and then click GeoCode Record s Exporting Data XData is available only in Street Atlas USA Plus You can export datasets to another dataset or a text file It is important to export datasets because e If you have modified a dataset after you have imported it you may want to save the new dataset for use in XMap as a dataset or as a text file 152 Using XData e If you have exported a copied dataset resulting from conducting a phone book listing search and then used the To XData function within the Phone tab you can modify and export it to a new dataset or export it as a text file To Export Data Use the following steps to export data Click the XData tab 2 Click Query 3 Select a dataset from the Use Dataset drop down list The records contained within the dataset display in the records window 4 To limit which records of the dataset are available for export you can Select one of the options from the Table Display drop down list OR Select records manually from the existing dataset To select multiple records individually press the CTRL key on your keyboard while clicking each of the desired records To select a block of records press the SHIFT key while clicking the record at the beginning of the block and then click the record at the end of the block all
94. map feature display handheld and keyboard shortcut preferences For more information see the Toolbar topic on page Toolbar27 Notes e Some tabs also have an Options button which opens the same dialog box e You can also click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open a menu Then click Options to open the dialog box Upgraders only What happens to my map files when upgrade Your map files draw files route files and log files are stored in the DeLorme Docs folder which is usually found on the root of your computer s C drive They are not affected by an install or removal of DeLorme software Getting Started Upgraders only Why doesn t this version of Street Atlas USA overwrite the older version This allows you to view both versions on the same computer Upgraders only Should uninstall my previous version before installing this version of Street Atlas USA Uninstalling is not necessary however you can uninstall the previous edition of the software either before or after installing this version of Street Atlas USA Can see my imagery and data from Topo USA and XMap on the map Yes as long as DeLorme Docs Downloads is located in the same location for Street Atlas USA as it was in Topo USA and or XMap all DeLorme applications install it to the root of your C drive by default Note You cannot view 7 5 minute USGS Quad maps or NOAA charts in Street Atlas USA How do create a route
95. map view screen displays e When tracking your handheld device will beep before each turn e The next segment of your route will be highlighted on the tracking screen Using the Navigation Panel on a Palm OS Handheld Street Atlas USA Handheld lets you change the view of the Info Area so that you can easily view information for the next turn while tracking To View the Navigation Panel on a Pocket PC 1 Tap the Menu button on your Palm OS handheld to display the Street Atlas USA Handheld menu bar 2 Tap Options tap Preferences and then tap Other The Preferences dialog box displays 3 Tap the down arrow next to Nav Panel to display the list items available under that option 4 Tap On While Tracking 5 When tracking the Navigation Panel displays in place of the Info Area It displays When tracking against a road route the When tracking against a waypoint map Navigation Panel displays feature or direct route the Navigation Panel displays A turn arrow indicating the direction of your A compass direction such as N for North next turn for the direction to your destination The name of the road you will be turning on The name of your destination next Two drop down menus with the following options Time to Turn Displays the time until your next turn for road routes Displays N A when selected while tracking against a waypoint map feature or direct route Distance to Turn Displays distance
96. more geographic detail zoom out to decrease the data zoom level and display less geographic detail e Press and release the Down scroll button on your handheld to zoom in to the map one data zoom level at a time e Press and release the Up scroll button on your handheld to zoom out from the map one data zoom level at a time e Press and hold the Up or Down scroll buttons to quickly zoom to the highest or lowest data zoom levels Notes e As you zoom using the scroll buttons text displays in the information area above the menu bar indicating the data zoom level you are zooming in to or out from The current data zoom level displays until the map redraws e Some devices also have controls on the sides of the device that allow them to zoom in and out Menu Options for a Pocket PC Device There are several menu options in Street Atlas USA Handheld Menu options are available in the menu bar at the bottom of the map view screen To Use the Menu Options Tap a main menu option to display the menu items available under each option The following table describes the three main menu options and a description of the menu items each contains Tap the main Then tap the To menu option menu item Maps View map file cutter information display a map Go To show hide vector and or raster data or rename or delete map files Routes View information on a route you have created direct or road center the map on a route Go To sh
97. not select to enable advanced file management during the product installation you can still change the settings using the Change File Management option in the Options menu This note does not apply to Street Atlas USA Plus users When you installed Street Atlas USA you were given the option to use simplified or advanced file management Simplified file management allows you to have one route or draw layer saved in a map file If you want to save multiple route and or draw layers in a map file you must activate advanced file management To Activate Advanced Simplified File Management Use the following steps to change your file management preferences Opti a 1 Click the arrow next to the Options button EE options on the toolbar 2 Click Change File Management The Change File Management dialog box opens indicating if the program is set to use advanced or simplified file management 3 To use advanced file management click Advanced OR To use simplified file management click Simplified 4 At the confirmation message click OK 5 You must restart Street Atlas USA to view the change in file management Note Some of the Help topics related to the Map Files tab Route tab and Draw tab include instructions for both simplified and advanced file management Be sure to follow the instructions for the file management system you have selected A note appears at the end of each related Help topic 12 Getting Started Glos
98. of the Shortcut Keys for a SCheme 0 cece cece eect eee e eee ee teeta eee 96 Viewing Map Data cic cc tor et ede peg a ea seeds en getedepede anit ett wear a esate NAAT 97 Saving Data to Your Hard Drive cc cceee cece eee eee eee nee ee nent e ae eens 97 COMNECHNG Data sass E nese ania ssh deb suresgee acl erring ahi neds eee he Aa A 97 Showing Roads in Raster Data cc ccee cece ee eee eee enter eee 98 USING Map Files e 24 eel Schaal aa a dastesied 4 ane AA a E E a A E E A a 99 Map Files Overview re oe a o aaa a aea seh hac a O a d a denen sya seven aana 99 Creating and Deleting Map FileS sssssssssssssesrrrrsssrrrrrresrirrrrssrrrrrrererrrrrsnns 100 Opening an Existing Map File sssssssssssssssrrsrssrrrrsrsrrrrrrrresrirrrrssrrrrrrererrrrrenns 101 Editing a Map File vss cusveccccdh tenes ei inaa ob ee oe ete cae dey ets EKA EEKE a PENAK a 102 Creating Transfer Filessac ts wah ec Seek teeta Ae AS More ahaa ee ak tk 103 Importing Transfer Files cece cece eee eee ene eee eee ia NaN 105 E mailling a Transter Fileiveuc cer adane ead whens el oni peed detonate AAi 107 Printi oraraa e eivex eed oven eds ee ean ted Bade Eaa EEKE T EE a tein vide eevee 109 Printing a MaD irera raana a a eA bys E a aa ah aac een bean EE ned A EE 109 Printing a Route and Directions ssssssssssserrrsssrerrrsssrirrrnssrrrrrrsnrrrnrrsrerrr ne 110 Adding Text or Graphics to Your Map ssssssssssssssssrsrrsssrrrr
99. of the records between the two you clicked are now selected 5 Click Export 6 Under Export Options select one of the following options Export to New Dataset Exports the file as a dds file for use within the program as another dataset Export to Text File Exports the file as a txt file for use in other programs 7 Under Records to Export select one of the following options Entire Dataset Exports all records in the selected dataset including records that have not been placed Records in List Exports the records currently displaying in the Query table The number of records is in parentheses This may be a subset of the dataset if you selected one of the Table Display options from the drop down list in the Query dialog area Only Selected Exports only those records currently selected in the Query table The number of records is in parentheses These are the records you selected manually 8 To export your dataset as another dataset click Create Dataset and follow the instructions provided to select a data symbol for each match status type a dataset name and select the map display option s Click Finish when prompted Exported files are available immediately in the Available Datasets list in the Datasets dialog area of the XData tab These files have dds extensions and are saved in the C DeLorme Docs Datasets directory by default OR To export your dataset as a text file make sure the Exp
100. options 9 Using the Draw Tools e The distance and bearing angle of each new point from its previous point display in the corresponding text boxes To finish the line arc spline click the last point on the map screen and then click Done OR Click the last point on the map screen and press the ENTER key on your keyboard OR Double click the last point of the line arc spline Drawing a Track on the Map You can add tracks to the map and adjust their line style color width and display them with map line features To Draw a Track Use the following steps to draw a track 1 ae EW Click the Draw tab fef Click and hold the Track Waypoint tool and select the Track tool PeF Select a track style from the Style drop down list Click the color button next to the Style drop down list to select a track color Select a track width from the Width drop down list Select the Highlight check box to make your track appear translucent on the map Select the Show Measurement check box to display information about the points on the map as you draw the track As you add each point a text box displays next to your pointer indicating the bearing or angle leg line segment length and total length of the track on the map Labels display when end points are clicked if the Show Measurement check box is selected Click the map to designate the start and end points of each line segment You can also drag your cursor on t
101. or waypoint files as GPX files GPX files derived from tracks contain the elevation time and GPS status for each point in the track GPX files derived from a waypoint file include the waypoint name comment URL lat lon elevation time GPS status and the symbol name You cannot export more than one waypoint track layer into a single GPX file To Export Track or Waypoint Files to GPX Files Use the following steps to export an existing track or waypoint file to a GPX file 1 166 Open the map file containing the track or waypoint file you want to export OR Create a new track or waypoint file for exporting Click the Draw tab Click File to open the draw file editing area A draw file with a selected check box displays on the map The Active column shows the active layers Select the track or waypoint file to export from the file list Click Export The Export Draw File dialog box opens Browse to a directory in which to save the file or use the default destination C DeLorme Docs Export Select GPX File from the Save as Type drop down list Type a name for the file in the File name text box The default name is DrawExport Click Save Click Done to return to the main Draw tab area Note for regular Street Atlas USA users This Help topic describes functionality provided in advanced file management Advanced file management allows you to save multiple routes and draw layers in a single map file With simplified
102. portable media player To begin select your portable media player type name your map and click Next Portable Media Player v Map Folder Name The map folder stores the portable map images Choose this folder when you sync the map images with your device Step 3 Select your device If your device is listed select it from the Portable Media Player drop down list If your device is not listed select Other 60 Portable Media Player Creative Zen Micro Photo Creative Zen Sleek Photo Creative Zen Vision Creative Zen Vision M iPod Classic iPod Nano iPod Nano Video iPod Touch iPod Video iriver clix 2 Microsoft Zune Toshiba Gigabeat Tutorials Step 4 Enter the name of the map folder 1 Type the name of the map folder in which to store your map images This is the folder you will choose when you sync the images to your device Map Folder Name 2 Click Next If you selected your device from the list go to step 6 If you selected Other go to the next step Step 5 Enter the display information for your custom device 1 In the Device screen Width and Height boxes type the screen size in pixels 2 Inthe Overview mode Columns and Rows boxes type the number of columns and rows of photos that display when you view photos in preview mode on your device The map will be divided into images based on the number of rows and column you can view so if you hav
103. product installation you can register using the NetLink tab This tutorial explains how to download color imagery Step 1 Find the area you want to download 1 Center the map on the area for which you want to download imagery and zoom the map in to data zoom level 11 0 or greater 2 Click the NetLink tab and then click the Datasets subtab Select Map Data See Coverage Map Delivery Method D Select Color DOQQ Aerial Imagery 1 00 km x Download x Clear Add To List View List Step 2 Select the coverage area 1 Click the Select button and then click inside the grids that cover your area The selected grids are highlighted The blue info box updates to show the size and cost of the download Note This special offer is available for download delivery only so be sure to select Download from the Delivery Method drop down list See Coverage Map Delivery Method Color DOQQ Aerial Imagery 1 00 km v Downoad v Clear Add To List View List 33 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide Step 3 Add the imagery to your download 1 Click the Add to List button Add To List to name and add the selected areas to your selection list 2 Type the name of your map in the Name Your Selection box and then click OK S Name Your Selection Name your Selection Yarmouth Maine letters numbers and spaces only Cancel OK Step 4 Enter certificate number 1 Type the certificate
104. right corner of the dialog area 145 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide 146 Notes If more than 1000 search results match your search criteria the More button becomes activated Click More to browse to the next 1 000 search results Click one or more search results in the Search Results area and then click Add or right click the search results and click Add to add your search result to the Selection area on the lower right corner of the dialog area Note Press the CTRL key on your keyboard to select more than one search result at a time You can also double click a search result to add it to the Selections area OR Click Add All or right click the search results and click Add All to include all of your search results to the Selection area Note The Selection area has a 1 000 listing limit as described in the license agreement OR Click Clear All or right click on the search results and click Clear All to remove all of the search results from the Selection area Use one of the following options to modify the selections in the Selections area e Click Map or right click on your selections and select Map from the shortcut menu to add your phone book listings to the map If only one item is selected the map centers on the object You can add all of the phone book listings in the Selections area to the map by right clicking on the selections selecting Select All from the shortcut menu and then clicking Map Once a phone
105. save multiple routes and draw layers in a single map file With simplified file management you can save only one route and or draw layer in a single map file If you did not select to enable advanced file management during the product installation you can still change the settings using the Change File Management option in the Options menu For more information see Activating Advanced Simplified File Management This note does not apply to Street Atlas USA Plus users Viewing Hidden Draw Tools The Draw tab tools allow you to add routable roads waypoints tracks lines straight lines arcs and splines shapes polygons rectangles and circles MapNotes text labels images and symbols to a draw file Some of these tools are hidden tools available in pull out menus To View the Hidden Draw Tools Five draw tool options have pull out menus with hidden tools These draw tools each have a small arrow at the bottom right of the draw tool button as shown in this sample ej Use the following steps to view the hidden draw tools 1 Click the Draw tab 2 Click and hold one of the visible tools shown below to display and select one of the options Selecting a hidden tool changes the default option a Routable Road Tool Tracks Waypoints Tool ae Set Wa r n Line Arc Spline Tool oO e Polygon Rectangle Circle Tool n MapNote Text Label Symbol Image Tool Ba TM p y g 160 Using the Draw Tools Draw File Management
106. saved in the specified location To Maintain the Directory Structure When Creating a Transfer File with Hyperlinked Files When you create a transfer file containing hyperlinked files you can select to maintain part of the directory structure for files with at least a common drive location Use the following steps to create a transfer file with hyperlinked files Click the Map Files tab 2 Open the map file you want to create as a transfer file 3 Click File click Transfer and then click Create The Select Hyperlinked Files dialog box opens 103 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide Select Hyperlinked Files md N vacation Spots 4 Verify the Include Hyperlink Files for Transfer check box is selected If you do not want to include hyperlink files in your transfer file clear this check box and go to step 8 5 Under File Options select Maintain Directory I nfo to save the directory structure of the hyperlinked files If you do not want to include the directory information for the hyperlinked files in the transfer file select Do Not Include Directory Info and go to step 7 6 Type the common base directory location of the hyperlinked files up to the folder location that you want to maintain in the text box OR Click the Browse button E and browse to the common base directory location 7 Under Select Files to Be Included clear the check box next to each file you do not want to include in your transfer file
107. search for address book contacts For more information see Searching for Address Book Contacts on page 135 e Do not enter more than five digits for a ZIP Code search or six characters for a Postal Code search you do not need to include spaces in a Postal Code e Address searches should be in the following formats street address city state OR street address ZIP Postal Code OR street address city state Zip Postal Code 3 Click Search If your search is Very Successful tThe results list displays and if there is one excellent match the map centers on that place A MapTag displays if 121 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide Notes the MapTags check box is selected The only time a MapTag is not placed is when you find and then go to a labeled area that has no single map point associated with it for example a large park Successful The results list displays Scroll or browse through the list of search results until you find the one you want to locate To center an item on the map double click it or select it and then click Go To A MapTag displays if the MapTags check box is selected Tip Single click an item in the results list to highlight it on the map without adding a MapTag or centering it in the map view For more information on viewing results see Tips on Viewing Search Results on page 129 Not Successful The Advanced dialog area displays The program makes its best guess about the type of search you
108. selection is on the map you can view details about the listing by right click its symbol and selecting Info from the shortcut menu Note Mapped businesses are indicated with a square symbol on the map and mapped residences are indicated with a small house symbol on the map Phone selections symbol and label that are placed on the map will appear in red if they have been located reliably to a street address Otherwise the approximate location appears light gray on the map e Click a listing in the Selections area and click Remove or right click a listing and click Remove to remove the phone book listing from your list of selections e Click Remove All or right click your selections and click Remove All to remove all of the phone book listings from the Selection area All mapped selections are removed from the map e Click To File to save all of the phone book listings in the Selections area in a txt file The default location for the file is C DeLorme Docs Datasets e Click To XData to copy all of the phone book listings in the Selections area to the XData tab as a dataset using the XData Import Wizard Note This option is unavailable when the XData tab is hidden with Tab Manager e Click a previously mapped listing in the Selections area to highlight it on the map e Double click a listing in the Selections area to center the map on that listing Using XData XData Overview e XData is available only in Street Atlas USA
109. such as road names city town details map about draw objects etc in the status line that appears at the bottom of the map just above the tab area Note The Phone tab is available only in Street Atlas USA Plus Print Stop a page in a multi If you do not want to print all the pages in a multi page map from printing page map click each page you do not want to print on the Layout graphic 10 Getting Started Route ifyouwantto Usethistip Reorder inserted stops Reorder your inserted route stops using the Advanced features in the Route tab Create a route quickly For quick route creation right click the map and select one of the Create Route options or use the Route buttons on the toolbar Reorder the columns in Click the Directions list column headers to change the Route Directions list the column order Determine the difference Added stops vias are placed in the order you add between adding and them to the route Inserted stops vias are placed in inserting stops and vias the order you would approach them between the Start and Finish points of the route View information about Click the Show Turns button when GPS tracking to your second turn view information about the following turn Tab Area Adjust the size of the Adjust the size of the tab area by dragging the top or tab area right side of the tab area Show hide or reorder Use the Tab Manager option in the Help menu to tabs show hide or reorder
110. symbols Color of Description GPS receiver is tracking the satellite but is not receiving data from it the Satellite Symbol GPS receiver is tracking the satellite ephemeris data is available but the satellite is not being used for navigation GPS receiver is tracking the satellite ephemeris data is available and the satellite is being used for navigation Channel View When connected to a GPS receiver each satellite currently visible in the sky is listed by e Satellite number Sat e Elevation degrees to horizon El e Azimuth Az e Signal to noise ratio SNR e Status N navigation E ephemeris data T tracked and D differential mode for WAAS Note 307 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide The PDOP Position Dilution of Precision HDOP Horizontal Dilution of Precision and EHPE Estimated Horizontal Position Error values display at the bottom of the GPS Channel Info screen Low PDOP HDOP and EHPE values indicate a higher probability of accuracy in position The PDOP and HDOP values should be 0 10 The EHPE value should be 0 125 meters Not all values are available on all GPS receivers To View the GPS Channel View Screen Use the following steps to view the GPS Channel View Screen 1 Tap the Menu button on your Palm OS handheld to display the Street Atlas USA Handheld menu bar 2 Tap GPS and then tap Channel View The GPS Channel Info screen displays information on the satellites being tracked
111. tab in the Options dialog box and the time to the next turn e Next Stop tThe distance and estimated time to the next stop e Finish The distance and estimated time to the finish Click the Show More Turns button 4l to view information for the turn after the following turn click Show List to return to the Directions dialog area 238 Using GPS Compass tThe default map setting is North up in 2 D and in the GPS direction in 3 D To change the compass select or clear the Rotate Map in GPS option on the GPS tab in the Options dialog box Next Turn The distance to the next turn based on the units selected on the Display tab in the Options dialog box Dist to Finish The distance to the finish point on your route based on the units selected on the Display tab in the Options dialog box ETA The estimated time of arrival at the finish of your route This is based on the time and time zone set on your computer If your trip goes beyond the current day the day of arrival also displays The ETA does not include any layover time at a stop GPS Fix Indicates if your GPS fix is 2D or 3D If you do not have a fix or if the GPS is acquiring a fix No Fix displays Speed Displays the speed you are traveling based on the units selected on the Display tab in the Options dialog box Heading Displays as degrees T True North or M Magnetic North based on the bearing selected on the Units area in the Options dialog box
112. tabs Import or export a tab Use the Tab Manager option in the Help menu to configuration file import or export a tab configuration file Voice Create new speech You can create a new speech recognition profile for recognition profiles each of your working environments noisy quiet and users your spouse or child by clicking the Speech settings in the Windows Control Panel Learn how to make the If there is background noise while you are speaking it microphone more may be helpful to precede all of your voice commands sensitive to your with a special phrase like Simon Says See the Voice commands in noisy Settings tab of the Options dialog box environments 11 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide XData Geoplace XData records You can drag a record from the Query list and place it that do not have at the correct geo location on the map complete address information or were not correctly located during the import process Add a blank record to To add a blank record to an XData database you your XData database must select All Records as the Table Display type Note The XData tab is available only in Street Atlas Plus Activating Advanced Simplified File Management Note for regular Street Atlas USA only Advanced file management allows you to save multiple routes and draw layers in a single map file With simplified file management you can save only one route and or draw layer in a single map file If you did
113. the GPS log file or track file If you do not have the correct time on your camera you can update the information with the Timestamp Offset option in the wizard See Calculating the Timestamp Offset in this section Tagging an I mage Once you successfully tag your digital images to a GPS log file or track file you can view the points at which the photos were taken on the map in your DeLorme program Before you begin you must download the GPS log file or track file and digital photographs to your computer See Receiving a Track From Your Third party GPS Device on page 267 for information on using the Exchange Wizard to transfer files To Tag an Image 1 Click the GeoTagger button ay on the toolbar to open the GeoTagger Wizard 2 Select Images and click Next 3 In the Photo Directory box type the path and file name for the folder not specific images on your computer where the images are stored OR Click Browse to search for the folder on your computer 4 Under Time Zone select the time zone where you were when you took the pictures See GMT Time Zone Information for a table of time zones by state If Daylight Saving Time was in effect second Sunday in March through first Sunday in November select the Adjust for Daylight Saving Time check box 5 Under GPS Data select Track or GPL File 6 If you selected Track the list of track layers in the Draw tab displays in a tree menu Click the plus sign to expand the tree menu
114. the fill options box OR To place a polygon on the map select the Coordinate option or use the Distance and Bearing Angle option in conjunction with the Coordinate option and enter the appropriate coordinates or numbers for the first polygon point into the corresponding text boxes to the right of the fill options box 5 Click Apply Note If you are placing a polygon on the map repeat the procedure for the other points Waypoints Symbols MapNotes Text Labels and Images Adding a Waypoint Symbol MapNote Text Label or Image to the Map You can add point draw objects to a draw file in your current map file Point objects consist of one anchor point attached to a waypoint symbol MapNote image or text label The anchor point is the pixel position on the symbol that corresponds to the geographic coordinate of the point selected on the map when the symbol is placed e Use the waypoints tool to label waypoints on a map You can exchange waypoints with a GPS receiver e Use symbols to identify certain areas on the map such as houses monuments or points of interest e Use MapNotes to point to and label a specific area on the map See Map Notes for more information e Use text labels to name features or give details about features on the map 200 Using the Draw Tools Use the image tool to add edit or place bmp jpg and gif images on the map To Add a Point Object to the Map From the Draw tab you can Add a Ma
115. the next stop Displays the Directions subtab in the Route tab 252 Using Voice Navigation and Speech Recognition After that Speaks the next stop or turn information depending on the previous spoken direction Are we there yet Speaks the finish name time to finish and distance to finish Show finish F8 Displays current location and finish on the map Center on finish Centers map on the finish Displays the Directions subtab in the Route tab Directions Speaks the next turn next stop finish name time and distance Displays the Directions subtab in the Route tab Where am Speaks current route segment heading speed town county and state Coordinates Speaks the coordinate of your current location Shush Silences GPS voice navigation but does not turn it off Be quiet Silences GPS voice navigation but does not turn it off Voice nav on F2 Turns voice navigation spoken turn directions on Voice nav off F2 Turns voice navigation spoken turn directions off Show route Displays your route on the map Back on track Adds current GPS location as a stop and recalculates the route Continue route from Adds current location as a stop and recalculates the here F9 route Show turns Activates the Show Turns dialog area in the Route tab Show directions Activates the Directions subtab in the Route tab Show list Map Commands The following table shows main map voice command
116. the number of keywords and types found also display A selected check box indicates the feature displays on the map e Select clear the individual feature check box to show or hide that feature e Click the small None button to the right of the Search Results window to show none of the features listed e Click the small All button to the right of the Search Results window to display all of the features listed e Click Only to display only those features listed in the Search Results window e Click Exclude to display all features except those listed in the Search Results window 5 To use the map feature tree to select which POIs display on the map click the plus signs to expand the individual branches A selected check box indicates the feature type displays on the map Note Some branches expand further than others Selecting clearing a check box at a certain branch of the tree shows hides all the items below that level e Select clear the individual map feature check box to show or hide that feature e Click All to select all map features in the program e Click None to select none of the types in the program Note A small number of features cannot be turned off They are part of the base map display and cannot be changed This is why certain levels on the tree remain unavailable appear dimmed or gray 5 Click OK to accept the change and exit the Options dialog box OR Click Apply to accept the change and keep working in the Options
117. the program Voice recognition requires a lot of disk space and slows down the system if you are not using it Remember the Voice tab displays with red font whenever the microphone is listening e Use the Commands Start With feature in the Voice tab in the Options dialog to clearly distinguish commands from other noise and speech Set the Commands Start With phrase to something like computer or Simon Says to reduce the chances of an unexpected command recognition When choosing a phrase make sure that it is more than one syllable The phrases Computer or Simon Says work well But the simple word Map probably will not e Train the speech recognition system in the environment in which you will use it for example in a noisy car Note To find out the proper position for your microphone model or to find tips on how to purchase a microphone click the Options button Ee _ on the toolbar or click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu then click Options to open the dialog box click the Voice Settings tab and then click Microphone Setup Or from the Start menu on your computer browse to the Control Panel and double click the Speech icon to open the Speech Properties dialog box Changing Voice Output calculated 1 To use voice navigation you must have a 2 D or 3 D GPS fix and a route Your application offers text to speech technology so you can receive spoken updates about your route direc
118. third party GPS waypoint symbols in the mapping application you must assign the proper waypoint identification number to each symbol you add to the custom symbol set Important To create a custom symbol set of your third party GPS device s waypoint symbols you must contact the device s manufacturer to obtain the graphic files and the waypoint ID number associated with each symbol Notes e Waypoint ID numbers vary by manufacturer and model e If you import multiple waypoints from a third party GPS device without assigning a waypoint ID to each first the waypoints display in the mapping application with the same default symbol e If you do not know the identification number for a third party GPS device s waypoint import the waypoint file into the mapping application Then use one of the two methods below to learn the waypoint ID o Open the symbol set that holds the waypoint and view the waypoint s ID number in XSym o Click the Info tool on the toolbar and click the symbol on the map The waypoint ID displays in the Info tab To Assign a Waypoint ID to a Custom Symbol Use the following steps to assign a waypoint ID to a custom symbol 1 Click the Draw tab A tet 2 Click and hold the Waypoint Track tool to view its hidden options Select the Waypoint tool BA 3 Under Symbols select lt New gt from the drop down list The DeLorme XSym dialog box opens 4 Under Symbol Set Name type the name for your new symbol set suc
119. to Create Route and then click Set as Start 2 Right click the location on the map that you want to set as your route finish point to Create Route and then click Set as Finish You can follow this same procedure if you want to add insert stops or vias in your route ester Park Step 2 Use the Find tab to search for POIs 1 Click the Find tab and then click the POIs subtab 2 Type the name of the point of interest you want to search for such as Flying J Exxon McDonalds etc in the Name text box 3 Type a keyword for the point of interest such as truck stop gas station restaurant etc in the Keywords text box 4 Type the distance within which you want to search for the POI 5 To find POIs along the route select the Along Current Route option Then click Search You may be prompted to select which route you want to search within and or to select from a group of general POI categories Step 3 Add results to the map The search results display in the Find tab To view the results on the map hold the CTRL key on your keyboard while you click to select each of the search results Then right click the results you highlighted point to Add and click Add MapNote 45 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide Norin Pacific Orean Fort Worth wat Step 4 Add more POIs Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each point of interest you want to search for along your route 46 Tutorials Tutorial Ph
120. to create new symbols or edit existing ones To Copy and Paste in XSym Use the following steps to copy a symbol or portions of a symbol to edit an existing symbol or to create a new symbol 1 Click the Draw tab 2 Click and hold the Symbol MapNote Text Label I mage tool NTM to view its hidden options Select the Symbol tool P 3 Under Symbols select the symbol set that contains the symbol you want to edit 4 Click Edit The DeLorme XSym dialog box opens 5 Under Symbols in Set select a symbol from the symbol selection 6 In the Draw Tool Box click the Select tool 7 Select the area of the symbol you want to copy or select the whole symbol EK and then click the Copy button under Edit Symbol 8 Click the Paste button B under Edit Symbol The copied image is pasted into the current symbol in the Symbol Editing Grid Drag the pasted piece into the place you want it within the current symbol OR To create a new symbol with the copied image click New under Symbols in Set to clear the Symbol Editing Grid and then click the Paste button to add the pasted image into the grid Note You can assign a new symbol name for the symbol to help locate it under the Find tab in the DeLorme mapping program To assign a symbol name to the current symbol type a name or phrase in the Symbol Name text box under Edit Symbol 209 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide 9 Click OK when finished Notes e To undo an action click the
121. to your destination Notes e When tracking with a GPS device position is determined by the GPS position not the screen center e When tracking toward a map feature waypoint or along a route with a GPS receiver connected bearing and distance to the destination point is based on your GPS location e You must stop tracking one feature to begin tracking another You must tap one of the four items in the Source box to track toward Find Use the Find feature to search for and select a specific map feature Wpts Select a waypoint from the list of those you have created Address Book Entry Select a contact from your Address Book 323 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide Routes Select a route from the list of those you have created Once you have selected an item to track toward tap Start Tracking to begin tracking Tap Stop Tracking to stop tracking As you track to a destination point map feature waypoint address book entry or route the Tracking icon displays if the ending destination point is not in the current map view Pan the map to the destination point or tap the Tracking icon to center the map on the map feature waypoint or route point If you have the Navigation Panel enabled and are tracking towards a direct route a compass direction displays along with the name of your destination If you have the Navigation Panel enabled and are tracking towards a road route a turn arrow along with the name of the road o
122. track or line to a road layer right click the object on the map point to Manage Draw and then click Copy to Active Road Layer OR To change a routable road to a track layer right click the object on the map point to Manage Draw and then click Copy to Active Track Layer OR To change a routable road waypoint or track to a draw layer right click the object on the map point to Manage Draw point to Copy to Draw Object and then click the object to copy to OR To create a copy of an existing area object point object or line object right click the object on the map point to Manage Draw point to Copy to Draw Object and then click the object to copy to OR To change a track to a GPS log right click the track on the map point to Manage Draw and click Copy Track to GPS Log OR To change a symbol to a waypoint right click the symbol on the map point to Manage Draw and click Copy Symbol to Waypoint Tip You can also change a draw file type using the File section of the Draw tab For more information see Copying a Draw File in this section Note for regular Street Atlas USA users This Help topic describes functionality provided in advanced file management Advanced file management allows you to save multiple routes and draw layers in a single map file With simplified file management you can save only one route and or draw layer in a single map file If you did not select to enable advanced file management during the product
123. two different ways to copy a draw file You can create an exact copy of an existing file retaining its draw file type or you can copy the contents of an existing file and save it as a different file type for example convert a road layer to a draw layer To Copy a Draw File Use the following steps to copy a draw file Click the Draw tab Click File to open the draw file editing area Click to select the file that you want to copy Click Copy To A shortcut menu displays the available layer types Road Waypoint and Track Note Ifa layer type is not available in the shortcut menu it is because the a ee a 173 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide original draw file that you are copying does not contain data that is pertinent to that file type For example you cannot copy a draw layer that contains area objects such as circles to a road layer that requires line objects 5 If you want to create an exact copy of the original file select the layer type that matches the original file A new file is created and inserted into the table OR If you want to copy the file and save it as a different layer type select the option you want A new file is created and inserted into the table Tip You can also change a draw object type using the right click feature For more information see Changing Draw Object Types in this section Note for regular Street Atlas USA users This Help topic describes functionality provided in advan
124. used when referring to titles of chapters sections and publications Blue underlined Hyperlinks These links act differently depending on their text context When it is e Referenced with for more information the link goes to another topic Embedded in text such as in the example Open the file the link goes to another topic opens drop down text that expands within the same topic or displays a secondary window with a definition or graphic Red underlined Opens expanding text that provides explanatory text information The expanding text is italicized blue text 30 Getting Started Note A note or notes that provide additional information A tip or tips that provide helpful hints Notes User Guide The User Guide includes the entire Help system contents modified for print in a portable document format pdf The User Guide contains a table of contents and you can print it as a hard copy reference To open the User Guide click the Help button Ce on the toolbar and then click User Guide in the menu to open the Technical Support website When you access the guide Adobe Acrobat Reader launches 31 Tutorials Tutorial Downloading I magery Your purchase includes free imagery downloads You can download color aerial imagery satellite imagery USGS aerial imagery and hi resolution city imagery You must be a registered user to receive your free imagery If you did not register during the
125. were trying and your search word s display in the upper right text box Click Search to proceed For more information see Performing an Advanced Search Use a comma to separate city and state country Atlanta Georgia Montreal Canada major point of interest and state Mt Washington NH parts of an address 444 E Pk Drive Milford CT or 444 E Pk Dr 06460 or coordinate points N 43 8 W 70 2 Tip You can find major landmarks or points of interest such as Yellowstone National Park and Mount Rushmore without using the state as part of the search criteria Separate street intersections with an ampersand Congress St amp High St Portland ME or Congress St amp High St 04101 Avoid entering a period in your text Click the Search For down arrow to view a drop down list of previously used search words and examples The Search For drop down list keeps a history of your successful search words during a session and between sessions To delete your search history select Clear History from the drop down list Click No to delete the search history in the QuickSearch drop down list Click Yes to delete the search history in both the QuickSearch and Advanced subtabs Use the right click feature to copy search result information to the clipboard center a search result on the map go to select all search results add a result as a MapTag MapNote Detailed MapNote Waypoint or Address Book Entry or assign it a start stop or fi
126. works such as magazines newspapers and newsletters provided that the publication is not primarily a collection of maps and provided that proper legend as described below accompanies the output Such articles may also be posted on your Web site Graphic printers hired by licensee to print DeLorme map images are required to purchase a license Special Presentation Rights You may use paper copies of Street Atlas USA map displays and printouts in presentations to live audiences only with prior written permission from DeLorme Web Site Map Display Rights You may display on your personal business or institutional static Web site map images derived from the System provided that you include the Legend indicated below and that you provide a link to the DeLorme Web site at www delorme com from any page featuring a DeLorme map image If you subcontract a web developer to display map images said web developer must purchase a license Legend Any System output that is provided to a third party must include the following credit and copyright notice 2008 DeLorme www delorme com Street Atlas USA Plus You may not remove alter or conceal any copyright or trademark notices appearing on any System output except that when creating a mural map you need only retain a single legend with scale for use in the field Phone Data End User shall use Phone Data in compliance with any and all federal state or local statutes regulations or ordin
127. y to center the map on your GPS position e Tap the GPS Position icon to center the map on your GPS position Note The GPS Position icon displays only when you are not moving while connected to a GPS receiver e Tap the Tracking icon to center the map on a map feature a waypoint Wpt or a segment of a route you are tracking e Tap Tools and then tap Go To Position Then tap a number or letter in the coordinate and use the up and down arrows to make changes Tap Go To to update the coordinates and center the map on that location The Map View Screen on a Pocket PC Device The map view screen in Street Atlas USA Handheld is the area where map files created in Street Atlas USA 2009 display It is also the area where you can access the menu bar in order to create routes add waypoints measure distances as well as other map functions On the map view screen you can e Access all menu options through the menu bar e Query map features e Create a direct route e Create a road route e Find a point of interest e Add a waypoint 333 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide e Measure distances e Track to a map feature waypoint or along a route e Start or stop a GPS connection Changing the Data Zoom Level of the Map on a Pocket PC Device Use the scroll buttons on your handheld to change the data zoom level on your map To Change the Data Zoom Level of the Map Zoom in on the map to increase the data zoom level and display
128. you see a sign that says Road Construction next 35 miles The Route Avoid feature lets you assign an area to avoid and even recalculate an existing route Step 1 Create a route Create a route There are several ways to create a route see the Creating a Route tutorial on page 37 for more information Pittsburgh PA w Indianapolis IN Step 2 Select the area to avoid 1 Decide which area you want to avoid On this trip we want to avoid Columbus Ohio 2 Click the Draw tab and then click and hold the Polygon tool and select e me the shape you want Se 3 From the Fill drop down list select Blended Note See Placing a Circle Rectangle or Polygon on the Map on page 200 for more information about the options available 4 Click the map and drag the shape to cover the area to avoid The measurements of the area you are covering display as you move the mouse 5 When you have the area you want release the mouse The selected area is indicated by the fill color 52 Tutorials ee Hoover Reservoir x Bs Z westernie iain eein p LWorthingon SG AV yee Hilliard Gahanna Port Columbus Intl Canal Winches iea Step 3 Create the route avoid Right click the new Draw object on the map point to Manage Draw and then click Route Avoid 53 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide Step 4 View the new route The route automatically recalculates the
129. you want to move the contact select the method to place it on the map from the Update Location drop down list 6 Click OK Notes e The address book has a 200 record limit e You can resize and move the Address Book dialog box e You can resize the columns inside the Address Book dialog box 137 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide Manually Moving a Contact on the Map Once you have created a contact in an address book you can manually move it on the map using the move address book entry function To Manually Move a Contact s Location on the Map Use the following steps to manually move a contact s location on the map 1 Click the Find tab 2 Click the Move Address Book Entry button w Your cursor changes to P when you hover over the location of an address book contact 3 Click and drag the contact to a different location on the map The Located status for that record in the Address Book dialog box changes to Manual 4 Click the move address book entry icon again to resume normal map operations Notes e The address book has a 200 record limit e You can resize and move the Address Book dialog box e You can resize the columns inside the Address Book dialog box Relocating Address Book Contacts Once you import an address book from a previous version of your application you can relocate your address book entries except for manual entries so they match the most recent data You are prompted to do this the first tim
130. your particular handheld see your user guide To Set Map Preferences Use the following steps to set preferences in the Map section of the Preferences screen 1 Tap the Menu button on your handheld to display the Street Atlas USA Handheld menu bar Note You can also access the Preferences menu option by using the Graffiti Menu Commands 2 Tap Options then tap Preferences The Preferences dialog box opens 3 Tap the Map tab 4 Tap the down arrow next to each Map Preference option to display the list items available under each option The table below describes the Map Preference options Preference Description Option Resolution If you are using a device with Palm OS 5 2 or higher you can select to view Street Atlas USA Handheld with High or Normal resolution Map Font There are two fonts available for displaying text for placenames point labels road names etc Tap Small to set text to display with a small sized font style Tap Standard to set text to display with a medium sized font style Tap Large to set text to display with a large sized font style POI Labels You can choose whether or not to display the labels for points of interest POI such as placenames landmarks geographic features historic buildings and so forth e Tap Displayed to view POI labels e Tap Hidden to hide POI labels Crosshairs Select At Screen Center to display crosshairs on the map Select Hidden to hide crosshairs Orientati
131. 1 Panning and Centering the Map on a Pocket PC Device ccceeeeeee teeta eee es 333 The Map View Screen on a Pocket PC Device 0 cece cece eee eee eee ee ee teeta eens 333 Changing the Data Zoom Level of the Map on a Pocket PC Device 334 Menu Options for a Pocket PC Device ccc ccece cece eee erent teeta teen a teeta ene n eed 334 Querying Features on the Map on a Pocket PC DeVICC cccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeees 337 Saving a Map Point on a Pocket PC 20 0 eeeeceee cent eee eee ee eee ee enter ene eae ee eeenenas 338 Finding Map Features on a Pocket PC DeVICE eee eece cent eee eee ee teen eee eeee enna 338 Finding a Coordinate Location on a Pocket PC ce ceceeeee eee eee eee ee eeeeeeeenenae 341 Connecting Your GPS Device to a Pocket PC cccccccece eee eeeeeeaeeeaeeeneeeneeenenas 341 Updating Your GPS Settings on a Pocket PC Device ccccceceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 342 GPS Logging on a Pocket PC Device ccc cce eee ee eee eee eee e eee teen e eee ee teeta eee 343 Viewing a GPS Log on the Map on a Pocket PC DeVICE c c cece eee eee eee 343 Renaming and Viewing Information on a GPS Log File on a Pocket PC 344 Hiding a GPS Log on the Map on a Pocket PC c ccceceee eee este eee eee t neta eens 344 Deleting a GPS Log on a Pocket PC 0 0 eeeeeece cece eee teen e eee eee teeta ene eeeeeeaene eas 344 Monitoring Your GPS Session on a P
132. 100 To Open a Map File To open an existing map file 1 Click the Open button gt E on the toolbar If you made changes to a map file that is already open the Save Changes dialog box opens to ask you if you want to save your changes Note Map files have saf extensions and are saved by default in C DeLorme Docs Map Files The Open File dialog box opens Note You can also click the arrow next to the Open toolbar button to open a menu Then click Open Map File 2 Select the map file you want to view and click Open For more options for opening files see Opening an Existing Map File on page 101 71 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide To Save a Map File To save the map file that is currently open r 1 Click the Save button a on the toolbar The Save File dialog box opens 2 Browse to the location where you want to save the map file If you want to rename the map file type a new name in the File Name text box 3 Click Save To Print To print a map using the current settings in the Print tab click the Print button 8 on the toolbar To Print the Map Screen To print the current view as it displays on the screen click the Print Screen button m on the toolbar To Share Maps To share your current map view or a route map and directions click the MapShare i button on the toolbar to open the MapShare Wizard For information on e mailing maps and routes with the MapShare Wizard click the Help butt
133. 2 MapTags Converting Moving Hiding and Deleting isecen 132 M as te is pisaa ai 74 85 Measuring Distance on a Palm OS Handheld s e 323 Measuring Distance on a Pocket PC 356 Menu Options for a Pocket PC Device sca dagiaied vs A aay vaauen sae aude dada Charu 334 Menu Options on a Palm OS Handheld a a sikmbatah coy nial dengan EE 293 Microphone nsss 250 257 Monitoring GPS Satellite Information sal Wea thie te ceed anata Pec E E 245 Monitoring Speech Recognition 250 Monitoring Your GPS Session on a Palm OS Handheld 025 306 Monitoring Your GPS Session on a PocketPC enr eenaa E ARED 345 Monitoring Your GPS Status 243 Moving a Contact s Location On the Moving a Draw Object to a Different Draw File aee 177 Moving a Record s Location 152 Moving and Deleting MapNotes 203 227 Moving Draw Objects 179 Moving Files on a Palm OS Handheld S na a a Wanna ths araa beans soba 328 N NavMode ossa 2 9 41 74 237 NGCLIN Kieu tench pausas isina 280 O Opening a Symbol Set 215 Options Dialog Box 77 80 81 82 83 85 91 92 93 234 257 261 Overview Map sssssesseeresesrerresssen 27 P Panning the Map 19 240 Panning the Map on a Palm OS Handheld nsee 292 Panning the Map on a Pocket PC DEVICE snk i ao Oa ii 333 Pasting a Bitmap into XSym 210 PHONG ss aa i a e 141 145 Placing Draw Objects 189 196 200
134. 2 1 a and 227 7203 3 a or DFARS 227 225 7013 OCT 1988 as applicable or FAR 12 212 a FAR 52 227 14 or FAR 52 227 19 as applicable Copyright 2008 DeLorme GDAL Proj4 License Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal in the Software without restriction including without limitation the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute sublicense and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so subject to the following conditions The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE Copyright 2000 Frank Warmerdam 385 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide Apache Software License Version 1 1 Copyright 1999 2008 The Apache Software Foundation All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with o
135. 202 Playing Back a Log File 240 POI Search 126 POIS irea inne uaea a i ance oe 80 126 POIygON nsssssssssisssserrrsesrrrrnss 197 199 Portable MapS c sceeeee eee ee eee 72 Previewing a GPS Log File 241 Print 20 72 109 110 114 116 224 Print Maps with a Transparent Background 116 Print Maps With a Yellow Black Background sssseseeererrrrre ren 116 Q Querying Features on the Map on a Palm OS Handheld 297 Querying Features on the Map on a Pocket PC Device scese 337 QuickSearch 121 128 R Recalculate When Off Route 234 Receiving a GPS Log 271 274 Receiving a Route 267 272 276 Receiving a Track 267 Receiving Product Updates 280 Receiving Waypoints 268 272 277 Recenter Map on GPS 234 240 Recognition SettingS 04 257 Recreational Contacts 373 Rectangle sesers 197 199 Reference Card ccceeeeeeee eee es 96 Relocating Address Book Contacts 138 Removing a Symbol 065 212 Renaming a Custom Scheme 94 Renaming a Draw Object 180 Renaming a Map File on a Palm OS Handheld cceeeeeeeeee eee ees 288 Index Renaming a Map File on a Pocket PC DEVICE ies ene aana a aa ag 330 Renaming and Viewing Information on a GPS Log File on a Palm OS Handheld sse 304 Renaming and Viewing Information on a GPS Log File on a Pocket
136. 3 character Postal Code is treated the same as a six character Postal Code Searches for the specified name within a ZIP Postal Code Displays a ZIP Postal Code text field A U S search for a ZIP 4 Code is treated the same as a five digit ZIP Code A Canadian search for a 3 character Postal Code is treated the same as a six character Postal Code Searches for the specified name within a ZIP Code Displays a ZIP Code text field A search for a ZIP 4 Code is treated the same as a five digit ZIP Code U S State Searches for a name within a specific U S state This option is available only when Category or Name and or Category is selected as the Find parameter Note If you are searching within a larger state this type of search may take longer than others because a lot of data is being searched to obtain a result Tips Finding a Location on the Map e Current Map City Searches for the specified name within the boundaries of all ZIP Postal Codes associated with the city at the current map center e Current Map Rectangle Searches for the specified location within the currently visible map area e Distance from Map Center Performs a search in all directions from the center of the map using the specified distance Also called a radius search The minimum distance you can use is 50 feet the maximum distance is 100 miles e Current Route Searches for objects within the specified distance from your currently active calculate
137. 4 Click the Draw tab Click File Click Save Draw files are saved by default in the C DeLorme Docs Draw directory with an1 extensions Click Done to return to the main Draw tab area Note for regular Street Atlas USA users This Help topic describes functionality provided in advanced file management Advanced file management allows you to save multiple routes and draw layers in a single map file With simplified file management you can save only one route and or draw layer in a single map file If you did not select to enable advanced file management during the product installation you can still change the settings using the Change File Management option in the Options menu For more information see Activating Advanced Simplified File Management This note does not apply to Street Atlas USA Plus users Using the Draw Tools Deleting a Draw File You can delete a draw file you just created or one you previously saved To Delete a Draw File Use the following steps to delete a draw file 1 Open the map file that contains the draw file you want to delete 2 Click the Draw tab 3 Click File to open the draw file editing area A draw file with a selected check box displays on the map Note The draw file editing area is categorized by draw file type for example all road layers are grouped together in the list all draw layers are grouped together and so on Select a draw file from the file list and then clic
138. 4 54 Y il ls f B Step 4 View results as points on the map Click Map to view all of the search results as points on the map The name of each result will display next to the point Note Results in red show exact locations Results in gray show approximate locations Central Ohio Dental ri ter an a Friendiy Restaurant m Always in Good Taste Olive Garden tater n ie aon Suites f Restaurant if od Tutorials Step 5 View details Hover over the point on the map to see the phone information for that result in the status bar above the tab area Note You can also right click the point on the map and click I nfo to view all of the information for that result in the Info tab 49 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide Tutorial Routing with XData Points Once you import an XData dataset you can use the data to create a route Notes e The XData tab is hidden by default Use Tab Manager to show the XData tab e The XData tab is available only in Street Atlas USA Plus Step 1 Import the dataset Import the dataset into the XData tab For more information see Importing Data on page 147 Step 2 Create a route Assign the Start and Finish points of the route You can assign the Start and Finish using the Route options on the toolbar right click functionality or the Route tab For more information see Creating a Route on page 217 Step 3 Select records to include as stops C
139. 5 Select your preferred speech recognition engine from the Recognizer drop down list Note Select the most recent version available in the drop down list 6 Click Speech Profile Training to display the speech training wizard specific to your speech recognition engine Note This feature is available only if it is supported by your speech recognition engine 7 Follow the on screen instructions Tips For best results e Use a close talk microphone that rests near the side of your mouth instead of a desktop or built in microphone e Train the speech recognition engine in the same environment in which you will use it For example if you use the engine mostly in the car perform training in the car Perform three training sessions to get the best results 251 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide e When training speak the same voice as you will when giving voice commands to the computer Speak distinctly and at an average speed as if giving a command e Use the Microphone Wizard to ensure your microphone is working correctly and to view tips on microphone selection and placement To use the wizard click Microphone Setup on the Voice tab of the Options dialog Or from the Start menu on your computer browse to the Control Panel and double click the Speech icon to open the Speech Properties dialog box e To increase the likelihood of correct speech recognition on the Voice Settings tab in the Options dialog box select the Commands start wit
140. 8 303 1746 Reservations 877 227 6963 Days Inn 800 329 7466 Doubletree Hotels 800 222 TREE Drury Inn 800 DRURY INN Econo Lodge 800 55 ECONO Reservations 877 424 6423 Extended StayAmerica 370 Hawthorn Suites Hilton Hotels Holiday Inn Holiday Inn Express Homewood Suites Howard J ohnson Hyatt Hotels and Resorts InterContinental Hotels La Quinta Inns Loews Hotel MainStay Suites Marriott Hotels Microtel Inn Motel 6 Omni Hotels Park Plaza International Quality Inn Radisson Hotels International Raffles International Hotels and Resorts Ramada Hotels Red Roof Inn Renaissance Hotels Residence Inn by Marriott Rodeway Inn Sheraton Hotels amp Motor Inns Shoney s Inn Recreational and Travel Contact Information 800 527 1133 800 HILTONS 800 HOLI DAY Reservations 877 410 6667 800 HOLI DAY Reservations 800 465 4329 800 CALLHOME 800 446 4656 800 633 7313 888 303 1758 Reservations 800 424 6835 866 725 1661 Reservations 800 642 4271 800 23 LOEWS Reservations 866 563 9792 877 424 6423 888 236 2427 Reservations 888 236 2427 U S and Canada Reservations 800 771 7171 Reservations 888 444 6664 371 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide Signature Inn Sleep Inn Staybridge Suites Super 8 Motels Inc Travelodge amp Viscount Hotels W Hotels Westin Hotels amp Resorts Wyndham Hotels and Resorts Car Rental Information Car Rental
141. 82 Changing the Map Magnification Level ssssssssssssssssrrrssssrrrrnsnrrrnrrsnsrrrrrrrsrns 83 Changing How POIs Display on the Mab ccceeeeee eee ee eee eee eee ee teen ea eae 83 Setting Units of Measure Preferences ccceceeee eens eee eeee cess sete saeeeaeeeneeeneeenees 85 Resizing the Map and Tab Areas ceccee eee e eee eee eee eee neta eee ee neta eaes 86 Showing or Hiding Ta DSi sterkes a eee erent ee eee 88 Importing Exporting Tab Manager Preferences cceceeeee eee eee eee ee teen ee eaeeaes 89 Reordering the Tabs serana a Anise sh a vad Aa 90 Using Keyboard Shortcuts cece cece eee eee ene teeta eee eee ee teeta 91 Selecting a Keyboard Shortcut SCHEME cccceccece cee eeee sees sees eaeeeaeeeneeeneeenees 91 Creating a New Custom SCHEME ccceecee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeuaeeeneeenesenes 91 Assigning Keyboard Shortcuts in a Custom SCHEME cccceeseeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeenas 92 Customizing a DeLorme SCNHEME cccecce eee cece eee e eee eeee sees eee eaeeeaeeeeeeeneeeneeneea 93 Renaming a Custom SCHEME cece eee eee teeta eee teeta eaee 94 Deleting a Custom SCHEME cece eee ene teeta nae 94 Importing a Custom SCHEME 0 cece eee eee eae een ene nate tees 95 Exporting a Custom SCHEME cece eee eee eee ee teeta nas 95 Table Of Contents Searching For COMMANGG ccce eee eee eee e eee enee 95 Viewing All
142. 9 Repeat the steps for each route you want to send to your device 10 Click Finish The route directions are available on your handheld device after your next synchronization operation Tip You can also open the Exchange Wizard by clicking the Exchange button E Exchange on the GPS tab or the Handheld Export tab Receiving a GPS Log From Your Pocket PC Device Use the Exchange Wizard to receive GPS logs created on your Pocket PC Once imported you can use the file in your mapping program 274 Using Handheld Devices To Receive GPS Logs From Your Pocket PC Device Use the following steps to receive GPS logs from your Pocket PC device Click the Exchange button j on the toolbar Under Device Type select Pocket PC Select Receive from Device Select GPS Logs from the Object Type drop down list Click Next Select the GPS log you want to receive from the GPS Log drop down list Click Receive From Device Repeats the steps for each GPS log file you want to receive Click Finish Tip You can also open the Exchange Wizard by clicking the Exchange button TE Exchange on the GPS tab or the Handheld Export tab ONDNARWN Sending Waypoints to Your Pocket PC Device Use the Exchange Wizard to send waypoints to your Pocket PC device To Send Waypoints Use the following steps to send waypoints to your Pocket PC device 1 Click the Exchange button on the toolbar 2 Under Device Type select Pocket PC 3 S
143. Al Click the MapNote to select it Press the DELETE key on your keyboard Using the Draw Tools Custom Symbols Custom Symbols Overview DeLorme XSym lets you create and edit your own symbols which you can edit and add to maps within DeLorme mapping programs The symbols created are 24 x 24 pixels New and edited symbols are saved within a symbol set dim file and can contain up to 250 symbols Symbol set files are located at C DeLorme Docs Symbols The DeLorme XSym Dialog Box The XSym dialog box provides all the tools you need to create and edit symbols for your DeLorme mapping program Click an area on the diagram below to view information on the various parts of the dialog box Tip To close the pop up information box that displays when you click the diagram click on another part of the diagram Creating a New Symbol With DeLorme XSym you can add a new symbol to an existing or new symbol set dim file You can assign a new category name for the symbol to help locate it under the Find tab in the DeLorme mapping program To Create a New Symbol Use the following steps to create a new symbol 1 Click the Draw tab 2 Click and hold the Symbol MapNote Text Label I mage tool b _ bs to view its hidden options Select the Symbol tool P 3 Under Symbols select the symbol set you want to add your new symbol to from the drop down list Select New to create a new symbol set 4 Under Symbols click Edit to display the DeLo
144. All A message box displays asking if you want to clear all draw objects from the current file e If you click Yes all draw objects in the file are cleared You cannot undo this action e If you click No no objects are cleared from the file Snapping Draw Objects You can snap any draw object to the exact coordinates of a point in another draw object You can also snap the central shape point of an arc to another object To Snap a Draw Object to the Coordinates of Another Object Use the following steps to snap a draw object to the coordinates of another draw object 1 Click the Draw tab 2 Click the Select tool A and then click the draw object on the map A box displays around the active object Shape points display as small magenta squares 3 Select an end point from any of the line segments within the draw object It displays as a red or green circle 4 Drag the point to e Any other shape point within a line spline polygon arc or rectangle e The center point of a circle e The anchor of a symbol e The base point of a text label e The text box anchor point of a MapNote When you drag your shape point over a point on the draw object a yellow diamond defines the snap point Release the point you dragged when the snap point displays The active draw object is then snapped to the other object s point coordinate Tip To undo a draw object snap click Undo to undo the last action If you decide not to undo the last
145. Click outside the object s active box on the map 195 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide Placing a Routable Road Line Arc or Spline at a Specific Location You can place any line object routable road line arc or spline at a specific coordinate location To Place a Line Object at a Specific Location Use the following steps to place your line object at a specific coordinate location 1 Click the Draw tab 2 To place a routable road click and hold the Routable Road tool all OR To place a line arc spline click and hold the Line Arc Spline tool and select the tool you want Then select the line style width if available and color for your line arc spline 3 Select the Coordinate option or use the Distance and Bearing Angle option in conjunction with the Coordinate option and enter the appropriate coordinates or numbers into the corresponding text boxes to the right of the text style options box Note If you are placing an arc enter new numbers into the Distance and Bearing Angle text boxes for the two base points of the arc only When the central shape point of the arc is selected the text options change from Distance and Bearing Angle to Radius and Direction Enter the appropriate radius number and direction to change the radius for this point 4 Click Apply and repeat the procedure for the second point The line object displays on the map at those coordinates distance and bearing or angle O
146. Columbus OH 43229 614 78 Corit 665 E Dublin Granville Rd Columbus OH 43229 614 841 1222 AUTOMATION SYSTE Heartbeat International 66S E Dublin Granville Rd Ste 440 Columbus OH 43229 614 885 75 Medtrans Newtwork Inc 665 E Dublin Granville Rd Columbus OH 43229 614 825 0764 Optionline 665 E Dublin Granville Rd Columbus OH 43229 614 802 2808 ABORTION ALTE Pregnancy Decision Health Centers 665 E Dublin Granville Rd Columbus OH 43229 614 88 Williams Jack A Jr 671 E Dublin Granville Rd Columbus OH 43229 614 885 9908 A 1 Preferred Sources Inc 1855 E Dublin Granville Rd Columbus OH 43229 614 268 380 A J Holdings 1925 E Dublin Granville Rd Columbus OH 43229 614 985 3014 REAL ESTA A 1 Preferred Sources 1855 E Dublin Granville Rd Columbus OH 43229 614 847 5820 H Abc Liquor 1571 E Dublin Granville Rd Columbus OH 43229 614 846 3130 ACCOUNTAN Abc Liquor 1571 E Dublin Granville Rd Columbus OH 43229 614 846 4788 LIQUOR STO Abl Inc 2999 E Dublin Granville Rd Columbus OH 43231 614 865 1850 FREIGHT TRAFFI Able Health Care 2021 E Dublin Granville Rd Columbus OH 43229 614 841 4451 HOME Able Support Services Inc 2021 E Dublin Granville Rd Columbus OH 43229 614 436 3791 Acadia Grandville Lic 1521 E Dublin Granville Rd Columbus OH 43229 614 848 5748 Snorks 0 685 E Dubin Granville Rd Columbus OH 43229 614 436 7064 Accident amp Injury Chiropractic Ce 1579 E Dublin Granville Rd Columbus OH 43229 61
147. Company Alamo Avis Budget Dollar Enterprise Hertz National Payless RentaWreck Thrifty Airline Information Airline Name Air Canada Airtran Airways Alaska Airlines American Airlines American Eagle 372 800 822 5252 800 SLEEP INN Reservations 877 424 6423 800 238 8000 800 800 8000 800 578 7878 888 625 5144 Reservations 877 946 8357 888 625 5144 Reservations 800 937 8461 877 999 3223 Phone Number 800 GO ALAMO 800 230 4898 Rates and Reservations 800 331 1212 Phone Number 888 247 2262 800 AIRTRAN 800 252 7522 800 433 7300 800 433 7300 Recreational and Travel Contact Information Canadian North 800 661 1505 Outside Canada 867 873 4484 Continental Airlines 800 525 0280 Reservations 800 523 3273 U S and Mexico Recreational Contacts National Recreation Information Contact Web Site Information Phone Name Number National www fs fed us 202 205 8333 Forest Service NFS Locator www fs fed us recreation map state_list shtml 202 205 1706 National Park Wwww nps gov NPS Center for Service Recreation amp Conservation 202 354 6900 NPS Locator www nps gov archive parks html National www blm gov nics monuments BLM National Monuments Landscape Conservation System 202 208 3516 National www cr nps gov NPS Center for Historic Sites Recreation amp 373 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide NPS U S Fish and Wildlife Service N
148. Copying and Pasting 0006 209 Copying and Placing Draw Objects 178 Copying Your Map to the Clipboard 20 County Borders 80 Create Dataset ccceeeee eee es 152 Creating a Direct Route on a Palm OS Handheld cccccceceeeeeeeeeeaees 317 Creating a Direct Route on a Pocket PC sAaPae toads ska N ade hie Mendes dha 352 Creating a New Custom Scheme 91 Creating a New Draw File 161 Creating a New Symbol 205 Creating a New Symbol Set 214 Creating a Road Route on a Palm OS Handheld cceccceseeeeeeeeeeeees 318 Creating a Road Route on a Pocket PC a hota tiedt stat nae Pree erent 353 Creating a Route 217 Creating a Route with XData Records gaia weird iia nila waley sie Sadana ewe sa engin 151 Cursor Position ccecceeee eee eenes 214 Custom Points of Interest 81 Custom SyMbols cceceeeee eae 205 Customizing a DeLorme Scheme 93 Customizing the Map Feature PreferenCes 2 Seine decree eee 81 D Data Corrections ccceeeee eee 280 Data Zoom Level 00000 18 26 388 Datasets 0 c cece cece eee eee eens 280 Deleting a Contact In Your Address BOOK EAE 24 eSoaa aver otere vie 139 Deleting a Custom Scheme 94 Deleting a Draw File 163 Deleting a GPS Log on a Palm OS Handheld cceceeeceeeeeeeeeeaes 306 Deleting a GPS Log on a Pocket PC 344 Dele
149. Creating a New Draw File There are four different types of draw files DrawLayer Created when you add a line arc spline circle rectangle polygon symbol MapNote or text label to the map RoadLayer Created when you add a routable road WaypointLayer Created when you add a waypoint to the map TrackLayer Created when you add a track to the map A draw file is automatically created when you add a draw object to the map and there are no draw files of that type included in or contained in the current map file You can control the creation of new draw files in the draw file editing area To Create a New Draw File Use the following steps to create a new draw file 1 2 6 7 Note Click the Draw tab Click File to open the draw file editing area A selected check box next to the draw file s name in the file list indicates the file is displaying on the map Note The draw file editing area is categorized by draw file type For example all roadlayer files are grouped together in the list all drawlayer files are grouped together and so on Click New and then click Draw Road Waypoint or Track The new file is now the active draw file Each draw file type has an active file Optional If you want to rename the draw file Right click the draw file in the draw file editing area and click Rename in the shortcut menu Type the new name in the Name box and press the ENTER key on your keyboard OR Click the draw
150. E No Commercial Use You do not have the right to sell or to reproduce or distribute for sale any part of the System or output of the System alone or in combination with any other text data software or graphic matter No Interactive Use You do not have the right to combine the System interactively with the operation of other software unless licensed to do so by DeLorme No Modifications or Decompilation Except through use of any software modification functions provided with the System you have no right to modify the System in any way incorporate any part or product of it into a compilation or create any derivative work You may not reverse engineer decompile disassemble or otherwise access source code or the logical structure and contents of the System database No Third Party Service Bureau Use Except as specifically provided in this Agreement you may not a permit any third party to use the System or transfer disclose or otherwise make available the System to any third party b use the System in the operation of a service bureau or c allow access to the System through terminals located outside your premises You agree to secure and protect the System in a manner consistent with the maintenance of DeLorme s rights therein and to take appropriate action by instruction or agreement with your employees who are permitted access to the System to satisfy your obligations hereunder No Copies The copying of the System any por
151. Feature Type column just before the symbol s feature type draw object Double click the item or select the item and click Go To to locate your selection on the map The map view centers on the item If you assigned a name for the symbol under the Draw tab a MapTag displays the name at the symbol location If you did not assign a name for the symbol a MapTag displays the Symbol Name at the symbol location If you do not assign a symbol name to a symbol in XSym you can locate it with the generic keyword of symbol or by the name or phrase given the symbol in the Draw tab For more information see Finding a Symbol by Its Name If you assigned a Symbol Name to a custom symbol in XSym and placed the symbol on the map the Symbol Name displays in the demographic information area when you right click the symbol and select I nfo Importing a Bitmap You can import a bitmap into DeLorme XSym to use as a symbol but any bitmap you import must be 24 x 24 pixels or less You can assign a new category name for the symbol to help locate it under the Find tab in the DeLorme mapping program To Import a Bitmap Use the following steps to import a bitmap to use as a symbol 1 2 208 Click the Draw tab Click and hold the Symbol MapNote Text Label I mage tool TM to view its hidden options Select the Symbol tool m Under Symbols click Edit The DeLorme XSym dialog box opens Under Symbols in Set click New to clear the Symbol Editi
152. Guide New Mexico 800 432 800 432 4269 www nmshtd state nm us 4269 New York NY Thruway www dot state ny us roads roads html 800 847 8929 Newfoundland Avalon 709 www roads gov nf ca 729 7669 Central 709 292 4444 East 709 466 4160 West 709 635 4144 Labrador 709 729 7888 2210 Worth Dakota m oes Pr Northwest 800 661 0750 www hwy dot gov nt ca highways Territories Nova Scotia 902 424 902 424 3933 www gov ns ca tran 3933 9869 Ohio 511 www dot state oh us Turnpike www buckeyetraffic org otis roads default asp 888 876 www ohioturnpike org 7453 Oklahoma N A 405 425 2385 www okladot state ok us Ontario Within Within www mto gov on ca english Canada 800 Canada 800 268 4686 268 4686 Toronto 416 Toronto 416 235 4686 235 4686 Oregon 511 511 www tripcheck com Outside OR Outside OR 503 588 503 588 2941 2941 Pennsylvania 888 783 888 783 6783 www dot state pa us 6783 Outside PA www paturnpike com Outside PA 717 783 5186 717 783 Turnpike 5186 800 331 3414 Turnpike 368 Recreational and Travel Contact Information 800 331 3414 Prince Edward N A Charlottetown www gov pe ca roadconditions index php3 Island 902 368 4750 Georgetown 902 652 8960 Summerside 902 888 8275 Quebec 888 355 888 355 0511 www mtq gouv qc ca en accueil plansite asp 0511 Rhode Island 511 511 www dot state ri us webtraf index html 401 222 4545 Saskatchewa
153. J 06355109 19TDJ 064511 19TDJ 0651 Use this example for USNG with non standard datum Searching Tips When you use the Quick Search subtab on the Find tab or the Route tab to search for a location you must enter the information in a specific format Tips e Use punctuation as in the examples in the table below e Do not use periods e Search with the minimum amount of information to increase the number of results For example if you are searching for a road and you are not sure of the spelling type in part of the name and then scroll through the list of results until you find a match This table shows formats for search types For this type of Use this format search Address Street address City State 100 Baxter Blvd Portland ME Street address ZIP Code 100 Congress St 04101 Street address City State 100 Congress St Portland ZIP Code ME 04101 ZIP Postal Code Within the U S 5 04096 digit ZIP Codes only or J8E756 Within Canada 6 digit Postal Codes only Minor Point of Interest POI name City State Subway Columbus OH Major Point of Interest or POI landmark name Mount Rushmore Landmark POI landmark name State Space Needle WA Latitude Longitude See Chart of Supported of Supported Coordinate Formats For more information about the Find tab see the Help topics under Finding a Location on the Map 24 Getting Started Exiting the Program To exit the program click the C
154. Maps to Your Portable Media Player ccceeeeeee eee eee eee eee eee 72 TO Create a ROU isni aa bie a coven evel ae tase raa a a T 73 To Start Stop Your GPS Connection 0 cc cece eee eee eee ee eee netstat na eee eee 73 To Exchange Files with a GPS or PDA ccceecee cece e eee eee e eee eee eee tena na eens 74 T sse GPSiNAVMO dE si a eae e ede Authioaa snd A tous nade A e E ELSES a 74 To Grab and Pan the Map 0 cceceeee eee eee eee een eee ene nett tena naeeaes 74 TO M aSUure DISTANCE sisien ene eiii eine net ec hence einai vale ene date a enaa Aa 74 TO View MAG ERY ster hata eb bled ig both aor aa a a a aa a a aAA a 75 To Get Information About a Location ccecceee cece ee eee teeta eee teen een eens 76 TO Chose OPtlons eaa teresa veda r arpaa EE aE de av nE Seid vasmavoeddd ence ven ERENS 77 To Add Images to a GPS Location 0 cece cece eee eee eae e eee te eae eae ee eee 77 Customizing the Map and Tab Display c cece cece eee eee ee teeta eae tae eae eeae 79 Display Options OVeErVieW 00 cece cece ee eee eee eee eee tenet nena naee 79 Customizing the INterface ccccccceccee eee e eee aa aaea a a A E E A EER a 79 Displaying Basic Map FeatureS ssssssssssssrrrrsrrrrrrnsrerrnrrsrerirrnseerirrnnesrrrrrnnt 80 Customizing the Map Feature Preferences cccccccseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeenesanes 81 Changing the Map COlOrSisean imn an ao a a a E i
155. NDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE This software consists of voluntary contributions made by many individuals on behalf of the Apache Software Foundation and was originally based on software copyright 1999 International 3 5 Machines Inc http www ibm com For more information on the Apache Software Foundation please see http www apache org 386 Index A ADOUt GPS eeceaald dasa apitdan 247 Activating Speech Recognition 250 Add Delete Words cscseceeeees 257 Adding a Symbol 200 Adding a Text Label 005 200 Adding a Waypoint 200 Adding Draw Objects 186 187 192 193 197 200 Adding Points to Draw Objects 183 Adding Stops and ViaS 64 219 Adding Text or Graphics 111 Adding Waypoints on a Palm OS Handheld cceceeeeeeeeeee ees 315 Adding Waypoints on a Pocket PC 350 Address Book135 136 137 138 139 140 Advanced Search eccere 122 Aligning Text and Graphic Items on Your MaD eee eeee cece teeter eees 114 AIIMAN ACs A a cied
156. PC 344 Renaming and Viewing Information on a Route File on a Palm OS Handheld E E E T E ETA 320 Renaming and Viewing Information on a Route File on a Pocket PC 354 Reordering the Tabs ece 90 Reordering the Toolbar 65 71 Resizing the Map and Tab Areas 86 Reverse ROUTE sesirikanira a 225 Reversing the Direction of a Route on a Palm OS Handheld 322 Reversing the Direction of a Route on a Pocket PCO viiivicceniee eee iiien 356 XY 10 Mt V re 161 Rotate Map in GPS Direction 234 Routable Roads 185 188 189 191 194 196 Routable Trails 185 188 189 191 194 196 Route 73 219 222 225 226 227 228 230 231 Route Avoid cccecceese cece rre 222 Route Directions cceceeee eee 222 Route Prefs ecceeeeeeeeeaes 224 227 S Satellites ccceeeeeeeeee ees 245 247 Save as GPS Log File 171 232 Saving a Draw File 006 162 Saving a Map as a Bitmap or J PEG PIAS SE cheat earn eae T 20 Saving a Map Point on a Pocket PC 338 Saving a Route eee 229 Saving a Track as a GPS Log 171 Saving Route Directions as Text 224 Scale Bafs ninaa a 26 Searching for a Phone Book Listing 141 Searching for Address Book Contacts E E EE vane oeatien Hae 135 391 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide Searching For Command 95 Searching TiPS cceceeeeee eee ee ees 24 Selectin
157. POIs Display on the Map e Setting Units of Measure Preferences Customizing the I nterface You can customize the interface for your application by hiding the tab panel area and the Control Panel If you optimized your installation for use with an Ultra Mobile PC you can turn UMPC Mode on or off To Customize the I nterface Click the arrow next to the Options button me on the toolbar Click Tab Manager to show or hide individual tabs or reorder tabs If the tab panel area is showing and you want to hide it click Show Tab Area Panel to clear the check box next to it OR If the tab panel area is hidden and you want to show it click Show Tab Area Panel to select the check box next to it If the Control Panel is showing and you want to hide it click Show Control Panel to clear the check box next to it OR If the Control Panel is hidden and you want to show it click Show Control Panel to select the check box next to it If you optimized your program for use with an Ultra Mobile PC during installation click UMPC Mode to turn the optimized view on or off UMPC Mode is on when the check box next to it is selected For more information see Using UMPC and Small screen Devices on page 279 Notes e You can also use keyboard shortcuts to hide and show the tab area panel and Control Panel and if you installed the UMPC option to optimize the interface for small screen devices e Your settings are saved until you change them
158. PS tab and then click Clear Trail to delete any GPS points from the current map display BE onions 3 Click the Options button on the toolbar or click the menu arrow and click Options and then click the GPS Settings tab OR Click the GPS tab and click the Options button EE options 4 Select any or all of the following check boxes and click OK when finished The description is for the state when the check box is selected Use NavMode Enables a hands free full screen view that you can view in 2 D or 3 D Snap to Route Automatically locates the place on the route that is closest to your vehicle s current location Start GPS Log Automatically generates a GPS log Use High Contrast Colors Automatically enables high contrast map colors Magnify Map Automatically magnifies the map view to the specified magnification 125 150 175 or 200 Recenter Map on GPS Automatically centers the map on the GPS Rotate Map in GPS Direction Automatically rotates the 2 D 3 D map in the direction of travel Direction of travel always displays as the top of the screen regardless of compass direction 234 OR Using GPS Auto Zoom To Turn Automatically pans and zooms the map to display both the current GPS position and the position of the next turn Select a data zoom level from the Minimum Maximum Zoom drop down lists to stop the map from zooming out in further than you want it to when approaching the next
159. R After placing the first point coordinate move your pointer to the map screen and place the other points by hand by clicking on the screen 5 To place additional points lines or other draw objects on the map in reference to the first line enter a specific distance and bearing into the corresponding text boxes and click Apply Joining and Breaking Linear Objects You can join two or more routable roads tracks lines arcs or splines into a single entity You can also break routable roads tracks lines or splines You cannot break arcs To Join Use the following steps to join linear objects 1 Click the Draw tab 2 Click the Select tool R press and hold the SHIFT key on the keyboard and select any lines arcs or splines you want to join OR Click the Select tool R and drag a box around the linear objects you want 196 Using the Draw Tools to join Note When joining the preceding types of line objects you can mix and match lines arcs and splines The result is always a line However when you join multiple splines the resulting joined object is a spline 3 Right click point to Manage Draw and then click J oin Lines OR Join the lines by pressing CTRL J or the keyboard shortcut combination you assigned for the joining function The selected lines are joined Note Any other objects selected during the multi select process are ignored To Break Use the following steps to break linear objects 1 Click th
160. S Logging M Distance The Distance tool icon displays in the upper right corner of the map view screen and the Erase tool icon displays in the upper left corner of the map view screen For more information see Measuring Distance R Preferences The Preferences dialog box opens For information on setting preferences see Setting Preferences IT Tracking The Select Track dialog box opens Select to track to a map feature a waypoint or the start or finish of a route you have created W Wpt list in the The Data screen displays along with a list of Data screen any waypoints wpts you have added For information on waypoints see Adding Waypoints Editing Commands The following table shows the Graffiti menu commands used to edit text field information The slash indicates the command stroke Note Make the command stroke by dragging the stylus diagonally from bottom left to top right in the Graffiti area then write the letter needed to activate the command Command Activated E i 7 i U i K Tap the field which contains the text you want to select Use to undo the last action Use to activate the handheld keyboard Use to activate the Graffiti Help character G Graffiti Help screens Note Use the above editing menu commands to edit text fields in the GPS Settings and Wot Info screens You may also access the editing menu commands by tapping the menu bar in either of the screens or by tapping the Menu button
161. SA base map data Satellite Imagery SAT10 9 11 True color 10 meter resolution imagery from the French based SPOT satellite Satellites d observation de la Terre Downloaded using the NetLink tab Aerial Imagery DOQQ 15 16 Street Atlas USA 15 17 Street Atlas USA Plus Black and white 1 meter resolution digital aerial photography Downloaded using the NetLink tab Color Aerial Imagery DOQQ 13 16 Street Atlas USA 13 17 Street Atlas USA Plus True color 1 meter resolution digital aerial photography Downloaded using the NetLink tab USGS Hi resolution 133 City Imagery 13 16 Street Atlas USA 13 17 Street Atlas USA Plus Color aerial imagery over the country s largest metropolitan areas with a resolution of approximately 1 3 meter or about 1 foot Raster maps have very large file sizes Exporting a Map to a Handheld Device You can export maps to be used on a Palm OS or Pocket PC handheld device To Export a Map Use the following steps to export a map to a Palm OS or Pocket PC device 1 Click the Handheld Export tab 2 To manually select the export area choose an appropriate grid size from the Grid Size drop down list See Grid Size Comparisons for more information click the Select Edit button EB setecteat and click grids on the map to add or remove them Grids selected for export are shaded red OR Select the grid size from the Grid Size drop down list see Grid Size
162. Started Overview Map The overview map is a smaller map in the lower right corner of the screen that offers a wide angle view of your current map view area It is approximately three data zoom levels out from the current map view Tips Click anywhere on the overview map and that point becomes the new map center This allows you to travel greater distances with each mouse click than you can within the larger current map view Use the black view box in the overview map window to pan the map Point anywhere on the view box When the pointer becomes a drag the view box to the new location gumbus E WASHINGTON I Ciiarlotte Toolbar The toolbar allows you to perform many functions in the application without navigating through the tab area You can use the toolbar to Create save and or open map files You can also find these features on the Map Files tab Print your current map screen find additional printing options on the Print tab or quick print with the current Print tab settings Use MapShare to share maps and or route directions Send static maps to your iPod or other compatible portable media player Set route start finish and stop points and calculate a route Additional route options are found on the Route tab Start or stop your GPS connection This feature is also available on the GPS tab Turn GPS NavMode on or off Exchange routes waypoints and more with a GPS or PDA View raster imagery
163. Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide Table of Contents Getting Started isani ten a tah nlandinnbatond berber a a nachna at a n a aa 1 Welcome to Street Atlas USA s ssssssssssssrrssssrsrrsrsrrsrrsnsrrrrnnnsrerrnennrerrnnnerernn 1 What s New in Street Atlas USA sssssssssssssssesrrsrssrrrrnrsssrrrrrnnerrrrrnesrnrrrnenerrnn 2 Frequently Asked QuesStionS sssssssssssssssrrrsrssirrrrrsrrrrrrnnrrrrrnrnnrurrn teeta eae ea eed 2 Helpful Tips scecicsteeewerky dake eae teeta oe tes eee ied oe ae et aay EAK eed Pee eae 9 Activating Advanced Simplified File Management cece cnet eee e eee ea eea eee 12 Glossary Terms tia trees a sce ded deve coe eb eile el ees die daa aa Leet anew de ate wea Axe nai 13 Basic DT ALE do D E EE A A A E A as auninagieg E Aatiiaseivtn 18 ZooMiNg lA ANA OUT a aa a a a Daa the al 18 Panning Centering the Map ssssssssssssrssssrrrrrsssrrnrrsnsrrrrnsrsrirrnnnnrerrrrnnenrrrrrnnt 19 Copying Your Map to the Clipboard cece eect eee eee neta eee 20 Saving a Map as a Bitmap or J PEG IMagQe 0 cece ce eee eect ee eee eee e teenies 20 Measuring Distance and Area ccce cece cece eee eee eee eee nee nee eae tenet nae nae nae 22 Chart of Supported Coordinate Formats ccceceeee eee ee eee ee tetas tent ee ena eae 23 Searching TipS 22 28 35 wi eel eet tars See eae ta he eae 24 EXItINg the Progra Ms sser esac ideda ene tedeceua eta calls ener ete eaaW ee naena selen
164. TS ea EE E EEEE 219 Index Viewing a GPS Log on the Map on a Palm OS Handheld 303 Viewing a GPS Log on the Map on a Pocket PC Device 343 Viewing a Route on Your Map on a Palm OS Handheld 321 Viewing a Route on Your Map on a Pocket PC irens cinan ee ree 355 Viewing All of the Shortcut Keys for a SCNEME siiin eiaa ann 96 Viewing Dataset Records 150 Viewing File Details for a GPS Log 242 Viewing Hidden Draw Tools 160 Viewing Maps on Your Palm OS Handheld sses 287 Viewing Maps on Your Pocket PC DEVICE aitona aia iaaa cane 329 Viewing Route Directions 222 Viewing the Contents of a Draw File inesiuga wiewasls E AE oaa ia een wake 172 Voice 249 250 251 252 256 257 Ww Waypoint cee eee eee ee eee ee eee 200 Waypoint ID ccceeeeee eee e eee 206 WaypointLayer ccceeeeeeeee eee 161 X XData 50 147 149 150 152 154 XSym 205 206 207 209 210 211 212 213 214 Z ZIP Postal CodesS cccccceeeeeeeeees 80 ZOOM TOOIS eana ai 18 26 Zooming In and Out 18 393
165. Tap Hidden to hide POI labels Map Font There are two fonts available for displaying text for placenames point labels road names etc e Tap Standard to set text to display with a large font style Tap Small to set text to display with a small font style Map Colors There are two map color options available e Tap Default to view the default map colors e Tap High Contrast to change your map display to be darker for improved in vehicle visibility Crosshairs Select Screen Center to display crosshairs on the map Select Hidden to hide crosshairs 348 Using Street Atlas Handheld on a PDA Coordinates There are three latitude longitude options as well as a UTM UPS coordinate option available for use with the maps on your handheld e For latitude longitude coordinates tap Degrees Deg Minutes or Deg Min Sec e Tap UTM UPS to display coordinates in the UTM Universal Transverse Mercator system or the UPS Universal Polar Stereographic system Coordinates display the zone number and letter with the easting and northing numbers Example 19 T 504780 5086751 There are four unit options available under Preferences e mi ft miles feet e km m kilometers meters e NM ft Nautical Miles feet e NM m Nautical Miles meters Off Route After When tracking along a route with a GPS device tap the minimum distance away from your route that you want to reach before being notified that you are off route Onc
166. Tap Tools and then tap Go To Position 3 Tap a number or letter in the coordinate and use the up and down arrows to make changes Tap Go To The map centers on the selected coordinate location GPS Connecting Your GPS Receiver Before you can record a GPS log you must connect a GPS receiver to your handheld Once you have attached the GPS receiver to your handheld you must initialize the GPS receiver by updating the fields in the GPS Settings screen in Street Atlas USA Handheld Select your receiver your state or coordinate location and time zone for your area For information on updating GPS Settings see Updating Your GPS Settings Note NMEA compatible GPS devices used with Street Atlas USA Handheld should be set to a mode corresponding to NMEA 183 version 2 0 at 4800 baud To Connect Your GPS Receiver Use the following steps to connect to your GPS receiver 1 Attach a GPS receiver to your Palm OS handheld 2 Open Street Atlas USA Handheld The map view screen displays the last map file viewed 3 Tap the Menu button on your handheld to display the Street Atlas USA Handheld menu bar 301 Street 4 Notes Atlas USA 2009 User Guide Tap GPS and then tap Connect The handheld first attempts to detect the GPS receiver The GPS then attempts to acquire a Satellite fix This process may take a few minutes The position indicator on the map displays red when a Satellite fix cannot be obtained yellow when a 2 D fix i
167. The address book has a 200 record limit e You can resize and move the Address Book dialog box e You can resize the columns inside the Address Book dialog box 136 Using Address Book Contacts Centering the Map on an Address Book Contact You can center the map on any address book contact you have with the Go To function in the Address Book dialog box To Center the Map on an Address Book Contact Use the following steps to center the map on an address book contact 1 Click the Find tab 2 Click the Address Book button The DeLorme Address Book dialog box opens 3 Click the contact 4 Click Go To The map centers on the selected contact Notes e The address book has a 200 record limit e You can resize and move the Address Book dialog box e You can resize the columns inside the Address Book dialog box Editing a Contact In Your Address Book Once you have imported your address book contacts you may need to edit the information if your contacts have moved changed phone numbers etc Instead of importing the information again you can simply edit the information To Edit a Contact In Your Address Book Use the following steps to edit a contact in your address book 1 Click the Find tab 2 Click the Address Book button The DeLorme Address Book dialog box opens 3 Double click the record you want to edit OR Click the record you want to edit and then click Edit 4 Edit the applicable information 5 If
168. Undo button under Edit Symbol e To repeat an action click the Redo button under Edit Symbol Pasting a Bitmap into XSym You can copy a bitmap or part of a bitmap to the clipboard and paste the image into DeLorme XSym to use as a symbol Ideally the pasted bitmap should be 24 x 24 pixels in size You can assign a new symbol name for the symbol to help locate it under the Find tab in the DeLorme mapping program To Paste a Bitmap into XSym Use the following steps to paste a bitmap into XSym 1 Click the Draw tab 2 Click and hold the Symbol MapNote Text Label I mage tool fT Pp to view its hidden options Select the Symbol tool m 3 Under Symbols select the symbol set that contains the symbol you want to edit 4 Click Edit The DeLorme XSym dialog box opens 5 Under Symbols in Set click New to clear the Symbol Editing Grid 6 Open a bitmap in another image editing program and select the bitmap or a part of the bitmap you want to copy Press CTRL C on your keyboard to copy the selection to the clipboard 7 Click the Paste button B under Edit Symbol The copied image is pasted into the current symbol in the Symbol Editing Grid See important Notes below 8 Use the tools in the Draw Tool Box and under Transparency and Anchor to edit the symbol e To undo the last action click the Undo button under Edit Symbol e To repeat the last action click the Redo button under Edit Symbol 9 To assign a sy
169. User Guide Viewing the Contents of a Draw File Once you create a draw file draw road waypoint or track layer you can view the contents of that file using the More button in the File view of the Draw tab To View the Contents of a Draw File Use the following steps to view the contents of a draw road waypoint or track file 1 Click the Draw tab 2 Click File to open the draw file editing area All the files you have created display in a table A draw file with a selected check box displays on the map Click to select the file that includes the contents you want to view Click More The tab area increases in height and the file contents table displays The information that displays in the table is dependent on the file type that is selected e Draw layer contents include the draw object label name comments about the draw object the URL assigned when the draw object was added to the map the date and time the object was last modified and the draw object type symbol line polygon circle etc e Road layer contents include the routable road name comments about the routable road the URL assigned when the routable road was added to the map the date and time the routable road was last modified and the length of the road in the measurement chosen in the Display settings e Waypoint layer contents include comments about the waypoint the URL assigned when the waypoint was added to the map the date and time the way
170. a Palm OS Handheld 0 cceceee eect e eee eee teeta ened 322 Reversing the Direction of a Route on a Palm OS Handheld ccceeeee eens 322 Measuring Distance on a Palm OS Handheld cccececeeee eee eee teeta teeta eed 323 Tracking Overview for Palm OS Handheld 00 cece eeee cece eee eee ates teeta ened 323 Tracking to a Map Feature on a Palm OS Handheld cccccccceseeeseeeeeeeeeeaes 324 Table Of Contents Tracking to a Waypoint on a Palm OS Handheld cccecceeseeseeeeeeeeeeeneeenes 325 Tracking to an Address Book Entry on a Palm OS Handheld liian 326 Tracking Along a Route on a Palm OS Handheld ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 326 Using the Navigation Panel on a Palm OS Handheld cccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeenes 327 Moving Files on a Palm OS Handheld cccece cece eee eee ee eens eee a teeta ene ened 328 Pocket PG Hel pits egsueceerad iti e cavlad eivse obvi DEY Seed bev ad ela ees etic 329 Viewing Maps on Your Pocket PC Device 0 cece ee eee eee eee eee teeta ene eaeeae eee 329 Renaming a Map File on a Pocket PC DeVICC eee cece cent eee eee e eaten eee eeeeenenae 330 Deleting a Map File on a Pocket PC Device 0 cee eee cette eee e ee teeta ene en aed 330 Showing Hiding Raster and or Vector Data On Your Map on a Pocket PC 331 The Data Screen on a Pocket PC DeVICE cece cece eect eee teeta e neta ene n eed 33
171. a eed 250 viii Table Of Contents Training the Speech Recognition Engine cc cece eee eee eee ee teens eae eae ed 251 Voice COMMANAS oe iu see eevee ein seas Sedans we eda sede oe ele ea va eden eda iene eee 252 Speech Recognition TipS ce cece eee eee eee eee ee ene ene eee e enter eee een enae 255 Changing Voice Outputs nec yui aena esas a eve eh gee dane en be aeaa 256 VOICE Preference E hahaa seed oa Gerh de dvsness DAs vere ing bibs A Aah inasizg 257 Voice Prompts wvs 2efeeceeies ede laevis Fovscaeyete Ea aa gets EKAA begs ede ee bade ea eee eee 258 Using Handheld DeVIC S 0 ccc cece eee tenner een eee ene e eaten need 261 Handheld Ex port e cigeniidscesbbs laste este i pdededasehapeeedea dead cd desu Lia DEEG Ar aA DEEA sees 261 Setting Your Handheld Export Preferences cceceeee eee eee eee teeta eee ee teeta 261 Exporting a Map to a Handheld DeVICE c cece eect ee eee eee teeta teeta ened 262 Grid Size COMPAPLISONS in cesses ee cee ee ee eee wba eee ei ov ete bed ewe dis ete Kaa sede EEE ee 263 Exchanging Information with a Third party GPS Device ccceeeeee eee e tees 264 Sending Route Information to a Third party GPS DeViCE ccceeeee eee ee eae 264 Sending Tracks to Your Third party GPS DeVICC cece cece eee eee eee teen eae 265 Sending Waypoints to Your Third party GPS DeVICE cccc cece eseeeeeneeeeeeenes 266 Receiving a Route Fr
172. a line arc spline click and hold the Line Arc Spline tool 189 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide A and select the tool you want Then select the line style width if available and color for your line arc spline 3 Select the Coordinate option or use the Distance and Bearing Angle option in conjunction with the Coordinate option and enter the appropriate coordinates or numbers into the corresponding text boxes to the right of the text style options box Note If you are placing an arc enter new numbers into the Distance and Bearing Angle text boxes for the two base points of the arc only When the central shape point of the arc is selected the text options change from Distance and Bearing Angle to Radius and Direction Enter the appropriate radius number and direction to change the radius for this point 4 Click Apply and repeat the procedure for the second point The line object displays on the map at those coordinates distance and bearing or angle OR After placing the first point coordinate move your pointer to the map screen and place the other points by hand by clicking on the screen 5 To place additional points lines or other draw objects on the map in reference to the first line enter a specific distance and bearing into the corresponding text boxes and click Apply Joining and Breaking Linear Objects You can join two or more routable roads tracks lines arcs or splines into a single entity You c
173. a specific location Street Atlas USA offers powerful search tools that enable you to locate any place in the United States or Canada In addition you can search for places along your route within a certain radius of the current map center or within a particular region To access the search features in Street Atlas USA click the Find tab For more information on searching for specific locations see Performing a Basic Search Performing a POI Search Performing an Advanced Search and Finding POIs Near Your Current Location e How can find all of the nearby points of interest Right click your location on the map click Find Travel POIs and then click the distance you want to search within 1 mile 5 miles or 10 miles The points of interest display in Find tab results area OR If you are tracking with a GPS device do a radar search to locate points of interest within a designated distance of your current GPS position e How dol perform an Along the Way search in the Find tab and print my results You can search for names or categories along your current route by doing an advanced search in the Find tab You can then print your search results using the Along the Way print option Use the following steps to search for a name category along your current route and print the results 1 Click the Find tab and then click Advanced The Advanced dialog area displays 2 Select Category from the From drop down list 3 Select
174. a tbe 25 Aboutsthe nterface sites ssc cues venseeindd aunt te leds taa dda a EAE ede EN EAA ANa 25 Tab Ane a ixtecncnce E E oumiack peddathus crate dcite net ota nade E Aathinasta te 25 Control Panels repeii niai ey ee vig ede eee Oe ele eed viv eee veined eee eevee 26 OVERVIEW Ma Piia niken e aa abit ase aa a a a a te erai 27 BROO oTe 1 Ea E EE E A T E E A E 27 Using the Help System ssssessssssssssrrrresrsrrrrsrssrerrsterrirnsnsrerrntnnrerrnnnnerrrrrnnet 28 Help OVerview sesira ae aaa ed eased dee veel AKEE A ee piace dew TEE R a 28 Using the Help SyStem 0 cc ecee eee eee een aa EEKE tne eee eee 29 Help Documentation COnventiOns 0 ccc cece eee eee eee eee neta e ee eee nee eaee 30 User Guide see fears ie ea had ot eine den eh eves ea ernd EA Aa E Ea C EA Eai 31 TULOMIGIS EEEE EREA E Sehncetis sh shia tere clot bhi anh A eur tete ally ket A al tose oh bahia iat 33 Tutorial Downloading Imagery c cece eee cece e ee eee teeta e ee tena na ena 33 Tutorial Creating a Route cece terete eee ene teeta eee tena naenaee 37 Tutorial Routing with GPS Tab VieW c cece cece eee eee eee e neta eae eee ene 39 Tutorial Routing with GPS NavMode c cece cence eee eee ee eee ee eee e eae nates 41 Tutorial Finding Points of InteresSt s ssssssssssrssserrrsrsrrrrrnrsrrrrrnnnsrrrrrrnererrnn 45 Tutorial Phone Tab Results by Road ssssssssrssssrirrrsssrerrrnssrrrrrrsrerrrr
175. ackground Color of a Printed Map 116 Changing the Data Zoom Level of the Map on a Pocket PC Device 334 Changing the Data Zoom Level on a Palm OS Handheld 292 Changing the Map Colors 5 82 Changing the Map Magnification 83 Changing the Properties of a Stop 222 Changing Voice Output 256 Channel View on a Palm OS Handheld aaa wuted al deve Siouse atonal ied 307 Channel View on a Pocket PC 346 Chart of Supported Coordinate FOrMat cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 23 Gircle S iccocseaas cakes 197 199 200 Clear Traller a eens oie tere 240 Compass ROSE 0 eeeeeee eee e eee ees 26 Connecting Data iecere 97 Connecting Your GPS Device to a Pocket Pinnonen es 341 Connecting Your GPS Receiver on a Palm OS Handheld 0006 301 Contact Information 365 370 387 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide Control Panel 26 Converting a Route to a GPS Log 232 Converting MapTags to MapNotes 132 Coordinate Formats 23 Coordinates 85 243 Copy Symbol to Waypoint 174 Copy to Active Road Layer 174 Copy to Active Track Layer 174 Copy to Active Trail Layer 174 Copy to Draw Object 6068 174 Copy Track to GPS Log 465 174 Copying a Draw File 6068 173 Copying a Draw Object From One Draw File to Another 176 Copying a Map Line to a Draw File 170
176. acks text symbols MapNotes images lines arcs splines circles polygons and rectangles to your map with the tools provided in the Draw tab To work with existing draw objects you must first open the existing map file that contains the object or draw file For more information click the link for the version of the product you are using Street Atlas USA Plus OR regular Street Atlas USA with Advanced File Management What is a Draw File Imagine a draw file as a sheet of glass laying on top of your map You can add various objects to the draw file to help enhance or pinpoint specific areas on the map but these objects do not become part of the map They exist in a draw file that overlays the map There are four different types of draw files draw road waypoint and track You can create more than one draw file and overlay one on top of the other while still viewing the map beneath See Editing Locking Draw Files in this section A draw file is automatically generated the first time you add a draw object to the map You can save draw objects in a single draw file or in multiple draw files Draw files are saved by default in C DeLorme Docs Draw with the default name for example DrawLayer an1 with indicating the number order in which the file was created You can rename draw files to better identify your specific information See Creating a New Draw File in this section You can view draw files individually or with ot
177. ad to the road system on the map database Speed field When GPS tracking displays your speed as you travel Terrain Distance The 3 D distance of the profile accounting for elevation rise and descent Third party GPS device A GPS receiver manufactured by a company other than DeLorme such as GARMIN Magellan Brunton Lowrance Trimble and so forth Time field When connected to a DeLorme GPS receiver displays the Greenwich mean time Track To observe or plot the moving path of an object Upload To transfer information from a computer to a remote unit such as a GPS receiver VDOP The measure of how much the geometry of the satellites affects the vertical position estimate Waypoints Marked positions with specific coordinates that can be downloaded or uploaded Zone A named grid system of any of the UTM UPS MGRS or State Plane coordinate systems and used as a basis for coordinate display For example UTM zone 19 specifies the six degree swath between longitude 66W to 72W and running from 84S to 80N Another example is zone ME W in the State Plane coordinate system which specifies an area that covers the western half of Maine When using one these coordinate systems the current zone and coordinates east and north the eastings and northings of the zone origin are displayed 17 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide Basic Functions Zooming In and Out You can use the drag and zoom feature zoom tools or the da
178. adian Postal Data product based on input from STC data files Statistics Canada information is used with the permission of Statistics Canada Users are forbidden to copy this material and or re disseminate the data in an original or modified form for commercial purposes without the expressed permission of Statistics Canada Information on the availability of the wide range of data from Statistics Canada can be obtained from Statistics Canada s Regional Offices its World Wide Web site at http www statcan ca and its toll free access number 1 800 263 1136 Copyright 2008 DeLorme All rights reserved Important Notices Patent and Copyright Notice Street Atlas USA StreetAtlas USA Plus is a limited field of use license under United States Patent law including the following patents owned by DeLorme U S Pat Nos 4 972 319 5 030 117 5 559 707 5 802 492 and 6 321 158 Other patents pending All software data compilations screen displays and map printouts are all protected by U S and foreign copyright and owned by DeLorme or its licensors Purchaser of license acquires no rights that are not specifically set forth in the License Agreement included in the documentation U S Government Rights in Commercial Software Use duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions set forth in the commercial computer software license agreement under which the software is delivered by DeLorme and as provided in DFARS 227 720
179. ale reference length on the map AND OR Select the Zoom check box to display the current data zoom level on the map Click the location on the map where you want to add the graphic Once you place the Scale Bar on the map you can resize it by dragging any of the white boxes on the corners sides of the graphic To Add an Image to Your Map Use the following steps to add an image to your map Click the Print tab and then click the Map subtab Select your Map and Print Layout options For more information see Printing a Map on page 109 Under Layout Tools click and hold the text and graphics button to reveal the hidden text and graphic tools Click the Image tool i Click the location on the map where you want to add your image The Select Image File dialog box opens You can reposition the image at any time by dragging it to the new position 113 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide 6 Select an image file jpg omp or gif to place on your map and then click Open The image displays on the map and the file name displays in the text box next to the Image tool under Layout Tools You can update the image at any time by clicking the Browse button and browsing to an alternative image 7 Select the Maintain Aspect Ratio check box to maintain the image s width to height ratio while resizing 8 Select the Preview I mage check box to preview the image on the map Aligning Text and Graphic Items on Your Map USA Plu
180. also access Data screen commands Delete Go To Details and Beam by tapping the Data screen menu bar or the menu button to display the Command drop down menu 287 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide Renaming a Map File on a Palm OS Handheld Map file names are derived from the text you typed in the Name text box on the Handheld Export tab in your DeLorme mapping application You can rename any map file installed on your Palm OS handheld To Rename a Map File Use the following steps to rename a map file 1 Tap the Menu button to display the Street Atlas USA Handheld menu bar 2 From the Data menu tap Maps to view the Data screen The list of maps you have installed displays under the Source selection box Notes e An eye symbol to the right of the map file name indicates the map s currently displayed on the map view screen e Acard symbol amp located to the right of the map file name indicates map files stored on an attached storage card For more information on using a storage card see Moving Files 3 Tap the map file you want to rename and then tap Details The Item Info dialog box opens 4 Tap Rename and enter a name for the file in the Save As dialog box Tap OK to accept the name change or tap Cancel to return to the Item Info screen without changing the file name 5 Tap Done to return to the Data screen 6 Tap Done to return to the map view screen Notes e Tap Beam to beam selected map files to anot
181. an overview of the tracking feature see Tracking Overview To Track to a Waypoint Use the following steps to track to a waypoint 1 Tap the Track button m The Select Track screen displays OR Tap Tools and then tap Tracking The Select Track screen displays 2 In the Source box tap Wpts The list of waypoints you have added displays 3 Tap the waypoint you want to track toward and then tap Start Tracking The destination from the waypoint to the screen center or your GPS position displays in the Information Area The map view screen displays the Tracking icon indicating the direction of track to the selected waypoint s destination point if the destination is off the current map view If you have the Navigation Panel enabled a compass direction displays along with the name of your destination Below that area two drop down menus let you choose to display the time to finish heading elevation etc If you do not have the Navigation Panel enabled the Info Area displays the distance and bearing to the destination 4 Drag the map to the destination point or tap the icon to center the map on the waypoint If tracking while connected to a GPS receiver the map pans as you move toward your destination point Notes To discontinue a tracking session tap the Track button or tap Tools and then tap Tracking to open the Select Track screen tap Stop Tracking and then tap ok to exit the Select Track screen The map view screen display
182. an also break routable roads tracks lines or splines You cannot break arcs To Join Use the following steps to join linear objects 1 Click the Draw tab 2 Click the Select tool N press and hold the SHIFT key on the keyboard and select any lines arcs or splines you want to join OR Click the Select tool A and drag a box around the linear objects you want to join Note When joining the preceding types of line objects you can mix and match lines arcs and splines The result is always a line However when you join multiple splines the resulting joined object is a spline 3 Right click point to Manage Draw and then click J oin Lines OR Join the lines by pressing CTRL J or the keyboard shortcut combination you assigned for the joining function The selected lines are joined Note Any other objects selected during the multi select process are ignored 190 Using the Draw Tools To Break Use the following steps to break linear objects 1 2 3 Click the Draw tab Click the Select tool A and select the line object you want to break e A box displays around the active line e The shape points used to create the line display as small magenta squares Click the shape point where you want to break the line right click point to Manage Draw and then click Break Line OR Break the line by pressing CTRL B or the keyboard shortcut combination you assigned for the breaking function The line is broken in
183. ances including without limitation any applicable privacy do not call telemarketing or related statutes regulations or ordinances End User shall defend and indemnify DeLorme including attorney fees against any claims arising out of the violation by End User of this License Agreement Export of phone data is limited to one thousand 1 000 records at any one time Phone data may not be used in conjunction with any autodialer or similar device or for call center or telemarketing purposes Copy Services You may use a commercial copy service to reproduce paper copies that are authorized by this Agreement NetLink Tab All data downloaded or purchased through the NetLink Tab is subject to DeLorme s specific data use license agreement associated with those products Commercial use of NetLink data is prohibited TopoBird data use is limited to recreational or personal use only See DeLorme s website for TopoBird derivative data use license agreement 378 Legal Information You understand and agree that the trademarks trade names service marks copyrights and other proprietary rights of DeLorme are and shall remain the sole and exclusive property of DeLorme and that you will not hold yourself out as having any ownership rights thereto You further agree that you will make no use of such rights except as provided in this Agreement PROHIBITIONS ON USE No Resale or Distribution Except as expressly permitted in this Agreement you
184. and 4 for each map data type you selected in step 2 The minimum and maximum data zoom levels display to the right of each map data type 6 Optional Click Use Defaults to return the slider controls to their default minimum and maximum values 7 Click OK to accept the changes and close the Options dialog box OR Click Apply to accept the changes and remain working in the Options dialog box Notes e Raster imagery such as aerial imagery and satellite imagery includes color coded data zoom level suggestions under Zoom Range e Green indicates the data zoom levels at which the data is best viewed The default values are set to only export data zoom levels that are in the green area Red indicates zoom levels at which the data is available but not necessarily the best viewed Exported maps include only data that is selected in the handheld export preferences and is available for that region For example if you have aerial imagery of only Boston you cannot cut a map of New York City that includes aerial imagery Maps with multiple data types have large file sizes To decrease the file size when exporting multiple map data types try exporting raster data with small 261 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide data zoom level ranges The following list provides the optimum data zoom level ranges for each raster data type o Street Atlas USA 2009 Data Series 8 16 Street Atlas USA 8 17 Street Atlas USA Plus Street Atlas U
185. ange your file management option Note This option is available only for regular Street Atlas USA users e UMPC Mode Allows you to turn the default UMPC view on or off If UMPC mode is turned on the check box next to it is selected Click UMPC Mode to turn it on or off For more information see Using UMPC and Small screen Devices on page 279 Note This option is available only if you selected to optimize the application for a UMPC during installation You can also customize your interface e Show Tab Area Panel Allows you to show or hide all the tabs If Show All Tabs is turned on the check box next to it is selected Click Show Tab Area Panel to show or hide the tab area e Show Control Panel Allows you to show or hide the Control Panel If Show Control Panel is turned on the check box next to it is selected Click Show Control Panel to show or hide it To Add I mages to a GPS Location To open the GeoTagger Wizard where you can combine images with GPS information on the map click the GeoTagger button on the toolbar For more information see Getting Started with GeoTagger on page 283 77 Customizing the Map and Tab Display Display Options Overview The following topics explain the display options available in the Options dialog box e Displaying Basic Map Features e Customizing the Interface e Customizing the Map Features Preferences e Changing the Map Colors e Changing the Map Magnification Level e Changing How
186. ap ok at any time to return to the map view screen Finding a Coordinate Location on a Pocket PC You can use the Go To Position function in the Tools menu to find a coordinate location on your map To Find a Coordinate Location Use the following steps to find a coordinate location 1 Tap Tools and then tap Go To Position 2 Tap anumber or letter in the coordinates and use the up and down arrows to make changes 3 Tap Go To to update the coordinates The map centers on the selected coordinate location GPS Connecting Your GPS Device to a Pocket PC Once you have attached the GPS device to your handheld you must initialize the GPS device by updating the fields in the GPS Settings screen in Street Atlas USA Handheld Select your device COM port your state and coordinate location For information on updating GPS Settings see Updating Your GPS Settings Note NMEA compatible GPS devices used with Street Atlas USA Handheld should be set to a mode corresponding to NMEA 183 version 2 0 at 4800 baud To Connect Your GPS Device Use the following steps to connect to your GPS device 1 Attach a GPS device to your Pocket PC handheld 2 Open Street Atlas USA Handheld The map view screen displays the last map file viewed The GPS button displays to the left of the Track button in the menu bar Note The GPS button is a toggle button that displays differently depending upon the status of the GPS connection 3 Tap GPS and then tap C
187. ap the Find File button to browse for a particular route waypoint or GPS log Select a folder and file type All of the files meeting that criteria display Tap a file to view it on the Data screen OR If you selected Maps in step 2 you can tap the Directories button to load multiple map files from a particular directory or to clear any map file directories you have previously selected 332 Using Street Atlas Handheld on a PDA Notes e Once you are in the Data screen you can change your source by selecting an alternate option from the Source drop down list The Data screen updates to show the files associated with that source e The tracking icon displays next to the route or waypoint you are tracking against e An eye symbol next to the map file name indicates the map s currently displaying on the map view screen e An hourglass symbol indicates it is a large file and may take longer to view The Map View Screen Panning and Centering the Map on a Pocket PC Device Tap and drag with the stylus to pan the map in Street Atlas USA Handheld You can also center the map in several different ways To Center the Map Use any of the following methods to center the map e From the Data screen tap Go To to center the map on the selected map waypoint the start point of a route or the start point of a GPS log e Tap a map feature located by Find and then tap Go To to center the feature on the map e Tap the GPS Off Map icon
188. ard To Calculate the Timestamp Offset Before Using the Wizard Use these steps to calculate the timestamp offset before you use the GeoTagger Wizard l E OOS 6 Click the Draw tab and view your track or GPS log Find a point on the track or GPS log where you know you took a picture Make a note of the time Start the GeoTagger Wizard and follow the on screen steps When you get to the screen with the offset option highlight the image in the file list The image timestamp displays in the Data Timestamp box Type the time you made a note of in the Matching GPS Time text box To Calculate the Timestamp Offset When Using the Wizard Use the following steps to calculate the timestamp offset if you are already using the GeoTagger Wizard 1 leer aaa 284 Click Cancel to exit the GeoTagger Wizard Click the Draw tab and view your track or GPS log Find a point on the track or GPS log where you know you took a picture Make a note of the time Start the GeoTagger Wizard and follow the on screen steps until you get to the screen with the offset option Using GeoTagger 6 Highlight the image in the file list The image timestamp displays in the Data Timestamp box 7 Type the time you made a note of in the Matching GPS Time text box 285 Using Street Atlas Handheld on a PDA Palm OS Help Map Files Viewing Maps on Your Palm OS Handheld Use Street Atlas USA Handheld to create map files using your DeLorm
189. as your unit preference Maximum One of five numeric list items 10 25 50 100 and 250 to choose the maximum number of matches you want to display For example if you choose the number 10 and the Find Results indicates 21 matches found the closest 10 are shown Match quality to sort matching feature names by those most closely matching the search text entry Match Quality results can range from 0 to 100 with 100 being the best text match and displaying at the top of the Find Results list Proximity to sort matching feature names by distance from screen center or GPS location Features closest to screen center or GPS location display at the top of the Find Results list There is no proximity limit 6 When all search list items are selected tap Search When the search is complete 300 the Find Results list box displays Search done at the top of the dialog area along with the number of matches found As feature name matches are found the list of search results displays Notes e Symbols to the left of the feature name match indicate what type of feature is listed ae Feature Type Line for example road stream railroad Polygon for example island water park Point of Interest for example placename landmark historic sites Symbol style varies Waypoint wpt based on the style selection made when the waypoint was added e Query results are sorted based on the sorting type match quality or pro
190. ate total distance duration finish location finish time finish coordinate and the number of readings for the selected log 5 Click Open 6 Click File and then click File Preview The map centers on your log location RWN Viewing File Details for a GPS Log If you want more information about your GPS log than just seeing where you ve been on the map the File Details feature in the GPS Log subtab can give you a variety of information about your journey For even more specific information about your log simply play back or preview your log and then right click a specific GPS point on the map to learn the date and time the point was obtained as well as the speed bearing elevation and GPS status for that particular point To View File Details for a GPS Log Use the following steps to view log file details Click the GPS tab and then click the GPS Log subtab Click Clear Trail to clear any existing GPS points from the map display Click File and then click Open Select the file you want to view details for and then click Open Click File and then click File Details A dialog box opens the following information about your log e Start time e Acquisition time e Finish time e Distance e Average speed e Maximum speed e Average elevation e Minimum elevation e Maximum elevation e Average GPS status e Number of the times the GPS fix was lost e Number of readings that were obtained e Acquisition street VR WN
191. ates of screen center the current time and the current battery level of the handheld or any tracking or GPS information until the next map action Navigation Panel Select On While Tracking to view the Navigation Panel while tracking or Off to view the Info Area while tracking The Navigation Panel has two drop down menus that let you view time to turn distance to turn time to finish distance to finish speed heading elevation time of day and battery level It also displays a turn arrow and the street of your next turn when tracking a road route or a compass directional icon for example N for North and the name of your destination when tracking against direct routes waypoints and map features Off Route When tracking along a route with a GPS device enter the minimum distance away from your route that you want to reach before being notified that you are off route Once you are notified an alert icon displays in the bottom right corner of the map display Tap the alert icon to recalculate the route based on your current GPS position To hear voice prompts while tracking to a map feature waypoint address book entry or along a route tap to select On While Tracking If you do not want to hear voice prompts tap to select Off 5 Tap the desired item for each preference option and then tap OK The map view screen or Info Area displays with the selected preference 314 Using Street Atlas Handheld on a PDA Waypoints
192. ational Trails BLM National Trails NPS National Association of RV Parks amp Campgrounds ARVC 374 www fws gov www blm gov nics nsht index html www gocampingamerica com WWW alrvc Org Conservation 202 354 6900 800 344 WILD BLM National Landscape Conservation System 202 208 3516 202 208 3100 or NPS Center for Recreation amp Conservation 202 354 6900 703 241 8801 Sharing Online Using Eartha Community Atlas Eartha Community Atlas is an interactive atlas where communities exchange their common experiences and location based information using shared customizable searchable maps You can geoplace photos on a map upload waypoints upload and download tracks and participate in forum discussions You do not have to be registered or signed in to browse the website If you want to post to a forum or manage map information you must register and sign in ala To launch the Eartha Community Atlas ECA wizard click the ECA button BP on the toolbar You can access the website from the first page of the wizard to open it in a new window If you need help with the Eartha Community Atlas website click Help on the toolbar Using MapShare MapShare lets you create static maps with or without route directions to send to your friends family and associates See the Using MapShare tutorial on page 55 for more information For help with e mailing maps and routes using the MapShare Wiza
193. ature is added to the route For more information on using the Find feature see Finding Map Features From the Add list box tap Wpts to use existing waypoints and to display the Wpt List screen Select the waypoint from the list and then tap Select The selected waypoint is added to the route For information on adding waypoints see Adding Waypoints From the Add list box tap Contacts Entry to use a contact as a point in your route Select the contacts entry from the list and then tap Select The selected contacts entry is added to the route From the Add list box tap Screen Center to use the current screen center as a point in your route Screen Center points are labeled as Screen Center when information for that location is unavailable 3 Once you have placed all of your route points you can reorder the points delete a point or add find search points waypoints contacts and or your screen center to your route 352 Using Street Atlas Handheld on a PDA Move a route point ahead in the route by tapping the route point and then tapping the up button Move a route point behind in the route by tapping the route point and then tapping the down button Delete a route point from your route using the delete button 4 Tap Calculate Once the route has been successfully calculated a Create Route message box displays Tap ok The route is automatically saved and the map is centered on the route start Creating a Road Route o
194. ave multiple routes and draw layers in a single map file With simplified file management you can save only one route and or draw layer in a single map file If you did not select to enable advanced file management during the product installation you can still change the settings using the Change File Management option in the Options menu For more information see Activating Advanced Simplified File Management This note does not apply to Street Atlas USA Plus users Moving a Draw Object to a Different Draw File You can move a draw object to a different draw file using the right click feature in the draw file list In order to move a draw object to another draw file a secondary compatible draw file must exist Moving a draw object removes it from the current draw file If you do not want to remove it but copy it to another draw file see Copying a Draw Object from One Draw File to Another in this section To Move a Draw Object to a Different Draw File Use the following steps to move a draw object 1 Click the Draw tab 2 Click File to open the draw file editing area All the files you have created display in a table A draw file with a selected check box displays on the map 3 Click to select the file that includes the contents you want to copy 4 Click More The tab area increases in height and the file details table displays The information that displays in the table is dependent on the file type that is selected 5
195. b 277 Using UMPC and Small screen Devices Using UMPC and Small screen Devices You can use Street Atlas USA with small screen devices such as UMPCs or Ultra Mobile PCs When you install your software on your device make sure you select the UMPC option If you install the UMPC option UMPC Mode is available in the Options G menu To turn UMPC mode off click the Options menu arrow and click UMPC Mode to clear the check box To turn UMPC mode on click UMPC Mode to select the check box next to it The default interface minimizes the tab area hides the Control Panel and shows only the toolbar buttons you need for navigating and tracking on a small screen however you can add or remove tabs show or hide toolbar buttons and customize the interface to meet your needs This screen is optimized for UMPC and is displaying GPS with NavMode T g amp ian 3 B JY rN Next Turn 60 MORE INFO 3D View Your Street Atlas license allows you to install a copy of the software on a portable device in addition to your computer Please see the license agreement for your software in the Legal Information Section for further information Street Atlas USA 2009 Plus Single User License Agreement Street Atlas USA 2009 Single User License Agreement 279 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide Using NetLink Using the Subtabs in NetLink You must have an Internet connection to use the NetLink tab Within eac
196. ber to the next full level Left Map Click the Zoom Out 3 tool to decrease the detail number by three full levels Click the plus button to increase the detail number to the next full level Click the minus button to decrease the detail number to the next full level Controls The data zoom level of the left map displays in the text area to the left of the buttons Press ALT PAGE UP on your keyboard to zoom out to the next full data zoom level Press ALT PAGE DOWN on your keyboard to zoom in to the next full data zoom level Use the mouse wheel to zoom the map in and out Rotate the mouse wheel to zoom in by individual data zoom level steps or hold the SHIFT key while rotating the mouse wheel to zoom to the next full data zoom level Panning Centering the Map Use any of the following methods to pan move or center the map Click anywhere on the current map view The point you click becomes the new map center When you point near the map edge a white hand displays Drag the hand to move the map in that direction Click the Grab and Pan button on the toolbar to drag pan the 2 D or 3 D map in any direction Click anywhere on the Overview Map The point you click becomes the new map center This allows you to traverse greater distances with each mouse click than you can within the main map 19 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide e Point anywhere on the black view box in the Overview Map window When the poin
197. best way to your destination avoiding the specified area Note If the route does not recalculate automatically the Auto check box in the Route tab is not selected Shue z Hoover R servoir h RS Z Livestensie i L Il worthington 43 mo tt a ORS _ RouterAvoid _ Groveport 3 7 Canal Winches i kenbacke Intl 54 Tutorials Tutorial Using MapShare MapShare lets you create static maps with or without route directions to send to your friends family and associates Step 1 Open the MapShare Wizard Click the MapShare button a on the toolbar to open the MapShare Wizard Step 2 Select the type of information you want to share Select Share the Current Map View a static map or Share a Route Map and Directions and then click Next For this tutorial we will share a route map and directions Welcome to MapShare DeLorme s Web based map sharing system that allows you to share maps and route directions with friends family and associates To begin select a sharing option below and then click Next Share the Current Map View Share a Route Map and Directions Manage My MapShares a Step 3 Select the route to share Select the route file you want to share from the Available Routes drop down list and then click Next 55 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide Share Route Directions Select the route file you would like to share from the
198. bject s active box on the map Editing a Track Once you download a track from a GPS receiver you can edit including reshaping or changing line color or width copy move or delete it at any time To Edit a Track Use the following steps to edit a track 1 2 3 Open the map file containing the draw file with the track you want to edit Click the Draw tab If the track you want to edit is not in the active draw file click File and select the draw file from the draw file dialog area Then click Done Click the Select tool A and click the track you want to edit e A box displays around the selected track e The shape points used to create the line display as small magenta squares Change any of the track style color or weight options of the existing track e To edit any label on a track click the Select tool select the line twice then type the label in the text box that displays next to the track e Reshape the track by dragging any of the points in the line to a new location When you select a shape point of a line segment within an active line e A small green circle indicates the start end point of the selected track segment e A small red circle indicates the last end point of the selected track segment e Select the Coordinate or the Distance and Bearing Angle option and edit their numbers Click Apply to initiate the changes Click Done to finish your edit OR Press the ENTER key on your keyboard OR
199. box a Showing Hiding Address Book Contacts on the Map Once you add contacts to your address book you can show or hide the contact information on the map To Show Hide Address Book Contacts on the Map Use the following steps to show hide address book contacts on the map 1 Click the Find tab 2 Select the Book check box to show address book contacts on the map and enable address book searching with the Find tab Route tab and toolbar OR Clear the Book check box to hide address book contacts on the map and disable address book searching with the Find tab Route tab and toolbar Notes e The address book has a 200 record limit e You can resize and move the Address Book dialog box e You can resize the columns inside the Address Book dialog box Deleting Your Entire Address Book Once you have created an address book you can delete the records it contains one at a time or all at once To Delete an Entire Address Book Use the following steps to delete an entire address book 139 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide 1 Click the Find tab 2 Click the Address Book button The DeLorme Address Book dialog box opens 3 Click Clear All A confirmation message displays 4 Click OK to delete the address book 5 Click Done Notes e The address book has a 200 record limit e You can resize and move the Address Book dialog box e You can resize the columns inside the Address Book dialog box Exporting Your Add
200. bs are minimized however you can change your display options If you are playing back a GPS log file the tab area is not minimized so you have access to the controls You can also route with GPS using GPS tab view To learn more about routing with GPS in tab view see the Routing with GPS Tab View tutorial on page 39 To turn NavMode on or off click the NavyMode ao on the toolbar When the button appears indented nN NavMode is on Note The button is greyed out A unless you have a GPS device plugged in or are playing back a GPS log file To learn more about using your GPS with your application see the Help topics under Using GPS Step 1 Get ready Create a Route Before you get ready to leave on your trip use the application to create a route using your current GPS location as the route start point and your destination as your finish You can create routes using the Route tab the toolbar or right click functionality in this tutorial we are using the toolbar lt Start from GPS Location j ri Start from Address Book Find POIs You can set up your application to automatically find points of interest using the GPS Radar option 1 Click the Find tab and click the GPS Radar subtab to search for your category of interest For this tutorial we want to know where we can find restaurants QuickSearch 2 If you select the Only in Direction of Travel check box you won t have to back track to make your next
201. c pop up tutorial again select the Do Not Show Again check box before you close it a l If you do not want to see any pop up tutorials click the Help button a on the toolbar and then click Shut Off All Pop Up Tutorials e ToolTips When you point to a tool for a few seconds a short label ToolTip describing the tool displays on your screen ToolTips also display in windows and dialog boxes when you point to a button icon or other feature e Information Boxes Several tabs contain information boxes Information boxes provide descriptions about the features and functions of the selected tab Help Menu Click the Help button T on the toolbar to view the online Help options and then click an item to select it Tip To access a Help menu item using its underlined letter click the Help button and then press the underlined letter for the item on your keyboard For example to access the Map Legend click the Help button and then press the M key on your keyboard 28 Getting Started Context Sensitive Help Click the Context sensitive Help button ol to help for the tab you are using in the tab area or in the Options dialog box Using the Help System The Help system provides explanations of all of the features and functions of the application To access the Help system click the Help button a on the toolbar and then click Help Topics or press the F1 key on your keyboard The Help system has three tabs Contents To vi
202. capabilities Note Click Audio Controls to access additional volume settings Use the Speaking Rate spin box to adjust the rate at which the computer s voice will speak A value of 50 is normal Voice Preferences To use voice navigation you must have a 2 D or 3 D GPS fix and a route calculated The Voice tab in the Options dialog displays a series of Engine Option buttons These option buttons allow you to view information or change preference settings in your speech recognition or text to speech engines Some speech recognition or text to speech engines do not support some of the preference options To View and Update Speech Recognition Preferences To change speech input preferences click the Options button EE Options on the toolbar or click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu then click Options to open the dialog box and then click the Voice Settings tab The following options are available under the Speech Recognition area of the dialog box Microphone Setup Opens the Microphone Wizard to adjust speech recognition whenever you change microphone or noise environments Speech Profile Training Opens Voice Training Wizard to train the engine to recognize your speech patterns This process may take 10 15 minutes to complete DeLorme Training Opens an abbreviated version of the Voice Training Wizard This dialog trains the system on DeLorme voice commands Add Delete Words Opens th
203. case use the right click Bring to Front Send to Back options so that each can still be displayed To Layer Multiple Text or Graphic Items on a Printed Map Use the following steps to layer multiple text or graphic items on the map 1 Click the Print tab and then click the Map subtab 2 Place more than one text or graphic item on your map see Adding Text or Graphics to Your Map on page 111 placing the text graphic items on top of each other 3 If one of the text graphic items you want to display is partially underneath another text graphic item select the item you want to display right click and select Bring to Front To reverse this step right click the item and select Send to Back Tips e To make multiple text and graphic items the same size press the SHIFT key on your keyboard and select each item Then right click select Make Same Size and select Width Height or Both from the shortcut menu When you attempt to make multiple items the same size the largest item is always the basis for the size change e To delete multiple text graphic items select the Edit tool drag the mouse in a down right direction on the map to encompass the items you want to delete and then press the DELETE key on your keyboard Changing the Background Color of a Printed Map When you print a map a yellow or black if you are using High Contrast Colors background automatically displays on the printout If you want a transparent background
204. cation display at the top of the list 7 Tap the feature you want to track and then tap OK The Select Track screen displays with the selected feature name under the Source box 8 Tap the feature name and then tap Start Tracking The map view screen displays the Tracking icon oo indicating the direction of track to the selected feature s destination point if the destination is off the current map view If you have the Navigation Panel enabled a compass direction displays along with the name of your destination Below that area two drop down menus let you choose to display the time to finish heading elevation etc If you do not have the 324 Using Street Atlas Handheld on a PDA Navigation Panel enabled the Info Area displays the distance and bearing to the destination Pan the map to the destination point or tap the Tracking icon to center the map on the map feature OR If tracking while connected to a GPS receiver the map pans as you move toward your destination point Note To discontinue a tracking session open the Select Track screen tap Stop Tracking and then tap Done The map view screen displays Tracking to a Waypoint on a Palm OS Handheld You can track any waypoint wpt you have added in Street Atlas USA Handheld For an overview of the tracking feature see Tracking Overview To Track to a Waypoint Use the following steps to track to a waypoint 1 Tap the Menu button on your Palm OS handheld to
205. ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 326 Tracking Along a Route on a Pocket PC PE E S E E E tate cea E 360 Tracking to a Contacts Entry on a PocketPC saarn tik casket entee nee 359 Tracking to a Map Feature on a Palm OS Handheld c0ceeeeeeees 324 Tracking to a Map Feature on a Pocket A OEE KE E O A 358 Tracking to a Waypoint on a Palm OS Handheld ccceceeeee eee eee ees 325 Tracking to a Waypoint on a Pocket PC a EA aaah A a Nae Bor WR at a 359 Tracking to an Address Book Entry 326 TrackLayer cccceeeeeeee eee eeeeeeees 161 TraillLayer seeen nern 161 Training the Speech Recognition ENGINE eri nanan pie a enei 251 Transfer File 103 105 107 Travel Package succeer 110 Turn Details cceeeeeee eee eee 110 Tutorial 33 37 45 47 50 52 55 UMPCs shctrrten rive ae 77 79 279 Updating Your GPS Settings on a Palm OS Handheld ccceeeeeeeeees 302 Updating Your GPS Settings ona Pocket PC Device c00eeee es 342 Urban Area Color cccecceeeeeeeees 80 Use Custom Map Features 81 Use High Contrast Colors 234 Using the Navigation Panel on a Palm OS Handheld cccceseeeeeeees 327 Using the Navigation Panel on a Pocket PC iri tetaschitanenenaeiaubet tan Cited da 363 Using the Subtabs in NetLink 280 Using the Transparency Option 213 Vv Vector oae aaa anay 262 291 331 Vertical Resize Tool cc cece eee e ee 86 V
206. ce a Rest Area with Facilities at data zoom levels 10 thru 11 Rest Area with Facilities at data zoom level 12 Rest Area without Facilities at data zoom levels 10 thru 11 Rest Area without Facilities at data zoom level 12 w Restaurants general Restaurants specialty Small City State Capital Unique Natural Feature at data zoom level 8 69 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide Line Features emys ooo epera SSCS Road Edit Features r ri r ri r ri r ri 70 Using the Toolbar Showing Hiding Toolbar Options You can customize the toolbar to show the options you use most You can also activate toolbar options that are not turned on by default To modify the toolbar 1 Right click the toolbar Toolbar options with a selected check box next to them are currently displayed on the toolbar 2 Click an item to activate or inactivate it in the toolbar Reordering the Toolbar Options To reposition the toolbar segments horizontally or vertically just drag the dotted rall vertical bar that separates each segment to the new location left right up or down You cannot move a toolbar segment above the top line on the toolbar To Create New Map Files ry To create a new map file click the New button O on the toolbar If you made changes to the map file that is currently open the Save Changes dialog box opens For more information see Creating and Deleting Map Files on page
207. ce of the measurement 74 Using the Toolbar taken Note When you pass over a point in a road measurement line or measurement area to which you can snap a yellow circle defines the snap point Click to snap the point of the measure line to the road or measurement object s point coordinate Press and hold the ALT key on your keyboard to disable snapping 3 To end a measurement line double click the last point of the measurement line The measure line displays as a two pixel wide yellow line and the total length of the line displays in a label at each endpoint of the line 4 To end a measure area hover over the starting point until the yellow snap circle displays and then double click the last point to the starting point The perimeter measurements display To View I magery You can view imagery such as aerial and satellite imagery within the program This data is available separately from DeLorme and can be purchased through the NetLink tab in your program however your purchase of Street Atlas USA entitles you to free imagery and data For download instructions see the Downloading Imagery tutorial on page 33 A i EN Use the Imagery button on the toolbar to turn imagery on and off select which type of imagery you want to view and also show roads on top of the raster data Note If no raster data types are detected the Show Roads feature is grayed out and no data types are listed To Turn Raster I mager
208. ce to next turn for road and direct routes Displays distance to the destination for waypoints and map features Time to Finish Displays the time remaining until you reach your finish point for road routes Displays N A when selected while tracking against a waypoint map feature or direct route Distance to Finish Displays the distance until you reach your finish point Speed Displays the speed while tracking with a GPS device Displays N A when not tracking with a GPS device Heading Displays the current heading direction of travel according to the GPS while tracking with a GPS device Displays N A when not tracking with a GPS device Note If you are tracking with a GPS device but not moving the Heading will be 0 degrees Elevation Displays the current elevation while tracking with a GPS device Displays N A when not tracking with a GPS device Time Displays the current time as displayed on your handheld computer 363 Recreational and Travel Contact Information Road Condition Construction Contact I nformation This list provides phone number and website information by state or province for road conditions and road construction forecasts in the United States and Canada For information in Mexico go to www travel state gov State Province Road Road Construction Conditions Alabama ae ae 334 242 4378 WWW www dot state al us 0 www dot state al us 0 al us Alaska 800 478 www dot state ak us 7674
209. ced file management Advanced file management allows you to save multiple routes and draw layers in a single map file With simplified file management you can save only one route and or draw layer in a single map file If you did not select to enable advanced file management during the product installation you can still change the settings using the Change File Management option in the Options menu For more information see Activating Advanced Simplified File Management This note does not apply to Street Atlas USA Plus users Changing Draw Object Types When you add a draw object to the map a draw file is automatically created that includes that object The draw file type varies depending on the draw object that was created Area Object Polygon Circle Rectangle Draw Layer Point Object MapNote Text Label Symbol Image Line Object Line Arc Spline You can right click a draw object on the map and change it to a road track waypoint or draw layer depending on the type of draw object you selected When the draw file type is changed the original draw file is maintained and a copy is made and switched to the new draw file type leaving you with two files the original draw file and the copied draw file which has a new draw file type 174 Using the Draw Tools To Change a Draw Object Use the following steps to change a draw object type 1 Use the Draw tab to place a draw object on the map 2 To change a
210. ces affect how distance and areas display throughout the program Use the following steps to change the measurement units for distance and area 1 Click the Options button ES baa on the toolbar and then click Options 2 Click the Display tab 3 Select the measurement from the Measurements drop down list e Statute Miles statute feet are used for small distances e Kilometers meters are used for small distances 85 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide e Nautical Miles Feet statute feet are used for small distances e Nautical Miles Meters meters are used for small distances 3 Click OK to commit the change and exit the Options dialog box OR Click Apply to commit the change and keep working in the Options dialog box To Change the Bearing Preferences Bearing listings are created as the result of creating route directions in the Route tab or from an Advanced Distance From search in the Find tab Bearing refers to the compass direction of a given object measured clockwise in degrees for example 30 or nearest compass point for example NNE and indicated from True North or Magnetic North Notes e Magnetic declination is the difference in degrees between True North and Magnetic North at a specific location e The bearing setting does not affect map appearance Use the following steps to change the bearing 1 Click the Options button ES scion fl on the toolbar and then click Options 2 Click the Display tab Selec
211. cess narrow the search field by selecting list items from the first four search categories below the Find text field e To delete the search text tap Clr Tap the down arrow next to the search categories Type State City ZIP Code Radius Maximum and Sort by and tap an item in each drop down list See the table below for descriptions of each search category In this Tap category Type All to search all feature types on the installed map file or tap to search one of the many specific feature types State All to search all states on the installed map file or tap to search an individual state Note The list of states is derived from the map files installed on your handheld City All to search all cities on the installed map file or tap to search an individual city name Note The list of city names is derived from the map files installed on your handheld ZIP Code All to search all ZIP Codes on the installed map file or tap to search an individual ZIP Code Note The list of ZIP Codes is derived from the map files 299 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide installed on your handheld Infinite to search an unlimited distance from your current GPS location or the screen center Other options include e 1mi 2 mi 5 mi 10 mi 20 mi if you selected mi ft as your unit preference 2 km 4 km 8 km 15 km 30 km if you selected km m as your unit preference 1 NM 2 NM 5 NM 10 NM 20 NM if you selected NM ft or NM m
212. copy To copy press the CTRL C keys on your keyboard To paste press CTRL V on your keyboard The newly copied object is placed directly on top of the original copied object To move the copied object use the table below aA Routable Road Track Press and hold the SHIFT Line Arc Spline key on your keyboard Polygon Rectangle and drag the object to Circle or MapNote the new location Symbol or Text Drag the object to the new location 178 To undo the move of the pasted draw object click the Undo button Bho undo the last action If you decide not to undo the last action click the Redo button El If you undo the first move of the pasted object the object is placed back on top of the original copied object To copy and move a single object select the draw object you want to copy press the CTRL key on your keyboard and drag the draw object to the new location If the item you copied does not successfully paste it may be because you clicked out of the map display To focus the cursor back on the map click inside the map display Then try pasting again Moving Draw Objects Using the Draw Tools You can move any draw object you place on the map using the Draw tab from one location to another To Move Draw Objects Use the following steps to move draw objects 1 Open the map file that contains the object you want to move 2 Click the Draw tab 3 Click the Select tool A and click the draw obj
213. created on your Pocket PC Once imported you can use the file in your mapping program To Receive Waypoints From Your Pocket PC Device Use the following steps to receive waypoints from your Pocket PC device a Pe ee 10 11 Click the Exchange button on the toolbar Under Device Type select Pocket PC Select Receive from Device Select Waypoints from the Object Type drop down list From the Save As drop down list select to save the waypoints as User Map Data Waypoints Click Next Select the waypoint file you want to add the waypoint information to from the Waypoint File drop down list If you want to create a new waypoint file select New from the Waypoint File drop down list and type the new waypoint file name in the text box If you want all of the waypoints to display with the current symbol such as the default red flag select the Use Current Waypoint active waypoint option If you want the waypoint symbols to match those on your third party GPS device select the Use Custom Waypoint Symbol Set option and then select the appropriate set from the drop down list For more information on creating a custom symbol set see Assigning a Waypoint ID to a Custom Symbol Click Receive From Device Repeats the steps for each waypoint file you want to receive Click Finish The waypoint information displays Tip You can also open the Exchange Wizard by clicking the Exchange button a on the GPS tab or the Handheld Export ta
214. cumulative distance of The total trip distance each successive line Note Tap the road type symbol segment in the route next to the desired route The total route distance at segment to center that route the end of the list of points point on the Map View screen Note Tap the bold point name The distance of the leg The direction of travel to center the selected route point on the Map View screen Using Street Atlas Handheld on a PDA 3 When you have finished renaming or viewing information on a route tap ok to return to the Data screen Note ActiveSync synchronizes only files located in Main Memory 4 If no further edits or information on route files are necessary tap ok to return to the map view screen Viewing a Route on Your Map on a Pocket PC Once you have created or imported a route in Street Atlas USA Handheld you can view one route at a time on the map view screen To View a Route Use the following steps to view routes you have created on a map 1 Tap Data and then tap Routes The Data screen displays the list of route files available on your Pocket PC device 2 From the list of routes tap to select the route file you want to view The route name is highlighted 3 Tap Go To The map view displays the start point of the selected route at map center Notes e Only the active route can be displayed on the map e You cannot view more than one route on the map at once e To view details on each route p
215. currently selected by selecting the dataset from the Use Dataset drop down list The records contained within the dataset display in the table below The Located To column indicates how each record was geoplaced on the map by Address ZIP Postal Code Street Coordinate Note You can adjust the size of the tab area to expand the table e Limit which records of the dataset display in the table by selecting one of the options from the Table Display drop down list Some of the Using XData Table Display options provide additional drop down lists to choose a more limited query For example selecting the Records by Placement option provides an additional drop down list of options so you can choose to display only those records placed to specific addresses only those records placed manually and so on Additional Viewing Tips The following list provides information on how to view records or obtain information about the dataset symbols on the map while in the Query dialog area To select records and view the corresponding symbol on the map To select one record click the record To select multiple records individually press the CTRL key on your keyboard while clicking each of the individual records To select a block of records press the SHIFT key while clicking the record at the beginning of the block and then click the record at the end of the block All of the records are selected To center the map on the selected record s
216. d Road St Street or Saint Mt Mount Dr Drive and Ct Court Street Intersection Use this search to locate the intersection of two specified roads ZIP Postal Code s Use at least a partial ZIP Postal Code to locate the covered regions The results display in a browse list Use at least a partial ZIP Postal Code to locate the covered regions The results are displayed in a browse list This means you are taken into the ZIP Postal Code database at the closest matching valid ZIP Postal Code You can browse through results in either direction to the first or last item in the database Use at least a partial ZIP Code to locate the covered regions The results are displayed in a browse list Name and or Category Searches for a specific name in a specific category For example if you want to find a particular restaurant in your town you would type restaurant in the Keywords text box type the name of the restaurant in the Name text box and then type your location information in the available text boxes For more information on category searches see Keywords for Category Searches on page 130 Note Category keywords must be at least three characters in length Category Searches for a category of items within the specified area For more information on category searches see Keywords for Category Searches on page 130 Notes 123 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide e In all category searches the Keywords field
217. d are tracking towards a road route a turn arrow along with the name of the road of your next turn display Below that area two drop down menus let you choose to display the time to finish heading elevation etc If you do not have the Navigation Panel enabled the Info Area displays the distance and bearing to the destination for direct routes waypoints and map features or turn information for road routes 357 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide Tracking to a Map Feature on a Pocket PC Use the Find feature to search for a specific map feature to track to For information on using Find see Finding Map Features and for an overview of the tracking feature see Tracking Overview To Track to a Map Feature Use the following steps to track to a map feature 1 Note Tap the Track button Ee The Select Track screen displays OR Tap Tools and then tap Tracking The Select Track screen displays In the Source box tap Find The Find screen displays Enter a name i e Main St 1 95 Town Park in the Find field Select any of the seven categories Type State City ZIP Code Method Radius Max Matches or Sort by choose match quality or proximity to narrow the search field Tap Search The find results screen displays the running list of matches e If you chose to sort by match quality the best matches display at the top of the list e If you chose to sort by proximity the matches closest to screen center or your
218. d on the map e The vector or raster check box is invisible when the map does not contain that type of data The Map View Screen The Map View Screen on a Palm OS Handheld The map view screen in Street Atlas USA Handheld is the area where map files created in your DeLorme mapping application display It is also the area where you can access the menu bar in order to create routes add waypoints measure distances as well as other map functions The example below shows the map view screen with menu bar and Info Area displaying on a Palm OS device 291 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide LIE GPS Tools Options Menu Bar eDeLorme Map View De Lo tm E Welcome to Street Atlas USA Ready Info Area With the map view screen you can e Access all menu options through the menu bar e View the map e View map information in the Info Area Panning and Centering the Map Tap and drag with the stylus on your Palm OS device to pan the map in Street Atlas USA Handheld You can also center the map in several different ways To Center the Map Use any of the following methods to center the map e On the Data screen for Maps select a map file and tap Go To e Tap to select a map feature located by Find and then tap Go To to center the feature on the map e From the Data screen tap Go To to center the selected map on the map view screen or to center a waypoint the start point of a route or the start of a GPS Log
219. d or Vector Data On Your Map on a Pocket PC Sharada dilate ES EE E 331 Sky View on a Palm OS Handheld 307 392 Sky View on a Pocket PC 346 SkyViEW aserne ia u ia 245 Snapping Draw Objects 182 Snapping Text and Graphic Items on Your Map isi parr aa 115 Speech Profile Training 251 257 Speech Recognition 250 251 255 Speed merria Te hein T E eedi 243 SPINE ssaa As 186 192 Start GPS a aa 234 240 Stop Prefs 222 225 DILLE OE AE OE 219 Strip MAPS cece eee eeee cette eee eee 110 Sun Moon on a Palm OS Handheld 308 Sun Moon on a Pocket PC 346 Supported Coordinate Formats 23 SYMDOI reelected secede eerie eee be 200 Synchronizing Phone Data with the Phone Tab cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 141 T Tab Configuration 86 88 89 Tab Manager ceeceeeeeeeeees 88 89 Text Label ccccccseeseeeeeeeneeaes 200 The Data Screen on a Palm OS Handheld ccecceeeeeeeeeeeeaes 289 The Data Screen on a Pocket PC DEVICE n e iaai 331 The Map View Screen on a Palm OS Handheld ccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 291 The Map View Screen on a Pocket PC DOVICE oo a naa Aaaa 333 Tips on Viewing Search Results 129 Toolbar 27 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 Town Borders secese rren 80 Track 166 171 187 189 193 195 238 239 240 265 267 RACKING aise ace ee 323 357 Tracking Along a Route on a Palm OS Handheld c
220. d route The minimum distance you can use is 500 feet the maximum distance is 10 miles Results are listed in the sequence they occur along the route from start point to finish point Note This search may take longer than other types of searches Type information in the text boxes to the right of the Find and Within fields The text boxes available are based on the selected Find and Within fields Tip A few text boxes are optional and you may get more results by leaving them blank To see if a text box is optional hold your cursor over the text box label or down arrow and read the ToolTip for that text box Click Search or press the ENTER key on your keyboard The Results list displays your search results with closest matching items at the top of the list Scroll or browse through the list of search results until you find the one you want to locate To center an item on the map select it and then click Go To or double click it A yellow MapTag displays at the location if the MapTags check box is selected Single click an item in the results list if you want to highlight it on the map without adding a MapTag or centering it in the map view For more information on viewing results see Tips on Viewing Search Results on page 129 Use the right click feature to copy search result information to the clipboard center a search result on the map go to select all search results add a result as a MapTag MapNote Detailed MapNote Wayp
221. d while moving files To Move Files To and From Main Memory Use the following steps to move map files to and from the handheld s main memory 1 Tap the Menu button on your handheld to display the Street Atlas USA Handheld menu bar 2 Tap Data on the menu bar and then tap Maps The Data screen displays and the list of map files you have created displays under the Source selection box 3 Tap the file you want to move and then tap Details The Item Info screen displays 4 Tap the information area next to Location The Move Package dialog box opens e The name of the file you tapped displays next to Move e The current location of the file displays next to From If the file is in main memory Main Memory displays If the file is on a attached storage card the card symbol and the name of the storage card displays The location you want to move the file to displays next to To If you have more than one storage card tap the down arrow to display the card names Tap the desired card name to select it 5 Tap OK to move the map file The Moving Data progress bar displays When the process in complete the Item Info screen displays Notes e Tap Beam to beam selected map files to another Palm OS handheld e You can also access Data screen commands Delete Go To Details and Beam by tapping the Data screen menu bar or the Menu button to display the Command drop down menu 328 Using Street Atlas Handheld on a PDA Pocket
222. dd your text A text box displays When not in editing mode you can reposition your text by dragging the text box to the new position Type the text in the text box To type more than one line of text press SHIFT ENTER on your keyboard to advance to another line Press the ENTER key on your keyboard when finished typing your text Under Layout Tools select the font style and size for your text from the drop down lists To underline your text click the Underline tool vj To change the color of your text click the Font Color tool mj From the Color dialog box you can e Click to select an alternative color Click OK when finished e Click Define Custom Colors and create a custom color by assigning red green blue or hue sat lum values Click Add to Custom Colors and then click OK Click the Align Left button to align the text in your text box to the left OR Click the Center button Z to align the text in the center of the text box OR Click the Align Right button to align the text in your text box to the right Click the Text Box Size button 5 if you want the size of your text box to grow with the amount of text typed The Text Box Size button is a toggle button If the button is not activated any text placed on the map is placed in a default sized text box You can resize the default size text box by selecting the text box on the map and dragging any of the white boxes on the corners sides of text box To Add a No
223. dheld to display the Street Atlas USA Handheld menu bar 2 Tap Data then tap Routes The Data screen displays and the list of routes you have created displays under the Source selection box 3 Tap Hide to hide the route which currently displays OR Tap Show to display the route that is currently hidden Note The Show Hide button is a toggle button 4 Tap Done to return to the map view screen The route no longer displays Notes e Tap Beam to beam selected routes to another Palm OS handheld e You can also access Data screen commands Delete Go To Details and Beam by tapping the Data screen menu bar or the Menu button to display the Command drop down menu 321 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide Deleting a Route on a Palm OS Handheld You can delete any route files you have created in Street Atlas USA Handheld To Delete a Route Use the following steps to delete a route file 1 Tap the Menu button on your Palm OS handheld to display the Street Atlas USA Handheld menu bar 2 Tap Data on the menu bar and then tap Routes The Data screen displays and the list of route files you have created displays under the Source selection box 3 Inthe list of routes tap the route file you want to delete The route name is highlighted 4 Tap Delete A message box displays asking if you want to delete the selected route file 5 Tap OK to delete the file The Data screen displays and the route file is cleared from the list of rou
224. dialog box Notes e When you save the current map file the following feature preferences are saved in reference to map features o Major map features preferences o Individual custom feature preferences o When you create a new map file the current map settings are used Click Use Defaults to return to the default settings Changing the Map Colors When you use a laptop computer while traveling it can be difficult to see the map display on your screen This can be especially true at nighttime or on a bright sunny day Changing your default map colors to high contrast map colors can make your map display easier to see 82 Customizing the Map and Tab Display To Change the Map Colors Use the following steps to change the map display EJ on the toolbar 1 Click the Options button OR Click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu Then click Options to open the dialog box 2 Click the Display tab From the Map Colors drop down list select High Contrast Colors to make the map display darker for improved in vehicle visibility Select Default Colors to use the standard display 4 Click OK to accept the change and exit the Options dialog box OR Click Apply to accept the change and keep working in the Options dialog box Changing the Map Magnification Level If you want to change the size of the map image but not change the degree of geographic detail on the map use the magnification settings in t
225. displays the direction of travel between your current position and your next waypoint relative to true or magnetic North Bread crumb trail A set of dots that display on your computer screen to record your progress as you travel CDT Central Daylight Time 13 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide Climbing Distance The total distance where the terrain is uphill Climbing Elevation The amount of ascending vertical distance Coordinates A set of numbers e g latitude and longitude used to identify the specific location of a point Course The azimuth and length of a line considered together CST Central Standard Time Current Elevation The elevation above sea level at a specific point Descending Distance The total distance where the terrain is downhill Descending Elevation The amount of descending vertical distance Differential GPS DGPS A technique to improve GPS accuracy that uses pseudo range errors recorded at a known location to improve the measurements made by other GPS receivers within the same general geographic area Dilution of Precision DOP The total effect of all error sources in locating a position DOP Dilution Of Precision Download To transfer information from a remote unit such as a GPS receiver to a computer EDT Eastern Daylight Time 14 Getting Started Easting The measure of a position relative to the x axis horizontal of a grid system Elevation Gain The differe
226. e and polygon tools in the Draw tab When you draw an area object on the map the area displays next to the object on the map If you click off of the object you can view the area again by clicking the Select tool in the Draw tab and then clicking the area object on the map 197 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide To Draw a Circle Rectangle or Polygon Use the following steps to add circles rectangles or polygons to the map 198 1 10 11 Click the Draw tab mno Click and hold the Polygon Rectangle Circle tool to view its hidden options Select the tool you want From the Fill drop down list select the fill style you want to apply to the area object Click the Fill Color button to the right of the Fill drop down list to select the color for your fill style Select an outline style for your circle from the Outline drop down list Click the outline color button to select a color for the outline of your area object Select the width for your area object outline from the Width drop down list Select the Show Measurement check box to display area and radius information for circles on the map as you draw the object To draw a circle click the location for the circle s center on the map and drag away from center to set the radius for the circle Release as soon as you achieve the radius you want The radius of the circle and the coordinates of the circle s center display in the corresponding text bo
227. e for each record e XData is available only in Street Atlas USA Plus e Supported file formats include Microsoft Access mdb mdw and mda Microsoft Excel xls Microsoft Visual FoxPro dbf dBase dbf Text files txt csv tab and asc e XData labels names and URLs cannot be more than 255 characters 147 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide To Import a Database Use the following steps to import a database into the current map file 1 Click the XData tab 148 Each dataset included in the current map file display under Available Datasets Note If the check box is selected it indicates that the dataset is displayed on the map Clear the check box to hide the dataset s symbols on the map Click Import to open the Import Wizard On the Select Data Source screen click Data Source to locate and select the file from the Open dialog box and then click Next Note If your file is not available in the directory as expected you may need to change the file type in the Files of Type drop down list If your data source is a csv or txt file complete this step If not go to step 5 The Select Schema screen displays Verify how the data displays in the columns If it is not displaying correctly under Schema Type select the option that separates your data into the appropriate columns If your first row is not a header row clear the First Row is Header check box Click Next The Assign Field Types screen disp
228. e route directions with the total time and distance OR Select Decreasing from the Trip Time Distance drop down list to start the directions with the total time and distance similar to a countdown 7 Optional To view a preview of your selection click View 8 Click Print Adding Text or Graphics to Your Map This Help topic describes functionality that is available only in Street Atlas USA Plus You can add text framed or unframed and graphics north arrows scale bars images to your map e To modify the properties of a text graphic item click the Select tool A and click the item on the map e To make graphic items added to your map the same size press and hold the SHIFT key on your keyboard or drag to select two items right click select Make Same Size and select Width Height or Both from the shortcut menu e After you add text graphic items to your map you can align snap or layer them on the map 111 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide To Add Text to Your Map Use the following steps to add text to your map 10 11 Click the Print tab and then click the Map subtab Select your Map and Print Layout options For more information see Printing a Map on page 109 Under Layout Tools click and hold the text and graphics button to reveal the hidden text and graphic tools Click the Framed Text tool Ti OR Click the Unframed Text tool eol Click the location on the map where you want to a
229. e Add Delete Words Wizard with the pronunciation wizard specific to your speech recognition engine You can enter edit or view the words in your pronunciation vocabulary Use this wizard when the speech recognition has trouble understanding a specific word that you are saying 257 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide Recognition Settings Opens the Recognition Profile Settings dialog Use this to change preferences for sensitivity and tolerance of errors in recognizing your voice Note Your application comes equipped with Microsoft English Recognizer Version 5 1 You may have a premium version for example Microsoft Office 2003 installs Microsoft English U S Version 6 1 Recognizer Select the most recent version To View and Update Voice Output Preferences To change voice output preferences click the Options button on the toolbar or click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu then click Options to open the dialog box and then click the Voice Settings tab The following options are available under the Voice Output area of the dialog box Test Voice Choose to display the preview voice dialog box for your text to speech engine Type in a sentence and click OK to hear it spoken Audio Controls Choose to adjust the speaker volume for all programs on your computer This is equivalent to the same adjustment in the Windows Control Panel Voice Prompts Directions spoken first or alone Proce
230. e Draw tab 2 Click the Select tool A and select the line object you want to break e A box displays around the active line e The shape points used to create the line display as small magenta squares 3 Click the shape point where you want to break the line right click point to Manage Draw and then click Break Line OR Break the line by pressing CTRL B or the keyboard shortcut combination you assigned for the breaking function The line is broken into two segments at the designated point and you can edit each line separately Note It is important that you perform steps 2 and 3 consecutively If you pan the map use another tab and so on between steps you may need to repeat the steps again to break your linear object Circles Rectangles and Polygons Drawing a Circle Rectangle or Polygon on the Map You can add area objects circles rectangles and polygons to a draw file in your current map file Area objects are those objects consisting of one or more closed line objects e Use circles to designate circular map features e Use rectangles to designate land boundaries or any other rectangular map feature e Use polygons to designate water bodies land boundaries or any other irregular map feature Once you have created an area draw object you can edit including reshaping or changing line color or weight copy move or delete it at any time Note The best way to measure a large area on the map is with the circle rectangl
231. e Move a route point behind in the route by tapping the route point and then tapping the down button e Delete a route point from your route using the delete button From the Method list box tap your preferred routing method quickest or shortest When you have added all the points to your route tap Calculate A message box displays when done Tap ok within the message box to return to the map view The new road route displays on the map view screen when the process is complete Renaming and Viewing Information on a Route File on a Pocket PC Once you have created a route in Street Atlas USA Handheld you can rename the file or view information about the route at any time To Rename or View Information on a Route Use the following steps to rename or view route information 1 2 354 Tap Data and then tap Routes The Data screen displays the list of route files available on your Pocket PC device Tap to select a route tap Rename and enter a new name in the Rename Move screen OR To view details on each route point and line segment in the route tap Details The following information is displayed For Direct Routes For Road Routes The point name labeled The road name with the name of the The leg distance nearest MaR Teatur The time required to travel Coordinate information for the leg distance each route point Line segment distance for segments between that AA point and the next The total trip time The
232. e You must have Street Atlas USA Handheld installed to view exported maps on a PDA To Send a Handheld Map Use the following steps to send a handheld map to a Palm OS device 1 Click the Exchange button on the toolbar OR click Ze Exchange on the Handheld Export tab to open the Exchange dialog box Under Select Device select Palm OS Select Send to Device Select Handheld Map from the Object Type drop down list Click Next Under Source select the map you want to send to your handheld device from the Handheld Map drop down list The maps saved in the specified location display in the list To view maps saved in an alternate location click the browse button and browse to the location Then select the map from the Handheld Map drop down list 7 Select the user you want to send the map to from the User drop down list 8 Select the media destination from the Destination drop down list 9 Click Prepare for Sync 10 Click OK to return to the Exchange Wizard 11 Repeat the steps for each map you want to send 12 Click Finish The exported map is available on your handheld device after your next synchronization operation oY o eS 269 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide Tip You can also open the Exchange Wizard by clicking the Exchange button E Exchange on the GPS tab or the Handheld Export tab Sending Route Information to Your Palm OS Device Use the Exchange Wizard to send route points or route directions t
233. e a DeLorme USB Earthmate tap Advanced to change the LED and or WAAS settings Then tap OK to return to the GPS Settings dialog box 9 Tap OK to save settings The map view screen displays Notes e After the first initialization all settings default to those created the last time you edited the GPS Settings screen e When you select a state the center of the state is used for the initialization Depending upon your location within the state you may want to tap a neighboring state closer to your current location e f your coordinates are in the UTM UPS system and you change the easting and northing numbers to values not found in the current zone the zone number and easting and northing values update to the correct zone which displays in the Coords information area in the GPS Settings screen GPS Logging on a Palm OS Handheld Connect a GPS receiver to your handheld and log your GPS session in Street Atlas USA Handheld To Log a GPS Session Use the following steps to set up and start logging your GPS session 1 Tap the Menu button on your Palm OS handheld to display the Street Atlas USA Handheld menu bar 2 Tap GPS and then tap Logging The GPS Logging dialog box opens 3 Tap the down arrow next to Interval underneath GPS Log and then tap 2 4 or 8 seconds Tap the record button to begin logging Optional Tap the pause button to pause logging Tap the stop button to stop logging Tap Done to exit the GPS Log
234. e check box next to the file name 163 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide e A draw file with a selected check box displays on the map e A draw file with a cleared check box does not display on the map 4 Click Done to return to the main Draw tab area Note for regular Street Atlas USA users This Help topic describes functionality provided in advanced file management Advanced file management allows you to save multiple routes and draw layers in a single map file With simplified file management you can save only one route and or draw layer in a single map file If you did not select to enable advanced file management during the product installation you can still change the settings using the Change File Management option in the Options menu For more information see Activating Advanced Simplified File Management This note does not apply to Street Atlas USA Plus users Editing Locking Draw Files You can edit the current active editable draw file You can also lock a draw file making it uneditable To Edit a Draw File Use the following steps to edit a draw file 1 Click the Draw tab 2 Click File to open the draw file editing area 3 Verify the draw file you want to edit is displaying on the map A draw file with a selected check box displays on the map 4 Verify that the file is selected in the Active column in the file editing area Click Done to return to the main Draw tab area 6 Click the Select tool A
235. e desired log file and then tap Go To The map view screen displays the start point of the selected log at map center OR If you have finished viewing log files tap ok to return to the map view screen Hiding a GPS Log on the Map on a Pocket PC When you create a new GPS log or tap Go To to view a log on the map the log points and line segments for that log display on the map The log continues to display on the map as you pan or perform other map functions unless you delete or hide the log To Hide a GPS Log Use the following steps to hide a GPS log while viewing the map 1 Tap Data and then tap GPS Logs The Data screen displays the list of GPS log files available on your Pocket PC 2 Tap Hide to hide the log that currently displays Note The Hide button toggles to display the Show button 3 Tap ok to return to the map view screen The log no longer displays Note To view a log again tap Data and then tap GPS Logs Tap the log file you want to view and tap Show The map view screen displays the start point of the selected log at map center Deleting a GPS Log on a Pocket PC You can delete any GPS log files you have recorded in Street Atlas USA Handheld To Delete a GPS Log Use the following steps to delete a log file 1 Tap Data and then tap GPS Logs The Data screen displays the list of GPS log files available on your Pocket PC 2 From the list of GPS logs tap the log file you want to delete The log name is highl
236. e ea T ai Aaa Gide eh Vid ENE evi ata ieee cede 233 GPS OVERVICW 2 Hiatt Fh santa dlateas Acad a a Ea a Aaa a a a E a E 233 Iitializing GPS ae oea a paaa aa a A Aa aa EA arataa aa 234 Using NavMode or GPS Tab VieW sssssssssssssssrssssrrerrsnsrrrrrsnsrrrrrsnsrrrrrersrrrrrnt 237 Tracking a Route with GPS cece eee eee eee ene nee need 238 Getting Back on Track When Off Course ccceee cece eee e teeta ee teeta ene eae eee 239 Panning the Map Automatically While GPS Tracking c seceeeee eee e eee e tees 240 Playing Back a LOg File eee ce eee ee etna aa 240 Previewing a GPS Log File cc ccccec cece ee ere aetna eee tenet ene ene ened 241 Viewing File Details for a GPS LOGQ eccece cece cence eee eee eee eee nett 242 Monitoring Your GPS StatuS ccc eee eee eee nee tee teeta ene need 243 Monitoring GPS Satellite Information cece cece eee eee eee eee teeta ened 245 Viewing Sun and Moon Information c cece eee e eects teeta teeta 246 ADOUt GPSrausisieciatetei sree ties partes ea aedtian ve nadia base E E el sebeaet aie 247 Using Voice Navigation and Speech Recognition cc cceeee eee ee teens teeta teeta ees 249 VOICE OVERVIEW is iaa a eel eee dete speedo teehee eatin cites 249 Voice Options OVErVieW 6 ccc cece eee een ene neat ne tne e ates 250 Activating and Monitoring Speech Recognition cccee cece cece ee ee teeta teet
237. e eee teeta eens 206 Editing a SYMON sriyrec vives Ped ein ees ed ee avian eget Phe eee ead ae ceed 207 Finding a Custom SyMbol Asiei ina 0c cece ee een ened 207 bMpOrting a Bitmap sisse aiir nae uh ea eira dake Yura beds e Irae deh pe ereda sendbeera oh 208 Copying and Pasting ccc ccc eect ee EE IEEE teeta tne eee 209 Pasting a Bitmap into XSYM cece eee eee een ene tae ne eee need 210 Dragging a Bitmap into XSYM ccc ccc e eee ee eee aetna ened 211 Removing 2a Symbol asriar eas eats ee eed Sas ned elie a enact a EE RARA 212 Draw Tool BOX ss cri ro eetan ribs eee eee tae ed eh nas ga ae a a ee eth eae eee 212 Using the Transparency OptiOn c cece eect eee eee nate eet teen neta eed 213 vii Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide Anchor Positions eisena eevee et ee bee eleven see a Wie a et AK EE ae SEEE 213 Cursor Position nas sn niae ete E SSE eee tio ea eee eee E ia 214 Creating a New Symbol Set cece cece eee eee eee teeta eee e eee ne teeta tetas 214 Opening a Symbol Set mses perso ek eres we atone eda ee eg vale dee ua te eed aE 215 ROULING asetit tet sitet earalee thy ese Gh Aras tele d beat E ie teak ea has cairo A A oS shred Saath ng 217 Creating a Route ie iie ceeecs irinin ithe ev is bed Sone Mey aa ian EEA nied aa eee cee 217 Adding and Inserting Stops and ViaS c cee ceee cece eee teeta eee teeta nae ea eed 219 Changing the Routing Method 00 cecceee cece
238. e eeeeeee ee ee teen eee eee ee en ene 356 xi Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide Measuring Distance on a Pocket PC cecceeeeee eee eee eee eee ee teen e ee tee ene en eed 356 Tracking Overview for Pocket PC cccceee ee eee e eee eee eee nett e ene e eat ee teeta ened 357 Tracking to a Map Feature on a Pocket PC ccceeceee eee e eee e teeta e neta teeta eed 358 Tracking to a Waypoint on a Pocket PC cece cece eee eee eee eee teeta teeta ened 359 Tracking to a Contacts Entry on a Pocket PC eceeece ence eee eee e neta teen eed 359 Tracking Along a Route on a Pocket PC cece cece eee cnet eee ee eee teeta ene eneed 360 Using the Navigation Panel on a Pocket PC cceceee eee e eset eee teeta e neta teeta eed 363 Recreational and Travel Contact Information c cece cece cece e teeta teeta eed 365 Road Condition Construction Contact Information cc cece eee e nets eee ee tees 365 Hotel Car and Airline Contact Information cceceee cece e eee eee e neta teeta eed 370 Recreational Contacts c ccc cece eee eee eee eee ee eee eee eee nena 373 Sharing Online us eek re ak bth ha Mor NR es DA I OU UPL 375 Using Eartha Community Atlas 0c cece eee eee eee tee a teeta ene ened 375 Using MapShatesvsowcrssiddet ess savioun aie yl seth eat E diaries cravat inet ye 375 Legal Information ec seen tga eaves a ees een a dvds eee eg v
239. e five columns and 3 rows your map is divided into 15 images Create Portable Maps You have chosen a custom device Please type your device s display parameters below Device screen Width 320 px Height 240 px Overview mode Columns 5 Rows Ep 61 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide Step 6 Create your maps Click Next to create the maps eh ee BGT pidi 62 Tutorials Step 7 Save your images 1 Preview your images 2 Click Browse for Folder and browse to location where you want to save the maps this is location you use when you sync photos to your device 3 Click OK The path displays in the Photo Image Sync Folder text box 4 Click Next Create Portable Maps Photo image Sync Folder Browse for Folder 63 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide Step 8 Close the wizard The path where your images are saved displays Click Close Create Portable Maps Your map images have been created in C My Pictures Aurora re oe Step 9 Sync the maps with your device Use your portable media player s software to synchronize the maps with your device If you have an iPod see the instructions below 64 Tutorials Synchronizing Maps with an iPod Use these instructions to synchronize the maps with an iPod using iTunes 7 1 Connect the iPod to the computer and open iTunes 2 Click the Photos tab Photos amp Sync photos
240. e location you selected To Save a Map Point as a Contact Use the following steps to save a map point as a contact 1 Tap a map point you want to save as a contact 2 Tap the information area above the menu bar 3 Tap Add to Contacts A confirmation message displays when the entry as been added Contacts are automatically saved in your Contacts database If a business address is available the business icon will display next to the contact in the Contact list If a business address is not available but a home address is a home icon will display next to the contact in the list If neither a home or business address is available for the contact a contact icon will display next to it in the list 4 Tap ok to acknowledge the confirmation message 5 Tap ok to return to the map view screen Find Finding Map Features on a Pocket PC Device The Find function in Street Atlas USA Handheld lets you search and locate features found in map files you have installed on your handheld as well as search and locate waypoints and contacts you have created on your handheld Search for features such as cities towns points of interest POI roads rivers streams railroads and parks To Find a Feature on the Map Use the following steps to find a map feature 338 1 2 3 Using Street Atlas Handheld on a PDA Tap Tools and then tap Find The Find screen displays Enter a name i e Main St I 95 Town Park in the Find text fie
241. e management you can save only one route and or draw layer in a single map file If you did not select to enable advanced file management during the product installation you can still change the settings using the Change File Management option in the Options menu For more information see Activating Advanced Simplified File Management This note does not apply to Street Atlas USA Plus users Copying a Map Line to a Draw File Map lines that you can copy to draw objects include segments of all types of roads and highways railroads power lines pipelines rivers or streams and grid lines To Copy a Map Line Use the following steps to copy a map line to a draw file 1 Pan the map and zoom to the data zoom level OR Open the map file with the map view you want 2 Right click the object on the map you want to bring into the draw file point to Manage Draw point to Copy to Draw Object and then click the object in the list The object is copied into the draw file using the current line style selections 170 Using the Draw Tools Note for regular Street Atlas USA users This Help topic describes functionality provided in advanced file management Advanced file management allows you to save multiple routes and draw layers in a single map file With simplified file management you can save only one route and or draw layer in a single map file If you did not select to enable advanced file management during the product instal
242. e mapping application and install them on your handheld device during a HotSync operation Create GPS logs add waypoints and create routes on the map using your handheld To View Maps on Your Handheld Use the following steps to view maps installed on your handheld 1 Open Street Atlas USA Handheld If you have already run the application and have one or more maps loaded the handheld screen displays the last map viewed Note If no maps are installed i e map files are deleted or not accessible to the handheld the No maps loaded on device error message displays 2 Tap the Menu button to display the Street Atlas USA Handheld menu bar 3 From the Data menu tap Maps The Data screen displays the list of maps you have installed Notes e An eye symbol to the right of the map file name indicates the map s currently displayed on the map view screen e Acard symbol amp located to the right of the map file name indicates map files stored on an attached storage card For more information on using a storage card see Moving Files 4 Tap the map file and then tap Go To The center of the map file is aligned with the screen center on the map view screen Notes e The scale bar displays in the units specified in the handheld application s preferences e Contour lines in maps cut with topographic data display in the units specified when the map was cut e Tap Beam to beam selected map files to another Palm OS handheld e You can
243. e name in the available text box 11 Click Receive from Device 12 Repeat the steps for every route file you want to receive from your device 13 Click Finish Tip You can also open the Exchange Wizard by clicking the Exchange button TE Exchange on the GPS tab or the Handheld Export tab ee Se eee Receiving a Track From Your Third party GPS Device If you have a compatible GPSdevice you can use the Exchange Wizard to receive tracks created on your device Once imported you can use the file in your mapping program Note When you open a track you ve imported from your GPS device you may notice that the track does not join existing roads Use the select tool in the Draw tab to snap the end node of the track to a road For more information see Snapping Draw Objects To Receive a Track Use the following steps to receive a track from your device and save it as a track 1 Connect your device to your computer 2 If you are using a third party GPS receiver you may have to use specific settings For example if you are using a GARMIN GPS receiver set your 267 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide Se ee ee 10 11 12 13 14 GARMIN receiver interface to GRMN GRMN For more information see your owner manual Ce Click the Exchange button amp on the toolbar Under Select Device select GPS Select Receive from Device Select Track from the Object drop down list Select User Map Data Track from the Save A
244. e of an address book contact user added waypoint or address Notes An address must be in one of the following formats street address city state OR street address ZIP Postal Code The Book check box underneath the Address Book buttons in the Find tab must be selected to search for address book contact names 217 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide 5 Select a calculation method the program adjusts the default calculation values based on your selection Driving Use this method to calculate the route when you are driving a vehicle Cycling Use this method to calculate a bicycle route Walking running Use this method to calculate routes when you are on foot Select a route type Road Shortest or Road Quickest from the drop down list If the Auto check box is not selected click Calculate If the program is unable to find an exact match for the item that you typed a dialog box opens with a list of the closest matches Scroll through the list of search results until you find the one you want to locate click the item to select it and then click OK Click Directions to view the route directions AND OR Click Advanced to display the advanced routing options AND OR Click Back on Track to add your current GPS position as a stop to the current route To Create a Route Using the Right click Function Use the following steps to create a route 1 2 Right click the map location where you want to begin you
245. e of the filled rectangle you want Fill Use the fill tool to fill an area of the grid with a color chosen from the color palette ER PROE OR N m N Using the Draw Tools Select Use select to choose an area of the symbol to copy from the Symbol Editing Grid and then paste into the same symbol or another symbol in the grid Using the Transparency Option The transparency option in DeLorme XSym lets you display a selected color as transparent in the final symbol image you place on a map within a DeLorme mapping program For example you may want to view the symbol object without the square of the surrounding background color You would then select the background color to appear transparent To Make Part of a Symbol Transparent Use the following steps to make part a symbol transparent 1 Click the Draw tab 2 Click and hold the Symbol MapNote Text Label I mage tool oo to view its hidden options Select the Symbol tool m 3 Under Symbols select the symbol set that contains the symbol you want to edit 4 Click Edit The DeLorme XSym dialog box opens 5 Select the symbol you want to edit from the Symbol Selection The symbol displays in the Symbol Editing Grid 6 Select the Transparent option under Transparency 7 Click the Select Color tool Pdl The pointer changes to a dropper tool 8 Select the color on the symbol you want to appear transparent The Transparent Color display box updates with the selected co
246. e option automatically locates the place on the route that is closest to your vehicle s current location GeoTagger a new toolbar feature provides updated image tagging features allows you to combine digital photos with GPS locations in a completely new way Refine your route by choosing the type of route you are creating for driving cycling or hiking includes appropriate speed and time settings Over 320 000 new roads and road names Option to sort columns of data in the File area of the Draw tab Advanced Find features for searching by category using keywords without having to narrow location Includes 40 of Data Download Dollars for all available datasets including new color high resolution imagery Datasets are now available for individual purchase allowing you to mix and match a variety of data Downloads require the use of NetLink and an Internet connection Improved Handheld Export tab Improved Info tab information for tracks Supports small screen devices such as UMPCs or Ultra Mobile Personal Computers Supports the Windows Vista operating system including recent model Intel chipset personal computers Frequently Asked Questions These questions are asked most frequently by our customers Where do find the map and other options settings All options are located in one in the Options dialog box To open it click the Options button ES on the toolbar You can use it to modify GPS voice
247. e route e To delete a stop or via select the stop or via in the route list and then click the Delete button e To change a stop to a via select the stop and click Make Via To change a via to a stop select the via and click Make Stop e Click Reverse Rte to reverse the order of all of the points in the route e Click Calculate if the Auto check box is not selected in the New Edit subtab e Click Stop Prefs to make a stop in your route a fuel or end of day stop For more information see Setting Your End of Day and Fuel Break Preferences in this section Note for regular Street Atlas USA users This Help topic describes functionality provided in advanced file management Advanced file management allows you to save multiple routes and draw layers in a single map file With simplified file management you can save only one route and or draw layer in a single map file If you did not select to enable advanced file management during the product installation you can still change the settings using the Change File Management option in the Options menu For more information see Activating Advanced Simplified File Management This note does not apply to Street Atlas USA Plus users Editing Roads You can change the characteristics of any road on a map to e Two Way e One Way NorE e No Left Turn NorE e No Right Turn Nor E e No Way e One Way S or W e No Left Turn S or W e No Right Turn S or W To Edit a Road Use the follo
248. e satellites a GPS receiver can determine your position anywhere on the globe GPS provides accurate information about coordinate position elevation speed and direction of travel Many people have discovered the benefits of GPS for tracking vehicles recording routes and much more How Does GPS Work The GPS constellation consists of 24 satellites each carrying several atomic clocks to ensure the most accurate time possible The satellites broadcast low power radio waves containing the satellite s identity code and the exact time to the nanosecond that the message was sent When a GPS receiver picks up a satellite signal it identifies the satellite and compares the signal time with its own clock The time difference represents the time it has taken for that radio wave to travel from the satellite to the receiver Since radio waves travel at the speed of light the time difference can be used to calculate the distance from the satellite to the GPS receiver The satellite s identity code provides the location of the satellite and the distance to the receiver creates a sphere of possible locations for the GPS receiver Without more information the receiver only knows that it is located somewhere on that sphere Two additional satellites are necessary to narrow down the receiver s possible position Each of these satellites sends a similar radio message containing time and identity information The GPS receiver checks the orbital location
249. e segment A small red circle indicates the last end point of the selected line segment The same spline with end points indicating a selected spline segment a ary rugi Bearing 249 2 M Leg 56 80 feet Tota 4 788 87 feet Notes e When you click the start or last end point of the line segment within a line draw object and the Show Measurement check box is available when using the Polygon or Line tool and selected it displays the bearing or angle of that point of the line the length of the line segment leg and the total length of the entire line object on the map e When you click the start or end point of the line segment within a polygon draw object a text box displays the bearing or angle of that point of the line the length of the line segment leg and the total area of the polygon on the map Points in Rectangles Circles and Arcs Draw objects such as rectangles circles and arcs also contain points but they are treated differently Rectangles Contain shape points at the four corners but the lines between the shape points contain no editable end points When you click one of these shape points a text box displays the width height and area of the rectangle on the map Circles Contain no shape points but have a central point that does not display until you snap it see Note below to another object Clicking the circle displays a central crosshair within the circle and a text box containing information
250. e you are notified an alert icon displays in the bottom right corner of the map display Tap the alert icon to recalculate the route based on your current GPS position Note If you never want to be alerted tap Infinite from the Off Route After drop down list Orientation Orientation refers to the direction on a compass in which the top of the map is pointing The default orientation for the map on the Map View screen is North Up which means the map orientation is north up There are nine options to choose from GPS Up current GPS heading North Up Northeast Up East Up Southeast Up South Up Southwest Up West Up Northwest Up Notes e If the map orientation is not displaying North Up a small compass displays near the scale bar to indicate map orientation You cannot change the orientation of raster maps If you attempt to change the orientation of a raster map and no vector data of that same location is available a gray screen will display and no data will be available If vector data is available at that same location the vector data will display with the changed orientation Voice Output There are two voice output options available under Preferences e Tap On to hear a voice when tracking along a 349 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide route with a GPS connection e Tap Off to deactivate voice output Note If you cannot hear spoken directions while you are tracking along a route the volume on your device
251. e you open the address book after installing a new version of your application however if you do not relocate the entries at that time you can do it later Important If you do not relocate your address book the entries may not be accurately placed according to the latest DeLorme road data To Relocate Contacts In Your Address Book Use the following steps to relocate address book entries except manual entries on the map 1 Click the Find tab 2 Click the Address Book button The DeLorme Address Book dialog box opens 3 Click Relocate All A confirmation message displays 4 Click OK to relocate the entries Notes e The address book has a 200 record limit e You can resize and move the Address Book dialog box e You can resize the columns inside the Address Book dialog box 138 Using Address Book Contacts Deleting a Contact In Your Address Book Once you successfully create an address book you can delete the contact information at any time To Delete a Contact In Your Address Book Use the following steps to delete a contact in your address book 1 Click the Find tab 2 Click the Address Book button The DeLorme Address Book dialog box opens Click the record you want to delete Click Delete Click OK to confirm the deletion 6 Click Done Notes e The address book has a 200 record limit e You can resize and move the Address Book dialog box e You can resize the columns inside the Address Book dialog
252. ect you want to move A box displays around the active object You can move Draw objects in different ways If the object is a n Routable Road Track Line Arc Spline Polygon Rectangle or Circle Symbol or Text MapNote Press and hold the SHIFT key on your keyboard and drag the object to the new location OR Press the arrow keys on your keyboard to move the object up down right or left Press the arrow keys on your keyboard to move the object up down right or left OR Drag it to the new location To move the entire MapNote press and hold the SHIFT key on your keyboard and drag the object to the new location or position your cursor between the MapNote text and the anchor and drag the entire MapNote to the desired location OR To move the MapNote s anchor drag the MapNote s anchor to the new location OR To move the MapNote s text drag the MapNote s text to the desired location Tip To undo a draw object move click the Undo button wW to undo the last action If you decide not to undo the last action click the Redo button Kl Notes You can also move draw objects or their points by typing a new coordinate or distance and bearing angle number within the corresponding text boxes 179 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide Type new coordinates and click Apply to move circles symbols text and MapNotes The whole object moves to the entered location If you change the distance and beari
253. ed Continue straight Bear right Bear left Turn right Turn left Turn hard right Turn hard left Go east Go west Go north Go northeast Go northwest Go south Go southeast Go southwest Direction distance modifiers spoken second dn distance in tenths of a mile Other spoken alone At finish was Destination reached 258 Using Voice Navigation and Speech Recognition Last leg Approaching finish Off route 259 Using Handheld Devices Handheld Export Setting Your Handheld Export Preferences You can customize your map export options so that you export exactly the map data types and data zoom level ranges you want to view on your handheld device To Set Your Handheld Export Preferences Use the following steps to customize your map cutting preferences 1 Click the Options button ES K on the toolbar or click the menu arrow and click Options and then click the Handheld tab OR Click the Handheld Export tab and click the Options button EE Options 2 Under Export Data Zooms select the check box next to each map data type you want to export with the Handheld Export tab Only connected map data types are listed 3 Under Zoom Range drag the left slider control to the minimum data zoom level at which to view the data 4 Under Zoom Range drag the right slider control to the maximum data zoom level at which to view the data 5 Repeat steps 3
254. ed the GPS Settings screen e When you select a state the center of the state is used for the initialization 342 Using Street Atlas Handheld on a PDA e If your coordinates are in the UTM UPS system and you change the easting and northing numbers to values not found in the current zone the zone number and easting and northing values update to the correct zone which displays in the Coords information area in the GPS Settings screen GPS Logging on a Pocket PC Device Connect a GPS receiver to your handheld and log your GPS session in Street Atlas US Handheld To Log a GPS Session Use the following steps to set up and start logging your GPS session 1 Tap GPS and then tap Logging The GPS Logging screen displays e To start logging when you start your GPS tap to select the Log at GPS Connect check box e To change the interval in seconds when points in the log are recorded tap the down arrow next to Interval and then tap 2 4 or 8 secs e To sound an alarm when system memory is low tap to select the Warn low memory check box The Memory bar displays used free and total memory on your handheld 2 Tap Start Log to begin logging Note Tap Stop Log to finish logging 3 Tap ok to exit the GPS Logging screen The map view screen displays Viewing a GPS Log on the Map on a Pocket PC Device Once you have created a GPS log in Street Atlas USA Handheld you can view the log on the map view screen To View a GPS
255. edia on which the System is furnished shall for a period of sixty 60 days from date of receipt the Warranty Period be free from defects in material and workmanship under normal use If a defect in the media appears during the Warranty Period return all materials to DeLorme for replacement or at DeLorme s option refund of the license fee Disclaimer of Warranty DeLorme does not warrant the completeness or accuracy of the System or that its use will meet your needs or be uninterrupted or error free TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW EXCEPT FOR THE WARRANTIES SET FORTH ABOVE THE SYSTEM IS LICENSED AS IS AND DELORME DISCLAIMS ANY AND ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE No Consequential Damages IN NO EVENT SHALL DELORME BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF REVENUES OR PROFITS EVEN IF DELORME HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES TERMINATION AND TRANSFER DeLorme may terminate this Agreement at any time for any reason including but not limited to if DeLorme finds that you have violated any of the terms of this Agreement or that you have attempted to exceed the licensed uses in any way Termination will be effective upon written notice to you Upon termination of this Agreement you agree to promptly return all copies of the
256. ee ead evi Lav ani iiaa 377 Street Atlas USA 2009 Plus Single User License Agreement cecceeeeeeeeees 377 Street Atlas USA 2009 Single User License Agreement ceceeeeeeee eee eaes 381 Important Notices osakond des entered padeeh ed E eed da ida reae dened vised nee E a ka 385 Apache Software License Version 1 1 ccc cece ee eee eee ete eee teen a teeta ened 386 INO OX oai iE ee ei leiden 387 xii Getting Started Welcome to Street Atlas USA Tips In the online Help double click a book in the Table of Contents to view all of its associated topics Click a topic to read its contents Additional information is available in the Technical Support section of our website Visit www delorme com to view tutorials search the forums and more The following features and more are available in Street Atlas USA and Street Atlas USA Plus Create a route by adding start and finish points on your map Customize your route by adding stops and vias Find a street address city town ZIP Postal Code coordinate point of interest and more anywhere in the U S You can even use the advanced search function to locate the intersection of two streets a specific category of map items such as landmarks along the current route or an area code and exchange Connect your GPS device to the program and track your progress on a portable computer as you travel View your next turn as well as the turn after that very h
257. eee 135 Importing Files to Draw Files 167 Importing Routes eee 230 Importing Tab Manager Preferences 89 Importing Transfer Files 105 INTO sede ete ee a tes e ira eee tae 76 Initializing GPS cece eee eee 234 Inserting Stops and ViaS 219 International Labels 055 80 InterVall sce vee feign oi anny 26 IPO asaan hi itr aa aT 72 J Joining Linear Objects 190 196 JPEG trna teaver d doves a hotest 20 K Keyboard Shortcuts 91 92 93 94 95 96 Keywords for Category Searches 130 L Labeling a Draw Object 184 Labeling a Route Point with a MapNote Gide Satabel seb deaty Sheeran he T 227 Large POI Symbols ee 83 Layering Multiple Text and Graphic Items on a Printed Map 116 Learning the Basics 6 0ee 9 Legend sirsiran eee be 67 EIN Gr i a aa ar ARA 186 192 M Magnification 83 234 Make Stop sssssssssssssssssrrsrsssrsrrrses 225 Make Via cceeeeeee ee eee eee ees 225 Managing Datasets 066 149 Map Center Crosshair 00000s 80 Map COl0rs cceeeeeeeeeee teen ee ea ees 82 Map Coordinates l es 26 Map Features ccceeeeeee eee 80 81 390 Map Files 99 100 101 102 Map Legend cceeeeeeeeeee teens 67 Map Rotation Tool 26 MapNote cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 200 MapShare aisn oaea a 7
258. eeneenes 275 Receiving a Route From Your Pocket PC DeVICE ccccece eee e esse eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeanes 276 Receiving Waypoints From Your Pocket PC DeVICC cccccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 277 Using UMPC and Small screen Devices 0 cece cece eee eee teeta nee a teeta ened 279 Using UMPC and Small screen Devices c cece cece eee eee eee ee teeta ene ea eed 279 USING NGtLINK sevens ccapseans creeks de seia eve wtb sade te sedes aA teense eben de ada EET a pegeesrustens 280 Using the Subtabs in Netlink cece nee eee eee teeta tee need 280 Receiving Product Updates and DoOwnloads cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 280 Using Geo Tagger asispa eae eee eerie Se ee eed dis ale vd Whe Wet ele boned ea aed Peis 283 Getting Started with GeoTagger cece cette eee eee eee neta teeta ene e neat 283 TAGGING an IMAG Os wes ara aei aaa teins EAE E weed atAGe A aa pad ia aTa TAa ATA 283 Calculate the Timestamp Offset sssssssssrsrssrrrrrrsrrrrrrnrerrrrrrrrrerrrrrererin rnern 284 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide Using Street Atlas Handheld on a PDA ccecece eect eee eee eee eee teeta ened 287 Palm OS Help onien i ee Sie peered cose eid aed wee be eee ae a eed ee 287 Viewing Maps on Your Palm OS Handheld ccceeeee cece ee eect ee eee teeta teens 287 Renaming a Map File on a Palm OS Handheld cceceeee eee eect ee eee teeta ees 288 Deletingza Map File sic cer
259. elect Send to Device 4 Select User Map Data Waypoints from the Object Type drop down list 5 Click Next 6 From the Waypoint File drop down list select the waypoint file you want to send to your device 7 Click Prepare for Sync 8 Click OK to return to the Exchange Wizard 9 Repeat the steps for each waypoint file you want to send to your device 10 Click Finish The waypoints are available on your handheld device after your next synchronization operation Tip You can also open the Exchange Wizard by clicking the Exchange button Ze Exchange on the GPS tab or the Handheld Export tab Sending a GPS Log to Your Pocket PC Device Use the Exchange Wizard to send GPS logs you created in your mapping program to your Pocket PC device To Send a GPS Log 275 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide Use the following steps to send a GPS log to a Pocket PC device Se Se 2 10 Click the Exchange button F on the toolbar Under Device Type select Pocket PC Select Send to Device Select GPS Log from the Object Type drop down list Click Next Under Source select the GPS log you want to send to your handheld device from the GPS Log drop down list The logs are saved in the specified location display in the list To view logs saved in an alternate location click the browse button and browse to the location Then select the log from the GPS Log drop down list Click Prepare for Sync Click OK to return to the Exc
260. elpful when you need to make a turn directly after another turn You can even use the automatic back on track feature to recalculate your route when detours veer you off course Use MapShare to share your current map view and even route directions with anyone Get free downloads of data and imagery for your area of interest Use Canadian data to create door to door routes in Canada Export maps to a handheld device Import your personal address book information and visualize your contacts on the map You can even use them as a start stop or finish route point or search for them using the Find functionality Create custom keyboard shortcuts to navigate the program more easily than ever Combine digital photos with GPS locations using GeoTagger Use the toolbar to create routes share maps open create save map files and edit your preferences Print high quality detailed single page maps or mural maps as large as 3 x 3 pages Print your route and or route directions Customize your map with routable roads text MapNotes and more And much more With the Phone tab in Street Atlas USA Plus you can also Search over 125 million residential and business phone listings Find residential business phone listings in Canada Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide What s New in Street Atlas USA GPS NavMode a new hands free full screen view that you can view in 2 D or 3 D GPS Radar results display on the screen GPS snap to rout
261. enu bar 2 Tap Data and then tap Routes The Data screen displays and the list of routes you have created displays under the Source selection box 3 Tap the route file you want to rename and then tap Details The Item Info dialog box displays the following The point name labeled with the name of the nearest map feature Coordinate information for each route point Line segment distance for segments between that point and the next The cumulative distance of each successive line segment in the route The total route distance at the end of the list of points Note Tap the bold point name to center the selected route point on the Map View screen The road name The leg distance The time required to travel the leg The distance of the leg The direction of travel Turn information The total trip time The total trip distance Note Tap the bold point name to center the selected route point on the Map View screen 4 When you have finished renaming or viewing information on a route tap Done to return to the Data screen 5 If no further edits or information on route files are necessary tap Done to return to the map view screen Notes e Tap Beam to beam selected routes to another Palm OS handheld e You can also access Data screen commands Delete Go To Details and Beam by tapping the Data screen menu bar or the Menu button to display the Command drop down menu 320 Using Street At
262. er 96 Use the Print Preview functionality in your Web browser to see if the list will display as you want it to If you do not like the way the list looks in the preview for example the list prints without grid lines in the table or does not print in color change the advanced print settings in your Web browser If you want to remove the header and footer text from the printout from the File menu select Page Setup Remove the text and the header and footer text boxes and then click OK Changes made to the browser s advanced print settings and page setup affect the printing of all Web pages Viewing Map Data Saving Data to Your Hard Drive If you did not install the Street Atlas USA map data to your computer s hard drive during installation you can do so anytime Saving data to your hard drive makes it readily available and improves performance To Save Street Atlas USA Data to Your Hard Drive Use the following steps to save Street Atlas USA data to your hard drive 1 Close all programs on your computer 2 Use your computer s Control Panel to locate the program and click Change The modify installation screen opens OR Insert the Street Atlas USA DVD into your DVD ROM drive Browse to the DVD drive on your computer and view the contents Double click setup exe The modify installation screen opens 3 Ensure Modify is selected and click Next Follow the on screen instructions to complete installation 5 When prompted cl
263. er is saved in C DeLorme Docs Draw Can I Reuse Draw Layers and Routes in Other Map Files After creating routes or adding your own roads you may not want to do all of the work again in another map file You can share routes and draw layers between map files using the Add button in the Map Files tab Can I Send Routes or Draw Layers to Another Street Atlas USA User You can package map files including their routes and draw layers into one transfer file The transfer file facilitates e mailing copying map file information to other computers and copying map files between DeLorme programs Note for regular Street Atlas USA users This Help topic describes functionality provided in advanced file management Advanced file management allows you to save multiple routes and draw layers in a single map file With simplified file management you can save only one route and or draw layer in a single map file If you did not select to enable advanced file management during the product installation you can still change the settings using the Change File Management option in the Options menu For more information see Activating Advanced Simplified File Management This note does not apply to Street Atlas USA Plus users 99 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide Creating and Deleting Map Files You can create various map views and save each in a different map file To Create a New Map File Use the following steps to create a new Map F
264. es of Type select the file type from the list If the type is not listed select All Files for example All Files 12 Click the file to select it and then click Open The imported draw layer displays in Street Atlas USA A copy of the draw layer is imported into the current map file and the original file is not modified e What is the difference between NavMode and the GPS tab view when usin GPS The default GPS view is NavMode a hands free full screen view that you can display in 2 D or 3 D By default the Control Panel is hidden and the tabs are minimized however you can customize your interface For more information see the NavMode tutorial on page 41 The GPS tab view option allows you to use the GPS tab to control navigating and tracking By default the tabs and Control Panel are visible but you can opt to hide them It is available only in 2 D mode To turn NavMode on or off click the NavMode button n on the toolbar When the button appears indented A NavMode is on Note The button is greyed out 7 unless you have a GPS device plugged in or are playing back a GPS log file Getting Started You can also change your GPS view in the Options dialog box 1 Click the Options button amp are on the toolbar and click the GPS tab You can also click the Options button a lon the GPS tab 2 Clear the Use NavMode check box to turn it off or select the check box to turn it on 3 Click OK e How do find
265. ew an outline of the Help system contents click the Contents tab e To view the additional topics under a particular book double click the book e To view a topic click the page Index Use the following steps to search the Help system index 1 While in the Help system click the Index tab 2 Type a keyword in the entry field The list automatically scrolls to the closest matching entry 3 Double click the topic OR Click the topic and then click Display OR Click the topic and press the ENTER key on your keyboard Note e If you don t find what you re looking for in the index click the Search tab and try a search for your keyword Search Use the following steps to search for particular words or phrases within topics in the Help system 1 While in the Help system click the Search tab 2 Type a keyword in the entry field and then click List Topics or press the ENTER key on your keyboard A list of topics containing the keyword displays 3 Double click the topic under Select Topic to Display OR Click the topic and then click Display OR Click the topic and press the ENTER key on your keyboard The Help system keeps a history of viewed topics Click the Back button to browse backward through previous topics Click the Forward button to browse forward through the topics previously viewed 29 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide e Print any of the Help topics by selecting a topic page with question mark or
266. ext for all categories check box to identify all of your records on the map using the Using XData same symbol without taking match status into consideration Note Click Edit to use XSym to create a new symbol or edit an existing symbol For more information see topics listed under Custom Symbols in the Draw section of the Help 10 Click Next The Data Options screen displays 11 Type the name for the dataset along with any additional identifying comments The date and time of creation are automatically recorded 12 Click Finish A progress bar displays with the status of matched records When the import process is complete the dialog box automatically closes the dataset name displays in the Available Datasets list and the symbol you chose displays on the map for every record which was geolocated Note Datasets have dds extensions and are saved by default to C DeLorme Docs Datasets Note If you decide to interrupt the import process you can finish importing the dataset later by selecting the dataset from the Available Datasets list in the XData tab and then clicking Resume Managing Datasets XData is available only in Street Atlas USA Plus You can manage your dataset after you have imported copied it as a dataset To Manage Your Datasets Use the following steps to manage your datasets 1 Click the XData tab A list of the datasets available in the current map file displays in the Available Datasets window From this scree
267. f your next turn display Below that area two drop down menus let you choose to display the time to finish heading elevation etc If you do not have the Navigation Panel enabled the Info Area displays the distance and bearing to the destination for direct routes waypoints and map features or turn information for road routes Tracking to a Map Feature on a Palm OS Handheld Use the Find feature to search for a specific map feature to track to For information on using Find see Finding Map Features and for an overview of the tracking feature see Tracking Overview To Track to a Map Feature Use the following steps to track to a map feature 1 Tap the Menu button on your handheld to display the Street Atlas USA Handheld menu bar 2 Tap Tools and then tap Tracking The Select Track screen displays 3 In the Source box tap Find The Find dialog box opens 4 Tap to select a search method Begins With Fuzzy Find or Contains above the Find text field 5 Enter a name i e Main St I 95 Town Park in the Find field Edit any of the six categories Type State City ZIP Code Radius Maximum or Sort by choose match quality or proximity to narrow the search field 6 Tap Search The find results screen displays the running list of matches e If you chose to sort by match quality the best matches display at the top of the list e If you chose to sort by proximity the matches closest to screen center or your GPS lo
268. file in the draw file editing area and then click it again do not double click Type the new name in the Name box and press the ENTER key on your keyboard Optional If you want to ensure no changes are made to a particular draw file select the Lock check box for that draw file in the draw file editing area Click Save Click Done to return to the main Draw tab area You can save new draw files any time For more information see Saving a Draw File in this section 161 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide Note for regular Street Atlas USA users This Help topic describes functionality provided in advanced file management Advanced file management allows you to save multiple routes and draw layers in a single map file With simplified file management you can save only one route and or draw layer in a single map file If you did not select to enable advanced file management during the product installation you can still change the settings using the Change File Management option in the Options menu For more information see Activating Advanced Simplified File Management This note does not apply to Street Atlas USA Plus users Saving a Draw File After you finish adding draw objects to a draw file you can save them in a draw file that you can view or edit later Any time you edit a draw file click Save to save your changes To Save a New Draw File Use the following steps to save a draw file 162 1 2 3
269. fix a Number to the Waypoint Name check box Not all devices support starting points See your device manual for more information 10 Click Send to Device 11 Repeat the steps for every route file you want to send to your device 12 Click Finish Tip You can also open the Exchange Wizard by clicking the Exchange button E Exchange on the GPS tab or the Handheld Export tab 266 Using Handheld Devices Receiving a Route From Your Third party GPS Device If you have a compatible GPSdevice you can use the Exchange Wizard to receive routes created on your device Once imported you can use the file in your mapping program To Receive a Route Use the following steps to receive a route from your device 1 Connect your device to your computer 2 If you are using a third party GPS receiver you may have to use specific settings For example if you are using a GARMIN GPS receiver set your GARMIN receiver interface to GRMN GRMN For more information see your owner manual Click the Exchange button e on the toolbar Under Select Device select GPS Select Receive from Device Select Route from the Object drop down list Select Route from the Save As drop down list Click Next Select the route name or route number on the device that you want to receive 10 Select the route file you want to add the route information to If you want to create a new route file select New from the Route drop down list and type the new rout
270. for Category Searches Browse Buttons alale l Your DeLorme application recognizes hundreds of English words to generate both general and specific searches using category keywords Try entering words that seem appropriate Keyword Samples The list below shows a few of the categories and sample keywords Sample keywords may be listed in more than one category Boundaries Map and Surveying Border Boundary Contour Crosshair Grid Line Point ZIP Postal Code Buildings and Structures Airport Bridge Business Landmark Library Businesses Hotel Gasoline Restaurant Pizza Education and Cultural College Local Park 130 Park School State Park University Miscellaneous Cemetery Hiking Mine Note Park Object Types Finding a Location on the Map All of the stock draw symbols such as blue map pin red flag canoe etc Draw symbols Objects in non DeLorme data Roads and Trails Bridge Exit Ferry Foot Trail Highway Hiking Interstate One Way Railroad Road Street Trail Tunnel Travel Amenities Airport Exit Landmark Rest Area Notes on Category Searches The following list provides notes you may find helpful for performing category searches e Category keyword searches must be at least three characters in length e Keywords are not case sensitive Using all capital letters or no capital letters does not affect the search e Some generic keywords wate
271. for example if you are printing transparencies you can change the Print settings to print with a transparent background To Print Maps With a Transparent Background Use the following steps to turn off the yellow background when printing a map Center the map on the area you want to print 2 Click the Print tab and then click the Map subtab 3 Select the Print Layout options For more information see Printing a Map on page 109 4 Click Setup The Print Setup dialog box opens 5 At the bottom of the dialog box select the Print Maps with a Transparent Background check box 116 6 Printing Click OK All map printouts print with a transparent background To Print Maps With a Yellow Black Background Use the following steps to turn on the yellow black background when printing a map 1 2 3 Center the map on the area you want to print Click the Print tab and then click the Map subtab Select the Print Layout options For more information see Printing a Map on page 109 Click Setup The Print Setup dialog box opens At the bottom of the dialog box clear the Print Maps with a Transparent Background check box Click OK All map printouts print with a yellow background or black if you are using High Contrast Colors Manually Assembling a Multi page Map After you have printed the sheets for your multi page map you are ready to assemble the map Before you begin be sure you have a clear wor
272. from Colorado Al photos 12 photos r Tunes wil frr copy af of Se othe concert onto your Pod Tunes wil then copy you amp Top 25 Most Fayed phono orno your Pod in the order shown in the lat unl the Pod ful You can drag the folders in the lat to change ther order E Indude fubresoluton photos Copy furesckion versions of your photos ra the Phonas folder on you Pod which vos can access ater enabling dak use Capacity i can cei 182 GB Other B Free Space ETIE ooy 856KB 182 GB 3 Select the Sync Photos From check box Then select the directory from the drop down list If the location isn t listed select Choose Folder from the drop down list to browse to the directory 4 Select to synchronize All Photos or Selected Folders If you choose Selected Folders select the check box next to the map folder name 5 Click Apply The Portable Maps are synchronized on the iPod 6 Disconnect the iPod from the computer Note For more information about synchronizing and viewing files on your portable media player see your device s user manual 65 Map Legend Map Legend The features that display on the map may display differently depending on which map colors you chose on the Display tab of the Options dialog box The tables below show the symbolization of each feature by map color Notes e Not all features are available at all zoom levels e Not all features are available in all datasets e High contrast Col
273. functionality J ust right click the location and click Info in the shortcut menu 76 Using the Toolbar e The status bar located above the tab area displays draw object type draw file information point of interest name if applicable street name address highway city state province and ZIP Postal Code information for the map location that your cursor is positioned on e Some map features such as campgrounds national scenic historic trail information centers and state parks display with a blue outline at higher data zoom levels The blue outline indicates that the feature has a hyperlink to its website To open the hyperlink right click the feature and then click Open Hyperlink OR click the URL in the Info tab To Choose Options To open the Options dialog box click the Options button ES i on the toolbar Use the Options dialog box to set GPS voice display map feature handheld and keyboard shortcut preferences An Options button that opens the Options dialog box is also available on the Handheld Export and GPS tabs cc Options pase To open the Options menu click the arrow next to the Options button amp uae are on the toolbar The following menu options are available e Options Opens the Options dialog box e Tab Manager Opens the Tab Manager dialog box where you can show or hide individual tabs and reorder tabs e Change File Management Opens the Change File Management dialog box where you can view or ch
274. g Association at http www the dma org Click Clear at any time to remove all of your search criteria from the Phone text boxes Select the Any State option to include all states in your search or if you do not know the state for your query Step 1 Find your location Center the map on the road where you want to find phone listings Step 2 Determine search area Right click the road and click Phone Listings Then select Whole Street or This Block The Phone tab displays with the search results for that street or block Note If the area where you clicked includes more than one road you will be prompted to select the particular road you want to search 47 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide i 2 ce Le iachis Mexican Add MapNote r surant Create Rout Manage Draw Copy Map to Clipboard Find Travel POls b Create Address Book Entry li PARKVILLE Sf ane Gy Gi mip iy Step 3 Add search results to selection area Click the Add All button to move all of the search results to the Phone tab selection area E Dublin Granville Rd 7 Residential Y Business I7 searen o eor Hallwager Tod 661 E Dublin Granville Rd Columbus OH 43229 614 436 6358 Auto Logistics 665 E Dublin Granville Rd Columbus OH 43229 614 888 6770 Bair the Foundation 665 E Dublin Granville Rd Columbus OH 43229 614 846 6265 ADOPT Carnegie Management Services Inc 665 E Dublin Granville Rd
275. g a Keyboard Shortcut Scheme E E T eeculaneninecdubarvndacs 91 Sending a GPS Log to Your Pocket PC DEV ICC Ric vate ianiai ainni 275 Sending a Handheld Map to a Palm OS DEVICE citi ec dest ccherus 269 Sending a Handheld Map to a Pocket PE DeViGewncsed tons aei a 273 Sending Route Information 264 270 274 Sending Tracks to Your GPS Device265 Sending Waypoints 266 271 275 Setting Preferences on a Palm OS Handheld ccccceseeeeeeeeeeeees 309 Setting Preferences on a Pocket PC 348 Setting Units of Measure Preferences AEEA ATE A A 85 Setting Your End of Day and Fuel Break Preferences ccce 231 Setting Your Handheld Export Preferences scsssereeressrrrsesres 261 Setting Your Routing Preferences 224 Share MapS ccceeeeee eee eee ea eee 72 Show All Commands 250 252 Show Comments MapNotes 227 Show GPS Bread Crumb Trail 234 Show Location MapNotes 227 Show Summary MapNotes 227 SNOW TUIMNS ccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 222 Showing Address Book Contacts on the Mapin vite te ie E aa a viia 139 Showing Tabs eree 88 Showing Toolbar Features 71 Showing Hiding a GPS Log on the Map on a Palm OS Handheld 305 Showing Hiding a Route on the Map on a Palm OS Handheld 321 Showing Hiding Raster and or Vector Data on Your Map on a Palm OS Handheld ccccceceeeeeeeeeenees 291 Showing Hiding Raster an
276. g information is only available for DeLorme receivers and NMEA compatible receivers When using a DeLorme GPS receiver the Almanac window displays the satellite number and its current status N Indicates the satellite is being used for navigation E Indicates ephemeris data is available for the satellite T Indicates the satellite is currently being tracked by your GPS receiver D Indicates differential data is available for that satellite Notes e Differential data is available on WAAS enabled devices e Almanac information is available only for DeLorme receivers 245 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide The Skyview diagram indicates visible satellites their number assigned by the Department of Defense and their position in the sky relative to your current position Each satellite is color coded based on the quality of data it is transmitting Gray Indicates the satellite s position in the sky Red Indicates your GPS receiver is tracking the satellite but it is not receiving data from it Yellow DeLorme GPS receivers only Indicates your receiver is tracking the satellite ephemeris data is available but the satellite is not being used for navigation Green Indicates your GPS receiver is tracking the satellite ephemeris data is available and the satellite is being used for navigation Dark Green WAAS enabled receivers only Indicates your receiver is tracking the satellite ephemeris data is avai
277. ge File Management Your current option displays in the dialog box To change the option click the button for the file management option you want to use For more information see Activating Advanced Simplified File Management on page 12 Getting Started Helpful Tips These tips may help you use the features in your application The Did You Know pop up tutorials provide hints while you are working in the application Tips e To disable a specific pop up tutorial select the Don t Show Again check box before you close it e To disable all pop up tutorials click the Help button T on the toolbar and click Shut Off All Pop up Tutorials e To enable all pop tutorials after you have shut off one or more click the Help button on the toolbar and click Reset All Pop up Tutorials Control Panel Zoom the map out in Drag the map cursor in an up left direction to zoom quickly the map out or drag it in a down right direction to zoom the map in Pan the map quickly Position your cursor on the edge of the map it becomes a white hand that you can use to drag the map to the new location Update the coordinate Update your measurement preferences at any time format that displays in using the Display tab in the Options dialog box the Control Panel View the last map center Press the middle button in the Compass Rose in the Control Panel to center the map on the previous map view This button performs an undo function for the last pan or zoo
278. ge at different data zoom levels e The number of points of interest that displays is dependent on the basic map features you selected on the Map Features tab in the Options dialog box For more information see Displaying Basic Map Features on page 80 This table shows the actions that may happen if you display major and minor POls If you You will see view the targe following eyinbels information aana at data zoom level zoom level 13 0 names and small square symbols small squares only 16 Regular Street Atlas USA 17 Street Atlas USA Plus 84 You will see the following information at data zoom level 14 0 name of the POI and the large symbol name of the POI and a small square symbol small square symbols only small square symbols and some names of POIs You will see the following information at data zoom level 15 0 name of the POI and the large symbol name of the POI and a small square symbol name of the POI and a small square symbol You will see the following information at data zoom level 16 0 Regular Street Atlas name of the POI and the large symbol name of the POI and a small square symbol You will see the following information at data zoom level 17 0 Street Atlas Plus name of the POI and the large symbol Customizing the Map and Tab Display Setting Units of Measure Preferences You can change the uni
279. ght click feature to copy search result information to the clipboard center a search result on the map go to select all search results add a result as a MapTag MapNote Detailed MapNote Waypoint or Address Book entry or assign it a start stop or finish in a route Just right click a search result and click the option you want Finding a Location on the Map Finding POIs Near Your Current Location Use the GPS Radar subtab on the Find tab to search for points of interest POIS such as gas Stations restaurants accommodations rest areas and so on near your current location if tracking with a GPS or near the center of the map You can even hear the nearest search result by enabling the speech button Once you find the point of interest you want you can use the GPS Radar subtab to recenter the map on the route to that point of interest and get directions to that POI Notes In GPS NavMode GPS Radar results display in an orange bar at the bottom of the map area Important To enable GPS Radar in NavMode you must select the Repeat Search Every check box and enter the number of minutes for repeating the search A GPS Radar search finds items that are the shortest driving distance from your current location within just a few miles Unless you select the Only in Direction of Travel check box some of the search results may be behind you GPS radar calculates a route to each POI and the fastest destination for you to drive to is li
280. ging dialog box The map view screen displays Viewing a GPS Log on the Map on a Palm OS Handheld So Once you have created a GPS log in Street Atlas USA Handheld you can view the log on the map view screen To View a GPS Log Use the following steps to view GPS logs you have created on a map 303 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide 1 2 4 Notes Tap the Menu button on your handheld to display the Street Atlas USA Handheld menu bar Tap Data and then tap GPS Logs The Data screen displays and the list of GPS log files you have created displays under the Source selection box From the list of log files tap the name of the log you want to view The log name is highlighted Note Only one GPS log can be displayed on the map at a time Tap Go To The map view displays the start point of the selected GPS log at map center e You cannot view a log file that is actively being logged e Tap Beam to beam selected GPS logs to another Palm OS handheld e You can also access Data screen commands Delete Go To Details and Beam by tapping the Data screen menu bar or the Menu button to display the Command drop down menu Renaming and Viewing Information on a GPS Log File ona Palm OS Handheld Once you have created a GPS log in Street Atlas USA Handheld you can rename the file or view information about the log at any time To Rename or View Information on a GPS Log File Use the following steps to rename or view
281. gistered a preference to not be solicited by telephone as provided by law DeLorme products cannot be relied upon as a method for legal compliance with state and federal regulations A number is flagged as Do Not Call if at least one of the following is true The phone number is unlisted Unlisted phone numbers allow customers to have their phone number be available from directory assistance but not 141 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide published in any phone directories Note Customers paying for non published service desire complete privacy of their phone number which means it is not published in the phone book and is unavailable from directory assistance Non published numbers are not available in Phone Data The phone number is on the Federal Trade Commission s National Do Not Call Registry You can register your home or mobile phone number or verify your registration at https www donotcall gov The address is on a mail preference list that limits mail solicitations You can register your preference for mail and e mail solicitations with the Direct Marketing Association at http www the dma org Click Clear at any time to remove all of your search criteria from the Phone text boxes Select the Any State option to include all states in your search or if you do not know the state for your query To Search for a Phone Book Listing Use the following steps to search for a phone book listing 142 1 If you
282. h as Garmin Waypoint Symbols or Magellan Waypoint Symbols Note The default name for a new symbol set is CustomSymbolSet 5 Paste the third party GPS device s waypoint symbol into XSym 6 Use the transparency option to make the area behind the symbol transparent 7 Type the waypoint identification number for the symbol in the Waypoint ID text box 8 For each additional symbol click New and then repeat steps 5 7 9 Click OK when finished 206 Using the Draw Tools Editing a Symbol With DeLorme XSym you can edit an existing symbol in a symbol set dim file and save the change or save it as a new symbol to be added to another symbol set You can assign a new category name for the symbol to help locate it under the Find tab in the DeLorme mapping program To Edit a Symbol Use the following steps to edit a symbol 1 Click the Draw tab 2 Click and hold the Symbol MapNote Text Label I mage tool T M to view its hidden options Select the Symbol tool P 3 Under Symbols select the symbol set that contains the symbol you want to edit 4 Click Edit The DeLorme XSym dialog box opens 5 Select the symbol you want to edit from the symbol selection of the default symbol set or from another symbol set you have created The symbol displays in the Symbol Editing Grid 6 Use the tools in the Draw Tool Box and under Transparency and Anchor to edit the symbol e To undo the last action click the Undo button under Edit
283. h check box and then type the appropriate word phrase in the text box if using a single word use a word with more than one syllable For example if you type computer you would then say Computer zoom in Voice Commands 1 To use voice navigation you must have a 2 D or 3 D GPS fix and a route calculated Your application includes Route Map GPS and Voice tab control commands Select the Show All Commands check box to view all options including those which are variations or unavailable Route Tab Commands The following table shows navigation voice commands for the Route tab If there is a keyboard shortcut available it is listed after the command What is the next turn Speaks the next turn name time to turn distance to F5 turn bearing to turn and turn direction Displays the Directions subtab in the Route tab What s the next turn F5 Next turn F5 Show next turn F6 Displays current location and next turn Displays the Directions subtab in the Route tab Center on next turn Centers map on the next turn Displays the Directions subtab in the Route tab What is the next stop Speaks the next stop name distance to stop bearing to Baten 3 stop and time to stop Displays the Directions subtab in What s the next stop the Route tab Next stop Show next stop F7 Displays current location and next stop Displays the Directions subtab in the Route tab Center on next stop Centers map on
284. h east or west of the Prime Meridian in degrees minutes and seconds Defined as the angle from the vertical plane running through the polar axis and the prime meridian All lines of longitude meet at the poles and are often referred to as meridians Maximum Elevation The elevation of the highest point on a profile Maximum Speed field When GPS tracking displays your maximum speed MDT Mountain daylight time Minimum Elevation The elevation of the lowest point on a profile MST Mountain standard time NMEA National Marine Electronics Association Northing The measure of a position relative to the y axis vertical of a grid system PDOP The measure of how much the error in the position estimate produced from satellite range measurements is amplified by a poor arrangement of satellites with respect to the receiver antenna Port A hardware interface used by a computer to communicate with an external device PPS Precise Positioning System radio signals available to military and other authorized personnel for GPS Real time The actual time during which something takes place 16 Getting Started Receiver Hardware device that receives data such as from satellites Snapping Attaching a point on one draw object to the exact coordinates of a point in another draw object You can snap the central shape point of an arc to another object or snap a routable road to an existing road enabling routing from the drawn ro
285. h its first and last end points as well as a text box indicating the new point s bearing or angle length of the new segment leg and total object s length on the map Tip To undo the addition of the point to the draw object click the Undo button 2 to undo the last action If you decide not to undo the last action click the Redo button Kl Deleting Points and Line Segments from Draw Objects You can delete points from routable road track line spline and polygon draw objects to change the shape of the object To Delete Points and Line Segments from Draw Objects Use the following steps to delete points and line segments from draw objects 1 Click the Draw tab 2 Click the Select tool A and click the draw object you want to edit A box displays around the line indicating it is active The shape points of the linear objects display as small magenta squares 3 Select the shape point The point displays as either a green or red end point depending upon the line segment it is associated with 183 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide 4 Click Delete in the Draw display area OR Press the DELETE key on your keyboard The point is deleted as well as the line segment within the draw object that was associated with that point Tip To undo the addition of the point to the draw object click the Undo button 2 to undo the last action If you decide not to undo the last action click the Redo button Kl Labeling a Draw Object
286. h subtab follow the on screen instructions or click the Help button jo for more information The NetLink tab has four subtabs e Home The NetLink home subtab You can register your product check for updates visit the DeLorme online forums and find information about our products e Datasets Use this subtab to purchase imagery and data For help with the Datasets subtab click the Help button on the subtab to open the Datasets Help file e Downloads Use this subtab to view and receive downloads and software updates e Corrections Use this subtab to submit a data revision Click the Map Correction link to open the Customer Revisions Wizard For help with submitting a data revision click the Help button on any screen in the wizard Receiving Product Updates and Downloads Once you register your product you can click the NetLink tab to see if any product updates or data downloads are available To Receive Product Updates and Downloads Use the following steps to receive product updates and downloads 1 Click the NetLink tab 2 Click the Downloads subtab or click View the List in the Check for Updates section on Home subtab The Available Downloads amp Updates list displays e The name of each update or download e A description of the update or download e A Download link to download the item e A Hide link to hide the item in the list use this to remove unwanted items from the download list to reduce c
287. hange Wizard Repeat the steps for each GPS log you want to send to your device Click Finish The GPS log is available on your handheld device after your next synchronization operation Tip You can also open the Exchange Wizard by clicking the Exchange button TE Exchange on the GPS tab or the Handheld Export tab Receiving a Route From Your Pocket PC Device Use the Exchange Wizard to receive a route created on your Pocket PC device Once imported you can use the file in your mapping program To Receive a Route From Your Pocket PC Device Use the following steps to receive a route from your Pocket PC device Pee To 9 10 11 Click the Exchange button r on the toolbar Under Device Type select Pocket PC Select Receive from Device Select Route from the Object Type drop down list Select Route from the Save As drop down list to save your route as a route file Click Next Select the route file on the device that you want to receive Select New from the Route drop down list and type the new route name in the text box Click Receive From Device Repeats the steps for each route file you want to receive Click Finish The route information displays Tip You can also open the Exchange Wizard by clicking the Exchange button E Exchange on the GPS tab or the Handheld Export tab 276 Using Handheld Devices Receiving Waypoints From Your Pocket PC Device Use the Exchange Wizard to receive waypoints
288. he Standard Positioning Service SPS for civilians and the Precise Positioning Service PPS for military and authorized personnel 248 Using Voice Navigation and Speech Recognition Voice Overview To use voice navigation you must have a 2 D or 3 D GPS fix and a route calculated Using the speech recognition and text to speech technology included in your application you can issue a series of voice commands to a laptop computer The voice commands activate basic navigation map control and GPS features providing you with hands free program navigation so you can concentrate on your driving When tracking with a GPS receiver you can receive spoken updates about your route directions next turn next stop current location etc The Voice label on the Voice tab displays red when the microphone is activated Your application comes equipped with Microsoft English Recognizer Version 5 1 You can also use other speech recognition engines that you may have purchased separately from other software companies Such speech recognition engines must support SAPI 5 1 to be available to you in your application See the Speech settings in the Windows Control Panel for more information about your engine If you have purchased other voices text to speech engines that are SAPI 5 1 compatible they are available in your application You must have a microphone attached to your computer to use speech recognition for input For tips on u
289. he Data screen menu bar or the Menu button to display the Command drop down menu The Data Screen The Data Screen on a Palm OS Handheld Use the Data screen in Street Atlas USA Handheld to view a list of the map files you have installed on your handheld as well as any waypoints wpts routes or GPS logs you have created To View Files in the Data Screen Use the following steps to view files in the Street Atlas USA Handheld data screen 1 Tap the Menu button on your handheld to display the Street Atlas USA Handheld menu bar 2 From the Data menu tap any of the four options Maps Routes Wpts or GPS Logs e Maps created in your DeLorme mapping application and installed on your handheld OR located on a storage card e Direct Road Routes created in your DeLorme mapping application and installed on your handheld OR created on the handheld e Waypoints Wpts created in your DeLorme mapping application and installed on your handheld OR created on the handheld e GPS Logs recorded on the handheld while using a GPS receiver The Data screen displays and the list of files you have displays under the Source selection box for the menu option you have chosen 3 Tap Details to display the Info dialog box which provides information about each file For each menu option the Data screen always displays the Beam Delete Done and Go To buttons The Data screen displays differently for the following options e Maps An eye symbol afte
290. he Options dialog box To Change the Map Magnification Use the following steps to change the map magnification 1 Click the Options button on the toolbar OR Click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu Then click Options to open the dialog box 2 Click the Display tab 3 Select a magnification percentage 50 75 100 125 150 175 or 200 from the Magnification drop down list Note Although the size of the image changes the degree of geographic detail does not 4 Click OK to accept the change and exit the Options dialog box OR Click Apply to accept the change and keep working in the Options dialog box Changing How POIs Display on the Map You can change the data zoom level at which large POI symbols display on the map To Change the Data Zoom Level for Large POI Symbols Use the following steps to change the data zoom level at which large POI symbols are displayed on the map FE Options 1 Click the Options button i on the toolbar OR 83 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide Click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu Then click Options to open the dialog box 2 Click the Display tab 3 Select the data zoom level from the Large Symbols At drop down list 4 Click OK to accept the change and exit the Options dialog box OR Click Apply to accept the change and keep working in the Options dialog box Notes e The appearance of a POI many chan
291. he Show Measurement check box to display information about the points on the map as you draw the track As you add each point a text box displays next to your pointer indicating the bearing or angle leg line segment length and total length of the track on the map Labels display when end points are clicked if the Show Measurement check box is selected Click the map to designate the start and end points of each line segment You can also drag your cursor on the map to draw a squiggly line e The coordinates of each point display in the corresponding text boxes to the right of the line options 193 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide e The distance and bearing angle of each new point from its previous point display in the corresponding text boxes 9 To finish the track click the last point on the map screen and then click Done OR Click the last point on the map screen and press the ENTER key on your keyboard OR Double click the last point of the track Tip To get information about a track right click it on the map and click Info in the shortcut menu The Info tab opens with information about the track Editing a Routable Road Line Arc or Spline Once you create a line object routable road line arc or spline you can edit including reshaping or changing line color or width copy move or delete it at any time To Edit a Line Object Use the following steps to edit the shape of a routable road line arc o
292. he arrow on the Imagery button to open the menu Ensure the type of imagery you want to view is selected o i ET FIELOSTONE OR ACORN CIR Yaron thine Coss 36 Tutorials Tutorial Creating a Route There are several different methods for creating a route on the Route tab You can designate a start stop via and finish for your route You can also designate e Your method of transportation car bicycle or on foot e The route calculation road quickest or road shortest e Special routing preferences such as establishing speeds for particular road types preferred roads roads to avoid and more You can also create a route on a map using the right click function or with the route buttons on the toolbar These two features let you create routes while using any tab in the program For more information on using these alternative methods see Creating a Route on page 217 For more information about adding stops and vias see Adding and Inserting Stops and Vias on page 219 This tutorial provides steps for creating a driving route with one stop and one via Step 1 Set the route start Click the Route tab and type the start location for your route in the Start text box maa SSCS _ o oS l Step 2 Add a stop Assign your first stop by typing it in the Stop text box Since you are adding your stops in the order you want to reach them along your route make sure the Add option is selected a
293. he map to draw a squiggly line e The coordinates of each point display in the corresponding text boxes to the right of the line options e The distance and bearing angle of each new point from its previous point display in the corresponding text boxes To finish the track click the last point on the map screen and then click Done OR Click the last point on the map screen and press the ENTER key on your keyboard OR Double click the last point of the track Tip To get information about a track right click it on the map and click Info in the shortcut menu The Info tab opens with information about the track 187 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide Editing a Routable Road Line Arc or Spline Once you create a line object routable road line arc or spline you can edit including reshaping or changing line color or width copy move or delete it at any time To Edit a Line Object Use the following steps to edit the shape of a routable road line arc or spline 1 Open the map file containing the draw layer with the line object you want to edit 2 Click the Draw tab 3 If the line object you want to edit is not active click File and activate the draw file in the file list Then click Done 4 Click the Select tool R and then click the line object you want to edit e A box displays around the selected line e The shape points used to create the line object display as small magenta squares 5 Perform a
294. he map view screen and the Erase tool icon displays in the upper left corner of the map view screen 3 Tap the location on the map where you want to place the first point from which to measure distance A point displays on the map view screen indicating the point tapped Note If you need to pan the map to place a point at a particular location pan to the location and tap the map view screen at the desired location to place the point 4 Tap the map again to place another point on the map Each time you tap the map while in Distance mode a point is placed on the map and a line segment displays between the points When you create a new line segment the segment length as well as the total distance of all segments drawn displays in the Info Area below the map view Note If you have placed a point on the distance measure line incorrectly tap the Erase icon The last point and the line segment between it and the previous point are cleared Clear a whole distance measure line by tapping the Erase icon until all points and line segments are cleared 5 To exit the Distance mode tap the Distance tool icon The distance measure points and line segments are cleared from the map Tracking Tracking Overview for Palm OS Handheld With Street Atlas USA Handheld on your Palm OS device you can track to a map feature a waypoint an address book entry or along a route you have created If you are connected to a GPS receiver use tracking to guide you
295. he right click feature for routing J ust right click the route stop or via point to Manage Route in the shortcut menu and click the applicable option To Edit a Route To edit a route click the Route tab and then click the Advanced subtab Select the route from the Name drop down list box The route becomes active The following list describes the edit functions e Street Atlas USA Plus and regular Street Atlas USA with advanced file management only To change the route name select the name in the Name text box type the new route name and then press the ENTER key on your keyboard e To change a route point click the corresponding tool and then click the new spot on the map OR Select a route point on the map and drag it to the new location on the map Note If you try to add a start or finish point to an existing route the Would you like to move your Start location or create a New route message opens 225 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide Click New to begin creating a new route Click Move to move the Start or Finish point to the last location clicked e To add or insert a stop or via to your route click the corresponding tool and then click the spot on the map where you want to add or insert your stop or via For more information see Adding and Inserting Stops and Vias in this section e To rearrange stops and vias click the point to select it and then click the Move Up E or Move Down ools to relocate it in th
296. he same tone that was used when during the speech recognition engine training e Keep the microphone as far as possible from the car radio or console computer speakers or other speakers e If your microphone is near your speakers and you are using the microphone together with voice reminders GPS VoiceNav the program may recognize some of the words that it is speaking and react to them Here are ways to eliminate this problem e Make sure that you have chosen the Voice Output device speakers headset and the Input device on board microphone headset microphone that you intend to use with DeLorme GPS voice navigation Use the selections that are available in the Voice settings tab in the Options dialog box e If more than one speech recognizer is available in the drop down list choose the most recent highest version number 255 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide e Your best speech recognition responses will always be to use a close talk microphone with voice output using the laptop speakers rather than a headphone speaker so that the computer will not hear itself e If you are speaking with someone else in the room have a radio or television on and so on the computer may think those sounds are commands to follow Select the Microphone check box on the Voice tab only when you intend to use it If you exit the program with the Microphone check box selected the program will start speech recognition again when you restart
297. her Palm OS handheld e You can also access Data screen commands Delete Go To Details and Beam by tapping the Data screen menu bar or the menu button to display the Command drop down menu Deleting a Map File You can delete any map files you have installed on your Palm OS handheld Waypoints routes and GPS logs are not cleared from the map view screen when a map is deleted To delete waypoints routes or GPS logs see the following topics e Deleting a Waypoint e Deleting a Route e Deleting a GPS Log To Delete a Map File Use the following steps to delete a map file 1 Tap the Menu button on your handheld to display the Street Atlas USA Handheld menu bar 2 From the Data menu tap Maps The Data screen displays the list of map files you have installed 3 From the list of map files tap the name of the map file you want to delete 288 Using Street Atlas Handheld on a PDA 4 Tap Delete A message box displays asking if you want to delete the selected map file 5 Tap OK to delete the file The Data screen displays and the map file is cleared from the list of map files OR Tap Cancel to return to the Data screen without deleting a map file 6 When finished deleting map files tap Done to display the map view screen Note If the map file you deleted was the current map the map no longer displays on the map view screen Note You can also access Data screen commands Delete Go To Details and Beam by tapping t
298. her draw files As you create draw files they are added to the current map files You can add draw files you create to multiple map files When you clear or delete a draw file the objects in the draw file do not display and are deleted along with the draw file You can control the creation of new draw files in the draw file editing area See Creating a New Draw File in this section You can display multiple draw files while working on your map You can work on one draw file at a time while viewing other files beneath it You can select different draw files to be the active editable file from within the Draw tab See Editing Locking Draw Files in this section Draw files created in a particular map file are displayed only if that map file is currently displaying For example if DrawLayer27 is created in a map file named Yarmouth Zoom 14 only DrawLayer27 does not display if a map file named Old Port is currently displaying Routable roads are not tied to a map file they do not change even when a map file is changed 157 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide 158 What is a Draw Object Draw objects are those objects you add to a draw file with the tools provided in the Draw tab Draw objects consist of line area or point objects You can copy move delete and add draw objects to other draw files and add them to another map file e Line objects are those objects consisting of line segments and points such as e Routable Roads
299. how Comments MapNotes Displays comments about your route e Show Summary MapNotes Displays time and distance information for each waypoint and the finish point of your route e Display Waypoint Labels Displays start stop via finish labels on the map when the route is created e Include State Borders Shows or hides state borders in your route directions only available when Road is the selected route type e GPS Voice Navigation Provides spoken route directions when you are tracking with a GPS receiver After initializing the computer speaks the directions for the next turn in your route It repeats the instructions approximately 90 seconds prior to arriving at the turn e Display Route Vias Shows or hides your route vias on the map 10 In the Voice Alert text box type the amount of time in seconds that you want to elapse before the computer alerts you of your next two turns Note Because it may take the computer a while to speak turn information it is recommended that you designate at least 60 seconds for the voice alert 11 Click Done Note Click Use Defaults to restore all route preferences to the default settings Editing a Route You can modify existing routes by e Adding removing and rearranging stops and vias e Adjusting your route preferences based on road type e Customizing your route based on your driving style and speed e Reversing a route Tips e Zoom in to set accurate points for your route e Use t
300. how Turns An arrow indicates your direction of travel Click the More button to get information on the turn after your next turn 39 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide Step 6 Start driving Your current position displays on the map as a green yellow circle green indicates a 3 D fix yellow indicates a 2 D fix and the computer speaks the route directions If you have set up speech recognition software you can ask the computer questions like What is the next turn or Where am For more information see Voice Overview on page 249 Step 7 Find points of interest near your location Running low on gas Maybe you re hungry and want to find the nearest fast food restaurant Click the Find tab and click the GPS Radar subtab to search for your category of interest If you select the Only in Direction of Travel check box you won t have to back track to make your next stop however if you re driving in a very rural area the closest point of interest may be behind you For more information see Finding Points of Interest Near Your Current Location on page 127 ARMOUTH CLIPPER MART TEXACO BIG APPLE FOOD STORE CITGO j Yarmouth Exxon a YARMOUTH MOBIL 40 Tutorials Tutorial Routing with GPS NavMode This tutorial explains routing with GPS in NavMode This is the default GPS view a hands free full screen view that you can display in 2 D or 3 D By default the Control Panel is hidden and the ta
301. ia sandtearhty teins he Aetndr shag eda de ies aol da eag cid ai 288 The Data Screen on a Palm OS Handheld ceeceee cece eee eee eee teeta teeta eed 289 Beaming Files to Another Handheld ccceceee cece ee eee eens eee eee eats teeta ened 290 Showing Hiding Raster and or Vector Data on Your Map on a Palm OS Handheld EE saga cena T E ETE tunic nae etn cnuda ta E TA Death T 291 The Map View Screen on a Palm OS Handheld cceceeeeeee eee e eee teeta ea eee 291 Panning and Centering the Map ccceceee eee eee ee eee eee nee teeta t neta ene ea eed 292 Changing the Data Zoom Level of the Map ccceeeee eect eee eee ee teeta teens 292 Menu Options on a Palm OS Handheld c cece cece e eee eee eee teeta e eee ee teeta eed 293 Graffiti Menu COMMANAS 0 ccc cece ee eee ne aetna ene 296 Querying Features on the Map on a Palm OS Handheld ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeees 297 Finding Map Features on a Palm OS Handheld cccceeeeee eee eens test ee eae ee 299 Finding a Coordinate Location ccceccee eee eee ee eee eee eee nett ene ne eae ea eed 301 Connecting Your GPS Receiver cece eee eee eee een tee tees 301 Updating Your GPS SettingS cc cece eee eee eee teeta teeta ened 302 GPS Logging on a Palm OS Handheld c cece cece eee eee cette neta teeta tetas 303 Viewing a GPS Log on the Map on a Palm OS Handheld 303 Renami
302. iceable in large cities They are available at data zoom level 13 0 or greater Places Minor View smaller towns suburbs locales and natural features Zoom levels vary Roads Minor View secondary roads local and rural routes trails and railroads Zoom levels vary Points of Interest e Major View many different points of interest including recreational areas public safety rest areas and more e Minor View general points of interest including educational technology government and religious buildings locations e Business Major View many different travel related points of interest including hospitals camping restaurants and more e Business Minor View general points of interest including small shops and food stores laundromats and golfing 3 Customizing the Map and Tab Display e 2ZIP Postal Codes ZIP Postal Code boundaries display at data zoom level 8 0 and greater with ZIP Postal Code labels displaying at data zoom level 10 0 and greater e Town Borders View town borders at data zoom level 10 0 and greater for the following states Arkansas Louisiana Mississippi North Vermont Connecticut Maine Missouri Carolina Virginia Illinois Maryland Nebraska North Washington Indiana Massachusetts New Dakota DC lowa Michigan Hampshire Ohio West Kansas Minnesota New Pennsylvania Virginia Jersey Rhode Wisconsin New York Island South Dakota e County Borders View shaded outlines of U S counties at data zo
303. ick Finish Connecting Data Only connected compatible data displays in Street Atlas USA You can improve performance by saving the data to your hard drive To Connect Data Use the following steps to connect a dataset 1 Click the Map Files tab 2 Street Atlas Plus only Click Add and then click Data Locations The Data Locations dialog box opens and displays a list of the of the data sources on your system Regular Street Atlas USA only If you are using simplified file management click File and then click Data Locations The Data Locations dialog box opens and displays a list of each of the data sources on your system OR If you are using advanced file management click Add and then click Data Locations Note See Activating Advanced Simplified File Management on page 12 for more information 3 If the dataset you want to view displays in the list ensure its check box is selected AND OR If the dataset you want to view does not display in the list click Add select the data folder where the dataset is located from the Browse for Folder dialog box and click OK 97 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide 4 Click Done when finished Note To remove a data source from the Data Locations list select the data source and click Remove Showing Roads in Raster Data Raster data such as aerial and satellite data is image based and does not provide typical map information such as street names route numbers and so on Stree
304. ighted 344 Using Street Atlas Handheld on a PDA 3 Tap Delete A message box displays asking if you want to delete the selected log file 4 Tap Yes to delete the file The Data screen displays and the log file is cleared from the list of GPS log files OR Tap No to return to the Data screen without deleting the log file 5 Tap ok to display the map view screen Monitoring Your GPS Session on a Pocket PC Once you have updated your GPS settings and have a good connection to your GPS receiver you can monitor the status of your GPS connection as well as your speed heading elevation and position To Monitor GPS Use the following steps to monitor your GPS session 1 Tap GPS and then tap Monitor The Monitor GPS screen displays the following information in units and coordinates set in the Preferences settings Screen item Description O GPS Status Symbol No connection Displays in the upper right corner of Detecting GPS the screen just Wf Acquiring satellite below the ok button in the title bar 2D GPS or DGPS connection displays as yellow 3D GPS or DGPS connection displays as green Heading Compass Compass needle turns to represent the current heading Speedometer Displays current speed Heading Text Displays degrees to true north Elevation Text Displays elevation when GPS connection is 3D Position Info Area Displays coordinates in units as selected under Setting Preferences GPS Data Stream D
305. ile You can create various map views and save each in a different map file You can view your map files by opening them one at a time To Open a Map File Use the following steps to open a map file 1 Click the Map Files tab 2 Click File and then click Open OR Click the Open button E on the tab 3 Double click the map file The last saved map view for that map file displays OR Click the map file to select it and then click Open The last saved map view for that map file displays You can also e Open a map file by clicking the Open button on the toolbar e Open a map file by dragging and dropping it into Street Atlas USA from Windows Explorer e View the most recently saved map files by clicking File Recent Files and then clicking the map file you want to open on the Map Files tab e Click the arrow next to the toolbar button to open a menu Then click Open Map File to open the Open File dialog box OR click a recently saved map file in the list Note for regular Street Atlas USA users This Help topic describes functionality provided in advanced file management Advanced file management allows you to save multiple routes and draw layers in a single map file With simplified file management you can save only one route and or draw layer in a single map file If you did not select to enable advanced file management during the product installation you can still change the settings using the Change File Manage
306. ile 1 Click the Map Files tab 2 Click File and then click New OR Click the New File button h 3 Click the Save button hil on Map Files have saf extensions and are saved by default in the C DeLorme Docs Map Files directory OR Click File and then click Save As to rename the map file Note You can also use the toolbar to create and save map files To Delete a Map File Use the following steps to delete a map file Open a map file 2 From the Map Files tab click File point to Current View and click File Info 3 Browse to the file location on your computer specified under Directory in the Map Files tab area 4 Select the file 5 From your computer s File menu select Delete 6 Click Yes at the Delete File confirmation message Note for regular Street Atlas USA users This Help topic describes functionality provided in advanced file management Advanced file management allows you to save multiple routes and draw layers in a single map file With simplified file management you can save only one route and or draw layer in a single map file If you did not select to enable advanced file management during the product installation you can still change the settings using the Change File Management option in the Options menu For more information see Activating Advanced Simplified File Management This note does not apply to Street Atlas USA Plus users 100 Using Map Files Opening an Existing Map F
307. in the route AND OR Tap the Road Route icon and enter the points of your route using one all of the available choices From the Add list box tap Find to search for points and to display the find screen Enter the name for a particular map feature and conduct a search for the feature Select the feature from the Find Results screen to add to your route and then tap Select The selected feature is added to the route For more information on using the Find feature see Finding Map Features From the Add list box tap Wpts to use existing waypoints and to display the Wpt List screen Select the waypoint from the list and then tap Select The selected waypoint is added to the route For information on adding waypoints see Adding Waypoints From the Add list box tap Contacts Entry to use a contact as a point in your route Select the contacts entry from the list and then tap Select The selected contacts entry is added to the route 353 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide e From the Add list box tap Screen Center to use the current screen center as a point in your route Screen Center points are labeled as Screen Center when information for that location is unavailable Once you have placed all of your route points you can reorder the points delete a point or add find search points waypoints and or your screen center to your route e Move a route point ahead in the route by tapping the route point and then tapping the up button
308. ine is a two pixel wide yellow line and the total length of the line is displayed in a label at each endpoint of the line 5 To end a measure area hover over the starting point until the yellow snap circle displays and then double click the last point to the starting point The closure area is transparently shaded and the area and perimeter measurements display 22 Getting Started Chart of Supported Coordinate Formats These are the supported formats for latitude longitude UTM UPS MGRS USNG and SPCS searches Sample coordinates are for Yarmouth Maine Tip Examples of search formats are listed in the Advanced search drop down text boxes along with a history of your most current search criteria Latitude Longitude N 43 48 30 W70 9 52 N 43 48 30 W70 9 52 N 43 48 4910 W 070 N 43 48 4910 W 070 09 8440 09 8440 N434829 4600 N434829 4600 W0700950 6400 W0700950 6400 N43 48 30 W70 9 52 N43 48 30 W70 9 52 70 9 50 64 4348 491 7009 844 4348 491 7009 844 434829 46 700950 64 43 80818333 43 80818333 70 16406667 70 16406667 43 48 4910 N 70 09 43 48 4910 N 70 09 50 64 W 50 64 W 43 48 4910 n 70 09 43 48 4910 n 70 09 50 64 w 50 64 w N 43 48 4910 W 70 09 N 43 48 4910 70 09 50 64 W 50 64 434829 46 N 700950 64 434829 46 N 700950 64 W 70 43 70 43 23 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide USNG 19TD 06354 51187 Same as QuickSearch Street Atlas USA Plus 19TDJ 0635451187 only NAD27 19TD
309. information displays Tip You can also open the Exchange Wizard by clicking the Exchange button Ze Exchange on the GPS tab or the Handheld Export tab Exchanging Information with a Pocket PC Device Sending a Handheld Map to a Pocket PC Device Use the Exchange Wizard to send maps you cut using the Handheld Export tab to your Pocket PC device See Creating a Map Package to Send to a DeLorme Earthmate or PDA for more information Note You must have Street Atlas USA Handheld installed to view exported maps on a PDA To Send a Handheld Map Use the following steps to send a handheld map to a Pocket PC device Go 1 Click the Exchange button F on the toolbar OR click TE Exchange on the Handheld Export tab to open the Exchange dialog box Under Device Type select Pocket PC Select Send to Device Select Handheld Map from the Object Type drop down list Click Next Under Source select the map you want to send to your handheld device from the Handheld Map drop down list The maps saved in the specified location display in the list To view maps saved in an alternate location click the browse button and browse to the location Then select the map from the Handheld Map drop down list 7 Click Prepare for Sync 8 Click OK to return to the Exchange Wizard 9 Repeat the steps for each map you want to send 10 Click Finish The exported map is available on your handheld device after your next synchronization operation Tip You can
310. ing a Route and Directions You can print maps of your route and route directions for any route you create Additionally you can save your directions or along the way results in a text file For more information see Saving Route Directions as Text on page 224 For specific recommendations on best printing results see your printer manual To Print a Route Use the following steps to print an existing route 1 Click the Print tab and then click the Route subtab Note If you do not have a route on this map file the route options are unavailable Optional Click Setup to open the Print Setup dialog box and select a printer change printer properties select a transparent yellow background select paper size and select paper orientation Click OK when finished If the options are available under Printer Properties set the graphics mode to use raster graphics and set TrueType fonts to print as graphics Select the route you want to print from the Name drop down list Only routes contained in the current map file display in this list Note for regularStreet Atlas USA only this does not apply to Street Atlas USA Plus If you are using simplified file management your only route print option displays in the Name text box 4 Under Options select from one of the following choices 110 Printing e Overview Provides an optimized map of your route and the route summary trip distance trip time start total stops and finish
311. ing many stops and vias Use Add instead of Insert when your start and finish are at the same place Don t place the finish point until you add all your stops and vias Place vias near the beginning of the road you want to use When you calculate the route if it goes to a via and then returns to the original path insert another via toward the end of that road where you want to turn onto the next road to force it to use that road When using a road as a stop or via zoom in to ensure you select the correct road The selected road segment is highlighted when you click it To Add a Stop or Via To Your Route The Add Stop Via function adds stops and vias in the order you add them to the route 1 2 3 Use the following steps to add a stop or via to your route Create a route In the New Edit dialog area in the Route tab make sure the button next to the Stop tool O if you are adding a stop or the Via tool Ol if you are adding a via is labeled Add If it is not click the arrow next to the button and select Add To add a stop or via to the route click the Stop or Via tool and then click the location on the map OR e To use an address book entry as your stop or via location 1 Select Stop From Address Book from the Stop drop down list OR Select Via From Address Book from the Via drop down list 2 Select an Address Book entry and then click OK e To use your current GPS position as your stop or via location Selec
312. installation you can still change the settings using the Change File Management option in the Options menu For more information see Activating Advanced Simplified File Management This note does not apply to Street Atlas USA Plus users Renaming a Draw File Once you create a draw file you can rename it in the draw file list or on the map To Rename a Draw File Use the following steps to rename a draw file 1 Click the Draw tab 2 Click File to open the draw file editing area All the files you have created display in a table A draw file with a selected check box displays on the map 175 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide 3 Right click the draw file and click Rename The file name area activates OR Click within the file name cell once Then click it again do not double click The file name area activates 4 Type the new file name in the cell and press the ENTER key on your keyboard Note for regular Street Atlas USA users This Help topic describes functionality provided in advanced file management Advanced file management allows you to save multiple routes and draw layers in a single map file With simplified file management you can save only one route and or draw layer in a single map file If you did not select to enable advanced file management during the product installation you can still change the settings using the Change File Management option in the Options menu For more information see Activa
313. ints tool Select the waypoint symbol from the Symbols options You can also select a different font style size and color for the waypoint name OR To place a symbol click and hold the MapNote Text HT PF Label Symbol I mage tool and select the Symbol tool Lal Select the symbol from the Symbol Selection list You can also select a different font style size and color for the symbol name OR To place a text label click and hold the MapNote Text Label Symbol I mage tool and select the Text Label tool jes Select the font style size and color from the text style options A sample of how your text display appears to the left of the options OR To place an image click and hold the MapNote Text Label Symbol I mage tool to view its hidden options Select the Image tool Under Images select an existing image or click Add browse to an image and click Open to add a new image to your Images selection 3 Select the Coordinate option or use the Distance and Bearing Angle option in conjunction with the Coordinate option and type the appropriate coordinates or numbers into the corresponding text boxes to the right of the text style options box 4 Click Apply The point object displays on the map at those coordinates distance and bearing or angle 5 If you are placing a text label enter the text and press the ENTER key on your keyboard or click the map outside of the text label active area when you are finished
314. ions on the map where you want to place each point in the route Each time you tap the map while in Direct Route mode a point is placed on the map and a line segment displays between the points Then tap the Calculate Direct Route icon 8 Notes e If you have placed a point on the route incorrectly tap the Erase icon The last point placed as well as the line segment between it and the previous point is cleared Clear a whole route by tapping the Erase icon until all points and line segments are cleared e If you need to pan the map to place another route point drag the map to the appropriate location and tap the map view screen at the desired location to place the next point and line segment in the route 317 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide AND OR Tap the Calculate Direct Route icon and enter the points of your route using one all of the three available choices Notes From the Add list box tap Find to search for points and to display the find screen Enter the name for a particular map feature and conduct a search for the feature Select the feature from the Find Results screen to add to your route and then tap Search The selected feature is added to the route For more information on using the Find feature see Finding Map Features From the Add list box tap Wpt to use existing waypoints and to display the Wpt List screen Select the waypoint from the list and then tap OK The selected waypoint is added to the ro
315. ip took six hours the on screen tracking process also takes six hours You can also e From the Playback Speed drop down list select an option 2x 5x 10x 25x or 50x to increase the tracking speed accordingly e Click the Pause button N to pause the tracking of the log file The Pause button turns blue to indicate the file is paused Click the Play button to continue playing back the file e Click the Stop button a_i to stop the play back To start the file over click the Play button again e Click and hold the Rewind button _t to rewind the log file to a particular point e Click and hold the Forward button to fast forward the log file to a particular point e Drag the slider in the Progress Bar to view a particular point in the log You can drag the slider forward or backward Previewing a GPS Log File There are two ways to view an existing GPS log You can play it back and watch it in real time point by point or you can preview it and view the entire log area without waiting for the playback to finish 241 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide To Preview a Log File Use the following steps to preview a log file Click the GPS tab and then click the GPS Log subtab Click Clear Trail to clear any existing GPS points from the map display Click File and then click Open Single click the file you want to view The bottom of the Open a GPL File dialog box opens the start location start time start coordin
316. is located between the tab area and the overview map lets you resize the width of the tab area Using the Horizontal Resize Tool e Drag the horizontal bar up down to expose the tab area you want to see e Click the up arrow on the horizontal resize tool once to incrementally increase the tab height You can repeat this step until the top of the tab area is flush with the bottom of the compass rose in the control panel e Click the down arrow on the horizontal resize tool once to incrementally decrease the tab height You can repeat this step until only the tab names display e Double click the bar to the right of the up arrow to expand the tab height to its maximum percentage if the tab height is at the default mode or higher Note If the tab area is below the default mode double click the bar to return the tab height to its default percentage 87 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide Double click the bar to the left of the down arrow to decrease the tab height to its minimum percentage if the tab height is at the default mode Note If the tab area is above the default mode double click the bar to return the tab height to its default percentage Double click the bar between the up and down arrows to return the tab height to its default view Using the Vertical Resize Tool Drag the vertical bar left to expose the area of the overview map you want to see Drag the vertical bar right to expose the tab area you want to see C
317. is optional If the Keywords field is left blank all objects in the selected Within area display in the Results list e Category keywords must be at least three characters in length Area Code and Exchange There are no Within options for Area Code and Exchange search Use at least a partial Area Code and Exchange to locate the covered regions This is not an individual phone search The results display in a browse list Latitude Longitude A single result is returned using a latitude longitude coordinate search There are no Within options Coordinates must be in one of the many formats recognized by the program and are based on your Display settings in the Options dialog box 3 From the Within drop down list select an option Available choices are based on what you selected as your Find type Click a Within type in the following list for more information 124 North America Searches for a name in North America US Canada Searches for ZIP Postal Code within the United States and Canada Available only when ZIP Postal Code s is selected as the Find parameter City or County Searches for the specified name within the ZIP Postal Codes associated with the city county and state province specified in the text boxes ZIP Postal Code Searches for the specified name within a ZIP Postal Code Displays a ZIP Postal Code text field A U S search for a ZIP 4 Code is treated the same as a five digit ZIP Code A Canadian search for a
318. isplays GPS information at the bottom of the Monitor GPS screen when connected to a GPS device 2 Tap ok to close the Monitor GPS screen The map view screen displays 345 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide Sky View on a Pocket PC The Sky View diagram displays satellites being tracked by number and position in the sky relative to your current position To View the Sky View Diagram Use the following steps to display the Sky View diagram 1 Tap GPS and then tap Sky View The Sky View diagram displays with satellite symbols representing satellites being tracked by your GPS receiver Note A Satellite Key for information on satellite status displays below the sky view diagram 2 Tap ok to close the Sky View diagram The map view screen displays Channel View on a Pocket PC When connected to a GPS receiver each satellite currently visible in the sky is listed by e Satellite number Sat e Elevation degrees to horizon El e Azimuth Az e Signal to noise ratio SNR e Status N navigation E ephemeris data T tracked and D differential mode for WAAS Note The PDOP Position Dilution of Precision HDOP Horizontal Dilution of Precision and EHPE Estimated Horizontal Position Error values display at the bottom of the GPS Channel Info screen Low PDOP HDOP and EHPE values indicate a higher probability of accuracy in position The PDOP and HDOP values should be 0 10 The EHPE value should be 0 125 meters Not all
319. ity state OR street address ZIP Postal Code The Book check box underneath the Address Book buttons in the Find tab must be selected to search for address book contact names e Right click the map where you want to add the stop or via Point to CreateRoute in the shortcut menu and then click Insert Stop or Insert Via e Use the toolbar to insert a Stop or Via 3 If the Auto check box is not selected click Calculate to recalculate your route to include the stop or via OR Click the Calculate button on the toolbar OR If the Auto check box is not selected right click the route point to Manage Route in the shortcut menu and click Calculate Road Quickest or Calculate Road Shortest Note If the program is unable to find an exact match for the item that you typed a dialog box opens with a list of the closest matches Scroll through the list of search results until you find the one you want to locate click the item to select it and then click OK 4 Click Directions to view the route directions AND OR Click Advanced to display the advanced routing options AND OR Click Plan Trip to assign end of day or fuel breaks to your route AND OR Click Back on Track to add your current GPS position as a via to the current route Changing the Routing Method You can change your routing calculation method at any time You may need to do this to update your routing preferences To Change the Route Calculation Method 1 From the Ro
320. ize Comparisons When you use the Handheld Export tab to export maps you can choose a grid size A grid of the same size gets progressively larger in coverage Square area the closer it is to the equator This is because the grid system is based on the latitude longitude coordinate system 60 seconds 1 minute 60 minutes 1 degree A 1 5 degree grid 9 30 minute grids 324 5 minute grids 8 100 1 minute grids or 202 500 12 second grids A 30 minute grid 36 5 minute grids 900 1 minute grids or 22 500 12 second grids A 5 minute grid 25 1 minute grids or 625 12 second grids A 1 minute grid 25 12 second grids 9 x 30 1 4 16 regular Street oe minute Atlas USA 4 17 Street Atlas USA Plus 263 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide 30 36x5 9 1 N A N A 6 16 regular Street minute minute Atlas USA 6 17 Street Atlas USA Plus 5 25x1 324 36 1 N A 8 16 regular Street minute minute Atlas USA 8 17 Street Atlas USA Plus 1 25 x 8 100 11 16 regular Street minute Atlas USA 11 17 Street Atlas USA Plus 202 500 22 500 13 16 regular Street Atlas USA 13 17 Street Atlas USA Plus Exchanging Information with a Third party GPS Device Sending Route Information to a Third party GPS Device If you have a compatible GPSdevice you can use the Exchange Wizard to send route points or route directions to your device To Send Route Points Use the following steps to send route points to your de
321. izontal placement of the items e Center to center the items based on the center of the average area that the items cover on the map e Stack Vertically to stack the items vertically on top of each other e Stack Horizontally to position the items side by side 114 Printing Tips e To make multiple graphic items the same size press the SHIFT key on your keyboard and select each item Then right click select Make Same Size and select Width Height or Both from the shortcut menu When you attempt to make multiple items the same size the largest item is always the basis for the size change Important For an item to be made the same size as another item the item must not be locked for example the Maintain Aspect Ratio check box should be cleared for any images only text items with default size text boxes can be resized and so on e To delete multiple text or graphic items click the Edit tool drag the mouse on the map to encompass the items you want to delete and then press the DELETE key on your keyboard Snapping Text and Graphic Items on Your Map This Help topic describes functionality that is available only in Street Atlas USA Plus After you add a text or graphic tool to your map you can snap each item to the location you want it by dragging the item along the edges of the map or by dragging the item to snap it to the horizontal center of the page To disable the auto snap function hold down the ALT key on you
322. k and is unavailable from directory assistance Non published numbers are not available in Phone Data The phone number is on the Federal Trade Commission s National Do Not Call Registry You can register your home or mobile phone number or verify your registration at https www donotcall gov The address is on a mail preference list that limits mail solicitations You can register your preference for mail and e mail solicitations with the Direct Marketing Association at http www the dma org Click Clear at any time to remove all of your search criteria from the Phone text boxes Select the Any State option to include all states in your search or if you do not know the state for your query To Find Phone Information for a Specific Road Use the following steps to find available phone information for a specific road If you did not install the phone data to your hard drive you can use the DVD 1 To find all of the phone listings for a particular address search for a phone book listing right click a search result and then click Search This Address All of the phone listings for that address display OR To find phone information using the map pan the map or click the Find tab and use the QuickSearch function to locate the road you want to use for your phone book listing search Then right click the road and click Phone Listings All the phone book listings for that road in that city display in the Search Results area on the lower
323. k Delete Click Yes in the confirmation message box to delete the object or click No to cancel OR Right click the draw file in the list and click Delete Click Yes in the confirmation message box to delete the object or click No to cancel Click Done to return to the main Draw tab area Note for regular Street Atlas USA users This Help topic describes functionality provided in advanced file management Advanced file management allows you to save multiple routes and draw layers in a single map file With simplified file management you can save only one route and or draw layer in a single map file If you did not select to enable advanced file management during the product installation you can still change the settings using the Change File Management option in the Options menu For more information see Activating Advanced Simplified File Management This note does not apply to Street Atlas USA Plus users Hiding Draw Files You can hide draw files you created This removes from view all the draw objects in that file without permanently deleting them To Hide a Draw File Use the following steps to hide a draw file 1 2 Click the Draw tab Click File to open the draw file editing area Note The draw file editing area is categorized by draw file type For example all road layers are grouped together in the list all draw layers are grouped together and so on Hide any files in the file list by clearing th
324. k surface large enough to accommodate the final map size You will need the following tools to assemble your map Pencil Razor knife Straight edge ruler longer than the edge of the longest sheet Permanent tape invisible or magic type Removable tape To Manually Assemble a Multi page Map Use the following steps to manually assemble a multi page map 1 2 For each sheet that needs to be trimmed mark the edges of the sheet to indicate the areas to trim Use the straight edge ruler and razor knife to trim each sheet to the thin black line bordering the map Note For adjacent sheets trim only one page This makes piecing the sheets together easier The following diagrams of a 2 x 2 and 3 x 3 multi page map provide additional information on where to trim the sheets The arrows indicate the edges to be trimmed 117 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide 2 x 2 multi page Map iw _ y Ea gt 3 3 x 3 multi page Map gt zs R yy nit a ae es Pye Ww ae Q 3 Align two adjacent sheets placing the trimmed edge on top of the non trimmed edge Notes e Piece together the multi page map one seam at a time This is especially important for a 3 x 3 multi page map e Build the multi page map from the inside out to minimize any misalignment 118 Printing 4 Using two small pieces of removable tape tack together the aligned sheets Note This is a temporary measure Steps 6 through
325. king When using this DeLorme application with a GPS receiver to track a route your map automatically pans and redraws as you travel always indicating your position on the map when Center on GPS is activated To Pan the Map Automatically The following procedure demonstrates how the check box and button work together to automatically pan the map 1 Click the Options button ES E on the toolbar or click the menu arrow and click Options and then click the GPS Settings tab OR Click the GPS tab to open it and click the Options button 2 Under When Tracking clear the Recenter Map on GPS check box If you pan the map manually during GPS tracking Center on GPS displays in the Control Panel OR Select the Recenter Map on GPS check box If you pan the map manually during GPS tracking the map automatically re centers itself on your location after 5 seconds A Options 3 Click OK 4 Click the GPS tab and click Start GPS OR Click the GPS button 0 on the toolbar Notes e The Center on GPS button displays and is activated by default on the Control Panel when the Recenter Map on GPS option is selected e f you deactivate the Center on GPS button you can continue to manually pan the map or use the search function in the Find tab e When you are done with other tasks click Center on GPS in the Control Panel to resume tracking Playing Back a Log File After you log a route with your GPS receiver you can play it back i
326. l your vehicle s fuel consumption rate and so on Note This feature works with the route preferences you have designated with the Route Preferences option under Route For more information see Setting Your Routing Preferences in this section To Set Your End of Day and Fuel Stop Preferences Use the following steps to set your time preferences 1 Create a route 2 Click the Route tab and then click Plan Trip 3 Optional Select the Estimate End of Day Breaks check box to schedule end of day breaks for your trip Select Hours per day to schedule your end of day breaks after a designated number of hours traveled per day Then type the number of hours you want to travel per day in the Hours Per Day text box Use the Flexibility drop down list to determine the amount of time you want to be flexible between breaks and defined stops For example if you selected 1 5 Hrs from the Flexibility drop down list and have an end of day break within 1 5 hours of a planned stop the end of day break is moved to the planned stop OR Select mi per day to schedule your end of day breaks after a designated number of miles traveled per day Then type the number of miles you want to travel per day in the Mi Per Day text box Use the Flexibility drop down list to determine the number of miles you want to be flexible between breaks and defined stops For example if you selected 50 mi from the Flexibility drop down list and have an end of day break wi
327. l Dilution of Precision e EHPE Estimated Horizontal Position Error Sun Moon View sunrise set and moon phase information and moonrise set information Settings changed on this screen do not effect other screens The system date and coordinates for the current screen center display by default Add Wpt Add a waypoint on the map using the waypoint Wpt icon Create Direct Rte Tap to activate the direct route function The Direct Route and Erase icons display on the map view screen Create Road Rte Tap to activate the road route function The Road Route and Erase icons display on the map view screen Enter text and or select menu items under the categories of Find Type State City ZIP Code Radius Maximum Matches and Sort by to narrow search parameters Go To Position Center the map on a coordinate location by tapping a number or letter in the coordinate and using the up and down arrows to make changes Tracking Tap to select to track to a map feature a waypoint or route you have created Distance Activate the Distance function The Distance tool icon and Erase tool icon display on the map view screen Options Preferences Display or hide POI points of interest labels change the map font map orientation map colors show hide map crosshairs select a latitude longitude coordinate format or select to display UTM UPS coordinates turn voice output on or off select an off route measurement or select the
328. lable the satellite is being used for navigation and the satellite has DGPS and WAAS corrections available Blue WAAS enabled receivers only Indicates a WAAS satellite used for corrections Viewing Sun and Moon Information You can use the Sun Moon subtab in the GPS tab to view information about the rising and setting of the Sun and Moon relative to a specified date time and location To View Sun and Moon Information Use the following steps to view Sun and Moon information in the GPS tab Click the GPS tab Click the Sun Moon subtab Click the down arrow next to the date to change the date Use the scroll arrows to change the time After you update the date and time you can view 246 VR WN The Sun and Moon traveling across the compass as time passes with the Sun Moon compass In the center of the compass a shadow grows and shrinks and changes direction as the Sun moves across the compass similar to a sun dial Sun rise set and Moon rise set information Moon cycle information such as the day of the moon cycle and the phase Using GPS About GPS What is GPS The Global Positioning System GPS applies modern technology to the ancient basics of navigation The U S Department of Defense has developed and launched a series of positioning satellites in an orbiting constellation These satellites are used as reference points much the same way stars have been used in conventional navigation Using thes
329. las Handheld on a PDA Viewing a Route on Your Map on a Palm OS Handheld Once you have created a route in Street Atlas USA Handheld you can view one route at a time on the map view screen To View a Route Use the following steps to view routes you have created on a map 1 Tap the Menu button on your handheld to display the Street Atlas USA Handheld menu bar 2 Tap Data and then tap Routes The Data screen displays and the list of routes you have created displays under the Source selection box 3 From the list of routes tap to select the route file you want to view The route name is highlighted 4 Tap Go To The map view displays the start point of the selected route at map center Notes e Only one route at a time can be displayed on the map e Tap Beam to beam selected routes to another Palm OS handheld e You can also access Data screen commands Delete Go To Details and Beam by tapping the Data screen menu bar or the Menu button to display the Command drop down menu Showing Hiding a Route on the Map on a Palm OS Handheld When you view a particular route on the map view screen the route continues to display as you pan or perform other map functions unless you delete or hide the route or display another route on the map Only one route can display on the map view screen at a time To Show Hide a Route Use the following steps to show hide a route while viewing the map 1 Tap the Menu button on your han
330. lation you can still change the settings using the Change File Management option in the Options menu For more information see Activating Advanced Simplified File Management This note does not apply to Street Atlas USA Plus users Saving a Track as a GPS Log You can save any track as a GPS Log using the right click feature To Save a Track as a GPS Log Use the following steps to save a track as a GPS log Place a track on the map 2 Right click the track point to Manage Draw and then click Save as GPS Log File 3 Browse to the location where you want to save the gpl file The default location is C DeLorme Docs GPSLogs 4 Type the file name in the File Name text box 5 Click Save The original track is retained in its draw file and a new GPS log is created Note for regular Street Atlas USA users This Help topic describes functionality provided in advanced file management Advanced file management allows you to save multiple routes and draw layers in a single map file With simplified file management you can save only one route and or draw layer in a single map file If you did not select to enable advanced file management during the product installation you can still change the settings using the Change File Management option in the Options menu For more information see Activating Advanced Simplified File Management This note does not apply to Street Atlas USA Plus users 171 Street Atlas USA 2009
331. lays Notes e Select Other under Schema Type to use a non standard file schema definition You can then select any combination of Tab Space Comma and Other If you select Other under Delimiter type the character s that separate your data in the text entry box e The First Row is Header check box is selected by default The program attempts to automatically assign field names based on the data in the first row Select the column you want to display as a label on the map using the available radio buttons Note You can clear a selection to have no label displayed on the map Click the Assignment header for each column and select the appropriate field option from the shortcut menu The Status text box indicates how your data will be geoplaced on the map Select how you want to locate your field information street address or ZIP Postal Code Note The available Locate By options are based on which fields have been assigned to the columns Click Next The Select Data Symbol screen displays Under Match Status click Exact Street Name Area or ZIP Center and then select the unique symbol and text properties you want to display for each match status Assigning different symbols text to your records based on match status shows a visual representation on the map of which records in your dataset were geoplaced exactly only by street name only by area or only by ZIP Center OR Under Match Status select the Use the same symbol t
332. lbar also on the GPS and Handheld Export tabs to exchange objects such as maps waypoints tracks and routes with a handheld device For more information on exchanging objects see Help topics listed under Using Handheld Devices To Use GPS NavMode NavMode a hands free full screen view that you can view in 2 D or 3 D is the default view when you navigate or track with GPS You can turn off NavMode to display the GPS tab view To Turn NavMode On Off Click the NavMode button n to turn it on or off When the button appears indented A NavMode is on Note The button is greyed out unless you have a GPS device plugged in or are playing back a GPS log file You can also change your GPS view in the Options dialog box 1 Click the Options button ES ala on the toolbar and click the GPS tab You can also click the Options button a lon the GPS tab 2 Clear the Use NawMode check box to turn it off or select the check box to turn it on 3 Click OK To Grab and Pan the Map To drag and pan the map in any direction click the Grab and Pan button K3 on the toolbar To Measure Distance Use the following steps to measure linear distances and perimeter area on the map For more information see Measuring Distance and Area on page 22 1 Click the Measure tool oo on the toolbar 2 Click point by point to draw a measurement line on the map A text box displays next to your pointer indicating the total distan
333. ld Notes e Itis not necessary to enter a name for a map feature in the Find text field e To hasten the search process narrow the search field by selecting list items from the first four search categories below the Find text field e To delete the search text tap Clr Tap the down arrow next to the search categories Type State City ZIP Code Method Radius Max Matches and Sort by and tap an item in each drop down list Note You do not need to wait for each search category to populate before you click Search See the table below for descriptions of each search category In this Tap category Type All to search all feature types on the installed map files waypoints or contacts or tap to search one of several feature types State All to search all states or tap to search an individual state Note The list of states is derived from the map files installed on your handheld City All to search all cities or tap to search an individual city name Note The list of city names is derived from the map files installed on your handheld ZIP Code All to search all ZIP Codes or tap to search an individual ZIP Code Note The list of ZIP Codes is derived from the map files installed on your handheld Method Begins with to search for items that begin with the same letters you typed in the Find text field Contains to search for items that contain the letters typed in the Find text field Fuzzy Find to search for items that start wi
334. le the auto snap function hold down the ALT key on your keyboard while using the Measure tool e Measure objects lines and areas are saved with the current map file When you create a new map file the measure objects do not display If you want the same measure objects on your new map file you must recreate them e To view information about a measurement line right click it and select Info from the shortcut menu The measurement information is automatically displayed in the Info tab To Measure Distance or Area Use the following steps to measure linear distance or area on the map 1 Verify you have the correct units of measure selected in the Display tab of the Options dialog box For more information see Setting Units of Measure Preferences on page 85 m f 2 On the toolbar click the Measure tool The pointer changes to P 3 Click point by point to draw a measurement line on the map A text box displays next to your pointer indicating the total distance of the measurement taken Note When you pass over a point in a road measurement line or measurement area to which you can snap a yellow circle defines the snap point Click to snap the point of the measure line to the road or measurement object s point coordinate 4 To end a measurement line double click the last point of the measurement line OR Click the last point of your measure line or area and then click the Measure tool on the toolbar The measure l
335. lect Send to Device Select Route Directions from the Object drop down list Click Next From the Route drop down list select the route file that contains the route directions you want to send to your device Designate a route name and or a route number for the file on the device device dependent 10 To avoid overwriting existing waypoints on your device type a starting point for the new points and select the Prefix a Number to the Waypoint Name check box Not all devices support starting points See your device manual for more information 11 Click Send to Device 12 Repeat the steps for each route file you wan to send to your device 13 Click Finish Tip You can also open the Exchange Wizard by clicking the Exchange button T Exchange on the GPS tab or the Handheld Export tab Sending Tracks to Your Third party GPS Device If you have a compatible GPSdevice you can use the Exchange Wizard to send tracks to your device To Send Tracks Use the following steps to send tracks to your device Connect your device to your computer If you are using a third party GPS receiver you may have to use specific settings For example if you are using a GARMIN GPS receiver set your GARMIN receiver interface to GRMN GRMN For more information see your owner manual Click the Exchange button P on the toolbar Under Select Device select GPS or point to Athletic Device and then select your device 265 Street Atlas
336. lick the Query tab and select the records that you want to include as stops in the route Note To select multiple records at once hold the CTRL key on your keyboard while you select the individual records pee elier A eael canner Ph t water Supercenter __ Anta Futon county l Mart Supercenter 2795 Chastain Meadows Pkw A 3 C T Step 4 Add Stops to route Right click the selected record s point to Route and then click Add Stop to add the stops in the order they were selected in the table or Insert Stop to add the stops in geographical order Note Use the Advanced subtab in the Route tab to reorder sats stops 3105 Cobb Pkwy Atlanta 50 Tutorials Step 5 Calculate the route If you do not have the Auto calculate check box selected in the Route New Edit tab click the Go To button on the right side of the tab or click the Calculate button in the Route tab The route displays on the map 5 il 1 44 E 141 attahoochee Plantaj OW lMat b i gt Sand Springs we a fama Ka Ae ae 4 Lo fete Step 6 Print the route directions Print the directions as a Travel Package using the Print Route functionality 51 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide Tutorial Using Route Avoids Ever been planning a trip only to find out that a major road you re planning to take is currently under construction How about when you re in the middle of your travels and
337. lick the right arrow on the vertical resize tool once to incrementally increase the tab width You can repeat this stop until the overview map is no longer exposed Click the left arrow on the vertical resize tool once to incrementally increase the width of the overview map You can repeat this step until the tab area is no longer exposed Double click the bar above the right arrow to show only the tab area Double click the bar below the left arrow to show only the overview map Double click the bar between the right and left arrows to return the tab and overview maps to their default views Showing or Hiding Tabs The Tab Manager feature allows you to customize your program by showing or hiding individual tabs You can access Tab Manager Notes During installation After installation using the Tab Manager option in the Options menu From the Start menu If you use Tab Manager while the program is open you must exit and restart the program to view the tab changes To show or hide the entire tab area panel click the arrow next to the Options button E options ptons on the toolbar If the tab area is showing and you want to hide it click Show Tab Area Panel to clear the check box next to it If the tab area is hidden and you want to show it click Show Tab Area Panel to select the check box To Show Individual Tabs Use the following steps to show tabs using Tab Manager 1 88 Open Street Atlas USA click the arrow next
338. like What is the next turn or Where am NavMode in 2 D e F 7 moRE stop eading w Exit 195 to SR 91 ramp NEXT Kj Keep LEFT on US 24 SR 91 N Poplar St Highway 91 NavMode Display e Compass tThe default map setting is North up in 2 D and in the GPS direction in 3 D To change the compass select or clear the Rotate Map in GPS option on the GPS tab in the Options dialog box 42 Tutorials Next Turn tThe distance to the next turn based on the units selected on the Display tab in the Options dialog box Dist to Finish The distance to the finish point on your route based on the units selected on the Display tab in the Options dialog box ETA The estimated time of arrival at the finish of your route This is based on the time and time zone set on your computer If your trip goes beyond the current day the day of arrival also displays The ETA does not include any layover time at a stop GPS Fix Indicates if your GPS fix is 2 D or 3 D If you do not have a fix or if the GPS is acquiring a fix No Fix displays Speed Displays the speed you are traveling based on the units selected on the Display tab in the Options dialog box Heading Displays as degrees T True North or M Magnetic North based on the bearing selected on the Units area in the Options dialog box Radar Results f you are using GPS Radar an orange bar displays the closest search result Click Stop Here to inse
339. llinoisroads info roads 312 roads 312 www dot state il us 368 4636 aie ied www gettingaroundillinois com Toll free Toll free roads 800 roads 800 452 4368 452 4368 Toll Toll highways highways 800 865 5394 800 865 5394 Indiana 317 232 317 232 8300 www in gov dot motoristinfo 8300 lowa 511 www dot state ia us roadcons htm Outside IA www 51lia org 515 288 1047 Co E www ee state ky us www 511 a gov 366 Recreational and Travel Contact Information www state me us mdot homepage htm Manitoba 877 627 877 627 6237 www gov mb ca 6237 204 945 3704 204 945 3704 Maryland 800 323 877 229 7726 www sha state md us 6742 410 545 0300 Massachusetts 617 374 617 374 1234 www mass gov 1234 www mhd state ma us www eot state ma us 800 381 800 381 8477 www michigan gov mdot 8477 Minnesota 11 www dot state mn us lt n 3774 601 359 601 987 1211 www gomdot com 7338 Missouri 888 275 888 275 6636 www modot mo gov 6636 800 222 6400 800 222 CO Nevada ee 511 www nevadadot com traveler Outside NV Outside NV 877 687 877 687 6237 hn New Brunswick 800 561 4063 www gnb ca 0113 roadcond road conditions e asp New Hampshire 511 www state nh us dot traveler htm Outside NH 866 282 7579 New Jersey Central 732 www state nj us transportation 308 4074 Northern 973 770 5025 Southern 609 866 4940 367 Street Atlas USA 2009 User
340. location on the map where you want to add or insert the stop or via Repeat this step for each stop or via you want to add to your route Note Ifthe Add option is selected in the Route tab stops and vias are added in the order they are added to the route If the Insert option is selected in the Route tab stops and vias are added in the order they are approached in the route For more information see Adding and Inserting Stops and Vias on page 219 4 Click the Calculate button Note To use the current GPS location in a route you must connect your device to your computer and click the Start GPS button on the toolbar or on the GPS tab Tip Once a route is calculated you can use the subtabs in the Route tab to view route directions edit a route and more Click the Directions subtab to view the route directions the Advanced subtab to display the advanced routing options or click Back on Track to add your current GPS position as a stop to the current route To Start Stop Your GPS Connection To start or stop your GPS connection click the GPS button Go on the toolbar If you are starting a connection the GPS tab area opens so you can monitor your GPS status Note The GPS button on the toolbar is a toggle button that lets you start your GPS connection if the device is not active or stop the connection if it is active 73 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide To Exchange Files with a GPS or PDA Use the Exchange button i on the too
341. log information 1 2 304 Tap the Menu button on your handheld to display the Street Atlas USA Handheld menu bar Tap Data and then tap GPS Logs to view the Data screen The list of logs you have recorded displays under the Source selection box Tap Details to view details on each point and line segment in the log The GPS Log Info screen displays the following The position coordinates for each log point Note Tapping the bold coordinate number centers the point on the map view screen The time the segment was recorded The speed you were traveling when the line segment was recorded The elevation in feet when the line segment was recorded The bearing of the line segment Note If speed is zero bearing displays as North Tap File Details to view the name type size creation date and location of the log file within main or secondary memory Tap Rename and then enter a new name in the Save As dialog box Tap OK to save the change or tap Cancel to return to the Item Info dialog box When you have finished renaming or viewing information on a log tap Done Then tap Done again to return to the Data screen To view another log select the desired log file and then tap Go To The map view screen displays the start point of the selected log at map center OR Using Street Atlas Handheld on a PDA If you have finished editing viewing log files tap Done to return to the map view screen Notes e Tap Beam to beam selected ma
342. lor and the Image Preview displays the chosen color area as transparent 9 To display all colors select the Opaque option under Transparency The Image Preview reflects this change 10 Click OK when finished Note Be sure the color in the symbol you want to appear transparent is not repeated in another part of the symbol you want to display as opaque Select a new color from the color palette and fill the area on the symbol you want to display as transparent with the new color Use the Select Color tool to select the new color in the symbol grid Anchor Position Being aware of Cursor Position is important for choosing the anchor position of a symbol The anchor is the pixel position on the symbol that corresponds to the geographic coordinate of the point selected on the map when the symbol is placed Any newly created symbol whether imported pasted or dragged into the XSym Symbol Editing Grid has a default position of center anchor 213 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide XSym lets you change the anchor position of your symbol To Select the Anchor Position Use the following steps to select the anchor position of a symbol su 1 Once your symbol is created click the Anchor Position When you pass your pointer over the Symbol Editing Grid it changes to a small cross hair plus sign 2 Click the pixel grid within the symbol to position your anchor The anchor location pixel coordinate numbers display after the position text
343. lose button EJ in the upper right corner of the screen The Save Changes dialog box opens if you made changes to a map file e Click Yes to save changes Note If only one change was made the program closes after you save the map file e Click No to discard changes and close the program e Click Cancel to return to Street Atlas USA No changes are saved If you made more than one change to the map file or changes to more than one map file once you save your map file the Exit dialog box opens e Click Save and Exit to save changes to the selected files and close the program Note Clear the check box for any file you do not want to save e Click No to discard changes and close the program e Click Cancel to return to Street Atlas USA No changes are saved About the I nterface Tab Area You can access most of the application s functions from the tab area at the bottom of the screen To access Help for a specific tab click the Help button jo on the tab You can also customize your interface to reorder the tabs show or hide individual tabs or show or hide the tab panel e Map Files e Find e Print e Draw e GPS e Voice e Route e Info e NetLink e Handheld Export Street Atlas Plus Only e Phone e XData Hidden by default Use Tab Manager to view the tab 25 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide Control Panel The Control Panel located to the right of the map view displays information pertinent to the
344. lutter e The file size of the update download 3 To download a product update or save a dataset to your computer click the Download link next to the item Datasets are saved by default in C DeLorme Docs Downloads To View Hidden Product Updates and Downloads Use the following steps to view and download hidden updates and downloads 1 Click the NetLink tab 2 Click the Downloads subtab or click View the List in the Check for Updates section on Home subtab 280 Using NetLink The Available Downloads amp Updates list displays If you have hidden product updates and downloads you will see a View Hidden link next to the Available Downloads amp Updates heading Click the View Hidden link The hidden updates and downloads display To download a product update or save a dataset to your computer click the Download link next to the item Datasets are saved by default in C DeLorme Docs Downloads 281 Using GeoTagger Getting Started with GeoTagger Use the GeoTagger Wizard to sync digital photos with GPS log files gpl and track files an1 and tag them to the location you took them You can place images as an actual image on the map a MapNote with a hyperlink or a symbol with a hyperlink To open the GeoTagger Wizard click the GeoTagger ET on on the toolbar Important Make sure the time and date on your camera and on your GPS device match before you begin This ensures that your images are correctly matched to
345. m up to 256 times Draw Create a route using a When drawing a routable road click each existing road you have added to road it crosses to ensure that you can route on the the map with the Draw new road When you open a track you ve imported tab from your GPS device join the imported line with existing lines by right clicking each intersection and selecting Manage Draw J oin Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide Find Modify a Find search Right click a result item in the Find tab to add it asa result MapNote insert it as a stop in your route copy the information to your clipboard and so on Find a custom point of You can use the Custom option to find other interest such as a categories besides those listed or to find multiple Chinese restaurant categories at once when performing a GPS radar search in Find GPS tyon wanton uses S UU yU View a GPS log on the Use the Draw tab to import a GPS log file and view it map as a line object on the map Handheld Export Modify the export area When you click Preview the default export area for in Handheld Export the location you selected displays on the map as shaded rectangles Click Select to confirm the area To edit the area click the Select Edit tool and then click the map to add or remove rectangles to from the export area I nfo NetLink Quickly view information Hover your cursor over objects on the map to see for a location on the information
346. m the draw file dialog area Then click Done 4 Click the Select tool A and click the track you want to edit e A box displays around the selected track e The shape points used to create the line display as small magenta squares 5 Change any of the track style color or weight options of the existing track e To edit any label on a track click the Select tool select the line twice then type the label in the text box that displays next to the track e Reshape the track by dragging any of the points in the line to a new location When you select a shape point of a line segment within an active line e A small green circle indicates the start end point of the selected track segment e A small red circle indicates the last end point of the selected track segment e Select the Coordinate or the Distance and Bearing Angle option and edit their numbers Click Apply to initiate the changes 6 Click Done to finish your edit OR Press the ENTER key on your keyboard OR Click outside the object s active box on the map Placing a Routable Road Line Arc or Spline at a Specific Location You can place any line object routable road line arc or spline at a specific coordinate location To Place a Line Object at a Specific Location Use the following steps to place your line object at a specific coordinate location 1 Click the Draw tab 2 To place a routable road click and hold the Routable Road tool OR To place
347. made If Not Located displays next to any of your records either address coordinate information was not provided with the contact or the address coordinate information could not be found in the program Notes e The address book has a 200 record limit e You can resize and move the Address Book dialog box e You can resize the columns inside the Address Book dialog box Manually Entering Address Book Information You can import an existing address book or build a new address book by manually entering each record You can also add an address book entry by right clicking the map selecting Create Address Book Entry and following steps 4 6 below If you right click the map at the location for the address book entry some of the information such as coordinates street name city state etc automatically complete the Edit a DeLorme Address Book Entry dialog box To Manually Enter Address Book I nformation Use the following steps to manually enter address book information 1 Click the Find tab 2 Click the Address Book button The DeLorme Address Book dialog box opens 3 Click New 4 Type select the contact s Name Street Address City State Abbreviation ZIP Postal Code Country Code Telephone Latitude if available and Longitude if available 5 Select how you want the contact to be placed on the map from the Update Location drop down list 6 Click OK 7 Repeat steps 2 6 for each contact you want to add Notes e
348. may need to be adjusted 2 3 Tap the item for each preference option and then tap ok The map view screen displays with the selected preference s Waypoints Adding Waypoints on a Pocket PC Use waypoints Wpts on the map to mark specific locations or to use as points along a route To Add a Waypoint Use the following steps to add a waypoint to the map 1 350 Tap and hold your stylus on a location on the map where you want to add a waypoint and select Drop Waypoint from the shortcut menu OR If location information was available for the last tapped position you can add it as a waypoint by tapping the point on the map tapping the information area above the menu bar and then tapping Add as Waypoint OR To add your screen center as a waypoint tap Tools and then tap Add Wpt The Add Wpt icon displays in the center of the map view screen Tap the Add Wpt icon to place the waypoint at the screen center If you do not want to place the waypoint at the screen center tap the map location where you want to place the waypoint and then tap the Add Wpt icon to save the waypoint Note If you need to pan the map to place a waypoint at a particular location pan to the location and then tap the map view screen at the desired location to place the waypoint icon Optional Enter a new name for the waypoint a map feature or placename the waypoint is close to any comment about the waypoint and the desired symbol style and color
349. mbol name to the current symbol type a name or phrase in the Symbol Name text box under Edit Symbol 10 Click OK when finished Notes e If you attempt to import a bitmap larger than 24 x 24 pixels into XSym a message box warns you the selected bitmap is larger than 24 x 24 pixels and the image is reduced e Ifthe bitmap is less than 24 x 24 pixels the remaining area is filled to the edge of the Symbol Editing Grid with one of the symbol pixel colors e As you create a symbol an image preview displays to the upper left of the Symbol Editing Grid You can make edits to the symbol in either the Image 210 Using the Draw Tools Preview or the Symbol Editing Grid Any edits done in one view are mirrored in the other view Dragging a Bitmap into XSym You can drag a bitmap into DeLorme XSym to use as a symbol Using drag to bring in an image is much like importing a bitmap into XSym Ideally the new bitmap should be 24 x 24 pixels in size You can assign a new symbol name for the symbol to help locate it under the Find tab in the DeLorme mapping program To Drag a Bitmap into XSym Use the following steps to drag a bitmap into XSym 1 2 10 Notes Click the Draw tab Click and hold the Symbol MapNote Text Label I mage tool oo to view its hidden options Select the Symbol tool PI Under Symbols select the symbol set that contains the symbol you want to edit Click Edit The DeLorme XSym dialog box opens U
350. ment option in the Options menu For more information see Activating Advanced Simplified File Management This note does not apply to Street Atlas USA Plus users 101 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide Editing a Map File As you create new routes and draw objects they are added to the current map file You can also pan and zoom the map as needed and then save all these changes To Add Delete Files Contained in a Map File Use the following steps to add or delete specific files contained in a particular map file from the Map Files tab 1 Open a map file 2 Click File click Current View and then click Contents to view the contents of the map file e To add a file click Add and then click Draw Files or Route Files Then select the file you want to add to the current map file Note If a file is added to a map file and then changed later the file is updated in every map file it has been added to e To remove a route or draw file from a map file select that file and then click Remove Note This process does not delete the file it just removes it from the current map file 3 Click File and then click Save OR a Click the Save button z Map files have saf extensions and are saved by default in the C DeLorme Docs Map Files directory Note Under the tree menu you can use the check box next to each draw or route file to display or hide it in the current map view 102 Note for regular Street Atlas USA u
351. n The name of the destination will also be displayed Use the drop down lists to view the following information Time to turn Distance to turn Time to finish Distance to finish Speed Heading Elevation System time If the navigation panel is turned off you will see a direction indicator Such as SW or NE as well as the bearing and distance For example Dir NW 204 0 3 mi If the navigation panel is turned off you will see turn information where time and distance from current location in the information area For example turn left at US 1 342 feet in under 1 minute If tracking while connected to a GPS receiver the map pans as you move along the route 361 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide 362 Use the Off Route After setting in the Preferences dialog to be notified when you have strayed a specified distance away from a route When you have met that minimum distance an alert icon displays in the lower right corner of the map display Tap the alert icon to recalculate the route from your current location To discontinue a tracking session tap the Track button or tap Tools and then tap Tracking to open the Select Track screen tap Stop Tracking and then tap ok to exit the Select Track screen The map view screen displays When tracking your handheld device will beep before each turn that is longer than one mile from your last turn if voice is off The next segment of your r
352. n EE options and then click the GPS Settings tab 3 Under GPS Options verify that the Automatically Detect GPS check box is cleared 4 Type the coordinates in the text boxes Note Coordinates display in the format specified in the Display tab of the Options dialog box OR Click Use Map Center to set the coordinates to the latitude and longitude of the current map center e Update the date time options You can use the date and time on your computer or you can change the date and time settings used by the GPS device to those of your choice Use the following steps to change the date and or time settings 1 Connect your GPS receiver to your computer set the receiver to the mode specified in your user manual and then turn the receiver on taal ions 2 Click the Options button ca R and then click the GPS Settings tab 3 To use the date and time on your computer select the Use Current System Date Time check box OR To use the time and date of your choice clear the Use Current System Date Time check box and then e To manually set the time select the time zone from the Zone drop down box and if Daylight Saving Time is currently in effect where you are select the DST check box Then use the scroll box to select the desired time Note Time is displayed in 24 hour format with Midnight as 00 00 00 e To manually set the date click the down arrow next to the Date field and select the date from the calendar 5
353. n N A 888 335 7623 roadinfo telenium ca shwyw html Northern SK www highways gov sk ca 306 933 8333 Southern SK 306 933 8333 South Carolina www dot state sc us South Dakota 511 511 www sddot com travinfo asp Outside SD Outside SD 866 697 866 697 3571 3511 Tennessee 511 511 www tdot state tn us tdotsmartway 800 858 800 342 3258 6349 9292 11 5 11 Vermont 5 11 www aot state vt us travelinfo htm 800 429 7623 Virginia 511 511 www virginiadot org default_flash asp 800 367 800 367 7623 www 51llva org 7623 800 695 800 695 7623 www wsdot wa gov traffic 7623 877 982 7623 www wvdot com 6 motorists 6 motorists htm Wisconsin 800 762 800 762 3947 www dot state wi us 3947 Wyoming 307 772 888 996 7623 www wyoroad info 0824 Outside WY 369 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide 307 772 0824 Yukon Territory 867 456 867 456 7623 www gov yk ca roadreport 7623 877 456 7623 877 456 7623 Hotel Car and Airline Contact Information This list provides hotel car rental and airline information Hotel Information Hotel Name Phone Number AmeriHost Inn 800 434 5800 AmeriSuites 877 774 6467 Reservations 800 833 1516 Baymont Inn amp Suites 866 999 1111 Reservations 877 229 6668 Best Inns and Suites Best Western International Inc Country Inns amp Suites Courtyard by Marriott 800 321 2211 Reservations 888 236 2427 U S and Canada Crowne Plaza 88
354. n a Pocket PC With Street Atlas USA Handheld you can create road routes to plan trips Note Only one route can display on the map at a time A route displays on the map as it is being drawn and continues to display once it is saved When you create a second route and save the route file the map centers on the start point of the new route and the previous route is cleared from the map You must end tracking before creating a new route To Create a Road Route Use the following steps to create a road route 1 Tap Tools and then tap Create Road Rte The Road Route icon displays in the upper right corner of the map view screen and the Erase icon displays in the upper left corner of the map view screen 2 Tap the locations on the map where you want to place each point in the route Each time you tap the map while in Road Route mode a point is placed on the map and a line segment displays between the points Tap the Road Route icon when you have finished placing all of your points Notes If you have placed a point on the route incorrectly tap the Erase icon The last point placed as well as the line segment between it and the previous point is cleared Clear a whole route by tapping the Erase icon until all points and line segments are cleared If you need to pan the map to place another route point drag the map to the appropriate location and tap the map view screen at the desired location to place the next point and line segment
355. n displays allowing you to view information on rename or delete files under the Maps Routes Wpts or GPS Log Source selections Press the button repeatedly to cycle through the Maps Routes Wpts or GPS Log Data screens in Street Atlas USA Handheld the new waypoint is labeled wpt6 Add Wpt The map refreshes and a waypoint displays at screen center or at the GPS position if a GPS receiver is connected The waypoint is labeled wpt with a sequential number determined by the number of unnamed waypoints you have added For example if you have already added five unnamed waypoints Find The Find dialog displays allowing you to search for map features on the maps installed on your handheld Help Displays the Help tips available for the screen that is currently displaying 5 Tap OK to save the selection The Preferences dialog box opens OR Tap Cancel if you do not want to assign any actions to an application button The Preferences dialog box displays Tap OK The map view screen displays Press any of the application buttons on the handheld to use the assigned action while viewing the map To Set Other Preferences Use the following steps to set preferences in the Other section of the Preferences screen 312 1 Tap the Menu button on your handheld to display the Street Atlas USA Handheld menu bar Note You can also access the Preferences menu option by using the Graffiti Menu Commands Tap Options then tap Prefere
356. n incorporate any new roads you add to a route when you create a route You must be at data zoom level 11 0 or greater when adding roads with the Routable Road tool To Draw Routable Roads Use the following steps to add routable roads to a road layer 1 2 3 Click the Draw tab Click the Routable Road tool all Type the name of the road you want to add in the Road Name text box Name each routable road you add so you can locate it using the find feature Hover the mouse pointer over existing roads to display the yellow diamond symbol X The yellow diamond symbol indicates where on an existing road the point for your new road will connect connection point Notes e The new road must connect to an existing non limited access road for routing to occur on the new road e Each time you intersect an existing road hover the mouse over the road to display the yellow diamond symbol and click to create a connection point before continuing to draw If you draw the line over the road without creating a connection point routing cannot occur along the intersection Once you locate the connection point for your new road click the map to place the first point Click point to point or drag to add the new road to the draw layer The following information is available as you add each point in your road e The coordinates of each point display in the corresponding text boxes e The distance and bearing angle of each new point from its previo
357. n is determined by the GPS position not the screen center e You must stop tracking one feature to begin tracking another e If you have selected to turn your voice output on a voice will alert you of upcoming decisions When you are in the map view screen of Street Atlas USA Handheld the Track button displays to the right of the Start Stop GPS button in the menu bar Tap the Track button Eri or tap Tools and then tap Tracking to display the Select Track screen You must tap one of the four items in the Source box to track toward Find Use the Find feature to search for and select a specific map feature Wpts Select a waypoint from the list of those you have created Direct Routes Select a direct route from the list of those you have on the device Road Routes Select a road route from the list of those you have on the device Once you have selected an item to track toward tap Start Tracking to begin tracking Tap Stop Tracking to stop tracking As you track to a destination point map feature waypoint or direct route the Tracking icon displays if the ending destination point is not in the current map view Pan the map to the destination point or tap the Tracking icon to center the map on the map feature waypoint or route point If you have the Navigation Panel enabled and are tracking towards a direct route a compass direction displays along with the name of your destination If you have the Navigation Panel enabled an
358. n on your handheld to display the Street Atlas USA Handheld menu bar 2 Tap Tools and then tap Tracking The Select Track screen displays 3 In the Source box tap Address Book Entries The list of contacts in the Address Book displays 4 Tap the entry you want to track toward and then tap Start Tracking The map view screen displays the Tracking icon indicating the direction of track to the selected entry s destination point if the destination is off the current map view If you have the Navigation Panel enabled a compass direction displays along with the name of your destination Below that area two drop down menus let you choose to display the time to finish heading elevation etc If you do not have the Navigation Panel enabled the Info Area displays the distance and bearing to the destination 5 Drag the map to the destination point or tap the icon to center the map on the entry OR If tracking while connected to a GPS receiver the map pans as you move toward your destination point Note To discontinue a tracking session open the Select Track screen tap Stop Tracking and then tap Done The map view screen displays Tracking Along a Route on a Palm OS Handheld You can track along a route you have loaded on your handheld device in Street Atlas USA 2009 Handheld For an overview of the tracking feature see Tracking Overview To Track Along a Route Use the following steps to track along a route 1 Tap the Menu
359. n size The print area for a Page map displays as a red box and the print area for a Screen map displays as a blue box on the overview map 4 If you selected Page in step 3 the following options are available e Under Print Layout select a layout option Single 2 x 2 or 3 x 3 The print area displays on both the Map and the Overview Map In the example below 2 x 2 is selected This means the print area encompasses four standard pages at whatever paper size you specified 20 Getting Started in the Setup options You can assemble a multipage map into a large map e If you selected 2 x 2 or 3 x 3 and do not want to save all the pages in the multipage map on the map layout graphic click each page you do not want to save The page appears dimmed or gray In the example below page 4 will not print E e Verify this is the location and photo zoom you want to save If not pan the map to the location and zoom to the level you want Note Changing the photo zoom enlarges reduces the map features and changes the map area that you save as an image If you increase the photo zoom level map text lines symbols etc are larger and your map area is reduced If you decrease the photo zoom level map text lines symbols etc are smaller and your map area is enlarged The reduction enlargement percentages for your photo zoom level display under the Photo Zoom drop down list e If you want to use other tabs and functions but not lose
360. n the mapping application and review your entire journey on screen Your log will play back in NavMode unless you have it turned off For more information see Using NavMode or GPS Tab View Notes e You cannot play back a log file if you are currently tracking with a GPS receiver e Zooming in on the map allows you to see the log file in greater detail e When you play back a log file in NavMode the tab area is not minimized this allows you to control the playback 240 Using GPS To Play Back a Log File Use the following steps to play back and review a log file eS Click the GPS tab and then click the GPS Log subtab Click Clear Trail to clear any existing GPS points from the map display Click File and then click Open Single click the file you want to view The bottom of the Open a GPL File dialog box opens the start location start time start coordinate total distance duration finish location finish time finish coordinate and the number of readings for the selected log Log files have gpl extensions and are saved by default in the C DeLorme Docs GPSLogs directory Click Open Click the Play button a ee to begin playing back your log OR Drag the slider in the Progress Bar see graphic at the end of this topic to the point in the log you want to play Note Playing back a log file defaults to 1x which occurs in real time and takes the same amount of time as the original trip did for example if your tr
361. n you can e Update the symbols in the selected dataset by clicking Symbolize and updating the symbol properties e Delete the selected dataset by clicking Delete The dataset is deleted from the map the current map file and from your computer e View the records within the selected dataset by clicking Query For more information see Viewing Dataset Records Note A selected check box indicates that the dataset is being displayed on the map Clear the check box to hide the dataset s symbols on the map 2 Click a dataset to select it and then click the Query subtab You can then e Edit a record in the dataset by double clicking inside the cell you want to edit or by right clicking the record in the Query subtab and clicking Edit e Press the TAB key on your keyboard to advance through the cells in the record When you are finished editing the record press the ENTER key on your keyboard 149 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide e Create a route using a record in the dataset by right clicking the record you want to use as your start stop or finish route point clicking Route and then clicking the route option e Add a blank record to the end of the records list by clicking Add e Duplicate a record in the dataset by right clicking the record and clicking Duplicate Record s Duplicates of the records will be available at the bottom of the record list e Delete a record in the dataset by selecting the record and clicking Delete o
362. nce in elevation from the start of the profile to the end of the profile Ephemeris Data that indicates the position and status of satellites EST Eastern Standard Time GMT Greenwich Mean Time used as the standard of time throughout the world GPS Global Positioning System a constellation of orbiting satellites used to calculate a precise position on or near the earth s surface Grade Actually percent grade rise over run 100 x rise run For example 6 means that for every 100 ft you gain 6 ft in elevation HDOP The measure of how much the geometry of the satellites affects the horizontal position estimate Heading Azimuth of the longitudinal axis of an aircraft or ship Heading may differ from direction of travel when flying or boating due to currents in the air or water Initialize To set to a starting position as in obtaining initial coordinates for a GPS receiver Latitude The measure of a position on the earth s surface north or south of the equator in degrees minutes and seconds Defined as the angle from the equator s horizontal plane perpendicular to the polar axis All lines of latitude are parallel and are often referred to as parallels Log A record of the speed direction and route of travel as obtained via GPS 15 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide Logging Recording the speed direction and route traveled using GPS Longitude The measure of a position on the surface of the eart
363. nces The Preferences dialog box opens Tap the Other tab Tap the down arrow next to each Other Preference option to display the list items available under each option The table below describes the Other Preference options Using Street Atlas Handheld on a PDA Preference Description Option Coordinates There are three latitude longitude options as well as a UTM UPS coordinate option available for use with the maps on your handheld e For latitude longitude coordinates tap Degrees Degrees Minutes or Degrees Minutes Seconds e Tap UTM UPS to display coordinates in the UTM Universal Transverse Mercator system or the UPS Universal Polar Stereographic system Coordinates display the zone number and letter with the easting and northing numbers Example 19 T 504780 5086751 There are four unit options available under Preferences mi ft miles feet km m kilometers meters NM ft Nautical Miles feet NM m Nautical Miles meters 313 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide Info Area The Info Area updates each time you use the map When the map is not in use you can select a static or cycling display e Tap Static to lock the display The GPS and Tracking buttons display until the next map action unless you are tracking an object When tracking the distance and bearing periodically displays e Tap Cycling to allow the Info Area to cycle through the GPS and Tracking buttons the current coordin
364. nd or Command Group Use the following steps to search for a command or command group 95 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide 1 Click the Options button ES i on the toolbar OR Click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu Then click Options to open the dialog box Click the Keyboard Shortcuts tab Select the Search option In the Commands text box begin typing the name of the command or command group you are searching for As you type the list box under the Commands text box displays word matches Viewing All of the Shortcut Keys for a Scheme The Reference Card option in the Keyboard Shortcuts tab lets you view a complete list of all of the scheme s shortcut keys To View a List of Shortcut Keys Use the following steps to view a list of shortcut keys for a scheme 1 on the toolbar Click the Options button ES OR Click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu Then click Options to open the dialog box Click the Keyboard Shortcuts tab Select the scheme that contains the shortcut keys you want to view from the Scheme drop down list Optional To sort the list view click the heading you want to sort by Group Command or Shortcut Click Reference Card The list displays in your default Web browser and is sorted by the same column you selected in step 3 Optional Print the list from your Web browser Tips for printing a reference card from your Web brows
365. nd then click Add to assign the stop Note The Stop text box clears itself after you click the Add button This allows you to use the text box to add more stops fe Step 3 Adda via To use a specific road or go through a certain town type the place in the Via box Since you want the route to calculate based on the geographic location of the via make sure the Insert option is selected and click Insert to add the via Montezuma co v 37 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide Step 5 Select your activity type To ensure the route is calculated for your activity select the Driving button and then select Road Quickest as the route calculation method Step 6 Calculate the route Click Calculate to calculate the route Tip Select the Auto check box next to the Calculate button to automatically calculate the route after you add each point ckewden ps era Central City a a SEverpeen di s i i co fn oe i 38 Tutorials Tutorial Routing with GPS Tab View Ever been lost unsure of a turn or had to stop unexpectedly during the course of a road trip Using Street Atlas USA on a portable computer with a compatible GPS device such as Earthmate GPS can solve those common traveling problems for good This tutorial explains routing with GPS in GPS tab view This option allows you to use the GPS tab to control navigating and tracking By default the tabs and Control Panel
366. nder Symbols in Set click New to clear the Symbol Editing Grid Browse your computer to locate the bitmap bmp file Drag the file into XSym The bitmap image displays in the Symbol Editing Grid See important Notes below Use the tools in the Draw Tool Box and under Transparency and Anchor to edit the symbol e To undo the last action click the Undo button under Edit Symbol e To repeat the last action click the Redo button under Edit Symbol To assign a symbol name to the current symbol type a name or phrase in the Symbol Name text box under Edit Symbol Click OK when finished If you attempt to import a bitmap larger than 24 x 24 pixels into XSym a message box warns you the selected bitmap is larger than 24 x 24 pixels and the image is reduced If the bitmap is less than 24 x 24 pixels the remaining area is filled to the edge of the Symbol Editing Grid with one of the symbol pixel colors As you create a symbol an image preview displays to the upper left of the Symbol Editing Grid You can make edits to the symbol in either the Image Preview or the Symbol Editing Grid Any edits done in one view are mirrored in the other view 211 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide Removing a Symbol You can remove a symbol from the default symbol set or from any other symbol set you have created To Remove a Symbol Use the following steps to remove a symbol from a symbol set 1 Click the Draw tab 2 Click and
367. ne number and distance from the current location OR Select the Directions option to view directions to the selected point of interest from your current specified location Finding a Symbol by its Name Within the Draw tab you can attach a name to any symbol you add to your map For more information on adding symbols to the map see Adding a Waypoint Symbol MapNote or Text Label to the Map You can use a name to help locate a symbol you have already placed on a map using the QuickSearch feature on the Find tab For example if you named a symbol My House when you placed it on the map use the following steps for conducting a search on the unique symbol name To Find a Symbol by its Name Use the following steps to find a symbol by its name 1 2 128 Click the Find tab Using QuickSearch type the symbol name followed by the town and state abbreviation for example My Office Yarmouth ME in the Search For text box Click Search The closet matches display in the list view to the right of the Search For text box The symbol name displays in the Name column Double click the item or select the item and click Go To to locate your selection on the map The map view centers on the item A MapTag displays the symbol name at the symbol location Note To display MapTags select the MapTags check box on the Find tab Finding a Location on the Map Tips on Viewing Search Results These tips can help you view Find tab sea
368. ne Data to your Hard Drive If you install the phone data to your hard drive it is always accessible when you use the Phone tab To install the data 1 Insert the Phone Data DVD into your DVD ROM drive The Installation Wizard opens 2 Follow the on screen steps to install the phone data to your hard drive To Use Phone Data from the DVD You can use the phone data from the DVD without installing it to your hard drive 1 Insert the Phone Data DVD into your DVD ROM drive The Installation Wizard opens 2 Click Cancel click Yes when prompted and then click Finish to exit the wizard 3 Click the Phone tab 4 Click Data The Browse for Folder dialog box opens 5 Browse to your DVD ROM drive and click the Phone folder 6 Click OK The states provinces on the disk in your DVD ROM drive are available in the State Prov drop down list in the Phone tab Searching for a Phone Book Listing This Help topic describes functionality that is available only in Street Atlas USA Plus With the Phone tab you can search for a name and address based on a given phone number or search for a phone number based upon a specified name and or address You can pick and choose your selections to add to map make a dataset and so on Notes e A hyphen before the name in a search result indicates a business listing An asterisk before the name in a search result indicates a Do Not Call preference The person or business listed has re
369. ng Grid Click Import to display the Open Bitmap File dialog box Browse to the location of the bitmap and click Open The imported bitmap displays in the Symbol Editing Grid See important Notes below Use the tools in the Draw Tool Box and under Transparency and Anchor to edit the symbol e To undo the last action click the Undo button under Edit Symbol e To repeat the last action click the Redo button under Edit Symbol To assign a symbol name to the current symbol type a name or phrase in the Symbol Name text box under Edit Symbol Using the Draw Tools Note Once you assign a name to a symbol in a symbol set each occurrence of that symbol you place on the map retains the new symbol name in addition to the default symbol name of symbol 8 Click OK when finished Notes e If you attempt to import a bitmap larger than 24 x 24 pixels into XSym a message box warns you the selected bitmap is larger than 24 x 24 pixels and the image is reduced e Ifthe bitmap is less than 24 x 24 pixels the remaining area is filled to the edge of the Symbol Editing Grid with one of the symbol pixel colors e As you create a symbol an image preview displays to the upper left of the Symbol Editing Grid You can make edits to the symbol in either the mage Preview or the Symbol Editing Grid Any edits done in one view are mirrored in the other view Copying and Pasting You can copy and paste portions of a symbol or whole symbols
370. ng and Viewing Information on a GPS Log File on a Palm OS Handheld 304 Showing Hiding a GPS Log on the Map on a Palm OS Handheld 55 305 Deleting a GPS LOG vsisveicecdueetieec egg eed ue eed ie eed E dhe bua ek ceed ev de wen er te 306 Monitoring Your GPS Session on a Palm OS Handheld 306 Sky View on a Palm OS Handheld 0 cceceee cece eee eee eects eee eee a eee eens 307 Channel MieWsssrnvsunpcorhes inter hs E Sed d escent eth E E oa deatehag teenage 307 Sun Moon on a Palm OS Handheld c cece cece ee eee eee eee neta e cee ee teens 308 Setting Preferences sni ciraire eden eed sg eee eet ban edt de eee Foden ebeea ia 309 Adding Way POINES ianea heen oaia KAE a hehe aa EAE EEEE E EA Ea Geen 315 Centering the Map on a Waypoint sssssssssssssrrrrrsssrrrrrsesrirrrnnnrrrrrrenerrnrre nns 315 Editing a Waypoint on a Palm OS Handheld ceceeee cece eee eect ee eee ee ened 316 Deleting a Waypoint cece eee ikea e EE EE ETE e a EEE eee eee aK K 316 Creating a Direct ROUTE sasin a dneni maraa ee Pees en tamed ena eet N 317 Creating a Road ROUTE Se ccc earies eee gedit a dienes vanadate hate deena 318 Renaming and Viewing Information on a Route File on a Palm OS Handheld 320 Viewing a Route on Your Map on a Palm OS Handheld eeeeee cece eee eee 321 Showing Hiding a Route on the Map on a Palm OS Handheld c00eeeees 321 Deleting a Route on
371. ng numbers the object moves in relationship to the object s last location Type new coordinates and click Apply to move individual end points small red circles in line segments in routable roads lines splines polygons rectangles and arcs If you change the distance and bearing numbers of the individual points not recommended for rectangles the end point s distance and bearing angle change in relationship to the start point of the segment Renaming a Draw Object Once you create a draw object you can rename it in the draw file list or on the map To Rename a Draw Object in the File List Note This option is available only with regular Street Atlas USA with Advanced File Management or Street Atlas USA Plus Use the following steps to rename a draw object in the file list 1 2 Click the Draw tab Click File to open the draw file editing area All the files you have created display in a table Any draw file with a selected check box displays on the map Click to select the file that includes the draw object you want to rename Click More The tab area increases in height and the file details table displays The information that displays in the table is dependent on the file type that is selected Right click the draw object and select Rename OR Click within the file name cell once Then click it again do not double click The file name area activates Type the file name and press the ENTER key on your keyboard
372. ng the Import Wizard Note This option is unavailable when the XData tab is hidden with Tab Manager e Click a previously mapped listing in the Selections area to highlight it on the map e Double click a listing in the Selections area to center the map on that listing Note You can also copy search and sort search results and selections using right click mouse options 144 Searching for Phone Book Listings Finding Phone Book Listings for a Specific Road This Help topic describes functionality that is available only in Street Atlas USA Plus You can right click a road to view all of the residential and business phone book listings on that road Notes e A hyphen before the name in a search result indicates a business listing An asterisk before the name in a search result indicates a Do Not Call preference The person or business listed has registered a preference to not be solicited by telephone as provided by law DeLorme products cannot be relied upon as a method for legal compliance with state and federal regulations A number is flagged as Do Not Call if at least one of the following is true The phone number is unlisted Unlisted phone numbers allow customers to have their phone number be available from directory assistance but not published in any phone directories Note Customers paying for non published service desire complete privacy of their phone number which means it is not published in the phone boo
373. nish in a route J ust right click a search result and select the applicable option from the shortcut menu Performing an Advanced Search The Advanced search option allows you to perform more detailed searches by controlling what you are looking for using the Find field and where you are looking for it using the Within field 122 The fields available for selection under Within vary based on your Find selection Type text in the fields and use the drop down list to see examples and your recent searches Finding a Location on the Map e The fill in fields located in the center of the tab vary based on both your Find and Within selections You can also search for more types of items than you can in the QuickSearch tab such as by category street intersection and more To Perform an Advanced Search Follow the steps below to use the advanced search function 1 Click the Find tab and then click the Advanced subtab Note This screen automatically displays if you performed an unsuccessful QuickSearch 2 From the Find drop down list select the Find type from the list When more than one match is available the closest match displays first in the Results list Click a Find type in the list below for more information Name Use Name to locate a city town landmark object label and so on Street Address Use Street Address to locate by street number and name highway number and so on You can use standard abbreviations like R
374. nt length and total length of the line arc spline on the map Labels display when end points are clicked if the Show Measurement check box is selected To draw a line or spline click the map to designate the start and end points of each line segment You can also drag your cursor on the map to draw a squiggly line OR To draw an arc click the map to designate the start and end points of the arc e The coordinates of each point display in the corresponding text boxes to the right of the line options e The distance and bearing angle of each new point from its previous point display in the corresponding text boxes To finish the line arc spline click the last point on the map screen and then click Done OR Click the last point on the map screen and press the ENTER key on your keyboard OR Double click the last point of the line arc spline Drawing a Track on the Map You can add tracks to the map and adjust their line style color width and display them with map line features To Draw a Track Use the following steps to draw a track 1 2 Click the Draw tab A taf Click and hold the Track Waypoint tool and select the Track tool PeF Select a track style from the Style drop down list Click the color button next to the Style drop down list to select a track color Select a track width from the Width drop down list Select the Highlight check box to make your track appear translucent on the map Select t
375. nt to hyperlink your point object to optional The address displays in the URL field Type the name or phrase into the Label field The coordinates or distance and bearing angle numbers of the location display in the corresponding Coordinate or Distance and Bearing Angle text boxes Press the ENTER key on your keyboard or click the map outside of the object s active area when you are finished Add an image 1 Click and hold the MapNote Text Label Symbol I mage tool and select Image Under Images select an existing image or click Add browse to an image and click Open to add a new image to your Images selection 201 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide Note You can delete an image from the Images selection by selecting the image and then clicking Delete 2 Click the location for the point object on the map The URL Label text box displays 3 Click the Hyperlink button al and browse to the document you want to hyperlink your point object to optional The address displays in the URL field 4 Type the name or phrase into the Label field The coordinates or distance and bearing angle numbers of the location display in the corresponding Coordinate or Distance and Bearing Angle text boxes 5 Press the ENTER key on your keyboard or click the map outside of the object s active area when you are finished Tip Search for a point object by its label name using the QuickSearch function in the Find tab or by typing
376. number found on the card inside your DVD case in the Certificate Number box 2 Click Add Certificate 3 Click Checkout to complete the ordering process Note If the order exceeds 40 you are required to pay the difference If the order is less than 40 your certificate number is credited with the difference 34 Tutorials S Selections List Yarmouth Maine 10 km of Color DOQQ v Download Time 200k 2 7 minutes Order Summary Shop On Color DOQQ Download 10 00 Checkout Discounts 10 00 Help Order Total 0 00 History Certificate Number xwx xK xKK KKK Remove Certificate Step 5 View license agreement and submit order The first time you download imagery a license agreement displays 1 Read the agreement and click Agree 2 If your order did not exceed the value of your certificate you are prompted to click Submit Order 3 OR If your order exceeded the value of your certificate you are prompted for payment Step 6 Download your imagery or data When the download is available e You are sent an e mail to the e mail address you provided when you registered e A message displays in the program if you chose the Automatically Check for Product Updates during installation See Receiving Product Updates and Downloads on page 280 for more information You can also go to the NetLink tab at any time to check for downloads 35 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide Step 7 View your imagery Click t
377. ny of the following edits to the line object e To edit any label on the line object select it twice then type the label in the text box that displays next to the line object OR Select the line object and edit its label e Reshape the line object by dragging any of its points to a new location When you select a shape point of a line segment within an active line object e A small green circle indicates the start end point of the selected line segment e A small red circle indicates the last end point of the selected line segment e Select the Coordinate or the Distance and Bearing Angle option and edit the numbers Click Apply to initiate the changes Note You can display either bearing or distance by clicking the drop down arrow next to the Bearing or Angle text located below the distance text in the Distance and Bearing Angle option 6 Click Done to finish your edit OR Press the ENTER key on your keyboard OR Click outside the object s active box on the map 188 Using the Draw Tools Editing a Track Once you download a track from a GPS receiver you can edit including reshaping or changing line color or width copy move or delete it at any time To Edit a Track Use the following steps to edit a track 1 Open the map file containing the draw file with the track you want to edit 2 Click the Draw tab 3 If the track you want to edit is not in the active draw file click File and select the draw file fro
378. o enable advanced file management during the product installation you can still change the settings using the Change File Management option in the Options menu For more information see Activating Advanced Simplified File Management This note does not apply to Street Atlas USA Plus users Saving a Route The route in memory is retained as you create it You are prompted to save your route when you create a new map file or exit the program Creating a New Map File When you click File New in the Files dialog area on the Map Files tab you are asked if you want to save changes to the most recently used map file A separate dialog box asks if you want to save changes to an unsaved route Exiting the application The Save Changes dialog box asks if you want to save your changes You can also save the route using the Route tab Routes have anr extensions and are saved by default in the C DeLorme Docs Navigation directory by default To Save a Route Using the Route Tab Use the following steps to save a route using the Route tab 1 Create a route 2 Click the Route tab and then click the New Edit subtab 3 Click File and then click Save Note for regular Street Atlas USA users This Help topic describes functionality provided in advanced file management Advanced file management allows you to save multiple routes and draw layers in a single map file With simplified file management you can save only one route and o
379. o your Palm OS device To Send Route Points Use the following steps to send route points to your Palm OS device a ee oo xN Click the Exchange button F on the toolbar Under Select Device select Palm OS Select Send to Device Select Route Points from the Object Type drop down list Click Next From the Route drop down list select the route file that contains the route points you want to send to your device Click Prepare for Sync Repeats the steps for each route file you want to send to your device Click Finish The route points are available on your handheld device after your next synchronization operation To Send Route Directions Use the following steps to send route directions to your Palm OS device ae a eS 10 Click the Exchange button F on the toolbar Under Select Device select Palm OS Select Send to Device Select Route Directions from the Object Type drop down list Click Next From the Route drop down list select the route file that contains the route directions you want to send to your device Select the User Profile the route file will sync to from the User drop down list Click Prepare for Sync Repeat the steps for each route file you want to send to your device Click Finish The route directions are available on your handheld device after your next synchronization operation Tip You can also open the Exchange Wizard by clicking the Exchange button E Exchange on the GPS
380. ocket PC ceececeeeee eee teeta eee ee eee eeeaen ena 345 Sky View ona Pocket PG ccc ietaceih errai ee EE TAA dav seerueldeurdseedenodeersaneat saves 346 Channel View on a Pocket PC eee eee eee eee ents ene tee e nett ne eee eas 346 Sun Moon on a Pocket PC ea a ai E A ee ee eee ene ete eens teense e ee eiaa 346 Setting Preferences on a Pocket PC ceceeceee cent eee eee e neat ee ee teeta eae ee ee eeeeaene eas 348 Adding Waypoints on a Pocket PC cc ce cece cette eee reteset eee e etna teeta eed 350 Centering the Map on a Waypoint on a Pocket PC cccecceeeee cette eee eee ees 351 Editing a Waypoint on a Pocket PC ccecceee cece eee eee eee eee eee eet nena teeta eed 351 Deleting a Waypoint on a Pocket PC ccc ccec cece eee eee eee teeta teeta een e 351 Creating a Direct Route on a Pocket PC ceccccc cece cece eeee eee eaeeeaeeeneeeneeanesas 352 Creating a Road Route on a Pocket PC c cece eee ee eee eee eee eee e neta teeta eens 353 Renaming and Viewing Information on a Route File on a Pocket PC 4 354 Viewing a Route on Your Map on a Pocket PC eeeeeeeee eee ee ee eee eee e ee eee eaten ened 355 Hiding a Route on the Map on a Pocket PC cceceee eens teen eee eee tees eee eeee ene eas 355 Deleting a Route on a Pocket PC cccceee cece eee eee ene e eae eee eae ea eed 355 Reversing the Direction of a Route on a Pocket PC 10 0 e
381. of common files By doing this the recipient of the transfer file can keep a similar directory structure as the creator This is helpful when a transfer file is shared and updated between users Note Transfer files do not include map data To Import a Transfer File Use the following steps to import a transfer file including transfer files that have been e mailed to you by other DeLorme users 1 Click the Map Files tab 2 Click File click Transfer and then click Import The Import Transfer File dialog box opens The C DeLorme Docs Transfer Files directory is the default location Browse to another location if you want to save the file somewhere else Transfer files have dmt extensions 3 Click a file to select it The name displays in the File Name text box 4 Click Import to finish the import process The imported map file opens and displays in the map view 105 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide To Import a Transfer File with Hyperlinked Files Use the following steps to import a transfer file that includes hyperlinked file attachments 1 Click the Map Files tab 2 Click File click Transfer and then click Import The Import Transfer File dialog box opens The C DeLorme Docs Transfer Files directory is the default location Browse to another location if you want to save the file somewhere else Transfer files have dmt extensions 3 Click a file to select it The name displays in the File Name text box 4 Click Im
382. of each satellite and uses the elapsed time to create two additional spheres of possible locations These three spheres intersect at two points however one of these points is eliminated because it is far away from the earth s surface Therefore the second point is assumed to be correct The data from these three satellites provides the receiver with a two dimensional location Data acquired from a fourth satellite pinpoints the receiver s exact location This additional positioning information allows the GPS receiver to calculate its elevation which is particularly important for GPS users in mountainous locations GPS Position Accuracy The accuracy of the data your GPS receiver provides is dependent upon many factors including the quality of your equipment A low quality clock within the receiver decreases the accuracy of your location The atmosphere the ionosphere and the number of channels your receiver can handle all affect the accuracy of your system Consult your GPS hardware manuals for information on how your receiver adjusts for errors Any buildings natural structures or heavy foliage that obstruct the GPS antenna s view of the sky prevent satellite signals from reaching the receiver and decreases the accuracy of your position 247 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide Your accuracy will also depend on your level of clearance with the U S Department of Defense There are two available radio signals that receivers can use t
383. oint or Address Book entry or assign it a start stop or finish in a route J ust right click a search result and select the applicable option from the shortcut menu Note The program keeps a history of your search words during a session If you want to delete your Advanced search history click the QuickSearch subtab and select Clear History from the Search For drop down list Then click Yes to delete the search history in both the QuickSearch and Advanced subtabs 125 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide Performing a POI Search The for POIs subtab gives you an easy way to find the places of interest you are looking You can search over four million places of interest including Wal Mart stores post offices hospitals and much more Some POIs contain extended information such as website links hours of operation and so on To view this extended information right click the POI search result point to Add and then click Detailed MapNote to view the information on the map Or right click the POI search result and click Info to view the extended information in the Info tab POI searches will find more objects than may be currently visible on the map To see all POls on the map click the Options button ES on the toolbar or click the menu arrow and click Options click the Map Features tab select the Points of Interest Minor and the Business Points of Interest Minor check boxes and click OK To Find a Point of Interes
384. oint and line segment tap and hold your stylus on the map and select Route Details from the shortcut menu Hiding a Route on the Map on a Pocket PC When you view a particular route on the map view screen the route continues to display as you pan or perform other map functions unless you delete or hide the route or display another route on the map Only one route can display on the map view screen at a time To Hide a Route Use the following steps to hide a route while viewing the map 1 Tap Data then tap Routes The Data screen displays the list of route files available on your Pocket PC device 2 Tap Hide to hide the route which currently displays Note Tap Show to view the hidden route on the map 3 Tap ok to return to the map view screen The route no longer displays Note To view a route again tap Data and then tap Routes Tap the route file you want to view and then tap Show Tap Go To to center the map on the start point of the route Deleting a Route on a Pocket PC You can delete any route files you have on the device with Street Atlas USA Handheld To Delete a Route Use the following steps to delete a route file 355 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide 5 Tap Data on the menu bar and then tap Routes The Data screen displays the list of route files available on your Pocket PC device In the list of routes tap the route file you want to delete The route name is highlighted Tap Delete A message box
385. olbar Under Select Device select GPS Select Receive from Device Select Waypoints from the Object drop down list Select User Map Data Waypoints from the Save As drop down list Click Next Select the waypoint file you want to add the waypoint information to from the Waypoint File drop down list To create a new Waypoint file select New Using Handheld Devices from the Waypoint File drop down list and type the new waypoint file name in the New Waypoint File text box 10 If you want all of the waypoints to display with the current symbol such as the default red flag select the Use Current Waypoint active waypoint option If you want the waypoint symbols to match those on your third party device select the Use Custom Waypoint Symbol Set option and then select the appropriate set from the drop down list For more information on creating a custom symbol set see Assigning a Waypoint ID to a Custom Symbol 11 Click Receive From Device 12 Repeats the steps for each waypoint file you want to receive 13 Click Finish Tip You can also open the Exchange Wizard by clicking the Exchange button IE Exchange on the GPS tab or the Handheld Export tab Exchanging Information with a Palm OS Device Sending a Handheld Map to a Palm OS Device Use the Exchange Wizard to send maps you cut using the Handheld Export tab to your Palm OS device See Creating a Map Package to Send to a DeLorme Earthmate or PDA for more information Not
386. om levels 7 0 or greater e International Labels View country labels at data zoom levels 2 0 through 4 0 e Urban Area Color Displays a shaded map area in populated regions at data zoom levels 9 0 and 10 0 Click OK to commit the change and exit the Options dialog box OR Click Apply to commit the change and keep working in the Options dialog box Customizing the Map Feature Preferences You can change the display of a wide variety of map features so you can customize your map to meet your specific needs You can even customize which POIs display To Set Custom Map Features This is an advanced feature that lets you create a specific custom set of map features for your map display from hundreds of options Note that changes are not visible until you click the Done button 1 4 Click the Options button ES ss OR Click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu Then click Options to open the dialog box Click the Map Features tab Select the Use Custom Map Features check box and then click Customize Features to display the custom options Note Custom map feature selections override selections in the basic features list To quickly search for a particular type of feature type the name of the item in the Search text box on the toolbar 81 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide A list of matching keywords displays and corresponding feature types are listed in the Search Results window Results for
387. om Your Third party GPS DeViCe ccceceee cece eee ee 267 Receiving a Track From Your Third party GPS DeVICE cceeeee eee e eee ee ees 267 Receiving Waypoints From Your Third party GPS Device ccceceeeeeeeeeeees 268 Exchanging Information with a Palm OS Device cceceeee eee eee eee ee teeta eae ed 269 Sending a Handheld Map to a Palm OS DeVICEC ccccceecc cece eee eeaeeeeeeeneeeeeeaes 269 Sending Route Information to Your Palm OS Device cccccce cscs eeeeeeeeeeeenes 270 Sending Waypoints to Your Palm OS Device ccceccseecesecceseeeeeeenecesenseenes 271 Receiving a GPS Log From Your Palm OS DeVICEC ccecc cece ence eeeeeeeeeneeeeeeaes 271 Receiving a Route From Your Palm OS Device cccccecsseeeeeseeeseeeeueseneeeeeees 272 Receiving Waypoints From Your Palm OS Device cccccecsceeseeseeeeeessuesueeees 272 Exchanging Information with a Pocket PC Device ccceeeeee eee eee eet ee teeta eed 273 Sending a Handheld Map to a Pocket PC De VICE ccece cece ene eeeeeeeeeeneeeneanes 273 Sending Route Information to Your Pocket PC Device ccceeseeneeeeeeeeeeanes 274 Receiving a GPS Log From Your Pocket PC Device cccccceeceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeenes 274 Sending Waypoints to Your Pocket PC Device ccccc cece cece eneeeeeeeeeeeneeeneenes 275 Sending a GPS Log to Your Pocket PC De VICE cccccceee cess ee eeeeeeeeeene
388. on Orientation refers to the direction on a compass in which the top of the map is pointing The default orientation for the map on the Map View screen is 310 Using Street Atlas Handheld on a PDA North Up which means the map orientation is north up There are nine options to choose from GPS current direction of travel North Up Northeast Up East Up Southeast Up South Up Southwest Up West Up Northwest Up Note You cannot change the orientation of raster maps If you attempt to change the orientation of a raster map and no vector data of that same location is available a gray screen will display and no data will be available If vector data is available at that same location the vector data will display with the changed orientation Colors There are two map color options available e Tap Default to view the default map colors e Tap High Contrast to change your map display to be darker for improved in vehicle visibility 4 5 Tap the desired item for each preference option and then tap OK The map view screen or Info Area displays with the selected preference To Set Button Preferences You may want to assign one of eight actions Default No Action Map View GPS Cycle Data Add Wot Find or Help to the application buttons located at the bottom of your handheld to either side of the scroll button All but the Default and No Action options are specific for use while in the Street Atlas USA Handheld ap
389. on in the MapShare Wizard To Share Online With Eartha Community Atlas lala f To launch the Eartha Community Atlas ECA wizard click the ECA button BF on the toolbar You can also access the Eartha Community Atlas website See Using Eartha Community Atlas on page 375 for more information To Send Static Maps to Your Portable Media Player To send your current map view as multiple static maps to your portable media player click the Portable Maps button g on the toolbar to open the Portable Maps Wizard For more information click the Help button in the Portable Maps dialog 72 Using the Toolbar To Create a Route To set route points using the toolbar 1 Type the location where you want to start your route in the Start text box next to the green Start button OR a Click the green Start button and then click the location on the map where you want to start your route OR Select an address book entry a previous location or your current GPS position from the Start drop down list 2 Type the location where you want to end your route in the Finish text box next to the red Finish button OR Click the red Finish button and then click the location on the map where you want to end your route OR Select an address book entry or your current GPS position from the Finish drop down list 3 Optional If you want to add a stop or via to your route click the Stop button ce or the Via button and then click the
390. on related meetings or events and in flyers or brochures that contain no paid advertising Paper Report Distribution Rights You may reproduce for distribution to colleagues or clients up to one thousand 1 000 paper copies of any Street Atlas USA map printouts for use in paper reports such as appraisals or environmental studies provided that no such report includes more than fifty 50 different Street Atlas USA maps and that the distribution does not constitute a general and unrestricted publication for sale or resale or contain paid advertising Periodical I Illustrations You may reproduce paper copies of any Street Atlas USA map printouts as illustrations to articles in printed paper periodical works such as magazines newspapers and newsletters provided that the publication is not primarily a collection of maps and provided that proper legend as described below accompanies the output Such articles may also be posted on your Web site Graphic printers hired by licensee to print DeLorme map images are required to purchase a license Special Presentation Rights You may use paper copies of any Street Atlas USA map displays and printouts in presentations to live audiences only with prior written permission from DeLorme Copy Services You may use a commercial copy service to reproduce paper copies that are authorized by this Agreement Web Site Map Display Rights You may display on your personal business or institutional static Web
391. on the area and radius of the circle on the map Arcs Contain three shape points When you click any of the points a text box displays the angle or bearing of the selected point the radius of the arc and the total length of the arc line on the map Only the first and second points you placed on the map when creating the arc are treated as start and end points i e show red or green when clicked The central magenta shape point or third point you placed determines the shape of the arc Note For information on snapping a draw object to another draw object see Snapping Draw Objects in this section Points in Draw Objects Point Objects such as waypoints symbols and text do not have shape or end points Text label objects contain a point at the bottom center of the text label box and are only visible during a snap Points in MapNotes MapNotes do not have shape or end points They contain an anchor point at the end of the text box Click the MapNote to display a central crosshair at the anchor point 159 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide e Regular Street Atlas USA with Simplified File Management If you are using Street Atlas USA with simplified file management draw objects are saved in the map file rather than in a draw layer Note for regular Street Atlas USA users Some of the information in this Help topic describes functionality provided in advanced file management Advanced file management allows you to
392. on the map e Tap the GPS Off Map icon a to center the map on your GPS position e Tap the blinking GPS Position icon to center the map on your GPS position Note The GPS Position icon blinks from solid to hollow and displays only when you are not moving while connected to a GPS receiver While in motion the icon changes to an arrow e Tap the Tracking icon ow to center the map on a map feature a waypoint wpt or a segment of a route you are tracking Changing the Data Zoom Level of the Map Use the scroll buttons on your Palm OS handheld to change the data zoom level on your map To Change the Data Zoom Level of the Map Zoom in on the map to increase the data zoom level and display more geographic detail zoom out to decrease the data zoom level and display less geographic detail 292 Using Street Atlas Handheld on a PDA e Press and release the Down scroll button on your handheld to zoom in to the map one data zoom level at a time e Press and release the Up scroll button on your handheld to zoom out from the map one data zoom level at a time e Press and hold the Up or Down scroll buttons to quickly zoom to the highest or lowest data zoom levels Note As you zoom using the scroll buttons text displays in the Info Area below the map view screen indicating the data zoom level you are zooming in to or out from The current data zoom level displays for a short time once the map redraws Menu Options on a Palm OS Handheld
393. ond 381 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide computer other than a permitted auxiliary computer only if you first delete the System from the first computer or purchase a separate license Installation of any part of the System on a network is prohibited For information on network or multiple user licensing contact DeLorme at prosales delorme com or 1 800 293 2389 You may use the System as instructed by the documentation to perform its designed functions only for the purposes authorized by this Agreement Paper Map Printout Rights You may reproduce paper copies or static digital images such as PDF or TIFF files of any Street Atlas USA map for personal or household use or if you are a business or institution for in house purposes provided that distribution and use of such printouts and copies of printouts is limited to the location where the System is installed or limited to use by employees based at that location Paper Locator Map Distribution Rights You may distribute to family and friends including via fax paper copies or static digital images such as PDF or TIFF files of Street Atlas USA map printouts depicting locations of personal interest You may distribute to your colleagues clients customers or prospects including via fax paper copies or static digital images such as PDF or TIFF files of Street Atlas USA map printouts depicting the location of your business or institution or the locations of your business or instituti
394. onds or UTM UPS format based upon the coordinate type selected under Preferences For more information on setting preferences see Setting Preferences Use the following steps to change your coordinates Change coordinates to view sun moon information for different locations 1 Tap the Coords field The Select Location screen displays 2 Tap the number or letter you want to change A box highlights your selection 3 Tap the up and down arrows to change the coordinate number or letter 4 Tap OK to save changes The Sun Moon screen displays the new coordinate numbers OR Tap Cancel to return to the Sun Moon screen without saving changes Note If your coordinates are in the UTM UPS coordinate system and the easting and northing values you specify are not found in the current zone the zone number and easting and northing values update and display in the Coords information area in the GPS Settings screen To Exit the Sun Moon Screen When you are done viewing sun moon status information tap Done to exit the Sun Moon screen The map view screen displays Preferences Setting Preferences 309 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide Use the preferences option to change the map font the map orientation or the Info Area action to assign specific functions to the application buttons on your handheld etc The Preferences screen is divided into three sections Map Buttons and Other Note For information on the application buttons on
395. one Tab Results by Road You can use right click functionality to find all of the residential and or business phone listings for a particular street or block e The Phone tab is available only in Street Atlas USA Plus e A hyphen before the name in a search result indicates a business listing An asterisk before the name in a search result indicates a Do Not Call preference The person or business listed has registered a preference to not be solicited by telephone as provided by law DeLorme products cannot be relied upon as a method for legal compliance with state and federal regulations A number is flagged as Do Not Call if at least one of the following is true The phone number is unlisted Unlisted phone numbers allow customers to have their phone number be available from directory assistance but not published in any phone directories Note Customers paying for non published service desire complete privacy of their phone number which means it is not published in the phone book and is unavailable from directory assistance Non published numbers are not available in Phone Data The phone number is on the Federal Trade Commission s National Do Not Call Registry You can register your home or mobile phone number or verify your registration at https www donotcall gov The address is on a mail preference list that limits mail solicitations You can register your preference for mail and e mail solicitations with the Direct Marketin
396. onnect OR Tap the Start GPS button a in the menu bar to connect The handheld first attempts to detect the GPS device The No Connection symbol changes to the GPS Transmitting symbol The GPS then attempts to acquire a satellite fix This process may take a few minutes Notes e Tap GPS and then tap Disconnect OR tap the Stop GPS button in the menu bar to disconnect your GPS device e If no GPS device is detected an error message displays Check the GPS connection and disconnect your GPS device in order to conserve batteries and reset the serial port 341 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide Notes e If the GPS device is receiving satellite data but there is insufficient data for an accurate location the status displays 2D in yellow Move your device to another location until you get better reception When a GPS connection is successful and the device is acquiring sufficient satellite data to determine your location the status displays 3D in green A 3D connection provides data on your current coordinates elevation heading and the speed you are traveling The GPS Position icon displays on the map view screen and blinks if you are not moving Once you start traveling the GPS Position icon changes to an arrow indicating direction of travel If you pan the map and the GPS Position is not in the map view the GPS Off Map icon displays in the lower left of the map view screen Tap the icon to center the map on your current GPS
397. ooth GPS device You must configure your Bluetooth software to create a virtual serial port 233 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide 1 Bring a passenger along to serve as GPS operator while you are driving a vehicle Safety Do not use this application with automatic navigation guidance Warnings systems or for any purpose requiring precise measurement of distance or direction Initializing GPS Before you can begin GPS tracking you must connect your GPS receiver to your portable computer Select the correct GPS receiver and change location time and preference settings as needed Before beginning your GPS setup read the user manual for your GPS receiver Also ensure you have the appropriate cable and any necessary adapters to connect your GPS receiver to the communications port of your portable computer If you have an Earthmate GPS device it is not necessary to follow these instructions Your device is automatically enabled when it is connected J ust click Start GPS to begin tracking To Initialize Your GPS Receiver The initializing process can take several minutes before the program detects the correct communications COM port and updates the current settings Use the following procedure to initialize your GPS receiver for use with your application 1 Connect your GPS receiver to your computer set the receiver to the mode specified in your user manual and then turn the on receiver if necessary 2 Click the G
398. or features display the same as the default features except for land which displays as black Routable Road Features E reese SOSC SCS Interstate Highway can also include this symbol 3 State Route can also include this symbol 2 Toll Road U S National Route can also include this symbol 1 Unclassified Road Unimproved Road 67 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide Land Cover Bare Rock or Sand E bureau of tana vanagemen ara O meeen SSCS O ema SSS Oleas Pinan Reservation aroa zoom ea i in Reservation at aata zoom eva z ao e SS SyS S T meyra eoma ary are a te oom ea zron O Pw River Stream EJ Transitional Area Lava Salt Flats or Mixed Barren Wetlands Point Features B sms o B wmon SSS B aoe i E spor genera avouon pao i Business amusement Recreation Specialty or Deparment Store IN camping daa om level 7 ie Educational Facility ae Exit with services at data zoom levels 10 thru 11 7 a Exit without services at data zoom levels 10 thru 11 7 68 Map Legend ti Exit food at data zoom levels 12 thru 17 Exit lodging at data zoom levels 12 thru 17 Exit other at data zoom levels 12 thru 17 ast Food Gas Lodging Metropolitan City National Capital data zoom level 7 thru 10 National Capital data zoom levels 2 thru 6 Point of Interest smaller black square Population Center Public Servi
399. ored To Resize the Map Area Using the Resize Tools ey ae The map resize tool runs perpendicular to the tab area If the secondary and primary maps are both displaying the resize tool is the bar that separates them When the bar is moved all the way to the left of the map only the primary map displays When the bar is moved all the way to the right of the map only the secondary map displays There are several methods you can use to resize the map area e Drag the bar left to expose the area of the primary map you want to see e Drag the bar right to expose the area of the secondary map you want to see e Click the right arrow on the resize tool once to move the secondary map 1 4 of the screen width You can repeat this step until the primary map is no longer visible e Click the left arrow on the resize tool once to move the primary map 1 4 of the screen width You can repeat this step until the secondary map is no longer visible e Double click the bar above the right arrow to show only the secondary map e Double click the bar below the left arrow to show only the primary map e Double click the bar between the right and left arrows to display an equal percentage of both the secondary and primary maps To Resize the Tab and Map Area Using the Resize Tools ey ae There are two tab area resize tools The horizontal resize tool is located above the tab area and lets you adjust the height of the tab area The vertical resize tool
400. ort to Text File option is selected Type the file name in the File text box and click Save Exported files have a txt extension and are saved in the C DeLorme Docs Datasets directory by default 153 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide Printing XData Dataset Records XData is available only in Street Atlas USA Plus You can print records from datasets imported with the XData tab For information on viewing records from imported datasets see Viewing Dataset Records To Print XData Dataset Records Use the following steps to print dataset records 1 2 Click the XData tab and then click Query Select a dataset from the Use Dataset drop down list Set Table Display or Record Placement options if they are available for your dataset Click the Print tab and then click XData to display the Print XData dialog area The title of the currently selected dataset displays in a text box in the Dataset Print Title area Optional Click Setup to open the Print Setup dialog box select a printer change printer properties select paper size and select paper orientation Click OK when finished Click Columns to view the Columns display area if the Print dialog area is minimized Under Dataset Print Title select the Print Title check box to display a title on each printed page Select the First Page Only check box to only display the title on the first printed page Note Click Font to change the font style size and or script
401. ose You cannot rename DeLorme schemes To Rename a Custom Scheme Use the following steps to rename a custom scheme 1 Click the Options button ES on the toolbar OR Click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu Then click Options to open the dialog box Click the Keyboard Shortcuts tab Select the custom scheme you want to rename from the Scheme drop down list Click File and then click Rename The Scheme text box becomes active Type the name in the Scheme text box Click Apply The new name displays OR Press the ENTER key on your keyboard The new name displays OR Press the ESC key on your keyboard to keep the old name Deleting a Custom Scheme Once you have created a custom scheme you can delete it at any time You cannot delete DeLorme schemes To Delete a Custom Scheme Use the following steps to delete a custom keyboard shortcut scheme 1 94 on the toolbar Click the Options button ES OR Click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu Then click Options to open the dialog box Click the Keyboard Shortcuts tab Select the custom scheme you want to delete from the Scheme drop down list Click File and then click Delete Click Yes when asked if you are sure you want to delete the scheme Using Keyboard Shortcuts Importing a Custom Scheme You can share their keyboard shortcut schemes with other DeLorme users To Import a Custom Scheme
402. ot detected copy and paste the link provided into your online e mail program AND OR Click Preview Your Route Map and Directions to preview your route map and directions as they appear on the MapShare site Note Print your route map and directions from the MapShare site by clicking Print in the upper right corner of the page 57 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide Share Route Directions Click the option below to preview your route map and directions as they will appear on the MapShare site Preview Your Route Map and Directions Click the option below to e mail a link of your route map and directions to friends family and associates E mail the MapShare Link for Your Route Map and Directions Step 8 Exit the MapShare Wizard Click Close to exit the MapShare Wizard 58 Tutorials Tutorial Using Portable Maps If your portable media player stores photos you can send your current map view to your portable media player as multiple static maps You can click the Help button in the Portable Maps wizard at any time Creating Your Maps Step 1 Find the map area you want to transfer lincorporatediRlacelon Equiv 59 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide Step 2 Launch the Portable Maps wizard Click the Portable Maps button on the toolbar to open the Portable Maps wizard Portable Maps Welcome to Portable Maps DeLorme s map generation system that allows you to create static maps for your
403. oute will be highlighted on the Details screen of the Data Routes dialog If the map is not displaying North up a small compass displays near the scale bar to indicate map orientation In order to hear spoken directions when tracking along a route your GPS device must be connected Using Street Atlas Handheld on a PDA Using the Navigation Panel on a Pocket PC Street Atlas USA Handheld lets you change the view of the Info Area so that you can easily view information for the next turn while tracking To View the Navigation Panel on a Pocket PC 1 Tap and hold your stylus on the map A shortcut menu displays 2 Select Nav Panel On to enable the navigation panel The option that is in gray font is the active option 3 When tracking the Navigation Panel displays in place of the Info Area It displays When tracking against a road route the When tracking against a waypoint map Navigation Panel displays feature or direct route the Navigation Panel displays A turn arrow indicating the direction of your A compass direction such as N for North next turn for the direction to your destination The name of the road you will be turning on The name of your destination next Two drop down menus with the following options Time to Turn Displays the time until your next turn for road routes Displays N A when selected while tracking against a waypoint map feature or direct route Distance to Turn Displays distan
404. ow hide rename reverse or delete a route 334 Using Street Atlas Handheld on a PDA Wpts View waypoints Wpt you have added center the map on a waypoint Go To or edit rename or delete waypoints GPS Logs View information on GPS Log files center the map on the GPS log Go To show hide rename or delete GPS log files Exit the application Connect Connect your GPS device to receive satellite data Disconnect your GPS device Settings View and if necessary set GPS settings Logging Activate GPS logging at connection change logging time intervals start and stop a logging session display low memory warnings and keep track of memory usage Monitor Monitor GPS status relative heading current direction of travel to true North current speed elevation 3D mode only coordinate position when connected to a GPS receiver and GPS information raw data stream Sky View View satellites being tracked their assigned number and position in the sky relative to your current position The Satellite Key displays information on satellite status Channel View View each satellite currently visible which is listed by Satellite number Sat Elevation degrees to horizon El Azimuth Az Signal to noise ratio SNR Status N navigation E ephemeris data T tracked and D differential mode for 335 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide WAAS e PDOP Position Dilution of Precision e HDOP Horizonta
405. oxes are completed The estimated fuel cost for your route displays in the Total Fuel Cost field 6 Click Close to close the dialog box and return to the Plan Trip subtab Converting a Route to a GPS Log MONE You can convert any route to a GPS log using right click functionality To Convert a Route to a GPL Use the following steps to convert a route to a GPS log file 1 Create a route 2 Right click the route point to Manage Route and then click Save as GPS Log File The Save Route as GPS Log File dialog box opens 3 Browse to the location where you want to save the gpl file The default location is C DeLorme Docs GPSLogs 4 Type the file name in the File Name text box 5 Click Save 232 Using GPS GPS Overview You can take advantage of the Global Positioning System GPS through an interface with most GPS receivers such DeLorme Earthmate devices Using your DeLorme application a portable computer and your GPS receiver you can display a bread crumb trail to track your progress as you travel You have two ways to use GPS in your mapping application e NavMode This is the default GPS view a hands free full screen view that you can display in 2 D or 3 D By default the Control Panel is hidden and the tabs are minimized however you can change your display options e GPS tab view This option allows you to use the GPS tab to control navigating and tracking By default the tabs and Control Panel a
406. p files to another Palm OS handheld e You can also access Data screen commands Delete Go To Details and Beam by tapping the Data tab or the Menu button to display the Command drop down menu Showing Hiding a GPS Log on the Map on a Palm OS Handheld When you create a new GPS log or tap Go To to view a log on the map the log points and line segments for that log display on the map The log continues to display on the map as you pan or perform other map functions unless you delete or hide the log or until you exit Street Atlas USA Handheld To Show Hide a GPS Log Use the following steps to show hide a GPS log while viewing the map 1 Tap the Menu button on your handheld to display the Street Atlas USA Handheld menu bar 2 Tap Data and then tap GPS Logs to view the Data screen The list of GPS logs you have created displays under the Source selection box 3 Tap Hide to hide the log which currently displays OR Tap Show to display a hidden log Note The Show Hide button is a toggle button 4 Tap Done to return to the map view screen The log no longer displays Notes e Tap Beam to beam selected GPS logs to another Palm OS handheld e You can also access Data screen commands Delete Go To Details and Beam by tapping the Data screen menu bar or the Menu button to display the Command drop down menu 305 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide Deleting a GPS Log You can delete any GPS log files you have recorded in Street
407. p in your route click Route and then click Insert as Stop to add the stop geographically in the route or click Add as Stop to add the stop in the order it was added to the route 5 Right click the record you want to use as a finish in your route click Route and then click Set as Finish Geocoding or Moving a Record s Location XData is available only in Street Atlas USA Plus During the import process the program attempts to geocode all records This means it places the symbol for the record on specific map coordinates based on address or coordinate information Once you have imported your data you may want to make changes to the data and manually geocode the record s to the new location s How an item has been located displays in the Located To column of the dataset s records To Move a Record s Location Use the following steps to move a record s location 1 Click the XData tab 2 Click Query 3 Select the dataset you want to view from the Use Dataset drop down list 4 Select Records by Placement from the Table Display drop down list 5 Select All Placed Records from the Record Placement drop down list 6 Scroll right to the Located To column and view how each record in the dataset was placed Any item listed as Not Placed or ZIP Code can be manually geocoded 7 Select the record you want to move 8 To manually place a record that has not been placed on the map drag the record from the table to the location on the
408. pNote text label or symbol 1 Notes Click and hold the MapNote Text Label Symbol Image tool and select the tool you want Then select the desired font style size and color for your point object s label from the text style options Click the location for the point object on the map The URL Label text box displays Click the Hyperlink button and browse to the document you want to hyperlink your point object to optional The address displays in the URL field Type the name or phrase into the Label field The coordinates or distance and bearing angle numbers of the location display in the corresponding Coordinate or Distance and Bearing Angle text boxes Press the ENTER key on your keyboard or click the map outside of the object s active area when you are finished These steps describe how to add Draw MapNotes To show delete Route MapNotes see Setting Your Routing Preferences on page 224 You can also add a MapNote by right clicking the map on the point you want to label pointing to Add MapNote and then selecting a MapNote option Add a waypoint 1 Click and hold the Tracks Waypoints tool and select Waypoint Then select the waypoint symbol from the Symbols options You can also select a different font style size and color for the waypoint name Click the location for the point object on the map The URL Label text box displays Click the Hyperlink button A and browse to the document you wa
409. plays the following information Screen item Description O GPS Status Symbol No connection Displays in the lower right corner of the screen 2 D GPS connection Acquiring satellites 3 D GPS connection Bearing Compass Compass needle turns to represent the current ee Heading Text Displays degrees to true north 306 Using Street Atlas Handheld on a PDA Elevation Text Displays elevation in feet when GPS connection is 3 D Position Info Area Displays coordinates in units as selected under Setting Preferences 3 Tap Done to close the Monitor GPS screen The map view screen displays Sky View on a Palm OS Handheld The Sky View diagram displays the visible satellites their assigned number assigned by the Department of Defense and position in the sky relative to your current position To View the Sky View Diagram Use the following steps to display the Sky View diagram 1 Tap the Menu button on your Palm OS handheld to display the Street Atlas USA Handheld menu bar 2 Tap GPS and then tap Sky View The Sky View diagram displays with satellite symbols representing satellites being tracked by your GPS receiver 3 Tap Done to close the Sky View diagram The map view screen displays Note Tap Key to display the Satellite Sky View Key for information on satellite status Tap Done to close the Satellite Sky View Key The Sky View diagram displays The following table gives a description of each of the key
410. plication Press the buttons to quickly access menus without having to use the menu bar Notes e Tap Default to return the button actions to the Palm OS system preferences e Tap No Action to prevent any action if an application button is accidentally pressed e The application buttons return to their default Palm OS actions when you exit Street Atlas USA Handheld Use the following steps to assign an action to an application button 1 Tap the Menu button on your handheld to display the Street Atlas USA Handheld menu bar Note You can also access the Preferences menu option by using the Graffiti Menu Commands 2 Tap Options then tap Preferences The Preferences dialog box opens 3 Tap Buttons The Buttons dialog box opens a 4 Under any of the application button names and icons tap the down arrow to display the available actions and then tap the desired action for each button Action Result When the Application Button is Pressed 311 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide Default Uses the Palm OS system preferences Map View Displays the map view screen when you are in any other screen such as the Data screen the GPS Settings screen the Sun Moon screen etc GPS Cycle Lets you cycle through the Sky View Channel View Monitor GPS and GPS Logging screens Press the assigned application button to go to the next screen in the cycle To stop the GPS Cycle tap Done on any of the screens Data The Data scree
411. point was last modified the coordinates of the waypoint the elevation of the waypoint and the symbol name e Track layer contents include comments about the track the URL assigned when the track was added to the map the date and time the track was last modified the start and finish time of the track the total time of the track the distance of the track in the measurement chosen in the Display settings and the number of readings that the track includes 5 Optional Double click a draw object in the table to center the map on its 172 location OR Right click the draw object in the table and click Go To Optional To sort the columns of data in the table in ascending order click the column header Click the column header again to sort in descending order Optional To modify a draw object s name comment or URL in the table click the draw file in the draw file editing area and then click it again do not double click Type the new name in the Name box and press the ENTER key on your keyboard OR Right click the draw file in the draw file editing area and click Rename in the shortcut menu Type the new name in the Name box and press the ENTER key on your keyboard Using the Draw Tools Note To add a line break to text in the Comment field press CTRL ENTER on your keyboard 8 Optional To view the contents of a track file in a dialog box right click the file in the draw file editing area and click Details in the shor
412. port The Browse for Folder dialog box opens 5 Select the folder where you want to save the hyperlinked files C DeLorme Docs Transfer Files is the default location Browse to another location if you want to save the file somewhere else 6 Click OK The imported map file opens and displays in the map view Note for regular Street Atlas USA users This Help topic describes functionality provided in advanced file management Advanced file management allows you to save multiple routes and draw layers in a single map file With simplified file management you can save only one route and or draw layer in a single map file If you did not select to enable advanced file management during the product installation you can still change the settings using the Change File Management option in the Options menu For more information see Activating Advanced Simplified File Management This note does not apply to Street Atlas USA Plus users 106 Using Map Files E mailing a Transfer File You can package a map file and its contents into a single file called a transfer file to facilitate e mailing or copying Note Transfer files do not include map data To E mail a Transfer File This procedure creates an attachment file but does not permanently save a file to C DeLorme Docs Transfer Files Use the following steps to e mail a transfer file 1 Click the Map Files tab 2 Open the map file you want to e mail as a transfer file
413. ps to edit an area draw object 1 2 3 Open the map file containing the draw file with the area object you want to edit Click the Draw tab If the object you want to edit is not in the active draw file click File and select the draw file from the draw file dialog area Then click Done The Draw dialog area displays Click the Select tool A and then click the object on the map A box displays around the object indicating that it is active OR To edit multiple objects click the Select tool A and then drag a box around the objects that you want to edit Change the object s fill outline and or width option OR If you selected a single circle drag one of the magenta squares around the circle to change the circle s size The center of the circle remains in its original location OR If you selected a single rectangle click one of the corner points of the rectangle and drag to change its width height and area on the map OR If you selected a single polygon click one of the shape points of the polygon and drag to change its bearing or angle the leg length and polygon area on the map Reshape the polygon by dragging any of the points in the polygon to a new location When you select a shape point of a line segment within an active polygon a small green circle indicates the start end point of the selected line segment and a small red circle indicates the last end point of the selected line segment Select the Coordina
414. r for example match many categories and display a dialog box with specific categories Select or clear these categories depending on what you want to locate 131 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide e Inthe Keyword Category samples below some keywords are used together to narrow the search The following two examples provide information on how results may differ using words together and separately e Example 1 Using Local Road provides many category results such as Ferry Crossing Local Road Local or Rural Road and Railroad Local Line e Example 2 Using Road provides over 100 results from more categories e Partial words are recognized when performing a search e You can use keywords in any order You get the same results using Local Road as for Road Local e A keyword may find categories related to the word rather than including the word e Use the word or in the Keywords text box to search for multiple categories For example pizza or fast food MapTags Converting Moving Hiding and Deleting When you search for and go to a Find search result a yellow MapTag displays at that location if the MapTags check box on the Find tab is selected If MapTags are cluttering your view of the map you can move the text area of the MapTag hide them from view or delete one several or all MapTags To Convert MapTags to MapNotes To change all of the MapTags on the map to MapNotes which can be retained when you save
415. r by right clicking the record and clicking Delete Record s e Center the map on the selected dataset by double clicking it or clicking Go To The map view changes to encompass all of the geoplaced records within that dataset Note To re geoplace those records click GeoCode or right click the records and select GeoCode Record s e Center the map on a particular record by double clicking the first column of the record or by selecting the record and clicking Go To Viewing Dataset Records XData is available only in Street Atlas USA Plus After you have imported your data as a dataset you can view information about the dataset view the data records within a dataset and select a specific record and view its symbol on the map To View Records Follow the steps below to view records within a particular dataset 150 1 Click the XData tab A list of the datasets available in the current map file is displayed in the Available Datasets window Note A selected check box indicates that the dataset is being displayed on the map Clear the check box to hide the dataset s symbols on the map Click a dataset to select it The name date and time that the dataset was created display in the Dataset Statistics window Any additional comments that you added during the import process also display here Click Query The records for the selected dataset display in the records window You can then e View a dataset other than the one
416. r draw layer in a single map file If you did not select to enable advanced file management during the product installation you can still change the settings using the Change File Management option in the Options menu For more information see Activating Advanced Simplified File Management This note does not apply to Street Atlas USA Plus users 229 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide Deleting a Route You can delete routes permanently To Delete a Route Use the following steps to delete a route 1 Click the Route tab and then click the New Edit subtab 2 Select the route from the Name drop down list 3 Click File and then click Delete OR Right click the route point to Manage Route in the shortcut menu and then click Delete Route Note for regular Street Atlas USA users This Help topic describes functionality provided in advanced file management Advanced file management allows you to save multiple routes and draw layers in a single map file With simplified file management you can save only one route and or draw layer in a single map file If you did not select to enable advanced file management during the product installation you can still change the settings using the Change File Management option in the Options menu For more information see Activating Advanced Simplified File Management This note does not apply to Street Atlas USA Plus users Importing Routes Routes can be imported from man
417. r keyboard while dragging the text graphic items on the map To Snap Text and Graphic Items on Your Map Use the following steps to snap text and graphic items on a printed map 1 Add text or graphics to your map 2 Drag the text graphic item s you placed on the map to the location you want them on the map If you drag the item s to the edge of the map print area the text graphics snap to the edge If you drag the item s to the horizontal center of the edge of the map print area the text graphics snap to the center of the edge You can also drag the item s to the center of the map print area to snap them at the center of the printed map Tips e To make multiple text and graphic items the same size press the SHIFT key on your keyboard and select each item Then right click select Make Same Size and select Width Height or Both from the shortcut menu When you attempt to make multiple items the same size the largest item is always the basis for the size change e To delete multiple text graphic items select the Edit tool drag the mouse in a down right direction on the map to encompass the items you want to delete and then press the DELETE key on your keyboard 115 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide Layering Multiple Text and Graphic Items on a Printed Map This Help topic describes functionality that is available only in Street Atlas USA Plus You may want to layer text or graphic items on your printed map In this
418. r route point to Create Route in the shortcut menu and click Set as Start Right click the map location where you want to end your route point to Create Route in the shortcut menu and click Set as Finish If the route doesn t automatically calculate right click the route point to Manage Route in the shortcut menu and click Calculate Road Quickest or Calculate Road Shortest Note If the program is unable to find an exact match for the item that you typed a dialog box opens with a list of the closest matches Scroll through the list of search results until you find the one you want to locate click the item to select it and then click OK Optional Click the Route tab Then click the Directions subtab to view the route directions the Advanced subtab to display advanced routing options Plan Trip to assign end of day or fuel breaks to your route or Back on Track to add your current GPS position as a stop to the current route To Create a Route Using the Toolbar See T to view the steps for creating a route using the toolbar 218 Routing Adding and Inserting Stops and Vias You can add or insert stops or vias in any route you create Note A stop is a location along a route where you want to stop and then proceed from A via is a point on the map that you want your route to go through You can use stops and vias to route you through a particular place or along a particular road Turn off Auto Calculate when you are add
419. r spline 1 194 Open the map file containing the draw layer with the line object you want to edit Click the Draw tab If the line object you want to edit is not active click File and activate the draw file in the file list Then click Done Click the Select tool A and then click the line object you want to edit e A box displays around the selected line e The shape points used to create the line object display as small magenta squares Perform any of the following edits to the line object e To edit any label on the line object select it twice then type the label in the text box that displays next to the line object OR Select the line object and edit its label e Reshape the line object by dragging any of its points to a new location When you select a shape point of a line segment within an active line object e A small green circle indicates the start end point of the selected line segment e A small red circle indicates the last end point of the selected line segment e Select the Coordinate or the Distance and Bearing Angle option and edit the numbers Click Apply to initiate the changes Note You can display either bearing or distance by clicking the drop down arrow next to the Bearing or Angle text located below the distance text in the Distance and Bearing Angle option 6 Using the Draw Tools Click Done to finish your edit OR Press the ENTER key on your keyboard OR Click outside the o
420. r the map name indicates the map currently displays on the map view screen Any map file stored on an attached storage card rather than on the main memory of the handheld displays with a card symbol k e Routes or GPS Logs tThe Show Hide toggle button is available Tap Hide to clear a route or GPS log from the map view screen Tap Show to display it again Notes 289 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide e Once you are in the Data screen view the files for any of the menu options in the Source box by tapping the menu item Any files for the selected menu option display under the Source box e Tap Beam to beam selected files to another Palm OS handheld e You can also access Data screen commands Delete Go To Details and Beam by tapping the Data screen menu bar or the Menu button to display the Command drop down menu Beaming Files to Another Handheld If your handheld has an infrared IR port you can beam files you ve created in Street Atlas USA Handheld from one handheld to another Before beaming ensure that the receiving handheld is turned on has Street Atlas USA Handheld installed has an IR port and is within 36 inches of your handheld The following files can be beamed e Maps created in your DeLorme mapping application and installed on your handheld or located on a storage card e Direct Road Routes created in your DeLorme mapping application and installed on your handheld OR created on the handheld
421. r without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 The end user documentation included with the redistribution if any must include the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation http www apache org Alternately this acknowledgment may appear in the software itself if and wherever such third party acknowledgments normally appear 4 The names Xerces and Apache Software Foundation must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission For written permission please contact apache apache org 5 Products derived from this software may not be called Apache nor may Apache appear in their name without prior written permission of the Apache Software Foundation THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAI MED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE APACHE SOFTWARE FOUNDATION OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT I
422. rch results To make it easier to view a long list of search results increase the height of the tab by dragging the top of the tab area up or by clicking the increase up tab height arrow Y l at the top of the tab To sort results by another column click the column header An arrow identifies the sort column Click a second time to reverse the sort order Note This feature is not available when in browse mode see last item in this list To copy the information for the selected item or items press CTRL C on your keyboard You can then paste the text into another program such as a word processing program Right click an item in the results list A shortcut menu displays the following items Copy to Clipboard Copies the detailed information for the selected item or items and is available for pasting into another program Go To Centers the map on the selected item Select All Selects all items in the list and highlights up to 350 on the map If you right click again with all items selected you can select Copy to Clipboard point to Add and then click MapTag MapNote Detailed MapNote Address Book Entry or Waypoint or point to Route and click Insert Stop You must have the MapTags checkbox on the Find tab selected to add a MapTag Add Adds a MapTag MapNote Detailed MapNote Address Book Entry or Waypoint for the selected item or items You must have the MapTags checkbox on the Find tab selected to add
423. rd click the Help button on any screen in the wizard To open the MapShare Wizard click the MapShare button O on the toolbar 375 Legal Information Street Atlas USA 2009 Plus Single User License Agreement This is an Agreement between you the end user and DeLorme By using the Street Atlas USA 2009 Plus software data and documentation the System you are agreeing to be bound by the terms of this Agreement If you do not agree with the terms of this Agreement you may not use the System Return all materials within thirty 30 days of receipt to the dealer from which you obtained them or to DeLorme for a full refund Any term or condition of an approved purchase order that differs from or adds to the terms or conditions of this License Agreement as well as any other modification or amendment to this Agreement will not be effective unless expressly agreed to in writing by both parties LICENSE TERMS AND CONDITIONS THE LICENSED SYSTEM The System consists of DeLorme s patented U S Pat Nos 4 972 319 5 030 117 5 559 707 5 802 492 and 6 321 158 other patents pending processes for the formatting storage retrieval and presentation of geographic and geographically related data DeLorme s copyrighted computer program for the use of those processes and related functions and compilations of geographic and supplemental data that are proprietary to DeLorme or its licensors The entire System including the software
424. re visible but you can opt to hide them It is available only in 2 D mode To turn NavMode on or off click the NavyMode Aon on the toolbar When the button appears indented lA NavMode is on Note The button is greyed out unless you have a GPS device plugged in or are playing back a GPS log file You can also change your GPS view in the Options dialog box 1 Click the Options button ES jase it on the toolbar and click the GPS tab You can also click the Options button a lon the GPS tab 2 Clear the Use NavMode check box to turn it off or select the check box to turn it on 3 Click OK DeLorme software interfaces with different GPS devices as outlined below e DeLorme GPS Devices Any DeLorme GPS will interface with a current DeLorme software release e USB GPS Support DeLorme software can use the data output from a USB GPS if the device meets one of the following criteria e When the GPS is attached to the computer it is recognized and displayed under Ports in the Microsoft Windows Device Manager e The unit is a Garmin USB device and the Garmin drivers are installed Note Magellan USB devices are not currently supported e Serial GPS Support DeLorme software can use the data output from a serial GPS device The device must be connected to a free COM port and output a generic NMEA National Marine Electronics Association stream e Bluetooth GPS Support DeLorme software can use the data output from a Bluet
425. rent data type in the list on the toolbar to open Aerial Imagery DOQQ Satellite Imagery SAT10 To Get Information About a Location Use the Information button f on the toolbar to click a point symbol feature measurement line track or area on the map to identify it and view detailed information about it Use the following steps to get information about a particular map feature 1 Click the Information button 2 Click the map feature you want information for such as a road town measurement line waypoint track draw symbol or point of interest The Info tab opens and displays a list of information categories Note Descriptive information may include a name or feature type length area ZIP Postal Code town name county name state province coordinates and Standard Industrial Classification categories 3 Click the plus sign next to each of the information categories to expand the category to view more detailed information OR Right click in the information box and click Expand All to expand all of the information categories Right click in the information box again and click Collapse All to minimize all of the information categories 4 Optional Repeat steps 1 3 to get information about another location 5 Optional Right click in the information box and click Print in the shortcut menu to print your map feature information Notes e You can also get information about a location using right click
426. reren 127 Formatting a Text File to Import as a Draw File ccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeaes 169 Felons mnda a a a a Naa ia 222 G Geocode sece 149 150 152 Getting Back on Track 0665 239 Global Positioning System 247 Glossary orior co sseereseaepeecenere desea 13 GPS 73 127 234 238 240 241 242 243 247 GPS Logging on a Palm OS Handheld SEG renn N E E EEEE 303 GPS Logging on a Pocket PC Device Aeae a a A A a a Eaa 343 GPS Radar sotaa ea aa oE N 127 GPS Voice Navigation 250 257 Grab and Pan ceecee 74 Graffiti Menu Commands 296 GUAS ieai veda devciatie eaaa 80 H Handheld261 262 269 273 287 290 Handheld Export n s 261 262 Heading cenaa n aak 243 Hidden Draw Tools se 160 Hide ROUte ce eeeee cece eee tees 228 Hiding a GPS Log on the Map ona POCKEU IPC pecnatke nner sittonaeecele 344 Hiding a Route on the Map on a Pocket PCr shade eer wantin ite caknedanmeata tildes 355 Hiding Address Book Contacts on the MaDe rna Er E AREETA En 139 Hiding Draw Files 163 Hiding Tabs 88 Hiding Toolbar Buttons 71 High contrast Colors eese 82 Horizontal Resize Tool 86 389 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide Image 20 200 208 210 211 Importing a Bitmap 208 Importing a Custom Scheme 95 Importing Data eee 147 Importing Existing Address Book Information 0 c cece
427. ress Book You can export your address book to another program using the Export function in the Address Book dialog box Exported address books are in DeLorme Address Book binary or comma separated file csv text format Latitude and longitude values are not exported To Export Your Address Book Use the following steps to export your address book 1 Click the Find tab 2 Click the Address Book button The DeLorme Address Book dialog box opens 3 Click Export The Save As dialog box opens 4 Browse to the location where you want to save the exported address book file 5 Type the file name for your exported file in the File Name text box 6 Select DeLorme Address Book dab binary format or Comma separated File csv text file format from the Save as Type drop down list DeLorme Address Book files retain all of their information and can be imported into compatible DeLorme programs Comma separated files do not contain coordinate information You can view text files in third party applications such as Microsoft Excel 7 Click Save 8 Click OK to acknowledge the export location 9 Click Done Notes e The address book has a 200 record limit e You can resize and move the Address Book dialog box e You can resize the columns inside the Address Book dialog box 140 Searching for Phone Book Listings Using Phone Data You can install the phone data to your hard drive or use it from the DVD To Install Pho
428. ress Book Contacts ccceceee eect e cent neta eae eaten ene 135 Importing Existing Address Book Information cceceeee eect ee ee eee teeta eae ed 135 Manually Entering Address Book Information cc ececeeee eee eee eee e estan eae ed 136 Centering the Map on an Address Book Contact ccceeeeeeee cnet ee eee eaten ees 137 Editing a Contact In Your Address BOOK c ccceeceee eee e eee e tees teeta teeta teeta aed 137 Manually Moving a Contact on the Map c ce cceeeeee eect ee eee e teeta teeta eens 138 Relocating Address Book Contacts ccceeeee eee eee eee eee teeta eae ee teeta ened 138 Deleting a Contact In Your Address BOOK cccceeeeee cece teeta teat ee eee eee eae ened 139 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide Showing Hiding Address Book Contacts on the MaP ccecceceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeenes 139 Deleting Your Entire Address Book ccceeeee eect e eee eee teeta eae ee teen nena eens 139 Exporting Your Address BOOK c cccceceee cnet eee ee ee eee teen e nate teeta ened 140 Searching for Phone Book LiStingdS c cece cee ee eee e eee ee teeta eae ee ene e eae ea eed 141 Using Phone Datar ie a shad ices dean pee oes ig le lees 141 Searching for a Phone Book Listing ccee cece eee eee eee ee eee eee ate tetas 141 Finding Phone Book Listings for a Specific Road cece cece e eect ee eee teeta eae ed
429. rme XSym dialog box Under Symbols in Set click New to clear the Symbol Editing Grid 6 Use the tools in the Draw Tool Box and the tools under Transparency and Anchor to create the new symbol e To undo the last action click the Undo button under Edit Symbol e To repeat the last action click the Redo button under Edit Symbol 7 To assign a symbol name to the current symbol type a name or phrase in the Symbol Name text box under Edit Symbol Note Once a name is assigned to a symbol in a symbol set each occurrence of that symbol placed on the map retains the new symbol name in addition to the default symbol name of symbol 8 Click OK when finished Note As you create a symbol an image preview displays to the upper left of the Symbol Editing Grid You can make edits to the symbol in either the Image Preview or the Symbol Editing Grid Any edits done in one view are mirrored in the other view g 205 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide Assigning a Waypoint I D to a Custom Symbol With DeLorme XSym you can create a custom symbol set that includes all of the waypoint symbols on your third party GPS device By creating this custom symbol set the waypoints you create display the same in both the mapping application and on your third party GPS device no matter where they originated Third party GPS waypoint symbols are identified by their waypoint ID number which is assigned by the device s manufacturer To successfully view
430. rsnerrnre 47 Tutorial Routing with XData POINtS cece cece eee e eee ee eee eee eee teen ee nae eaes 50 Tutorial Using Route AVOIdS ccc eect eeeee neta teen e aetna na eeaes 52 Tutorial Using MapShare cc cece eee eee eee eee ne eee nent eee nee eeaee 55 Tutorial Using Portable MapsS cccece cece cence cette eee eee e neta ene e aetna teeta 59 Map Legend myrra ann a aai healt hited iced ea a a a aA a aa T 67 Map LEQ Gnd ae a a a a a a a aa E A ea ae r a 67 Using the Toolbar a ii iienaa aeaa anaa da ada ENE TENA naa 71 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide Showing Hiding Toolbar Options cece eee cece e eee neta tate eee ees 71 Reordering the Toolbar Options cccccece cece eect eee ee eae eee e een e eae ee eee 71 To Create New Map Files 0 ccecceee cece eee eee eee eee ene nee teeta eee teen eee eines 71 TO Open a Map File serne naea eels ie daar eee es nek dete wea tetas we EA aA eda tareeede aAa 71 TO Savea Map Pilesncscciersasee E A oo aldnerh aa ananiac i D R tile era 72 TO Prinia i EE EAA Guia eh vss bahia a edna ie eee ceva 72 To Print the Map SCree n cece cece eee ee eee eee ene eens eee neat tee a ena 72 TO Share MapSise 2 ei cncaws si eshease hed tevra ested Geese hi de aeiiedawssuddeeraeasseechewau slaps dete sebars 72 To Share Online With Eartha Community Atlas ccc cece eee eee eee ee eee eee eae 72 To Send Static
431. rsrsrrrrrnnsrrrrrrrseren 111 Aligning Text and Graphic Items on Your Map sssssssssssssssrrsrssrrrrsrsrrrrrnrrerer 114 Snapping Text and Graphic Items on Your Map cccceeeee eee teeta eee teens 115 Layering Multiple Text and Graphic Items on a Printed Map cceeeeeeeeeees 116 Changing the Background Color of a Printed Map c ccceceee eee e eee eee ees 116 Manually Assembling a Multi page Map cccceeeeee eee e netstat teeta teeta teeta eed 117 Finding a Location on the Mabp 0 cece cece eee eee eee eee ents ene eee need 121 Find OVErViCW ici ive eeceeiad digacivee i ei ees ede cela devia eh ss TNA eve aa eee 121 Performing a Basic Search cece ce eee eee eee eee e etna ened 121 Performing an Advanced Search ccecce cece eee eee ee ee eee nena teen t neta ened 122 Performing a POI Search cece cece ee tenet neta teen nena eed 126 Finding POIs Near Your Current Location ccccceeeeee eee e eee eee teeta eee eneed 127 Finding a Symbol by its NaMe c ccc ece eect eee etna eaten e need 128 Tips on Viewing Search Results cece cece eee eee eee tenet neta ened 129 Keywords for Category Searches ceccee eee eee eee ee teeta t neta ene ened 130 MapTags Converting Moving Hiding and Deleting cceceeeeee eee ee erates 132 Using Address Book Contacts c cece cece eee eee entered 135 Searching for Add
432. rt a stop into your route Click More I nfo to open the GPS Radar subtab on the Find tab and get more information about the result Click Stop Radar to stop searching Progress Bar The progress bar displays below the orange bar It shows how far along you are in your route by distance Turns tThe blue area at the bottom of the screen shows the next turn in large text and the following turn in smaller text An arrow showing the direction of each turn displays next to the text Zoom I n Out Click the plus sign in the Turns area to zoom the map in Click the minus sign to zoom the map out 3 D 2 D View To view the map in 3 D click 3 D If you are viewing the map in 3 D click 2 D to view the map in 2 D 43 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide NavMode in 3 D 1 5 7 A 11 19 Turn LEFT on Chestnut St NEX vad Turn RIGHT on Cabot Rd 44 Tutorials Tutorial Finding Points of Interest You can search for points of interest such as restaurants and truck stops along a route using the POIs subtab in the Find tab If you are traveling with GPS you can use the Radar subtab to find the closest point of interest to your current location Step 1 Create a route The route in this tutorial was created with right click functionality For more information about the different ways you can create routes see Creating a Route on page 217 1 Right click the location on the map that you want to set as your route start point
433. rth Arrow to Your Map Use the following steps to add a North arrow to your map 1 112 Click the Print tab and then click the Map subtab Printing Select your Map and Print Layout options For more information see Printing a Map on page 109 Under Layout Tools click and hold the text and graphics button to reveal the hidden text and graphic tools Click the North Arrow tool a All of the North Arrow styles display to the right Select the North Arrow style and then click the location on the map where you want to add the graphic Once you place the North Arrow on the map you can resize it by dragging any of the white boxes on the corners sides of the graphic Reposition the North Arrow at any time by dragging the graphic to the new position To Add a Scale Bar to Your Map Use the following steps to add a scale bar to your map 1 2 3 Click the Print tab and then click the Map subtab Select your Map and Print Layout options For more information see Printing a Map on page 109 Under Layout Tools click and hold the text and graphics button to reveal the hidden text and graphic tools Click the Scale Bar tool aad All of the Scale Bar styles display to the right Select the check box to the left of the Scale Bar style options and then select the Scale Bar style AND OR Select the Scale check box to display the current scale on the map AND OR Select the Scale Reference Length check box to display the sc
434. rting Existing Address Book Information You can import an existing address book or build a new address book by manually entering each record Imported address book items are merged with your existing address book Items with identical names are not replaced during the import process To Import an Existing Address Book Use the following steps to import an existing address book and view its contents on the map 1 Click the Find tab 2 Click the Address Book button ol The DeLorme Address Book dialog box opens 3 Click Import 4 Click Browse to find the dab txt csv or tab address book file Click the file and then click Open 5 If the first line of the title contains column names select the First Row is Header check box 6 If you want to adjust the column headers for your address book information select a default column label from the available drop down lists There is a list for Name Street Address City State Abbreviation ZIP Postal Code Telephone Latitude Longitude The information in your address book displays to the right of these lists 135 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide 7 Click OK The address book contacts are imported into the program All street address or latitude longitude matches display on the map with the following symbol and the name of the contact Note If your contacts do not display on the map check the Located column in the Address Book dialog box to verify a successful match was
435. s This Help topic describes functionality that is available only in Street Atlas After you add a text or graphic tool to your map you can use the right click functionality to align each object with a certain location on the map Aligning Multiple Text and Graphic Items on Your Map Use the following steps to align multiple text and graphic items on the map 1 Click the Print tab and then click the Map subtab 2 Place more than one text or graphic item on your map For more information see Adding Text or Graphics to Your Map on page 111 3 While pressing the SHIFT key on your keyboard click each text graphic item on the map OR Drag your mouse over the text graphic items on the map to select multiple items at once 4 Right click one of the items and then select Align from the shortcut menu Then click e Left to align the left sides of all of the items placement is based on the left side of the left most item e Right to align the right sides of all of the items placement is based on the right side of the right most item e Top to align the top side of all of the items placement is based on the top side of the top most item e Bottom to align the bottom side of all of the items placement is based on the bottom side of the bottom most item e Vertical Center to center the items based on the average of the vertical placement of the items e Horizontal Center to center the items based on the average of the hor
436. s Tracking to a Contacts Entry on a Pocket PC You can track a contact you have in your Contacts database as long as the entry has address information For an overview of the tracking feature see Tracking Overview To Track to a Contacts Entry Use the following steps to track to a contacts entry 1 Tap the Track button Ee The Select Track screen displays OR Tap Tools and then tap Tracking The Select Track screen displays 2 In the Source box tap Contacts Entry The list of contacts you have in your Contacts database displays 3 Tap the contact you want to track toward and then tap Start Tracking The destination from the contact to the screen center or your GPS position displays 359 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide in the Information Area The map view screen displays the Tracking icon indicating the direction of track to the selected contact s destination point if the destination is off the current map view If you have the Navigation Panel enabled a compass direction displays along with the name of your destination Below that area two drop down menus let you choose to display the time to finish heading elevation etc If you do not have the Navigation Panel enabled the Info Area displays the distance and bearing to the destination 4 Drag the map to the destination point or tap the icon to center the map on the contact OR If tracking while connected to a GPS receiver the map pans as you move toward your destina
437. s If there is a keyboard shortcut available it is listed after the command Pan left ALT Left Pans or scrolls the map left Scroll left ALT Left Pan right ALT Right Pans or scrolls the map right Scroll right ALT Right Pan up ALT UP Pans or scrolls the map up Scroll up ALT UP Pan down Pans or scrolls the map down ALT DOWN 253 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide Scroll down ALT DOWN Zoom in ALT PAGE Zooms in one level DOWN Zoom out ALT PAGE Zooms out one level UP Zoom in lt gt times Zooms in the specified number of levels Zoom out lt gt times Zooms out the specified number of levels Zoom level lt gt Zooms to specified level GPS Tab Commands The following table shows GPS voice commands If there is a keyboard shortcut available it is listed after the command Monitor GPS Displays the GPS Monitor subtab GPS Monitor Center on GPS ALT P Recenters the map on the current GPS location Stop centering on GPS Stops the map from recentering on your current GPS ALT P location Stop center on GPS ALT P Clear GPS Clears the GPS bread crumb trail from the map Autorotate map on Turns automatic map rotation on ALT R Autorotate map off Turns automatic map rotation off ALT R Autozoom map on When GPS tracking turns automatic zoom on ALT Z Autozoom map off When GPS tracking turns automatic zoom off ALT Z
438. s obtained and green when a 3 D fix is obtained If no GPS device is detected an error message displays e From the GPS menu tap Disconnect any time to disconnect e You can check the status of your GPS connection on the Monitor Sky View and Channel View screens under the GPS menu If the GPS receiver is receiving satellite data but there is insufficient data for an accurate location the status displays 2 or fae if you are using a WAAS enabled device Move your receiver to another location until you get better reception When a GPS connection is successful and the receiver is acquiring sufficient satellite data to determine your location the status displays 0 or tae if you are using a WAAS enabled device A 3 D connection provides data on your current coordinates elevation heading and the speed you are traveling while recording a GPS log The blinking GPS Position icon displays at the center of the map view screen if you are not moving Once you start traveling the GPS Position icon changes to an arrow indicating direction of travel If you pan the map and the GPS Position is not in the map view the GPS Off Map icon displays in the lower left of the map view screen Tap the icon to center the map on your current GPS Position Updating Your GPS Settings When connecting your receiver to your Palm OS handheld for use with Street Atlas USA Handheld you must update your GPS settings to initialize your GPS recei
439. s those entered when creating a line The difference between a line and a spline is that when you enter each point the line segment between the points curves instead of staying straight To Draw a Line Arc or Spline Use the following steps to draw a line arc spline 1 Click the Draw tab 186 WA Click and hold the Line Arc Spline tool and select the tool you want Select a line arc spline style from the Style drop down list Click the color button next to the Style drop down list to select a line arc spline color If available select a line arc spline width from the Width drop down list If available select the Highlight check box to make your line arc spline appear translucent on the map Select the Show Measurement check box to display information about the points on the map as you draw the line arc spline As you add each point a text box displays next to your pointer indicating the bearing or angle leg line segment length and total length of the line arc spline on the map Labels display when end points are clicked if the Show Measurement check box is selected To draw a line or spline click the map to designate the start and end points of each line segment You can also drag your cursor on the map to draw a squiggly line OR To draw an arc click the map to designate the start and end points of the arc e The coordinates of each point display in the corresponding text boxes to the right of the line
440. s allow you to favor or avoid various road types when calculating your route You can also set your speed preferences The default settings are based on the calculation method you chose when creating the route To Set Your Routing Preferences Use the following steps to set your routing preferences Click the Route tab and then click the Advanced subtab 2 Click Route Prefs to display the Route Preferences dialog area 3 From the Road Type drop down list select the road type for which to set preferences 4 Select Preferred Standard or Avoid from the Routing Preference drop down list Preferred favors this type of road whenever possible Standard is the default level and Avoid avoids this type of road whenever possible An avoided road may be used when no other road is available 5 In the Speed text box type your average driving speed for this road type These speeds are used to compute the travel time for a route 6 In the Urban Speed text box type your average driving speed within an urban area These speeds are used to compute the travel time for a route 7 Repeat these steps for each road type 8 When you are finished setting your road preferences click Review to display your settings 9 In the Route Features list select the check box for each feature you want to display 224 Routing e Show Location MapNotes Displays Location MapNotes with their coordinate information for each point in your route e S
441. s described in the license agreement Use one of the following options to modify the selections in the Selections area e Click Map or right click your selections and click Map to add your phone book listings to the map To add all of the phone book listings in the Selections area to the map right click the selections click Select All and then click Map Once a phone selection is on the map you can view details about the listing by right clicking its symbol and clicking Info Note Mapped businesses are indicated with a square symbol on the map and mapped residences are indicated with a small house symbol on the map Phone selections symbol and label that are placed on the map appear in red if they have been located reliably to a street address Otherwise the approximate location appears light gray on the map e Click a listing in the Selections area and click Remove or right click a listing and click Remove to remove the phone book listing from your list of selections e Click Remove All or right click on your selections and click Remove All to remove all of the phone book listings from the Selection area All mapped selections will be removed from the map e Click To File to save all of the phone book listings in the Selections area in a txt file The default location for the file is C DeLorme Docs Datasets e Click To XData to copy all of the phone book listings in the Selections area to the XData tab as a dataset usi
442. s drop down list 7 Select the file and then click Open The draw objects in the imported file display A new draw file is automatically created for the imported file 8 Click Done to return to the Draw dialog area Notes You can import a file containing survey information as long as the survey information is formatted correctly For more information see Sample Survey File e The file must start with Begin Survey and end with End e The second line must be a coordinate e The remainder of the file can be made up of lines or arcs A line is defined by direction and length e A curve is defined by the word curve followed by a letter representing the side of the arc to put the radius This is followed by the length of the radius and the length of the arc The arc is completed with a bearing from the start to finish point Street Atlas USA only This Help topic describes functionality that s provided in advanced file management Advanced file management allows you to save multiple routes and draw layers in a single Map File Simplified file management lets you save only one route and or draw layer in a single Map File If you did not select to enable advanced file management during the product installation you can still change the settings using the Change File Management option in the Options menu For more information see Activating Advanced Simplified File Management 167 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide If you impor
443. s drop down list Click Next Select the track name or track number on the device that you want to receive Not all devices support downloading individual track logs See your device manual for more information Select the track file you want to add the track information to To create a new track file select New from the Track File drop down list and type the new track file name in the New Track File text box Optional Type a label for your track in the Track Label text box Click Receive from Device Repeat the steps for every track file you want to receive from your device Click Finish Tip You can also open the Exchange Wizard by clicking the Exchange button IE Exchange on the GPS tab or the Handheld Export tab Receiving Waypoints From Your Third party GPS Device If you have a compatible GPSdevice you can use the Exchange Wizard to receive waypoints created on your device and save them as a draw file or as a waypoint file Once imported you can use the file in your mapping program To Receive Waypoints as a Waypoint File Use the following steps to receive waypoints from your device 1 2 Sea aS SP 268 Connect your device to your computer If you are using a third party GPS receiver you may have to use specific settings For example if you are using a GARMIN GPS receiver set your GARMIN receiver interface to GRMN GRMN For more information see your owner manual Click the Exchange button a on the to
444. s in material and workmanship under normal use If a defect in the media appears during the Warranty Period return all materials to DeLorme for replacement or at DeLorme s option refund of the license fee Disclaimer of Warranty on Software Neither DeLorme nor its licensors warrants the completeness or accuracy of the System or that its use will meet your needs or be uninterrupted or error free TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW EXCEPT FOR THE WARRANTIES SET FORTH ABOVE THE SYSTEM IS LICENSED AS IS AND DELORME DISCLAIMS ANY AND ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE No Consequential Damages IN NO EVENT SHALL DELORME OR ITS LICENSORS BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF REVENUES OR PROFITS EVEN IF DELORME OR ITS LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES TERMINATION AND TRANSFER DeLorme may terminate this Agreement at any time for any reason including but not limited to if DeLorme finds that you have violated any of the terms of this Agreement or that you have attempted to exceed the licensed uses in any way Termination will be effective upon written notice to you Upon termination of this Agreement you agree to promptly return all copies of the System documentation and other materials furnished to you or made by you
445. s soon as they are added You can create many waypoints on your Palm OS handheld These waypoint wpt files are stored on your handheld and can be accessed at anytime To Center Your Map on a Waypoint Use the following steps to center the map on a waypoint you have added 1 Tap the Menu button on your handheld to display the Street Atlas USA Handheld menu bar 2 Tap Data and then tap Wpts The Data screen displays and the list of waypoints you have created displays under the Source selection box 3 Tap the waypoint you want to locate The waypoint name is highlighted 4 Tap Go To The map view screen centers on the selected waypoint Notes With Street Atlas USA Handheld you can 315 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide e Access the waypoint menu option by using the Graffiti Menu Commands e Tap Beam to beam selected waypoints to another Palm OS handheld e Access Data screen commands Delete Go To Details and Beam by tapping the Data screen menu bar or the Menu button to display the Command drop down menu Editing a Waypoint on a Palm OS Handheld Edit waypoint file information of any waypoint wpt you have created in Street Atlas USA Handheld To Edit a Waypoint Use the following steps to edit waypoint file information I Tap the Menu button on your handheld to display the Street Atlas USA Handheld menu bar Tap Data and then tap Wpts The Data screen displays and the list of waypoints you ha
446. s tab 2 Click File and then click Open Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide 3 Select the map file you want to view and then click Open Notes Street Atlas USA can open only map files with an saf extension Regular Street Atlas USA only If you have simplified file management activated and the map file you are opening contains more then one draw file or route file you will be prompted to select the file you want to open 4 Click OK The files are imported into one saf file Note Once you save the map file in Street Atlas USA you can no longer open it in previous versions of Street Atlas USA If you want to continue to use the map file in a previous version select Save As and rename the file To Import a Route 5 Using Windows Explorer browse to the source folder of the route file The default directory is C DeLorme Docs Navigation or C Program Files Street Atlas USA 6 Locate the file you want to import 7 While holding the left mouse button drag the file to the Windows taskbar button for Street Atlas USA Street Atlas USA opens and then drag the file to the map Release the mouse button when finished 8 Drag the file on top of the map and release the left mouse button The file imports and displays the route To Import a Draw File 9 Click the Draw tab click File and then click Import 10 Browse to the path where your draw files are stored By default they are located in C DeLorme Docs Draw 11 Under Fil
447. sary Terms ADT Alaska Daylight Time Almanac Data downloaded from satellites that contains the identity codes location and time information for each satellite Arctic Circle Parallel or line of latitude around the Earth at approximately 66 30 N Because of the Earth s inclination of about 23 1 2 to the vertical it marks the southern limit of the area within which for one day or more each year the Sun does not set about June 21 or rise about December 21 AST Alaska Standard Time Average Grade Average of the grade from the start to the current cursor position or finish Azimuth The direction of travel or the direction between two points in reference to true or magnetic north When expressed in degrees its value ranges from 0 to 360 A compass heading is an azimuth In most places the word bearing has grown to mean the same thing as azimuth However azimuth is always measured from true or magnetic north in a clockwise direction For example due east is 90 and due west is 270 See also Bearing Bearing Like an azimuth a bearing is measured in reference to true or magnetic north but its value never goes over 90 A bearing is always measured from the cardinal directions of north or south A typical bearing would be N45 E which is the same as an azimuth of 45 The bearing S45 W is an azimuth of 225 The use of the word bearing has changed over the years and now means the same as azimuth When tracking bearing
448. scheme Notes 92 1 10 11 on the toolbar Click the Options button ES ae OR Click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu Then click Options to open the dialog box Click the Keyboard Shortcuts tab Select a custom scheme from the Scheme drop down list Note You cannot edit DeLorme schemes Select the List option if it is not already selected Select the command grouping you want to assign shortcuts to from the Commands drop down list If you want assign shortcuts to several groupings select All Commands Click to select the command you want to assign a shortcut to Click inside the Customize Shortcut text box Press the shortcut key combination on your keyboard that you want to assign for that command Click Assign The shortcut for that command changes to the combination you assigned and displays as pending Repeat steps 4 8 for each command you want to assign Click Apply to save the changes OR Click OK to save the changes and close the Options dialog box OR Click Cancel to cancel your pending changes and close the Options dialog box You can sort the command list view at any time by clicking the heading you want to sort by Group Command or Shortcut The following keyboard shortcut combinations cannot be changed G O 0 00 0 0 0 0 ALT F4 Close Window F1 Help ALT F1 Help Menu SHIFT F10 Context Menu CTRL C Copy CTRL V Paste CTRL X Cut CTRL Y
449. sers This Help topic describes functionality provided in advanced file management Advanced file management allows you to save multiple routes and draw layers in a single map file With simplified file management you can save only one route and or draw layer in a single map file If you did not select to enable advanced file management during the product installation you can still change the settings using the Change File Management option in the Options menu For more information see Activating Advanced Simplified File Management This note does not apply to Street Atlas USA Plus users Using Map Files Creating Transfer Files A map file is made up of several different files for example route draw and waypoint files A map file and its contents can be packaged into a single file called a transfer file to facilitate e mail or copying Transfer files do not include map data To Create a Transfer File Use the following steps to create a transfer file 1 Click the Map Files tab 2 Open the map file you want to create as a transfer file 3 Click File click Transfer and then click Create The Create Transfer File dialog box opens 4 In the File Name text box type the file name Note Transfer files have dmt extensions and are saved by default in the C DeLorme Docs Transfer Files directory by default Browse to another location if you want to save the file somewhere else 5 Click Create Your file is created and
450. sindtcldin m a naite 245 Along the Way 110 224 Anchor PoSition cesseeeeeaees 213 Arc s 186 188 189 192 194 196 Assembling a Multi page Map 117 Assigning a Waypoint ID to a Custom SYMBOls2c ecsourcwteet cle end ah 206 Assigning Keyboard Shortcuts 92 Audio Controls cccceeeeeeeeeaees 257 Auto ZOOM TO TUM cece eee eee 234 Automatically Detect GPS 234 Avoiding a Specified Area When ROUINO sipres 52 222 B Back on TraCk ccceeeeeee sees eaees 239 Basic Map Features ccceeeeees 80 Basic Search ce cceeeeee eee ees 121 Beaming Files to Another Handheld 290 Beep When Heard 60000 250 Bitmap eae 20 208 210 211 Breaking Linear Objects 190 196 Cc Cate Gory diet dan atadai 207 Category Searches cceeeeeees 130 Center ON GPS scceeeeeee eee eee 240 Centering Routes on the Map 228 Centering the Map 19 Centering the Map on a Palm OS Handheld cceeeeeeeeeeeee ees 292 Centering the Map on a Pocket PC Device Tsiena ri ee ieee bee 333 Centering the Map on a Waypoint on a Palm OS Handheld 025 315 Centering the Map on a Waypoint on a Pocket PC c eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 351 Centering the Map on an Address Book Contacto nirea iaaii es 137 Changing Draw Object Types 174 Changing How POIs Display on the Ma Pieces rana rn aaa 83 Changing the B
451. sing the speech recognition feature and setting up your microphone see Speech Recognition Tips If you are having difficulty hearing the voice output adjust the volume on your external speakers or adjust your computer s volume using the settings in the Windows Control Panel If you chose the custom installation option when you installed your application you were asked whether or not to install a speech recognition engine for voice input If you want to use voice input and selected not to install a speech recognition engine when you installed the program you must uninstall and then reinstall the application making sure to select to install the speech recognition engine Notes e The speech recognition engine is automatically installed on Windows Vista operating systems If you have another DeLorme product installed and already opted to install the speech recognition engine you may not see the option to install it again 249 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide Voice Options Overview The following topics explain the functionality of the Voice section of the Options dialog box e Voice Overview e Activating and Monitoring Speech Recognition e Training the Speech Recognition Engine e Voice Commands e Speech Recognition Tips e Changing Voice Output e Voice Preferences e Voice Prompts Activating and Monitoring Speech Recognition To use voice navigation you must have a 2 D or 3 D GPS fix and a route calculated
452. site map images derived from the System provided that you include the Legend indicated below and that you provide a link to the DeLorme Web site at www delorme com from any page that shows a DeLorme map image If you subcontract a web developer to display map images said Web developer must purchase a license NetLink Tab All data downloaded or purchased through the NetLink Tab is subject to DeLorme s specific data use license agreement associated with those products Commercial use of NetLink data is prohibited TopoBird data use is limited to recreational or personal use only See DeLorme s Web site for TopoBird derivative data use license agreement Legend Any System output that is provided to a third party must include the following credit and copyright notice 2008 DeLorme www delorme com Street 382 Legal Information Atlas USA You may not remove alter or conceal any copyright or trademark notices appearing on any System output except that when creating a mural map you need only retain a single legend with scale for use in the field You understand and agree that the trademarks trade names service marks copyrights and other proprietary rights of DeLorme are and shall remain the sole and exclusive property of DeLorme and that you will not hold yourself out as having any ownership rights thereto You further agree that you will make no use of such rights except as provided in this Agreement PROHIBITIONS ON US
453. snerrnnt 164 Exporting Draw Files to Text Files sssssssssssrsssssrrrsssrrrrrnssrrrrrrsrerrrrrsrerrrre 165 Exporting Track or Waypoint Files to GPX Files ce cceee eee eee eee ee eee teeta ea eee 166 Importing Files to Draw Fil S cece cece eect eee eee teeta need 167 Formatting a Text File to Import as a Draw File cee ceee cece eee eee teeta eee ed 169 Copying a Map Line to a Draw File 0 cece cece cece eect eee eee eee teeta ee eae eee 170 Saving a Track as a GPS LOG vies oti eet ce ei hie Se aai 171 Viewing the Contents of a Draw Fil cccece cece eee eee ee teeta teeta eaten eee 172 Copying a Draw Filetstscsrheg annad his buna avast a dda E a AORE Ast noes 173 Changing Draw Object Types ccc cece eee eee eee ee eee eee e tenet nena teeta 174 Renaming a Draw Fil cccccee eee eee ee nee eee eee eee eee neta eee 175 Copying a Draw Object From One Draw File to Another c eeeeeeeeeee ees 176 Moving a Draw Object to a Different Draw File cc cece cece ee eee ee teeta ead 177 Using Draw Ob Cts iea e eE EEE EE EE E dolls ve cea odes ease ow 178 Copying and Placing Draw Objects cece eee e eee ee eee eee e eee ee teeta ates 178 Moving Draw Objects 0 aani eee nee ene ene nena nee AA 179 Renaming a Draw ODjeCct cece cece ee eet eet teeter ne ed 180 Deleting Draw Objects ccc cece cece neta ae
454. so report data corrections to DeLorme using the NetLink tab Getting Started What is a map file Street Atlas USA lets you save all of the work you have done in the mapping application as a single workspace so you can open it again later These saved workspaces are called map files A map file consists of the following items coordinates of the map center current zoom level current magnification map display preferences any added items such as draw layers routes and so forth As you create new routes or draw layers change preferences or the map center and so forth they are added to the current map file Changes can be saved or discarded To learn how to create a map file in Street Atlas USA see Creating and Deleting Map Files on page 99 What do the different colors and symbols on the map mean The different colors on the map represent different areas of land use and land cover parks population centers water forests and so on The Map Legend provides examples and descriptions of the map features Click the Help button on the Street Atlas USA toolbar and click Map Legend to display the Map Legend Help topic You can view the Map Legend for all map features on the map or view the legends for individual feature categories What s the difference between a stop and a via When routing in Street Atlas USA you have the option of adding inserting stops or vias in the route A stop is a location in the middle of a rou
455. sted first If you are on a one way road or freeway GPS Radar takes into account the fact that you need to drive further to get off at an exit You can click each item in the result list to see each option to highlight the route to each destination and to see a description of each one as well as driving directions This should help you choose the best one for your needs The time required for a GPS Radar search varies by the distance density of objects in the area the categories chosen and whether you are searching only in the direction of travel e If you are using GPS NavMode a long search will automatically be interrupted click the More Info button on the orange status bar to open the GPS Radar subtab and adjust your settings for a shorter search e If you are using GPS tab view click the Interrupt button to interrupt a long search and see a listing of the nearby POls Driving directions will not be provided To Find POIs Near Your Location Use the following steps to find POIs near your location Click the Find tab 2 If you are not tracking with a GPS type a specified location in the Search For text box and click Search 3 Click the GPS Radar subtab 4 Under Search For select the point of interest you want to locate within the specified area Note If you select Custom you will be asked to enter keywords for the category you are searching for You can perform a specific keyword search such as bowling or hospital or a
456. stop however if you re driving in a very rural area you may not want to use this feature because the closest point of interest may be behind you 3 Select the Repeat Search Every check box and enter a number of minutes Important You must select this for your results to display 41 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide 4 If you want to hear the search results click the Speech button 5 From the Search Area Scroll list select a distance in miles to limit your search to a certain driving distance from your current location For more information about GPS Radar see Finding POIs Near Your Current Location on page 127 Step 2 Start the GPS 1 Connect your GPS device to your portable computer Ensure the speakers are turned on and loud enough for you to hear while driving 2 Launch Street Atlas USA 3 Make sure the NavMode button n on the toolbar is on appears indented 4 Click the GPS button on the toolbar to start your GPS If you are using a GPS device that is not an Earthmate GPS device and you have not initialized it in Street Atlas USA before you will need to initialize the device using the GPS Settings tab in the Options dialog box Note If you do not see the GPS button on the toolbar right click the toolbar and select the GPS Exchange option Step 3 Start driving The computer speaks the route directions as you drive If you are using speech recognition software you can ask the computer questions
457. system date and coordinates for the current screen center display by default Add a waypoint on the map using the waypoint wpt icon Tap to find map features by name Enter text and or select menu items under the categories of Type State City ZIP Code Radius Maximum and Sort by to narrow search parameters Center the map on the previous map view Tap to activate the Select Location dialog Then select a coordinate letter number use the arrows to adjust and then tap Go To Tap to select to track to a map feature a waypoint or the start or finish of a route you have created Activate the Distance function The Distance tool icon and Erase tool icon display on the map view screen Tap to activate the direct route function The Calculate Direct Route and Erase icons display on the map view screen Tap to activate the road route function The Calculate Road Route and Erase icons display on the map view screen 295 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide Options Preferences Display or hide POI points of interest labels and map crosshairs change the map font map colors or map orientation change the screen resolution for devices with Palm OS 5 2 or higher set the Info Area as static or cycling turn voice on off select to display UTM UPS or latitude longitude coordinates or change the units preferences to be used throughout the program Help View tips on using the map view screen Getting S
458. t Use the following steps to find a point of interest with the POIs subtab Click the Find tab 2 Click the POIs subtab 3 Type the name of the point of interest you are searching for for example Wal Mart or Sheraton in the Name text box 4 Type the category that best fits your POI name for example type Hotel if you are searching for a Sheraton type Department Store if you are searching for Wal Mart in the Keywords text box See Keywords for Category Searches on page 130 for more information OR Select an appropriate keyword from the Keywords drop down list examples and history 5 Type the distance you want to search in the Distance text box Type the number of miles followed by mi for example 5 mi 6 Select From Map Center or Along Current Route 7 Click Search If your search is Very Successful The results list displays and if there is one excellent match the map centers on that place and a yellow box displays at the location of the POI match Successful The results list displays Scroll or browse through the list of search results until you find the one you want to locate To center an item on the map double click it or select it and then click Go To Tips 126 Single click an item in the results list to highlight it on the map without adding a MapTag or centering it in the map view For more information on viewing results see Tips on Viewing Search Results on page 129 Use the ri
459. t Atlas USA has a Show Roads feature that lets you overlay this type of map information onto raster data To Show Roads and Text Labels in Raster Data Use the following steps to show road names numbers etc on raster data AJ 7 1 Click the arrow next to the Imagery button on the toolbar When Show Roads displays in the shortcut menu with a check mark next to it roads display in the raster data When Show Roads displays in the shortcut menu without a check mark next to it roads do not display in the raster data 2 Click Show Roads to toggle the option on off o 98 Using Map Files Map Files Overview You can save all of the work that you have done as a single Map File so you can open it again later You can create various map views and save each in a different Map File if desired In this way you can save separate views of often viewed areas at your preferred zoom level and other settings Then open them as you need them using the Map Files tab What is a Map File A Map File consists of the map center coordinates the current data zoom level the current magnification rotation preferences and links to routes or draw layers you have added to it As you create routes and draw layers they are added to the currently selected map file Map files are saved by default in C DeLorme Docs Map Files Each associated file is saved in its respective folder in the C DeLorme Docs directory For example a draw lay
460. t Stop at GPS Location from the Stop drop down list OR Select Via at GPS Location from the Via drop down list e Type the stop or via location in the Stop or Via text box Type the name of an address book contact user added waypoint or address If you type an address it must be in one of the following formats street address city state OR street address ZIP Postal Code The Book check box underneath the Address Book buttons in the Find tab must be selected to search for address book contact names 219 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide 2 e Right click the map where you want to add the stop or via Point to CreateRoute in the shortcut menu and then click Add Stop or Add Via You can also select Add as Last Stop or Add as Last Via e Use the toolbar to add a Stop or Via If the Auto check box is not selected click Calculate to recalculate your route to include the stop or via OR Click the Calculate button Go on the toolbar OR If the Auto check box is not selected right click the route point to Manage Route in the shortcut menu and click Calculate Road Quickest or Calculate Road Shortest Note If the program is unable to find an exact match for the item that you typed a dialog box opens with a list of the closest matches Scroll through the list of search results until you find the one you want to locate click the item to select it and then click OK Click Directions to view the route directions AND
461. t be at least three characters in length Name searches do not require punctuation Type the last name first The Phone tab recognizes partial last names You may get better results for longer names or if you are unsure of the spelling if you only type a portion of the name Many business names are abbreviated in phone book listings For best results try additional searches using alternate spellings or abbreviations Street Street name descriptors e g street road drive should Address not be used for address searches However you can use street name abbreviations e g st rd dr You can use street address ranges such as 100 200 Main St for address searches City Long city names may be abbreviated in the Phone data Try shortening the city name until the search finds the city name you recognize then use that abbreviation City listings may have variances in spelling such as Saint Louis rather than St Louis ZIP Postal ZIP Code searches must contain at least three digits Postal Code Code searches must contain at least three characters Phone Phone number searches are performed by entering at least three digits the area code Yellow Pg Yellow page searches should be singular for example type Yellow restaurant instead of restaurants Pages If you use multiple words all of the words are required to form a match There are over 34 000 yellow page headings possible Use keywords you would expect to find in
462. t file is deleted from the list and no longer displays on the map OR Tap Cancel to return to the Data screen without deleting a waypoint 6 When finished deleting waypoints tap Done to display the map view screen Notes e Access waypoint menu options by using the Graffiti Menu Commands e Access Data screen commands Delete Go To Details and Beam by tapping the Data screen menu bar or the Menu button to display the Command drop down menu Route Creating a Direct Route With Street Atlas USA Handheld you can create direct routes to plan trips or to follow along when connected to a GPS receiver When you calculate a direct route the shortest distance between the start and finish points is measured with a straight line without turns or following particular roads Note Only one route can display on the map at a time When you create a second route and save the route file the map centers on the start point of the new route if you are not tracking along a route and the previous route is cleared from the map To Create a Direct Route Use the following steps to create a direct route on your Palm OS handheld 1 Tap the Menu button on your handheld to display the Street Atlas USA Handheld menu bar 2 Tap Tools and then tap Create Direct Route The Calculate Direct Route icon displays in the upper right corner of the map view screen and the Erase icon displays in the upper left corner of the map view screen 3 Tap the locat
463. t from which to measure distance A point displays on the map view screen indicating the point tapped Note If you need to pan the map to place a point at a particular location pan to the location and tap the map view screen at the desired location to place the point Tap the map again to place another point on the map Each time you tap the map while in Distance mode a point is placed on the map and a line segment displays between the points When you create a new line segment the segment length as well as the total distance of all segments drawn displays in the information area above the menu bar Note If you have placed a point on the distance measure line incorrectly tap the Using Street Atlas Handheld on a PDA Erase icon The last point and the line segment between it and the previous point are cleared Clear a whole distance measure line by tapping the Erase icon until all points and line segments are cleared 4 To exit the Distance mode tap the Distance tool icon The distance measure points and line segments are cleared from the map Tracking Tracking Overview for Pocket PC With Street Atlas USA Handheld you can track to a map feature a waypoint or along a route you have loaded Use tracking to plan ahead and find the distance and bearing for a direct route or between waypoints If you are connected to a GPS receiver use tracking to guide you to your destination Notes e When tracking with a GPS device positio
464. t of the feature name match indicate what type of feature is listed Feature Type Line for example road stream railroad Polygon for example island water park Point of Interest for example placename landmark historic sites Waypoint Wpt Business address from contacts Home address from contacts Search results are based on the search method selected begins with contains or fuzzy find Query results are sorted based on the sorting type match quality or proximity selected on the Find screen While a search is running results are automatically sorted as they become available The top matches closest name match or closest in distance to screen center move to the top of the search results list pushing the previous results down the list Tap Pause to interrupt the search Tap Resume to continue the search If no matches are found tap ok to return to the Find screen and perform another search 5 Tap the item in the Find Results list and then tap Go To to display the feature at the center of the map view screen Notes To view information such as name type city state ZIP Code and coordinates for the map feature tap the desired item in the Find Results list and then tap Info Tap ok to return to the Find Results list You can then tap Go To to display the feature at the center of the map view screen Using Street Atlas Handheld on a PDA e To end the search session without locating a list item t
465. t the bearing from the Bearing drop down list e True North The direction to the north pole This is the default setting e Magnetic North The direction that a compass needle points 3 Click OK to commit the change and exit the Options dialog box OR Click Apply to commit the change and keep working in the Options dialog box Resizing the Map and Tab Areas You can horizontally and vertically resize the primary right map secondary left map tab area and overview map with the map and tab area resize tools Notes e The tab and overview map window size does not change when you choose another tab e Some tab areas that provide search results automatically resize depending on the number of results e Street Atlas USA displays both maps only when you are using GPS in GPS tab view To use this feature select the Auto display GPS Overview check box on the GPS Settings tab in the Options dialog box e You can also hide the tab area panel To Resize the Map and Tab Area Using the Drag Method Use the drag method to horizontally or vertically resize these areas 1 Point to the frame area between the tab and overview map windows The pointer becomes a i 86 Customizing the Map and Tab Display OR Point to the horizontal edge of the tab main map window The pointer tT becomesa F 2 Drag to resize 3 To cancel the resize while dragging press the ESC key on your keyboard The size just prior to this resize is rest
466. t the waypoint information fields 3 Tap ok to return to the Data screen 4 If you have no other waypoint files to edit tap ok to return to the map view screen Deleting a Waypoint on a Pocket PC You can delete any waypoint Wpt files you have created in Street Atlas USA Handheld To Delete a Waypoint Use the following steps to delete a waypoint file 1 Tap Data and then tap Wpts The Data screen displays the list of waypoint files available on your Pocket PC 2 Tap the waypoint you want to delete The waypoint name is highlighted 3 Tap Delete A message box displays asking if you want to delete the selected waypoint file 4 Tap Yes to the delete the waypoint The waypoint file is deleted from the device and no longer displays on the map OR Tap No to return to the Data screen without deleting a waypoint 5 When finished deleting waypoints tap ok to display the map view screen 351 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide Route Creating a Direct Route on a Pocket PC With Street Atlas USA Handheld you can create direct routes which you can follow along when connected to a GPS device Only one route can display on the map at a time A route displays on the map as it is being drawn and continues to display once it is saved When you create a second route and save the route file the map centers on the start point of the new route and the previous route is cleared from the map You must end tracking before creating a new rou
467. t this That results from this The following is imported type of file source Text File txt Lat Lon Text File Annotation draw objects displaying with the current symbol and line style selections GPS Log File gpl Any DeLorme product Line or waypoint object that supports GPS displaying with the current tracking line preferences GPX File gpx DeLorme product on May contain one or more third party application routes tracks or waypoints as well as comments Note e When you import a GPX file all the waypoints tracks comments and routes found in the file are imported at the same time Magellan Track Magellan Track Log Latitude longitude elevation File log name and date time if specified Magellan Waypoint Magellan Waypoint File Latitude longitude elevation File upt name comment and symbol are imported Draw Layer Files Topo USA 2 0 ano Annotation draw objects displaying with the current symbol and line style selections MapDocs sa7 Street Atlas USA Point objects and annotation sa8 sa9 mn5 7 0 8 0 and 9 0 draw objects displaying with mn6 mn7 AAA Map n Go 5 0 the current symbol and line 6 0 and 7 0 style selections 168 Using the Draw Tools Formatting a Text File to I mport as a Draw File These are the formatting conventions with examples for creating a text file to import as a draw file Polygon Rectangle Circle BEGIN LINE LAT LON LAT
468. ta zoom level Data zoom level is the relationship between what you see in a map view and how it exists in reality It is the amount of geographic data displayed on a computer monitor The data zoom level is similar to the traditional fractional relationship expressed on paper maps For example 1 24 000 1 100 000 1 500 000 and so on to quickly change the zoom level of the map view Notes Increasing the data zoom level number shows a smaller geographic area at greater detail Decreasing the data zoom level number shows a larger geographic area at lesser detail If you view both the right primary and left secondary maps at different data zoom levels a box or lines depending on the current data zoom level displays on the map that is zoomed out the furthest The box lines indicate the area that is in view on the other map If you view the right and left maps at the same data zoom level but they are not equally represented on the screen 50 50 a box or lines displays on the map that is covering the most screen area The box lines indicate the area that is in view on the other map To Drag and Zoom In Use the following steps to zoom in either the right or left map 1 Click and hold down the left mouse button as you drag the mouse in a down right direction on the map to encompass the area you want to display A view box displays on the screen and changes dimension as you move the mouse A label displays the data zoom
469. tab or the Handheld Export tab 270 Using Handheld Devices Sending Waypoints to Your Palm OS Device Use the Exchange Wizard to send waypoints to your Palm OS device To Send Waypoints Use the following steps to send waypoints to your Palm OS device l Click the Exchange button a on the toolbar 1 2 Click Use Other Device to open the Exchange Wizard 3 Under Select Device select Palm OS 4 Select Send to Device 5 Select User Map Data Waypoints from the Object Type drop down list 6 Click Next 7 Select the waypoint file you want to send to your device from the Waypoint File drop down list 8 Click Prepare for Sync 9 Repeat the steps for every waypoint file you want to send to your device 10 Click Finish The waypoints are available on your handheld device after your next synchronization operation Tip You can also open the Exchange Wizard by clicking the Exchange button TE Exchange on the GPS tab or the Handheld Export tab Receiving a GPS Log From Your Palm OS Device Use the Exchange Wizard to receive GPS logs created on your Palm OS device Once imported you can use the file in your mapping program To Receive GPS Logs From Your Palm OS Device Use the following steps to receive GPS logs from your Palm OS device Click the Exchange button on the toolbar Under Select Device select Palm OS Select Receive from Device Select GPS Logs from the Object Type drop down list Click Ne
470. tallation e After installation using the Tab Manager option in the Options menu e From the Start menu Note If you use Tab Manager while the program is open you must exit and restart the program to view the tab changes To Reorder the Tabs Use the following steps to reorder the tabs with Tab Manager 1 Open Street Atlas USA click the arrow next to the Options button E Risg z Ton the toolbar and click Tab Manager OR From the Start menu point to Programs point to DeLorme point to Street Atlas USA and then click Tab Manager 2 Click the tab you want to reorder to highlight it 3 Click the up arrow 4 or the down arrow to move the tab to the new position 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each tab you want to reorder 5 Optional Click Default to cancel the reordering process and use the default tab order showing all available tabs 6 Click OK 7 Exit Street Atlas USA 8 Open Street Atlas USA 90 Using Keyboard Shortcuts Selecting a Keyboard Shortcut Scheme Your application comes with the following DeLorme keyboard shortcut schemes e Desktop Mapping e In vehicle Navigation You cannot edit DeLorme schemes however you can create custom schemes that are editable You can create as many additional custom schemes as you need To Select a Keyboard Shortcut Scheme Use the following steps to select a keyboard shortcut scheme 1 Click the Options button i on the toolbar RE Options OR Click the
471. tarted View the Getting Started Tutorial for Street Atlas USA Handheld About View version and licensing information about Street Atlas USA Handheld Graffiti Menu Commands There are several Palm OS Graffiti menu commands you can use to quickly access menu options while using maps or editing text fields in Street Atlas USA Handheld Menu Commands for the Map The following table shows the Graffiti menu command used to activate specific functions on the map in Street Atlas USA Handheld and the resultant action of the command The slash indicates the command stroke Note Make the command stroke by dragging the stylus diagonally from bottom left to top right in the Graffiti area then write the letter needed to activate the command Menu Command Command Activated Add Wpt The wpt symbol displays on the map view screen For information on adding waypoints see Adding Waypoints Find The Find dialog box opens For information on using the Find function see Finding Map Features Help The Help Tips screen displays with tips on using the map on your handheld GPS Settings The GPS Settings dialog box opens For information on GPS Settings see Updating Go To Position The Select Location dialog box opens For more information see Finding a Coordinate Location 296 Using Street Atlas Handheld on a PDA Your GPS Settings L GPS Logging The GPS Logging dialog box opens For information on GPS logging see GP
472. tcut menu 9 Optional To launch a Web browser for a draw object that includes a URL right click the file in the draw file editing area and click Launch Browser 10 Optional To delete a draw object click the draw object in the table and click the Delete button Click Yes in the confirmation message box to delete the object or click No to cancel OR Right click the draw object in the table and click Delete Click Yes in the confirmation message box to delete the object or click No to cancel 11 Optional Click Less to return the tab height to its default height Note To edit the Comments field click once in the cell type your text in the box and then press ENTER on your keyboard When you hover your cursor over a comment the entire comment displays as a ToolTip Note for regular Street Atlas USA users This Help topic describes functionality provided in advanced file management Advanced file management allows you to save multiple routes and draw layers in a single map file With simplified file management you can save only one route and or draw layer in a single map file If you did not select to enable advanced file management during the product installation you can still change the settings using the Change File Management option in the Options menu For more information see Activating Advanced Simplified File Management This note does not apply to Street Atlas USA Plus users Copying a Draw File There are
473. te To Create a Direct Route Use the following steps to create a direct route on your Pocket PC handheld 1 Tap Tools and then tap Create Direct Rte The Direct Route icon displays in the upper right corner of the map view screen and the Erase icon displays in the upper left corner of the map view screen 2 Tap the locations on the map where you want to place each point in the route Each time you tap the map while in Direct Route mode a point is placed on the map and a line segment displays between the points Tap the Direct Route icon when you have finished placing all of your points Notes AND OR If you have placed a point on the route incorrectly tap the Erase icon The last point placed as well as the line segment between it and the previous point is cleared Clear a whole route by tapping the Erase icon until all points and line segments are cleared If you need to pan the map to place another route point drag the map to the appropriate location and tap the map view screen at the desired location to place the next point and line segment in the route Tap the Direct Route icon and enter your route information using one all of the four available choices From the Add list box tap Find to search for points and to display the Find screen Enter the name for a particular map feature and conduct a search for the feature Select the feature from the Find Results screen to add to your route and then tap Select The selected fe
474. te files OR Tap Cancel to return to the Data screen without deleting a route file 6 When finished deleting route files tap Done to display the map view screen Note You can also access Data screen commands Delete Go To Details and Beam by tapping the Data screen menu bar or the Menu button to display the Command drop down menu Reversing the Direction of a Route on a Palm OS Handheld Once you have created a route in Street Atlas USA Handheld you can reverse its direction at any time To Reverse the Direction of a Route Use the following steps to reverse the direction of a route 1 Tap the Menu button on your Palm OS handheld to display the Street Atlas USA Handheld menu bar 2 From the Data menu tap Routes to view the Data screen The list of routes you have created displays under the Source selection box 3 To reverse a route file tap the file to select it and then tap Reverse A progress bar displays and then disappears once the route is reversed 322 Using Street Atlas Handheld on a PDA Distance Measuring Distance on a Palm OS Handheld Use the Distance tool to measure the distance in feet or miles from one map feature to another To Measure Distance Use the following steps to measure distance on the map 1 Tap the Menu button on your Palm OS handheld to display the Street Atlas USA Handheld menu bar 2 Tap Tools then tap Distance The Distance tool icon displays in the upper right corner of t
475. te is the selected device Turns on the LED on the Earthmate When the check box is cleared the LED on the Earthmate does not display This option is selected by default Use the following procedures to manually configure your GPS connection Click a procedure to view the step by step directions Select the correct GPS device Use the steps below to select the correct GPS receiver and settings 1 Connect your GPS receiver to your computer set the receiver to the mode specified in your user manual and then turn the receiver on 2 Click the Options button and then click the GPS Settings tab 3 From the Device drop down list select the type of GPS receiver you are using If your device is not listed select Generic NMEA 235 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide Note The Settings text box automatically displays the default settings for the selected device 4 From the Port drop down list select the communications port you are using to attach the GPS receiver to your computer See your computer manual for further information e Manually change the location coordinates Each time you track with GPS the initialization process uses the coordinates from the last initialized location Use the following steps to change these coordinates to those of your choice 1 Connect your GPS receiver to your computer set the receiver to the mode specified in your owner manual and then turn the receiver on 2 Click the Options butto
476. te option or the Distance and Bearing Angle option and edit their numbers Click Apply to initiate the changes Notes You can display either bearing or distance by clicking the drop down arrow next to the Bearing or Angle text located below the distance text in the Distance and Bearing Angle option You can also delete points and line segments from or add points to a polygon Press the ENTER key on your keyboard to finish your edit OR Click outside the object s active box on the map 199 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide Placing a Circle Rectangle or Polygon on the Map You can place any area object circle rectangle or polygon at a specific coordinate location To Place an Area Object on the Map Use the following steps to place a circle rectangle or polygon on the map 1 Click the Draw tab n 2 Click and hold the Polygon Rectangle Circle tool lt and select the tool you want 3 Select the circle fill outline and or width options 4 To place a circle on the map enter the coordinates for the circle s center into the corresponding text boxes Then enter the radius for the circle into the radius text box OR To place a rectangle on the map select the Coordinate option or use the Distance and Bearing Angle option in conjunction with the Coordinate option Enter the appropriate coordinates or numbers for the rectangle s upper left corner point into the corresponding text boxes to the right of
477. te where you want to stop and then proceed from A via is a road on the map that you want to specifically use when routing What s the difference between adding and inserting a stop or via The Insert Stop Via function arranges stops vias geographically in the route The Add Stop Via function adds stops vias in the order you add them to the route Why does my route fail to calculate Your route will fail to calculate if you create a route e With a route start stop via or finish point in an area that you have designated as a Route Avoid e That includes route points outside the United States Mexico or Canada e Onan island without roads In this case Street Atlas USA will look for the nearest road to that island to place the route point If the nearest road is not routable for example it is the only road on the island and or the island does not have ferry access you will get an error message saying Route failed to calculate Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide e Why do X marks display on the map when calculate a route e When you place a route point in a location that isn t on a street Street Atlas USA finds the closest street to that location marks the space between the point you clicked and the street with X marks and starts the route at the street e If you search for an address that is on a walkway and place a route point on it Street Atlas USA finds the closest street to that location marks the space be
478. ter 4 Tap ok to save changes The Sun Moon screen displays the new coordinate numbers OR Tap Cancel to return to the Sun Moon screen without saving changes Note If your coordinates are in the UTM UPS coordinate system and the easting and northing values you specify are not found in the current zone the zone number and easting and northing values update and display in the Coords information area in the GPS Settings screen 347 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide To Exit the Sun Moon Screen When you are done viewing sun moon status information tap ok to exit the Sun Moon screen The map view screen displays Preferences Setting Preferences on a Pocket PC Use the preferences option to change such preferences as map font the map orientation coordinates voice output etc To Set Preferences In the Preferences screen you can choose to change all or some of the options Use the following steps to set preferences on your Pocket PC handheld 1 Tap Tools tap Options then tap Preferences The Preferences screen displays 2 Tap the down arrow next to each Preference option to display the list items available under each option The table below describes the Preference options Preference Description Option POI Labels You can choose whether or not to display the labels for points of interest POI such as placenames landmarks geographic features historic buildings and so forth e Tap Displayed to view POI labels e
479. ter becomes a P drag the view box to the new location AE s SIE S gplumbus WASHINGTON Gliarlotte e Use the search features in the Find tab to center the map on a particular location e Assign shortcut keys to pan the map up down left or right in small increments Copying Your Map to the Clipboard Click the Copy to Clipboard button a on the Print tab to copy your map to the clipboard You can then paste it into a graphics program such as Microsoft Paint or Adobe Photoshop You can also right click anywhere on the map and select Copy Map to Clipboard from the shortcut menu Saving a Map as a Bitmap or J PEG Image You can save the current map view as a bitmap bmp or J PEG jpg image in all page layout formats Single 2 x 2 and 3 x 3 If you select a multi page format all the active pages are saved as individual bitmaps or J PEGs The file name is the specified file name with an incremental page number at the end See Printing a Map on page 109 for information about printing a map without saving it as a file To Save a Map as a Bitmap or J PEG Use the following steps to save a map as an image 1 Locate the area on the map that you want to save as an image 2 Click the Print tab and then click the Map subtab if it is not already selected 3 Under Print Layout select Page the map print area is based on the paper size specified in the Setup options or Screen the map print area is based on the scree
480. th line to displays its position in lat lon or UTM UPS coordinates Water Polygons Islands Land Within the feature boundaries to Use Land Cover Parks and so forth display its name and coordinate information 298 Find Using Street Atlas Handheld on a PDA Finding Map Features on a Palm OS Handheld The Find function in Street Atlas USA Handheld lets you search and locate features found in map files you have installed on your handheld Search for features such as cities towns points of interest POIs roads rivers streams railroads and parks To Find a Feature on the Map Use the following steps to find a map feature I 2 Tap the Menu button on your Palm OS handheld to display the Street Atlas USA Handheld menu bar Tap Tools and then tap Find The Find screen displays Note You can also access the Find function using the Graffiti Menu Commands Tap to select a search method from the list above the Find text field Select e Begins with to search for items that begin with the same letters you typed in the Find text field e Contains to search for items that contain the letters typed in the Find text field e Fuzzy Find to search for items that start with the first three letters you typed in the Find text field Enter a name i e Main St 1 95 Town Park in the Find text field Notes e It is not necessary to enter a name for a map feature in the Find text field e To hasten the search pro
481. th the first three letters you typed in the Find text field Radius Infinite to search an unlimited distance from your current GPS location or the screen center Other options include e l1mi 2 mi 5 mi 10 mi 20 mi if you selected mi ft as your unit preference 2 km 4 km 8 km 15 km 30 km if you selected km m as your unit preference 1 NM 2 NM 5 NM 10 NM 20 NM if you selected NM ft or NM m as your unit preference Max One of five numeric list items 10 25 50 100 and 250 to Matches choose the maximum number of matches you want to 339 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide 340 display For example if you choose the number 10 and the Find Results indicates 21 matches found the closest 10 are shown Match quality to sort matching feature names by those most closely matching the search text entry Match Quality results can range from 0 to 100 with 100 being the best text match and displaying at the top of the Find Results list Proximity to sort matching feature names by distance from screen center Features closest to screen center display at the top of the Find Results list There is no proximity limit 4 When all search list items are selected tap Search When the search is complete the Find Results screen displays Search done at the top of the dialog area along with the number of matches found As feature name matches are found the list of search results displays Notes Symbols to the lef
482. the printed materials accompanying the System is strictly prohibited All rights not specifically granted by this Agreement are reserved by DeLorme ADDITIONAL USE AND PUBLICATION RIGHTS MAY BE AVAILABLE UNDER A SEPARATE EXTENDED LICENSE AGREEMENT CONTACT DELORME AT CUSTOM DELORME COM FOR DETAILS AND PRICING WARNING WARRANTIES AND DISCLAIMER Warning THE SYSTEM IS SUITABLE AND INTENDED ONLY FOR GENERAL VISUAL REFERENCE USE IT SHOULD NOT BE USED FOR ANY PURPOSE REQUIRING EXACT MEASUREMENT OF DISTANCE OR DIRECTION OR FOR PRECISION IN ADDRESS LOCATION OR IN THE DEPICTION OF GEOGRAPHIC FEATURES ROUTING DIRECTIONS SHOULD BE USED ONLY AS A TRAVEL AID AND MUST ALWAYS BE VISUALLY VERIFIED BY THE USER ON THE GROUND AND EXECUTED WITH DUE REGARD TO TRAFFIC AND ROAD CONDITIONS ROAD SIGNS AND REGULATIONS Please note that the Data is merely a graphical representation of geographic features appearing on the face of the earth The Data may include features such as roads and trails that are located on private property Nothing in this License grants the 379 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide use of or is intended to imply the right to use any such private property You should respect all landowner restrictions You are solely responsible for complying with all legal requirements relating to land use and for your own safety and for the consequences of your actions in your use of the Data Limited Warranty on Media DeLorme warrants that the m
483. the label name in the Start Finish Stop or Via text boxes when creating a route in the Route tab Editing a Waypoint Symbol MapNote Text Label or Image Once you add a point object to a draw file you can edit name only copy move or delete it at any time You can edit multiple point objects at the same time by dragging a box around the objects you want to edit Any changes are made to all of the point objects included in the box To Edit a Point Object Use the following steps to edit a waypoint symbol MapNote text label or image 1 Click the Draw tab 2 Click the Select tool A and then click the point object on the map twice 3 Type a new name or phrase in the Label field change the name s font style size or color select a new symbol if applicable or click the hyperlink button to change the URL address 4 Press the ENTER key on your keyboard or click the map outside of the point object s active area when you are finished Placing a Waypoint Symbol Text Label or I mage at a Specific Location You can place any point object waypoint symbol text label or image at a specific coordinate location To Place a Point Object at a Specific Location Use the following steps to place a waypoint symbol text label or image at a specific coordinate location 1 Click the Draw tab 202 Using the Draw Tools eet 2 To place a waypoint click and hold the Tracks Waypoints tool and select the Waypo
484. the map file right click the map click Manage Draw and then click Convert All MapTags to MapNotes A new draw layer called MapNotes is created in your map file To Move a MapTag You cannot detach a MapTag from its anchor point you can move only the text area Use the following steps to move the MapTag text area 1 Use the Find tab search for a place street address coordinate category item or street intersection MapTags are placed on the map at each point you locate 2 Click the Select tool hel 3 Click the text area for the MapTag you want to move and drag it to the position on the map where you want it The anchor point does not move 4 Click the Select tool again to resume normal map operations To Hide MapTags The MapTags check box controls if existing MapTags display on the map e MapTags are visible when the MapTags check box is selected 132 Finding a Location on the Map e MapTags are hidden from view when the MapTags check box is cleared Select the MapTags check box at any time to display existing MapTags To Delete MapTags You can delete one several or all MapTags To delete MapTags from the Find tab e To delete one Maa click the Select tool w click the MapTag click the Delete Tag tool xI and click the Select tool again OR Right click the MapTag you want to delete and select Delete MapTag e To delete several MapTags click the Select tool i hold down the SHIFT key on your keyboard while
485. the road without creating a connection point routing cannot occur along the intersection Once you locate the connection point for your new road click the map to place the first point Click point to point or drag to add the new road to the 191 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide draw layer The following information is available as you add each point in your road e The coordinates of each point display in the corresponding text boxes e The distance and bearing angle of each new point from its previous point display in the corresponding text boxes To finish the line draw for the new road enter the last point on the map screen and click Done The new road displays on the map with the name you typed in the Road Name text box You can also finish the line draw by pressing the ENTER key on your keyboard or double clicking while entering the last point of the line Drawing a Line Arc or Spline on the Map You can add lines arcs and splines to a draw file and adjust their line style color width and display them with map line features Use lines to mark boundaries or to add railroads or utility lines You can draw lines with varied line styles weights and colors including lines that reflect actual map line types Use arcs to add curved line features to a draw file You can draw arcs with varied line styles weights and colors including lines that reflect actual map line types Note An arc is created by entering only
486. the yellow pages Yellow page searches must be at least three characters in length 6 Press the ENTER key on your keyboard or click Search The search results display in the Search Results area on the lower left corner of the dialog area Notes e If you do not receive any results from your yellow page search use an alternative keyword for your search attempt For example if you are looking for a clothing store type clothing instead of clothes Or if the alternative keyword still does not work search by name for a clothing store and see what category it is listed under the category displays in parenthesis at the end of the result e f more than 1000 search results match your search criteria the More button becomes activated Click More to browse to the next 1000 search results 143 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide 7 Click one or more search results in the Search Results area and then click Add or right click on the search results and select Add from the shortcut menu to add your search result to the Selection area on the lower right corner of the dialog area Note Press the CTRL key on your keyboard to select more than one search result at a time You can also double click a search result to add it to the Selections area OR click Add All or right click the search results and click Add All to include all of your search results to the Selection area Note The Selection area has a 1 000 listing limit a
487. them from the map To Display a Route on the Map Use the following steps to display a hidden route on the map 1 Click the Route tab and then click the Directions subtab 2 In the route list on the left select the check box next to the route you want to display OR To center the map on the route double click the route name To Hide a Route from the Map Use the following steps to hide a route from view on the map 1 Click the Route tab and then click the Directions subtab 2 In the route list on the left clear the check box next to each route you want to hide from view on the map OR Right click the route you want to clear from the map view point to Manage Route in the shortcut menu and then click Hide Route To Center the Map on a Route Use the following steps to center a route on the map 1 Click the Route tab and then click the Directions subtab 2 Double click the route in the route list on the left Tip To center a route that is not in the current map view click the Route tab click the New Edit subtab and select the route from the Name drop down list Note for regular Street Atlas USA users This Help topic describes functionality provided in advanced file management Advanced file management allows you to save multiple routes and draw layers in a single map file With simplified file management you can save 228 Routing only one route and or draw layer in a single map file If you did not select t
488. thin 50 miles of a planned stop the end of day break is moved to the planned stop 3 Optional Select the Estimate Fuel Breaks check box to schedule fuel breaks for your trip Type the fuel tank capacity in gallons in the Tank Cap text box Type the fuel consumption rate in miles per gallon or the distance unit you have selected in the Display tab of the Options dialog for your vehicle in the Fuel Rate text box Select the amount closest to your current fuel tank level from the Starting level drop down list Select the amount of fuel you would like to have in your tank when warned to stop for fuel from the Warning Level drop down list 4 Click Apply 231 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide Estimating the Fuel Cost of Your Route The Plan Trip subtab of the Route tab lets you estimate the fuel cost of your route using the fuel rate how many gallons of fuel your vehicle uses per mile kilometer traveled and fuel price per gallon To Estimate the Fuel Cost of Your Route Use the following steps to estimate the fuel cost of your route Create a route Click the Plan Trip subtab on the Route tab Click Fuel Cost Type the fuel rate for your vehicle in the Fuel Rate text box The fuel rate can often be found in the vehicle s owners manual 5 Type the price of your fuel in the Fuel Price text box The estimated fuel cost in U S dollars for your route automatically calculates when the Fuel Rate and Fuel Price text b
489. three points on the map The first and second points determine the distance of the first arc base from the last arc base The third point placed between the first two determines the radius of the arc and fixes the arc in place Use splines to add map features that contain curves You can draw splines with varied line colors weights and styles including lines that reflect actual map line types Note As you draw a spline points are entered in much the same way as those entered when creating a line The difference between a line and a spline is that when you enter each point the line segment between the points curves instead of staying straight To Draw a Line Arc or Spline Use the following steps to draw a line arc spline 192 1 Click the Draw tab l Click and hold the Line Arc Spline tool and select the tool you want Select a line arc spline style from the Style drop down list Click the color button next to the Style drop down list to select a line arc spline color If available select a line arc spline width from the Width drop down list If available select the Highlight check box to make your line arc spline appear translucent on the map Select the Show Measurement check box to display information about the points on the map as you draw the line arc spline Using the Draw Tools As you add each point a text box displays next to your pointer indicating the bearing or angle leg line segme
490. ties as a written amendment to this Agreement LICENSE TERMS AND CONDITIONS THE LICENSED SYSTEM The System consists of DeLorme s patented U S Pat Nos 4 972 319 5 030 117 5 559 707 5 802 492 5 848 373 5 948 040 and 6 321 158 other patents pending process for the formatting storage retrieval and presentation of geographic and geographically related data DeLorme s copyrighted computer program for the use of those processes and related functions and compilations of geographic and supplemental data that are proprietary to DeLorme or its licensors The entire System including the software documentation including introductory guide and help screens data compilations screen displays and map printouts are protected by U S and foreign copyright You have no ownership rights in the System Rather you have a license to use the System as long as this Agreement remains in full force and effect Permitted Use Provided that you are a registered user this Agreement permits you to use the System on a non exclusive basis for personal reference or business purposes on a single computer all as further set forth later in this Agreement You may install the System on an auxiliary computer in addition to your principal computer However one of these two computers must be portable and the software may not be used simultaneously on both computers Otherwise once you have installed the System on one computer you may use the System on a sec
491. ting Advanced Simplified File Management This note does not apply to Street Atlas USA Plus users Copying a Draw Object From One Draw File to Another You can copy draw objects from one draw file to another using the right click feature in the draw file list Copying retains the draw object in the original draw file while placing a copy of it in a selected draw file If you want to move a draw object to another draw file see Moving a Draw Object to a Different Draw File in this section To Copy a Draw Object to a Different Draw File Use the following steps to copy a draw object 1 Click the Draw tab 2 Click File to open the draw file editing area All the files you created display in a table A draw file with a selected check box displays on the map 3 Click to select the file that includes the contents you want to copy 4 Click More The tab area increases in height and the file details table displays The information that displays in the table is dependent on the file type that is selected 5 Right click the draw object that you want to copy to another draw file point to Copy To and then click the draw file you want to copy the object to The draw object remains in the original draw file and is copied to the selected draw file 176 Using the Draw Tools Note for regular Street Atlas USA users This Help topic describes functionality provided in advanced file management Advanced file management allows you to s
492. ting a Map File on a Palm OS Handheld sse 288 Deleting a Map File on a Pocket PC DEVICE s aep aa AESi 330 Deleting a Route n se 230 Deleting a Route on a Palm OS Handheld sse 322 Deleting a Route on a Pocket PC 355 Deleting a Waypoint on a Palm OS Handheld l e 316 Deleting a Waypoint on a Pocket PC Er a E T 351 Deleting Draw Objects 181 Deleting Points and Line Segments from Draw Objects s e 183 Deleting Your Entire Address Book 139 Dilution of Precision 245 Directions s e 110 222 224 Disable Screen Saver 234 Display oserei a 82 83 Display Route Vias a 224 Display Waypoint Labels 224 Displaying Basic Map Features 80 Displaying Routes on the Map 228 Drag and ZOOM 18 Dragging a Bitmap into XSym 211 Draw 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 172 173 174 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 186 187 192 193 197 199 200 208 212 215 222 Draw Layer r eire EEr ES E ee 161 Draw Tool BOX ecceeeee eee eee 212 E Editing a Contact In Your Address BOOK asrine aaa a a Sates 137 Editing a Route 225 Editing a Symbol 207 Editing a Waypoint on a Palm OS Handheld cceeeeeee eee eeeees 316 Editing a Waypoint on a Pocket PC 351 Editing Draw Objects 188 189 194 195 199 202 Editing Roads ssec 226 Editing Locking Draw Files 164 Elevation seee 26 243 E mailing a Transfer File
493. ting a Route e Deleting a GPS Log To Delete a Map File Use the following steps to delete a map file 1 Tap Data on the menu bar and then tap Maps The Data screen displays the list of map files available on your Pocket PC device 2 From the list of map files tap the name of the map file you want to delete 3 Tap Delete A message box displays asking if you want to delete the selected map file 4 Tap Yes to delete the file The Data screen displays and the map file is cleared from the list of map files OR Tap No to return to the Data screen without deleting a map file The Data Screen 330 Using Street Atlas Handheld on a PDA Showing Hiding Raster and or Vector Data On Your Map on a Pocket PC You can choose to show or hide vector and or raster data on your map To Show Hide Data Use the following steps to show hide vector and or raster data on your map 1 Tap Data and then tap Maps The Data screen displays the list of map files available on your Pocket PC device 2 Tap to select a map file and then tap Details 3 Under Data select the Draw Vectors check box to show vector data on your map OR Under Data clear the Draw Vectors check box to hide vector data on your map 4 Under Data select the Draw Rasters check box to show raster data on your map OR Under Data clear the Draw Rasters check box to hide raster data on your map 5 Tap ok to return to the Data screen 6 Tap ok to return to the map view screen
494. tion enlargement percentages for your photo zoom level display under the Photo Zoom drop down list e If you want to use other tabs and functions but not lose your current print area or other settings select the Lock Print Center check box 109 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide Tips Selecting this check box locks the print area and changes the tab label to red e Select the Print Preview check box to zoom the map and view the entire print area Clear the check box to return to your previous data zoom level e Street Atlas USA Plus only Add text or graphics to your map e Street Atlas USA only To add a title to a single page map select the Map Title check box and click Map Title to assign the title s text font and alignment To change printers or make choices for transparent yellow background paper orientation paper size and paper source click Setup The Print Setup dialog opens Note From the Setup dialog box click Properties to view additional options If the options are available set the graphics mode to use raster graphics and set TrueType fonts to print as graphics Consult your printer manual for additional information Click the Print button to print your map To save a map to a file see Saving a Map as a Bitmap or J PEG Image on page 20 To adjust the print area of a Page map select the Lock Print Center check A box select the Select tool position and then drag the frame to the new Print
495. tion of the System or any of the printed materials accompanying the System is strictly prohibited All rights not specifically granted by this Agreement are reserved by DeLorme WARNING WARRANTIES DISCLAIMER Warning THE SYSTEM IS SUITABLE AND INTENDED ONLY FOR GENERAL VISUAL REFERENCE USE IT SHOULD NOT BE USED FOR ANY PURPOSE REQUIRING EXACT MEASUREMENT OF DISTANCE OR DIRECTION OR FOR PRECISION IN ADDRESS LOCATION OR IN THE DEPICTION OF GEOGRAPHIC FEATURES ROUTING DIRECTIONS SHOULD BE USED ONLY AS A TRAVEL AID AND MUST ALWAYS BE VISUALLY VERIFIED BY THE USER ON THE GROUND AND EXECUTED WITH DUE REGARD TO TRAFFIC AND ROAD CONDITIONS ROAD SIGNS AND REGULATIONS Please note that the Data is merely a graphical representation of geographic features appearing on the face of the earth The Data may include features such as roads and trails that are located on private property Nothing in this License grants the use of or is intended to imply the right to use any such private property You should respect all landowner restrictions You are solely responsible for complying with all legal requirements relating to land use and for your own safety and for the consequences of your actions in your use of the Data 383 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide Limited Warranty on Media DeLorme warrants that the media on which the System is furnished shall for a period of sixty 60 days from date of receipt the Warranty Period be free from defect
496. tion point Note To discontinue a tracking session tap the Track button or tap Tools and then tap Tracking to open the Select Track screen tap Stop Tracking and then tap ok to exit the Select Track screen The map view screen displays Tracking Along a Route on a Pocket PC You can track toward the finish point of any route you have created in Street Atlas USA Handheld For an overview of the tracking feature see Tracking Overview You can hear spoken directions while tracking along a route on a Pocket PC by selecting a voice output option under Preferences For more information on setting voice output preferences see Setting Preferences on a Pocket PC Notes If you cannot hear spoken directions while you are tracking along a route the volume on your device may need to be adjusted To Track Along a Route Use the following steps to track along a route 1 Tap the Track button Ee The Select Track screen displays OR Tap Tools and then tap Tracking The Select Track screen displays 2 In the Source box tap Direct Routes or Road Routes The list of direct road routes you have loaded displays 3 Tap the route you want to track along and then tap Start Tracking The map view screen centers on the current GPS position if you are tracking with a GPS device or the screen center if you are not tracking with a GPS device The map view screen displays the Tracking icon black arrowhead within a circle indicating the direction of
497. tions next turn next stop current location time to finish or current coordinates when navigating with a GPS receiver Text to speech allows hands free navigation of the program on your computer Use your text to speech engine to change and preview the tone and quality of the computer s voice To Change the Voice Output Use the following steps to change your computer s voice 1 Click the Options button on the toolbar FE options OR Click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu Then click Options to open the dialog box 256 Using Voice Navigation and Speech Recognition Click the Voice Settings tab From the Voice drop down list box select a voice from the list of options A description of the selected voice displays to the right of the drop down list box Note If you have purchased SAPI 5 1 compatible voices from another software vendor they are included in this list From the Device drop down list box select the output device from which you want to hear the computer s voice for example your speakers or a headset To preview the voice click Test Voice type a sample sentence and then click OK The sample sentence is spoken in the selected voice Use the Voice Volume spin box to adjust the output volume relative to the other programs you are running By default this is set to 100 maximum Note that you cannot set the volume higher than your speakers or Windows Control Panel settings
498. tna nena eee E 181 vi Table Of Contents Snapping Draw Objects ccc eee ee enen eee eae eee nee e eae ee tee 182 Adding Points to Draw Objects c ccc cce cece eee eee ene teeta tne nne ened 183 Deleting Points and Line Segments from Draw Objects ccccceseeeeeeeeeenes 183 Labeling a Draw ObDjeCt cece e cece a E aeia eer eens ene ene enna eae 184 Routable Roads Trails Tracks Lines Arcs and Splines 185 Drawing Routable Roads on the Map ceceeeee eee eee eee eee eee teeta eae ea eed 185 Drawing a Line Arc or Spline on the Map ceeceee cece eee eee eee teeta teeta ed 186 Drawing a Track On the Map c cece cece eee eee ete eee aetna ne ened 187 Editing a Routable Road Line Arc or Spline cece cece cece e eects teeta need 188 EGItING E E E E E 189 Placing a Routable Road Line Arc or Spline at a Specific Location 189 Joining and Breaking Linear ObjectS ssssssssssssrssssrrrrrsserrrrrsrsrrrrrrrerrrrene 190 Routable Roads Tracks Lines Arcs and Splines ssesssesesesreersrrrere neresen 191 Drawing Routable Roads on the Map ssssssssssssssssrsrssrerrrrnsrrnrrrnsrrrrrersrrrrrne 191 Drawing a Line Arc or Spline on the Map ssssssssssssssesrrsssrrerrsnsrrrrrrrsrrrrn 192 Drawing a Track on the Map ccc eee eee eee eee ene teeta ened 193 Editing a Routable Road Line Arc or Spline cece
499. to the right of the Anchor Position button The large cross hair in the Symbol Editing Grid moves from its default anchor position to the new anchor position To Center the Anchor Position Click Center Anchor to place the anchor point in the exact center of the Symbol Editing Grid Cursor Position Any symbol created in XSym is 24 x 24 pixels square Each of these pixels is represented in the Symbol Editing Grid When you move your cursor over the Symbol Editing Grid the cursor position by pixel number displays to the right of the Cursor Position text next to the Image Preview as shown below Image Preview and Cursor Position Cursor Position 16 14 As you move the cursor over the grid the numbers update according to where you are in the 24 x 24 grid The first number in the above sample 16 refers to the number of pixels across the X coordinate from the upper left corner of the grid beginning with zero The second number 14 refers to the number of pixels down the Y coordinate from the upper left corner of the grid beginning with zero Symbol Sets Creating a New Symbol Set Symbols created in DeLorme XSym are saved within a symbol set dim file which can contain up to 250 symbols To Create a New Symbol Set Use the following steps to create a new symbol set 1 Click the Draw tab 2 Click and hold the Symbol MapNote Text Label I mage tool T M to view its hidden options Select the Symbol tool PI 214
500. to next turn for road and direct routes Displays distance to the destination for waypoints and map features Time to Finish Displays the time remaining until you reach your finish point for road routes Displays N A when selected while tracking against a waypoint map feature or direct route Distance to Finish Displays the distance until you reach your finish point 327 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide e Speed Displays the speed while tracking with a GPS device Displays N A when not tracking with a GPS device e Heading Displays the current heading direction of travel according to the GPS while tracking with a GPS device Displays N A when not tracking with a GPS device Note If you are tracking with a GPS device but not moving the Heading will be 0 degrees e Elevation Displays the current elevation while tracking with a GPS device Displays N A when not tracking with a GPS device e Time of Day Displays the current time as displayed on your handheld computer e Battery Level Displays the status of your battery level Using a Storage Card Moving Files on a Palm OS Handheld If you have a storage card installed on your handheld you can move map files from the main memory of the handheld to secondary storage and vice versa On the Data screen map files existing on an attached storage card display a card symbol amp to the right of the file name Note Do not remove the storage card from the handhel
501. to save the changes To Change the Time Zone Change the time zone to view sun moon information for another time zone Sun moon information displays relative to the time zone you specify For example if you are in New York and want to view sun moon status for a location in California update the coordinates field to the California location To view the sun moon information as though you are in California you must change the time zone to that of the California location Use the following steps to change the time zone e Next to Zone tap the up or down down arrow and select the number that represents the time zone of the desired location e Tap to select the DST check box if daylight saving time is in effect e Tap to select the Behind GMT Greenwich Mean Time check box if the time zone of the location is behind Greenwich Mean Time For example the East coast is 5 time zones behind GMT To Change Coordinates Coordinates can display in either latitude longitude or UTM UPS format based upon the coordinate type selected under Preferences Change coordinates to view sun moon information for different locations For more information on setting preferences see Setting Preferences Use the following steps to change your coordinates 1 Tap the Coords field The Select Location screen displays 2 Tap the number or letter you want to change A box highlights your selection 3 Tap the up and down arrows to change the coordinate number or let
502. to the Options button amp aa a on the toolbar and select Tab Manager from the menu OR From the Start menu point to Programs point to DeLorme point to Street Atlas USA and then click Tab Manager Select the check box next to each tab you want to display in the program Note Click Default to show all the tabs in the program in the default order Customizing the Map and Tab Display 3 Click OK 4 Exit Street Atlas USA 5 Open Street Atlas USA To Hide Individual Tabs Hiding tabs may significantly increase the startup speed of Street Atlas USA Use the following steps to hide tabs using Tab Manager 1 Open Street Atlas USA click the arrow next to the Options button EE onto on the toolbar and select Tab Manager from the menu OR From the Start menu point to Programs point to DeLorme point to and then click Tab Manager 2 Clear the check box next to each tab you want to hide in the program OR Click Minimum Only the required tabs will display in the program Note Find Map Files Info and NetLink are required tabs and cannot be hidden 3 Click OK 4 Exit Street Atlas USA 5 Open Street Atlas USA Importing Exporting Tab Manager Preferences Tab Manager includes a feature that allows you to share your custom tab manager preferences with other Street Atlas USA users To Import Tab Manager Preferences Use the following steps to import another user s Tab Manager preferences 1 If your application is open
503. to two segments at the designated point and you can edit each line separately Note Itis important that you perform steps 2 and 3 consecutively If you pan the map use another tab and so on between steps you may need to repeat the steps again to break your linear object Routable Roads Tracks Lines Arcs and Splines Drawing Routable Roads on the Map The Routable Road tool allows you to add a new road to a draw layer in the current map file You can then incorporate any new roads you add to a route when you create a route You must be at data zoom level 11 0 or greater when adding roads with the Routable Road tool To Draw Routable Roads Use the following steps to add routable roads to a road layer 1 2 Click the Draw tab Click the Routable Road tool all 3 Type the name of the road you want to add in the Road Name text box Name each routable road you add so you can locate it using the find feature Hover the mouse pointer over existing roads to display the yellow diamond symbol The yellow diamond symbol indicates where on an existing road the point for your new road will connect connection point Notes e The new road must connect to an existing non limited access road for routing to occur on the new road e Each time you intersect an existing road hover the mouse over the road to display the yellow diamond symbol and click to create a connection point before continuing to draw If you draw the line over
504. travel to the finish point if the destination is off the current map view for direct routes If you have the Navigation Panel enabled and are tracking along a direct route a compass direction displays along with the name of your destination If you have the Navigation Panel enabled and are tracking along a road route a turn arrow along with the name of the road of your next turn display Below that area two drop down menus let you choose to display the time to finish heading elevation etc If you do not have the Navigation Panel enabled the I nfo Area displays the distance and bearing to the destination for direct routes or the turn time and distance for road routes 4 Pan the map to the point The information area displays different information depending on the type of route you are tracking and if you have selected to show the navigation panel 360 Direct Routes Road Routes OR Using Street Atlas Handheld on a PDA Navigation Panel On Navigation Panel Off If the navigation panel is on the compass direction N S E W NW etc will display to indicate the direction of your destination The name of the destination will also be displayed Use the drop down lists to view the following information Time to turn Distance to turn Time to finish Distance to finish Speed Heading Elevation System time If the navigation panel is on an arrow will display to indicate the direction of your next destinatio
505. ts of measure used to represent how coordinate formats distance datum and bearing listings display Changing these preferences affects how units of measure display in several areas of the program such as on the map and in the Control Panel As you change your unit of measure preferences a description of each choice displays in the information box in the center of the Options dialog box immediately after you select it To Change the Coordinate Preferences Changing the coordinate preferences affects the e Coordinates display on the Control Panel e Coordinate MapNotes e Grid label display if Grids are selected in Map Features e Any other place where coordinates display or print Use the following steps to change how coordinate measurement units display 1 Click the Options button ES smali on the toolbar OR Click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu Then click Options to open the dialog box 2 Click the Display tab Select the coordinate display format from the Coordinates drop down list e Degrees e Degrees Minutes e Deg Min Sec e USNG United States National Grid Street Atlas USA Plus only 4 Click OK to commit the change and exit the Options dialog box OR Click Apply to commit the change and keep working in the Options dialog box Note The Datum displayed is automatically adjusted when your change your coordinate preference To Change the Distance Preferences Distance preferen
506. turn Show GPS Bread Crumb Trail Automatically displays your GPS progress on the map as a bread crumb trail up to the maximum specified number of points 5000 points is approximately one hour and 20 minutes worth of points This setting does not affect the number of points captured in the GPS log file Enable GPS Voice Navigation Provides spoken directions when tracking a route with a GPS receiver Recalculate When Off Route Automatically recalculates the route by the designated threshold distance when the GPS is off of the route Display GPS Overview 2 D only When selected opens the GPS overview window after the GPS is connected You can adjust the size of the map and overview areas The overview map does not display when you use NavMode in 3 D Disable Screen Saver Overrides the system screen saver so that the display stays activated during GPS tracking Start GPS with the Program Automatically starts GPS tracking each time you open the program Automatically Detect GPS Automatically sets up your GPS connection Suggestion If your GPS receiver has a USB cable select Automatically Detect GPS to ensure the correct COM port is detected for your device and that a connection can be made Enable WAAS Use This option is only available only when Earthmate is the selected device see step 4A Enables WAAS use This option is selected by default Enable LED on GPS Device This option is available only when Earthma
507. tween the point you clicked and the street with X marks and starts the route at the street e Why are the tab area and control panel so narrow Street Atlas USA was designed to accommodate resolutions of 800 x 600 or higher If you are using a very high resolution such as 1920 x 1200 the tab area and control panel in Street Atlas USA may appear to be very narrow Note Use the Windows Control Panel to adjust your display settings e Can I send maps to my GPS device You cannot export maps to a GPS device with Street Atlas USA You can send routes draw files waypoints and tracks e Why can t see all the information about my route on the Route tab If your have your screen resolution set to 800 x 600 some information such as the route summary may not display for a longer route Increase your screen resolution to view all details e Regular Street Atlas USA only What s the difference between advanced and simplified file management Simplified file management allows you to save one route or draw layer ina single map file Advanced file management allows you to save multiple routes and draw layers in a single map file During the product installation you chose to use simplified or advanced file management Once the program is installed you can verify the type of file management you are using and change it Click the arrow next to the Options button a on the toolbar to open the menu and then click Chan
508. ugh to hear contact your sound card manufacturer to download and install the latest driver for your specific model sound card The new driver may be able to provide louder output There are a variety of external speaker output options for your laptop Some of them are simply larger external speakers others allow you to send the voice to your car stereo speakers e Why doesn t Street Atlas USA recognize my voice To troubleshoot why Street Atlas USA may not recognize your voice verify the following e Ensure Street Atlas USA is the active application e Ensure you are wearing your microphone correctly See your microphone s user guide for more information e Train your speech engine in the environment in which you are using the Voice tab of Street Atlas USA It is important to speak as naturally as you did during the training Note You can also designate a phrase with which to prefix all of your commands similar to Simon Says within the program or the Speech settings in your Windows Control Panel to change your voice settings e How do get data updates or fix the roads on my map The data in Street Atlas USA can be updated only by buying a more recent version of the product when it is available However if you find there is a local road that is missing you can add it to the current draw layer using the Routable Roads Draw tool For more information see the topic Drawing Routable Roads on the Map on page 185 Note You can al
509. uide Renaming a Map File on a Pocket PC Device Map files are named in the Handheld Export tab of your DeLorme mapping application Once a map file has been downloaded to your Pocket PC handheld you can rename it using the Rename option in the Data screen To Rename a Map File Use the following steps to rename a map file 1 Tap Data and then tap Maps The Data screen displays the list of map files available on your Pocket PC device Notes e An eye symbol next to the map file name indicates the map s currently displaying on the map view screen e An hourglass symbol indicates it is a large file and may take longer to view on the screen 2 From the list of map files tap the name of the map file you want to rename 3 Tap Rename 4 Enter a name assign a folder and assign a location for the file Note ActiveSync synchronizes only files located in Main Memory 5 Tap ok to accept the change 6 Tap ok to return to the map view screen Note Once in the Data screen tap the Directories button to load multiple map files from a particular directory or to clear any map file directories you have previously selected Deleting a Map File on a Pocket PC Device You can delete any map files you have installed on your Pocket PC handheld Waypoints routes and GPS logs are not cleared from the map view screen when a map is deleted To delete waypoints routes or GPS logs see the following topics e Deleting a Waypoint e Dele
510. ull screen view that you can display in 2 D or 3 D By default the Control Panel is hidden and the tabs are minimized however you can change your display options The GPS tab view option allows you to use the GPS tab to control navigating and tracking By default the tabs and Control Panel are visible but you can opt to hide them It is available only in 2 D mode To turn NavMode on or off click the NavMode ao on the toolbar When the Note The button is greyed out j unless you have a GPS device plugged in or are playing back a GPS log file button appears indented 1 NavMode is on You can also change your GPS view in the Options dialog box 1 Click the Options button E scans fi on the toolbar and click the GPS tab You can also click the Options button a lon the GPS tab 2 Clear the Use NavMode check box to turn it off or select the check box to turn it on 3 Click OK See the NavMode tutorial on page 41 for more information 237 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide Tracking a Route with GPS When tracking you can follow along a road route you created As you travel the current leg or segment of your route is highlighted on the map Notes e To automatically recalculate your route when off track on the Route tab select the Auto check box next to the Back on Track button on the New Edit subtab If you do not want the program to automatically recalculate your route when off track clear the Back on Track check box
511. us point display in the corresponding text boxes To finish the line draw for the new road enter the last point on the map screen and click Done The new road displays on the map with the name you typed in the Road Name text box You can also finish the line draw by pressing the ENTER key on your keyboard or double clicking while entering the last point of the line 185 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide Drawing a Line Arc or Spline on the Map You can add lines arcs and splines to a draw file and adjust their line style color width and display them with map line features Use lines to mark boundaries or to add railroads or utility lines You can draw lines with varied line styles weights and colors including lines that reflect actual map line types Use arcs to add curved line features to a draw file You can draw arcs with varied line styles weights and colors including lines that reflect actual map line types Note An arc is created by entering only three points on the map The first and second points determine the distance of the first arc base from the last arc base The third point placed between the first two determines the radius of the arc and fixes the arc in place Use splines to add map features that contain curves You can draw splines with varied line colors weights and styles including lines that reflect actual map line types Note As you draw a Spline points are entered in much the same way a
512. ute For information on adding waypoints see Adding Waypoints From the Add list box tap Address Book Entry to use an Address Book entry as a point in your route only entries with address information are included in the list Select the entry from the list and then tap OK The selected entry is added to the route From the Add list box tap Screen Center to use the current screen center as a point in your route Screen Center points are labeled as Screen Center when information for that location is unavailable You can change the order of points in your route using the up and down arrow buttons You can delete a point from your route using the delete button x Tap Calculate The route is automatically saved Creating a Road Route With Street Atlas USA Handheld you can create road routes to plan trips or to follow along when connected to a GPS receiver Road routes are especially helpful for trip planning providing you with turn by turn route directions from the beginning of your route until the end Only one route can display on the map at a time When you create a second route and save the route file the map centers on the start point of the new route if you are not tracking along a route and the previous route is cleared from the map To Create a Road Route Use the following steps to create a road route 1 Tap the Menu button on your Palm OS handheld to display the Street Atlas USA Handheld menu bar Tap Tools
513. ute tab click the New Edit subtab 2 Select a calculation method Driving Use this method to calculate the route when you are driving a vehicle amp Cycling Use this method to calculate a bicycle route Walking running Use this method to calculate routes when you are on foot 3 Select a route type Road Shortest or Road Quickest from the drop down list 221 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide Changing the Properties of a Stop Along Your Route You can change the properties of a stop along your route by using the Stop Prefs function in the Advanced sub tab under Route To Change the Properties of a Stop Use the following steps to change the properties of a stop 1 Click the Route tab and then click Advanced 2 Click a stop from the waypoint list and then click Stop Prefs The Stop Time Preferences dialog box opens 3 To designate the stop as an end of day stop select the End of Day check box click Apply and then click Done AND OR To designate the stop as a fuel break select the Fuel check box click Apply select the Duration check box select the duration of the fuel break using the Hrs and Mins drop down lists and then click Done Note It is not necessary to allocate a fuel stop duration Viewing Route Directions After you create a route you can view the accompanying route directions To View the Route Directions Use the following steps to view the route directions 1 Click the Route tab and then
514. values are available on all GPS receivers To View the GPS Channel View Screen Use the following steps to view the GPS Channel View Screen 1 Tap GPS and then tap Channel View The GPS Channel Info screen displays information on the satellites being tracked by your GPS receiver The status of the GPS connection displays in the upper right corner of the screen just below the ok button in the title bar 2 Tap ok to exit the GPS Channel Info screen The map view screen displays Sun Moon on a Pocket PC Change settings to view sun moon status at different dates or in different time zones anywhere in the world View the following information in the Sun Moon screen for your current location in Street Atlas USA Handheld e Sunrise set and moonrise set times displayed in a 24 hour clock where 12 is noon and 24 is midnight e Moon phase e Percentage of moon illumination 346 Using Street Atlas Handheld on a PDA To open the Sun Moon screen in Street Atlas USA Handheld tap GPS and then tap Sun Moon The Sun Moon screen displays Note Settings changed in the Sun Moon screen do not affect other screens To Change the Date Use the following steps to view the sun moon information for a particular date 1 Tap the month and then tap the up or down arrow to change the month AND OR Tap the day and then tap the up or down arrow to change the day AND OR Tap the year and then tap the up or down arrow to change the year 2 Tap ok
515. ve created displays under the Source selection box Tap the waypoint file you want to edit and then tap Details The Wpt Info dialog box displays In the dialog box you can edit or add a e Name in the Name field e Placename or map feature in the Close To field e Comment in the Comment field e Symbol style e Symbol color Tap Done to return to the Data screen If you have no other waypoint files to edit tap Done to return to the Map View screen Access the waypoint menu option by using the Graffiti Menu Commands Tap Beam to beam selected waypoints to another Palm OS handheld Access Data screen commands Delete Go To Details and Beam by tapping the Data screen menu bar or the Menu button to display the Command drop down menu Deleting a Waypoint You can delete any waypoint wpt files you have created in Street Atlas USA Handheld To Delete a Waypoint Use the following steps to delete a waypoint file I 2 316 Tap the Menu button on your Palm OS handheld to display the Street Atlas USA Handheld menu bar Tap Data and then tap Wpts The Data screen displays and the list of waypoints you have created displays under the Source selection box Using Street Atlas Handheld on a PDA 3 Tap the waypoint you want to delete The waypoint name is highlighted 4 Tap Delete A message box displays asking if you want to delete the selected waypoint file 5 Tap OK to the delete the waypoint The waypoin
516. ver Note NMEA compatible GPS devices used with Street Atlas USA Handheld should be set to a mode corresponding to NMEA 183 version 2 0 at 4800 baud To Update Your GPS Settings Use the following steps to update your GPS settings 1 302 Tap the Menu button on your handheld to display the Street Atlas USA Handheld menu bar Tap GPS then tap Settings The GPS Settings dialog box opens Next to Device tap to select the type of device you are using Next to Port tap to select the port that the GPS device is connected to Next to State tap the state where you are currently located Tap the up or down arrows or use the handheld s scroll buttons to locate the state abbreviation Note If you have previously used your GPS receiver with Street Atlas USA Handheld tap Last Location to use the last state used or tap Screen Center to use the current screen center coordinates Using Street Atlas Handheld on a PDA OR Tap the Default Location field to manually enter your coordinates The Select Location screen displays Tap a number or letter in the coordinate and use the up and down arrows to make changes Tap OK to update the coordinates The GPS Settings dialog box opens 6 Next to DST tap On if daylight saving time is in effect at your location 7 GMT Greenwich Mean Time Offset displays the offset for the state s time zone relative to Greenwich Mean Time Drag to select and then change the offset number 8 If you hav
517. vice 1 Connect your device to your computer 2 If you are using a third party GPS receiver you may have to use specific settings For example if you are using a GARMIN GPS receiver set your GARMIN receiver interface to GRMN GRMN For more information see your owner manual Click the Exchange button i on the toolbar Under Select Device select GPS Select Send to Device Select Route Points from the Object drop down list Click Next From the Route drop down list select the route file that contains the route points you want to send to your device 9 To avoid overwriting existing waypoints on your device type a starting point for the new points and select the Prefix a Number to the Waypoint Name check box Not all devices support starting points See your device manual for more information 10 Click Send to Device 2 ee SS 264 Using Handheld Devices 11 Repeat the steps for every route file you want to send to your device 12 Click Finish To Send Route Directions Use the following steps to send route directions to your GPS device 1 2 9 Se ee ee Connect your device to your computer If you are using a third party GPS receiver you may have to use specific settings For example if you are using a GARMIN GPS receiver set your GARMIN receiver interface to GRMN GRMN For more information see your owner manual Click the Exchange button on the toolbar Under Select Device select GPS Se
518. vided that distribution and use of such printouts and copies of printouts is limited to the location where the System is installed or limited to use by employees based at that location 377 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide Paper Locator Map Distribution Rights You may distribute to family and friends including via fax paper copies or static digital images such as PDF or TIFF files of Street Atlas USA map printouts depicting locations of personal interest You may distribute to your colleagues clients customers or prospects including via fax paper copies or static digital images such as PDF or TIFF files of Street Atlas USA map printouts depicting the location of your business or institution or the locations of your business or institution related meetings or events and in flyers or brochures that contain no paid advertising Paper Report Distribution Rights You may reproduce for distribution to colleagues or clients up to one thousand 1 000 paper copies of any Street Atlas USA map printouts for use in paper reports such as appraisals or environmental studies provided that no such report includes more than fifty 50 different Street Atlas USA maps and that the distribution does not constitute a general and unrestricted publication for sale or resale or contain paid advertising Periodical I Illustrations You may reproduce paper copies of any Street Atlas USA map printouts as illustrations to articles in printed paper periodical
519. wing steps to edit a road 1 Click the Route tab and then click the Advanced subtab 226 Routing 2 Click Edit Roads 3 Select the Display Road Edits check box to show existing road edits on the map 4 Click the Select tool A and select the road on the map you want to edit 5 Select a direction e If you select Two Way you can also select No Left Turn No Right Turn e If you select One Way you can also select No Left Turn or No Right Turn e If you select No Way you cannot select any other options Note Click Default to change the road properties to the default settings Click Clear All Edits to remove all road options and return all road properties to their default settings 6 Click Done Labeling a Route Point with a MapNote The easiest way to label your route points start stop via and finish with a MapNote is to use the Route Preferences section of the Route tab If you select more than one option each category of information location comments and or summary displays in the same MapNote To Label a Route Point with a MapNote Use the following steps to label a route point with a MapNote 1 Click the Route tab and then click the Advanced subtab 2 Click Route Prefs to display the Route Preferences dialog area Under Route Features select the check box next to each MapNote you want to display at your route points e Show Location MapNotes Displays the coordinate information for each point in your route
520. xes to the right of the circle fill option area OR To draw a rectangle click the location for the rectangle s upper left corner on the map and drag away from the corner to set the width height and area for the rectangle Release as soon as you achieve the size you want The coordinates of the upper left corner point display in the corresponding text boxes to the right of the fill options The distance and bearing angle of the final corner point from the first corner point display in the corresponding text boxes to the right of the fill options OR To draw a polygon click the map to enter each point of the polygon The coordinates of each point display in the corresponding text boxes to the right of the fill options The distance and bearing angle of each new point from its previous point display in the corresponding text boxes Labels display when end points are clicked if the Show Measurement check box is selected Click the Select tool A and then click the area object on the map A box displays around the object indicating that it is active Click the object again A text box displays Type the label in the text box and press the ENTER key on your keyboard Using the Draw Tools Editing a Circle Rectangle or Polygon Once you have created an area draw object you can edit including reshaping or changing line color or weight copy move or delete at any time To Edit a Circle Rectangle or Polygon Use the following ste
521. ximity selected on the Find screen While a search is running results are Using Street Atlas Handheld on a PDA automatically sorted as they become available The top matches closest name match or closest in distance to screen center move to the top of the search results list pushing the previous results down the list e Tap Pause to interrupt the search Tap Resume to continue the search e If no matches are found tap Done to return to the Find screen and perform another search 7 Tap the desired item in the Find Results list and then tap Go To to display the feature at the center of the map view screen Notes e To view information such as city state ZIP Code and coordinates for the map feature tap the desired item in the Find Results list and then tap I nfo Tap Done on the Item Info screen to return to the Find Results list You can then tap Go To to display the feature at the center of the map view screen e To end the search session without locating a list item tap Done at any time to return to the map view screen Note Tap all under Type to include waypoint wpts in the Find Results list Finding a Coordinate Location You can use the Go To Position function in the Tools menu to find a coordinate location on your map To Find a Coordinate Location Use the following steps to find a coordinate location 1 Tap the Menu button on your Palm OS handheld to display the Street Atlas USA Handheld menu bar 2
522. xt Select the GPS log you want to receive from the GPS Log drop down list Click Receive From Device Repeats the steps for each GPS log file you want to receive Click Finish Tip You can also open the Exchange Wizard by clicking the Exchange button GE Exchange on the GPS tab or the Handheld Export tab ee a ee 271 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide Receiving a Route From Your Palm OS Device Use the Exchange Wizard to receive a route created on your Palm OS device Once imported you can use the file in your mapping program To Receive a Route From Your Palm OS Device Use the following steps to receive a route from your Palm OS device Click the Exchange button Ei on the toolbar Under Select Device select Palm OS Select Receive from Device Select Route from the Object Type drop down list Select Route from the Save As drop down list to save your route as a route file Click Next Select the route file on the device that you want to receive 8 Select the route file you want to add the route information to To create a new route file select New from the Route drop down list and type the new route name in the text box 9 Click Receive From Device 10 Repeats the steps for each route file you want to receive 11 Click Finish The route information displays Tip You can also open the Exchange Wizard by clicking the Exchange button TE Exchange on the GPS tab or the Handheld Export tab 2 eee ee yo
523. xt Files Use the following steps to export an existing draw file to a text file Click the Draw tab 2 Click File to open the draw file editing area A draw file with a selected check box displays on the map The Active column shows the active layers 3 From the file list click the draw file to export 4 Click Export The Export Draw File dialog box opens 5 Browse to a directory in which to save the file or use the default destination C DeLorme Docs Export 6 Select Text File from the Save as Type drop down list 7 Type a name for the file in the File name text box The default name is root name of the layer 8 Click Save 9 Click Done to return to the main Draw tab area Note for regular Street Atlas USA users This Help topic describes functionality provided in advanced file management Advanced file management allows you to save multiple routes and draw layers in a single map file With simplified file management you can save only one route and or draw layer in a single map file If you did not select to enable advanced file management during the product installation you can still change the settings using the Change File Management option in the Options menu For more information see Activating Advanced Simplified File Management 165 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide This note does not apply to Street Atlas USA Plus users Exporting Track or Waypoint Files to GPX Files You can export track
524. y On Off S I Click the Imagery button to toggle raster imagery on off When the Imagery button appears indented all connected imagery displays on the map When the lal 7 Imagery button does not appear indented no raster imagery displays on the map You can also turn raster imagery on off by clicking the arrow next to the Imagery button and selecting the Show Imagery option from the menu A selected check box next to the option indicates that imagery is currently displaying on the map if the check box is cleared it indicates that raster imagery is currently hidden To Show Hide Roads in the Raster I magery jw N 1 Click the arrow next to the Imagery button on the toolbar to open the Imagery menu 2 If a selected check box displays next to the Show Roads option road names labels display in the imagery OR If the check box next to the Show Roads option is cleared road names labels do not display in the imagery 75 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide 3 To change the Show Roads status click Show Roads to toggle the option To Change the Raster Data Type imi 1 Click the arrow next to the Imagery button f the Imagery menu All of the connected compatible raster data types are listed under the Show Roads and Show Imagery options The active raster data type has a black dot next to it In the graphic below Aerial Imagery is the active raster data type 2 To change the raster data type click a diffe
525. y other DeLorme mapping programs using the Route tab To Import an Existing Route Using the Route Tab Use the following steps to import an existing route using the Route tab 1 2 3 230 Click the Route tab and then click the New Edit subtab Click File and then click I mport The Import dialog box opens Browse to select the route file and then click Open The map centers on the imported route and is available in the Name drop down list Note for regular Street Atlas USA users This Help topic describes functionality provided in advanced file management Advanced file management allows you to save multiple routes and draw layers in a single map file With simplified file management you can save only one route and or draw layer in a single map file If you did not select to enable advanced file management during the product installation you can still change the settings using the Change File Management option in the Options menu For more information see Activating Advanced Simplified File Management This note does not apply to Street Atlas USA Plus users Routing Setting Your End of Day and Fuel Break Preferences You can schedule end of day and fuel breaks along a route by using the Plan Trip option in the Route tab You can schedule end of day breaks according to the miles or other distance unit selected in Map Display or hours driven and you can schedule fuel breaks according to your current fuel leve
526. your current print area print photo zoom or other settings select the Lock Print Center check box This locks the print area and changes the tab label to red e Add text or graphics to your map e Select the Print Preview check box to zoom the map and view the entire area that will be saved as a bitmap image Clear the check box to return to your previous data zoom level Click the Save button Hl The Save 2D Map Image dialog box opens Type the file name in the File Name text box select to save the file as a bmp or jpg from the Save as Type drop down list select the DPI dots per inch value optional and click Save 21 Street Atlas USA 2009 User Guide Measuring Distance and Area can Use the Measure tool on the toolbar to measure linear distance and area on the map based on the units chosen in the Display tab of the Options dialog box The snap function snaps attaches the point of a measurement line to a point ona road or another measurement object This ensures a more accurate measurement of distance or area The snap function is essential when measuring area To measure area you must completely enclose the area by snapping your finish point to your starting point Notes e The measure tool is the best way to measure short distances on the map If you want to measure the distance of a road try creating a route If you want to measure a large area on the map use the area object tools in the Draw tab e To disab

Street Atlas USA® 2009 User Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Street Atlas USA&reg; 2009 User Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Street Atlas USA® 2009 User Guide